SPECIFICATION - Alita Constructions

Project

SOUTH COASTBAPTIST COLLEGESTAGE 1B

S P E C I F I C A T I O N

Issue

TENDERDate

NOVEMBER 2018Project No.

17.04

SPECIFICATION OF WORKS TO BE PERFORMED AND MATERIAL TO BE USED for the construction of SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B for SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE INCORPORATED at 30 GNANGARA DRIVE, WAIKIKI Prepared by: BRAD QUARTERMAINE ARCHITECT 27 CHARLES STREET, SOUTH PERTH, WA 6151 0417 931 941 [email protected] TENDER ISSUE 5 November 2018

SECTION 00110 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 00110 TABLE OF CONTENTS

CONTRACT PRELIMINARIES Document No Document Name No of Pages 00200 INFORMATION FOR TENDERERS 1 - 4 00210 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING 1 - 2 00230 EXISTING CONDITIONS AT SITE 1 - 1 00300 TENDER FORM 1 - 1 00301 TENDER SUM BREAKDOWN 1 - 1 00500 INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT 1 - 1 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND 1 - 1 00650 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 1 - 1 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 1 - 8 00819 OHS & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 - 1 00860 DRAWINGS 1 - 2 00870 SCHEDULES & TABLES 1 - 2 00900 ADDENDA 1 - 1 TRADE SECTIONS (SPECIFICATIONS) Section No Section Name No of Pages 02050 DEMOLITION 1 - 3 02210 CIVIL WORKS 1 - 21 02220 EARTHWORKS 1 - 10 02240 STORMWATER DRAINAGE 1 - 10 02360 TERMITE CONTROL 1 - 2 03100 CONCRETE 1 - 13 04210 BRICKWORK 1 - 3 04220 BLOCKWORK 1 - 4 05080 METAL FINISHES – SHOP APPLIED 1 - 2 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL 1 - 9 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 1 - 3 05500 METALWORK 1 - 5 05520 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES 1 - 2 06165 FIBRE CEMENT PRODUCTS 1 - 3 06400 JOINERY 1 - 2 07130 WATERPROOFING AND TANKING 1 - 7 07200 INSULATION (THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC) 1 - 2 07600 METAL ROOFING, SIDING AMD ROOF PLUMBING 1 - 3 07725 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT 1 - 2 07810 FIREPROOFING 1 - 3 08200 DOORS, DOOR FRAMES AND HATCHES 1 - 3 08330 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS 1 - 3 08520 METAL WINDOWS AND GLAZING 1 - 5 08710 DOOR HARDWARE 1 - 3 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING 1 - 4

SECTION 00110 TABLE OF CONTENTS

SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 00110 TABLE OF CONTENTS

08850 MIRRORS 1 - 3 09200 HARD PLASTER OVER RENDER BASE 1 - 3 09250 PLASTERBOARD 1 - 2 09260 DRY WALL PARTITIONS 1 - 2 09300 CERAMIC TILE 1 - 4 09500 SUSPENDED CEILING 1 - 3 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 1 - 2 09585 MODULAR CARPET (TILE) 1 - 4 09720 WALLCOVERING (PAPER, FABRIC ETC) 1 - 2 09910 PAINTING 1 - 6 10150 TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1 - 2 10240 GRILLES AND SCREENS 1 - 3 10400 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS 1 - 2 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 1 - 2 10705 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES 1 - 3 12300 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK – SHOP BUILT 1 - 5 12480 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES 1 - 2 14000 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS 1 - 68 15000 MECHANICAL SERVICES 1 - 36 16000 ELECTRICAL SERVICES 1 - 33 20000 EXTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE 1 - 2 20001 INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE 1 - 3 20002 INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE ROOM BY ROOM 1 - 7 20003 INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE CABINETRY 1 - 2 APPENDIX A GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION APPENDIX B CONFIDENTIAL DECLARATION FORM

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 26 00200 INFORMATION FOR TENDERERS

00200 INFORMATION FOR TENDERERS

1. The Project

Alterations and additions to existing Science and Technology Centre along with external works and services and carparking.

2. The Contract Fixed lump sum not subject to rise and fall. AS 2124 1992 General conditions of contract.

3. Tenders The proprietor reserves the right to reject the lowest or any tender or an otherwise conforming tender. Comply with AS 4120 1994 Code of tendering.

4. Tender Documents Available without fee from the architect.

5. Alternative Proposals Submit tenders in accordance with the tender documents. Alternatives may be considered but only where all performance aspects of each item comply with the one specified and verification of compliance with the relevant Australian Standards must be submitted in writing. Alternatives will only be considered where a conforming tender is submitted.

6. Permission to Visit the Site Tenderers may visit the site by appointment only, arranged with the architect. Refer clause 9.

7. Schedule Submit a Preliminary Construction Program indicating commencement and completion dates.

8. Tender Enquiries All enquiries during the tender period should be directed to: Brad Quartermaine: Email [email protected], Phone: 0417 931 941

9. Approved Mechanical Services Sub- Contractors The following mechanical services contractors are approved to tender for the mechanical services works.

Adamsson Engineering (Contact: Mick Fisher [email protected] ) Admiral Air (Contact: Steve Nelson [email protected] ) Centigrade (Contact: Mike Anthony [email protected] ) CMS (Contact: Ross Carroll [email protected] ) Jako Industries (Contact: Patrick Ma [email protected] )

The Tenderer may forward alternative Mechanical Services Sub-Contractors, other than listed above, to the Architect for assessment and approval a minimum of 14 days prior to close of Tenders. Alternative Mechanical Sub-Contractors submitted within 14 days from close of Tenders will not be assessed or approved to undertake the mechanical services installation. Alternative Mechanical Sub-Contractors submissions shall include all information, including but not limited to resources, quality control, current work load, a minimum of 3 similar sized projects undertaken within the previous 5 years including a minimum of 3 referees for each project. The Contractor shall nominate the Mechanical Sub-Contractor selected to undertake the mechanical section of work within their Tender submission. Failure to nominate the selected mechanical Sub-Contractor within the Contractor Tender submission will deem the Tender non-conforming

10. Consultants For this project, the proprietor has appointed the following Consultants:

Architects Name of Contact Tel: 0417 931 941 Brad Quartermaine Architect

Brad Quartermaine Mobile: 0417 931 941

Email address:

[email protected]

Structural Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 9382 8008 BPA Engineering Long Truong Mobile: Email

address: [email protected]

Civil Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 9424 0921 BPA Engineering Todd Broadwood Mobile: Email



Mechanical Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 0417 925 898 Manessis Engineering Consultants

Mike Manessis Mobile:

Email address:

[email protected]

Hydraulics Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 9225 9300 HDA Matt Martin Mobile: Email


Electrical Engineer Name of Contact Tel: 9227 0300 BEST Consultants Craig Lougheed Mobile: Email


Quantity Surveyor Name of Contact Tel: 9321 2777 RBB Kevin Daniels Mobile: Email


Building Surveyor Name of Contact Tel: 1300 550 848 Building Lines Robert Pretrusich Mobile: Email


11. Annexure Part A to General Conditions of Contract

This Annexure is to be attached to the General Conditions of Contract and shall be read as part of the Contract: The law applicable is that of the State or Territory of: (Clause 1)

Western Australia

Payments under the Contract shall be made at: (Clause 1)

Perth W.A. - by way of “not negotiable” cheque or Electronic Funds Transfer to the account nominated by the Contractor/Principal

The Principal: (Clause 2)

South Coast Baptist College Incorporated

The address of the Principal: 30 Gnangara Drive PO Box 6126, Waikiki WA 6169

The Superintendent: (Clause 2)

Brad Quartermaine Architect

The address of the Superintendent: 27 Charles Street South Perth WA 6151

Limits of accuracy applying to quantities for which the Principal accepted a rate or rates: (Clause 3.3(b))

Not Applicable

Bill of Quantities—the alternative applying: (Clause 4.1)

Alternative 2

The time for lodgement of the priced copy of the Bill of Quantities: (Clause 4.2)

Not Applicable

The percentage to which the entitlement to security and retention moneys is reduced: (Clause 5.7)

50% (i.e. one of the Banker’s undertakings shall be returned)

Interest on retention moneys and security—the alternative applying: (Clause 5.9)

Not Applicable

The number of copies to be supplied by the Principal: (Clause 8.3)

0

The number of copies to be supplied by the Contractor: (Clause 8.4)

0

The time within which the Superintendent must give a direction as to the suitability and return the Contractor’s copies: (Clause 8.4)

14 Days


Work which cannot be subcontracted without approval: (Clause 9.2)

Work under the Contract that is carried out by Subcontractors, suppliers or other parties nominated by the Principal or Superintendent.

The percentage for profit and attendance: (Clause 11(b))

0 %

The amount or percentage for profit and attendance: (Clause 11(c))

0 %

Insurance of the Works—the alternative applying: (Clause 18)

Alternative 1

The assessment for insurance purposes of the costs of demolition and removal of debris: (Clause 18(ii))

5 % of the Contract Sum

The assessment for insurance purposes of consultants’ fees: (Clause 18(iii))

10 % of the Contract Sum

The value of materials to be supplied by the Principal: (Clause 18 (iv))

$ Nil

The additional amount or percentage: (Clause 18(v))

5 %

Public Liability Insurance—the alternative applying: (Clause 19)

Alternative 1

The amount of Public Liability Insurance shall be not less than: (Clause 19)

$ 20 Million

The time for giving possession of the Site: (Clause 27.1)

Within 7 days of the acceptance of the offer or the date on which the Building Permit is issued, whichever occurs last.

The Charge for overheads, profit, etc. for Daywork (Clause 41(f))

10 %

Times for Payment Claims: (Clause 42.1)

On the last Working day of the month

Unfixed Plant and Materials for which payment claims may be made notwithstanding that they are not incorporated in the Works: (Clause 42.1(ii))

Nil

Retention Moneys on: (Clause 42.3)

Nil

Unfixed Plant or Materials - the alternative applying (Clause 42.4)

Alternative 3

The rate of interest on overdue payments: (Clause 42.9)

Supreme Court rates as at the date of Acceptance of the Tender

The delay in giving possession of the Site which shall be a substantial breach: (Clause 44.7)

28 Days

The alternative required in proceeding with dispute resolution: (Clause 47.2)

Alternative 2

The person to nominate an arbitrator: (Clause 47.3

The President for the time being of the Institute of Arbitrators) & Mediators Australia – Western Australian Chapter

Location of arbitration: (Clause 47.3)

Perth, Western Australia


Separable Portion 1

All works other than works to new and existing carparks

Contractor shall provide security in the amount of: (Clause 5.2)

5% of the Contract Sum in lieu of retention moneys.

Principal shall provide security in the amount of: (Clause 5.2)

Not Applicable

The period of notice required of a party’s intention to have recourse to retention moneys and/or to convert security: (Clause 5.5)

Not applicable

The date for Practical Completion: (Clause 35.2)

36 weeks from the giving of possession of the Site, inclusive of industry RDO/PDO and public holiday allowances.

Liquidated damages per day: (Clause 35.6)

$ 600 per day for the first 28 days and $1,000 per day thereafter.

Limit of Liquidated damages: (Clause 35.7)

Not Applicable

Bonus per day for early Practical Completion: (Clause 35.8)

Not Applicable

Limit of bonus: (Clause 35.8)

Not Applicable

Extra costs for Delay or Disruption: (Clause 36)

No Extra Events

The Defects liability period: (Clause 37)

12 Months

Separable Portion 2 New carpark and works to existing carpark

Contractor shall provide security in the amount of: (Clause 5.2)

5% of the Contract Sum in lieu of retention moneys.

Principal shall provide security in the amount of: (Clause 5.2)

Not Applicable

The period of notice required of a party’s intention to have recourse to retention moneys and/or to convert security: (Clause 5.5)

Not applicable

The date for Practical Completion: (Clause 35.2)

6 weeks commencing on the 9th December 2019, inclusive of industry RDO/PDO and public holiday allowances.

Liquidated damages per day: (Clause 35.6)

$ 100 per day

Limit of Liquidated damages: (Clause 35.7)

Not Applicable

Bonus per day for early Practical Completion: (Clause 35.8)

Not Applicable

Limit of bonus: (Clause 35.8)

Not Applicable

Extra costs for Delay or Disruption: (Clause 36)

No Extra Events

The Defects liability period: (Clause 37)

12 Months

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 5 of 26 00210 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

00210 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

1. Tender Form

Refer Document 00300 "TENDER FORM".

2. Tender Documents The tender documents include the "The Conditions" or "The Agreement" or "General Conditions of Contract", tender form, and specification, drawings, schedules and any other documents issued by the architect for the purpose of tendering (available at point of issue of documents). No explanation or amendment to the tender documents will be recognised unless in the form of written addendum issued by the architect.

3. Tenderer to Inform Himself and Sub-contractors The tenderer is deemed to have: A. Examined the tender documents, the site and its surroundings and other information made available. B. Examined information relevant to the risks, contingencies, and other circumstances having an effect on

his tender and which is obtainable by the making of enquiries. C. Satisfied himself as to the correctness and sufficiency of his tender and that his tender covers the cost

of complying with the obligations of the tender documents. D. Advised suppliers and sub-contractors of the requirements of the preliminary and trade sections of the

specifications. Satisfied himself that all legal and other requirements, relevant to the project and relating to Occupational Health Safety and the Environment, have been met.

4. Discrepancies, Errors and Omissions in Tender Documents If a tenderer finds any discrepancy, error or omission in the tender documents, notify the architect, in writing, 5 days before the date and time for closing of tenders.

5. Submission of Tender A. Submit tender only on the form provided, Document 00300 TENDER FORM. B. Include an address for service of notices for the purpose of this tender and subsequent contact. C. Sign the tender form, or if the tenderer is a corporation or company, sign the tender with company seal. D. The tender shall be for the whole of the work described in the tender documents. E. Do not alter or add to tender documents except as required by these General Conditions of Tendering.

6. Lodgement of Tenders A. Tender to be placed in a sealed envelope, marked with the name of the project, and lodged in the

tender box at, (or sent by pre-paid post to) the architect’s/proprietor’s office: by the date and time of closing of tenders. See "C" below.

B. Notwithstanding sub-clause A, faxed, emailed, telegraphic or telexed tenders received by the date and time for closing of tenders may be admitted for consideration, subject to the concurrent submission of a written tender. Oral tenders will not be received.

C. Tenders Close 2:30pm on 4 December 2018

7. Informal Tenders (Non-conforming Tenders) Tenders which do not comply with the requirements of, or which contain provisions not required or allowed by the tender documents, will be declared informal.

8. Trade Names Trade or proprietary names, brands, catalogue or reference numbers are specified in the tender documents. A successful tenderer may offer material or equipment of similar characteristics or type, quality, appearance, finish, method or construction and performance, after the Letter of Acceptance of tender has been issued, unless otherwise noted in the specification trade sections.

9. Customs Duties The tender shall include customs duty and other similar charges applicable to imported materials, plant and equipment required for work described in the tender documents.

10. Pre-requisites to Acceptance A. Notwithstanding other requirements of the tender documents, the proprietor or architect may require a

tenderer to submit additional information to allow further consideration of his tender. B. Should the tenderer fail to submit the information so required by the date and time stipulated by the

proprietor or architect the tender may be treated as informal. 11. Review And Acceptance Of Tenders

The Proprietor is not obliged to accept the lowest or any tender and may reject without liability any or all tenders submitted. The Contract, if any, will be awarded to the tenderer that in the opinion of the Proprietor meets the requirements described in the Tender Documents and offers the best value for money. Value for money will be determined solely by the Proprietor and will take into consideration, but is not bound or limited to: A. Tendered price. B. The tenderer’s past performance in relation to:

• compliance with any applicable code of practice for the building and construction industry; • payment of subcontractors, suppliers and/or workers;

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 6 of 26 00210 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF TENDERING

• quality, time and cost under previous contracts; C. Current workload and resources; D. Proposed construction methodology; E. The experience and capacity of the proposed key project personnel. F. The tenderer’s financial viability and capacity; G. Compliance with the requirements of the Tender Documents; and H. If, in the opinion of the Proprietor, a tenderer fails to meet, or is otherwise deficient in respect of, any one

or more of the above criteria, the tenderer may be excluded from further consideration. 12. Acceptance of Tender

A tender shall not be deemed to have been accepted unless and until a Letter of Acceptance is handed to the tenderer or is sent by pre-paid post to, or is left at the address stated in the tender form for service of notices.

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 7 of 26 00230 EXISTING CONDITIONS AT SITE

00230 EXISTING CONDITIONS AT SITE

EXISTING OCCUPIED BUILDING TO BE RETAINED AND NEW WORK ADDED.

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 8 of 26 00300 TENDER FORM

00300 TENDER FORM

COMPLETE IN FULL AND LODGE WITH ARCHITECT I/We (tenderer’s name)

Licence no. Registration no. of (address)

hereby tender(s) to perform the work for (proprietor name):

in accordance with the following documents and specifications:

(add extra pages if needed)

For the lump sum of:

Construction Program. Tenderer to submit a Preliminary Construction Program for the works. working days inclusive of

________________________________________days for inclement weather.

Signed by (Company Directors)

Date this (day) (month) 20

COMPANY SEAL

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 9 of 26 00301 TENDER SUM BREAKDOWN FORM

00301 TENDER SUM BREAKDOWN FORM

Tender Sum Breakdown Lump Sum (excluding GST)

Preliminaries $ Demolition $ Site Preparation and Earthworks $ Roadworks and Drainage $ Concrete $ Blockwork / Brickwork $ Structural Steelwork $ Carpentry and Joinery $ Cold Formed Metal Framing $ Metalwork $ Fibre Cement Products $ Metal Roofing, Siding and Roof Plumbing and Insulation $ Doors and Door Frames $ Metal Windows, Glazing and Mirrors $ Plastering $ Dry Wall Partitions and Suspended Ceilings and Insulation $ Ceramic Tiles $ Carpet and Resilient Flooring $ Manufactured Casework $ Painting $ Paving $ Hydraulic Services $ Electrical Services $ Mechanical Services $ Provisional Sum: Water Corporation Fees $ 5,000.00 Provisional Sum: Siphonic Roof Drainage $ 17,000.00 Provisional Sum: Fall Arrest Equipment $ 3,500.00 Provisional Sum: Door Hardware $ 30,000.00 Provisional Sum: Identification Signs $ 2,500.00 Provisional Sum: Fire Extinguishers $ 5,000.00 Provisional Sum: Unidentified services diversions $ 10,000.00 Provisional Sum: Refurbishment of Existing Rooms $ 150,000.00 Contingency Sum $ 200,000.00 Total $ GST $ Total Price $

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 10 of 26 00500 INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT

00500 INSTRUMENT OF AGREEMENT

(ADAPTED FROM AS 2124 -1992)

AGREEMENT made day of 20

BETWEEN (the contractor)

AND

(the principal/proprietor)

IT IS AGREED that the annexed documents listed below:

Tender, dated

Letter of acceptance,

dated

General Conditions of Contract and Annexure.

(Agreement signed and all pages initialled by parties).

Documents and specification

Drawing no.s:

Other documents:

(Use extra sheets if necessary to list all documents and drawings) together comprise the contract between the parties AND if the contractor or the principal is two or more persons then

they will be regarded as being bound jointly and severally.

Signed by the contractor

COMPANY SEAL Signed by the principal

COMPANY SEAL

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 11 of 26 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND

00610 PERFORMANCE BOND

APPROVED FORM OF UNCONDITIONAL UNDERTAKING (ADAPTED FROM AS 2124 - 1992)

At the request of (the contractor) and in consideration of (the principal, proprietor, owner)

accepting this undertaking in respect of the contract for

(name of project )

(name of the “financial institution”)

unconditionally undertakes to pay on demand any sum or sums which may from time to time be demanded by the principal to a maximum aggregate sum of

$ (

) The undertaking is to continue until notification has been received from the principal that the sum is no longer required

by the principal or until this undertaking is returned to the financial institution or until payment to the principal by the

financial institution of the whole of the sum or such part as the principal may require.

Should the financial institution be notified in writing, purporting to be signed by

for and on behalf of the principal that the principal desires payment to be made of the whole or any part or parts of the

sum, it is unconditionally agreed that the financial institution will make the payment or payments to the principal forthwith without reference to the contractor and notwithstanding any notice given by the contractor not to pay same.

Provided always that the financial institution may at any time without being required so to do pay to the principal the sum

of $ ( )

less any amount or amounts it may previously have paid under this undertaking or such lesser sum as may be required

and specified by the principal and thereupon the liability of the financial institution hereunder will immediately cease.

DATED at this day of 20

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 12 of 26 00650 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE

00650 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE

Submit each certificate to the principal via the architect before commencement of work.

A. COST OF DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL OF RUBBISH.

B. RESTORATION OF EXISTING OR BUILT STRUCTURES.

C. PERCENTAGE TO COVER FEES OF CONSULTANTS.

D. PERCENTAGE TO COVER ESCALATION COSTS.

E. PUBLIC LIABILITY INSURANCE.

F. WORKER’S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYER’S LIABILITY.

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 13 of 26 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

Annexure Part B to General Conditions of Contract

The Clauses set out below (the Supplementary Conditions of Contract) have been added to those of AS 2124—1992 and/or have been amended and differ from the corresponding Clauses in AS 2124-1992. If there is any inconsistency between the General Conditions of Contract and this Annexure Part B, this Annexure Part B prevails to the extent of any inconsistency.

1. Information to Sub-contractors, Suppliers and Installers Advise sub-contractors and suppliers and installers of material of the requirements of these Supplementary Conditions of Contract.

2. Amount of Security (Performance Bond) See Annexure Part A to General Conditions of Contract or Appendix to General Conditions of Contract. Refer Document 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND.

3. Interpretation of Drawings Check dimensions on site, certified by a qualified land surveyor, before proceeding with the work of the contract. Survey needs to be confirmed by a qualified surveyor and checked at specific intervals during the construction period. Notify architect of omission or conflict in drawings and their relation to specifications.

4. Construction Progress Bar Graph Within 14 calendar days after the date of Letter of Acceptance of tender, submit to the architect a detailed chart of the plan of progress, in bar graph form. For each item of work provide graph showing planned progress with planned monthly quantities and with space or other provision for entering actual progress. The architect may require the builder to provide an amended bar graph within 7 days of being requested to do so. Submit bar graph at monthly intervals showing actual progress.

5. Sub-contractors and Suppliers Within 7 days of receipt of the Letter of Acceptance, supply to the architect a complete list of sub-contractors and suppliers proposed for the works. The principal, through the architect, reserves the right to reject any so listed.

6. Indemnity of Principal A. Indemnify, and keep indemnified the principal against claim, demand, action, suit or proceeding that

may be brought or made against the principal by any other person who has entered into a contract with the principal to execute work associated with the project.

B. Submit evidence of such insurance in respect of loss, damage or expense incurred by that other person by reason of an act, default or neglect of the builder in the performance of his obligations under the contract or arising out of or as a consequence of delay by the builder in executing or failing to complete work under the contract and also from costs and expenses that may be incurred by that other person in connection with such claim, demand, action, suit or proceeding.

C. Do not proceed with work under the contract until evidence of licencing, indemnities and insurances required herein, is submitted in writing to the architect.

7. Approvals, Services, Fees and Tax

A. The following documents have been submitted by the principal, via the architect and fees paid for: Planning permit and/or D.A.

B. Allow for fees for the Application for a Building Permit, Construction Training Fund Levy, Building Services Levy, Verge Bond and Application for an Occupancy Permit.

C. Pay fees to the Local Authority for any required pruning of tree trees. D. Be responsible for the identification and protection of existing services and connection /disconnection of

services, water, sewerage, drainage, electricity and gas etc. Apply for such permits, pay for fees and charges levied by relevant bodies for such connections. Issue necessary notices to such bodies. Obtain and pay for scaffolding permit.

E. Pay tax on items where such tax is applicable. If tax is not applicable, request from the principal, via the architect, a tax exemption certificate for use when ordering specified materials.

F. Pay fees, where applicable, relating to workplace health and safety acts, Regulation, Code of Practice, Australian Standards and other state or local government policy, acts regulations etc.

8. Site Control

A. Existing buildings will remain in occupation throughout the duration of the works. Ensure that the work is carried out without damage to and with a minimum of nuisance or annoyance to the occupants of the existing building and adjacent premises. Prevent weather and dust and dust ingress into the existing building for the duration of the works. Make good any weather damage incurred to the existing building. The Proprietor’s use of the existing building and adjacent premises as a school must not be negatively affected in any way. Safe access and egress from occupied premises is to be maintained at all times.

B. Erect approved site safety fence, barriers and hoardings to enclose the works and to protect the occupants of adjoining occupied premises, and to prevent weather ingress where required. Exact position of safety fences etc shall be to the approval of the Architect. Use all types and methods of protection (such as temporary safety fencing and warning signage) that are reasonably practicable and necessary to protect the public from hazards associated with the work under the Contract. Protection


shall be consistent with the recommendations contained in the WorkSafe WA publication “Construction Work and the Public”. Where a safety fence is used, it shall be not less than 1.8 metres in height.

C. Be responsible for activities on the site including providing access for authorised persons and restricting access by unauthorised persons. Take necessary precautions to secure the assets of the principal.

D. Be responsible for providing controls to protect workers, working at height, in confined space, in excavations and trenches, using hazardous substances/chemicals and other tasks and activities identified by legislation or contained in the builders hazard and risk register, maintained at the project, that may create a risk to the occupational health and safety of workers and other persons at or near the workplace.

E. Except as otherwise provided in the contract, delivery of materials for the works, space for storage of same and for building sheds, office and workshops will be allowed only as directed by the builder. Do not store waste building materials and flammable liquids in the building.

F. Take proper precautions to keep hazardous chemicals/substances, poisons and other injurious substances in places secured against access by unauthorised persons, properly labelled and not stored in food containers or drinking vessels.

G. Confirm that the site is not in an area affected by vermin, noxious pests, e.g. fire ants, termites etc Refer to relevant authority for guidance.

H. Delivery of materials for the works shall not take place between 7:30am-8:30am and 2:30pm-4pm on school days.

9. Noise Control

Take adequate measures to control noise on the site and comply with the following requirements. No operation shall be carried out on the site if it causes the sound emitted (as determined by the sound level at the site boundary by the Architect) to exceed: Time of day Sound level in Decibels (A) Monday to Friday 7.00 am to 7.00pm 80 Saturday and Sunday 7.00 am to 7.00pm 70

Evening 7.00 am to 10.00pm 65 Night 10.00 pm to 7.00 am 55

No appliance shall be used if the noise emitted by the appliance exceeds the following maximum sound levels measured at any point 7 metres ±200mm from: The surface of the appliance excepting those items indicated which shall have sound levels measured at the building site boundary. measurements shall be made in accordance with AS.1217 (methods of measurement of airborne sound emitted by machines), or where applicable for pneumatic driven appliances, the measurement procedures set out in the cagi-pneurop test code for the measurement of sound from pneumatic machines 1969 may be used. - Group (I) 70 decibels (A) max.: Air compressors up to 170 litres/sec capacity. - Group (ii) 75 decibels (A) max.: Internal combustion or electrically driven equipment up to 14kw N.E.P.

(20hp) (mobile or stationary), construction dumpers up to 1 cu metre capacity, fluid pumps, air compressors above 170 litres/sec capacity.

- Group (iii) 80 decibels (A) max.: Vibratory compactors, internal concrete vibrators, concrete saws (mobile and stationary), internal combustion or electrically driven equipment over 14kw N.E.P. (2Ohp) (mobile or stationary), earth moving equipment up to and including engine capacities of 100kw N.E.P. (lSOhp), concrete pumps, concrete agitators, portable air or electric tools, public address system (at boundary), cranes (at boundary).

- Group (iv) 85 decibels (A) max.: Air or electric impulsive tools, scabblers, impact wrenches, explosive power tools, earth moving equipment of engine capacity between 100kw and 200kw N.E.P. (lSOhp and 300hp), refuse chutes (at boundary).

- Group (V) 90 decibels (A) max.: Sirens - warning (at boundary), pile drivers (at boundary), earth moving equipment of engine capacity above 200kw N.E.P. (300hp).

For the purpose of this clause: - Appliance means any apparatus, equipment or machine used for or in connection with the building site and

includes motor vehicles and earth moving machinery. - Sound level emitted from the building site boundary means the sound level exceeded for 10% of the time

(110), measured in decibels (A) and evaluated over hourly intervals during the period of time specified in the “time of day and sound level table” above.

- Maximum sound level emitted by an appliance means the sound level in decibels (A) exceeded for 1% of the measurement period.

- Sound level decibels (A) shall be measured with a sound level meter complying with the specifications set out in AS.1259 part 1 or AS.1259 part 2, with the microphone oriented in a direction indicating the maximum sound level.

- means net engine power determined in accordance with Australian design rule no. 28, motor vehicle noise, dated July 1972.

- Where no means of performing a particular function is available other than by a means which will produce sound levels in excess of those requirements specified above, the Contractor shall obtain permission from the Architect to perform such operations on the days and within the hours approved by the Architect.

The Architect may require the Contractor to produce a certificate of acoustic performance issued by a laboratory registered with the N.A.T.A. for any appliance before permitting its use, or continued use, on the building site.


On occasions for emergency reasons, the Architect may direct that all noise on the site ceases or be reduced. the Contractor shall direct all its sub-Contractors on site to meet the requirements.

10. Dust, Dirt, Water and Fumes

Prevent any nuisance occurring through the discharge of dust dirt, water, fumes and the like on to persons or property. Prepare and implement a Dust Management Plan. Submit to the architect prior to taking possession of the site.

11. Security of Premises Carry out the work under the contract in such a manner that maximum security of the existing premises is maintained at all times. If, in the opinion of the Architect at any period of the contract and during all non-working hours maximum security cannot be maintained, the Contractor shall employ an approved static guard security service on the site. Prepare and implement a security management plan which shall include: A. Arming / disarming requirements of existing intruder alarm systems. B. A pre-start or demolition program of works showing the areas where isolation and reinstatement of

alarm system detection points is required. C. Measures to be adopted to provide effective security to the site at all times. D. Name and contact details for the approved electronic security Subcontractor engaged by the Contractor

to implement changes to existing intruder alarm systems. Endorsement by the approved electronic security Subcontractor.

12. Restrictions on access to the school site. Pursuant to clauses 27 and 14 of the “General Conditions” access to the site under this Contract is controlled as described hereunder. The School Education Regulations 2000 made under section 244 of the School Education Act 1999 empowers the school principal to regulate persons who enter or are on school premises. Accordingly, overall control of occupied school premises is the responsibility of the school principal (occupied school premises includes a new school on a greenfield site that has achieved partial or total Practical Completion). These Regulations and Act enable the school principal to direct the Contractor, its employees, sub-contractors, suppliers and the like in respect to school access. In determining access to the school premises, the school principal is guided by the School Education Regulations 2000 and other Department of Education policies. Persons admitted onto school premises must be of good character and conduct. The following conduct is prohibited on school premises and any offending person may be directed to leave the premises: - Causing disruption to or likely to cause disruption to the good order on the school premises; - Using threatening or insulting language; - Using threatening or violent behaviour; - Adversely affecting the safety and welfare of persons on the school premises; - Causing damage to property that comprises or is located at the school premise; - Smoking; - Defacing school premises; - Lighting fires or bringing explosives onto school premises; - Bringing animals onto school premises; - Having intoxicating liquor; - Driving vehicles off roadways and parking areas; - Exceeding speed limits or driving in a dangerous or inconsiderate manner, or; - Disobeying traffic signs. The applicable Department of Education policy requires that all persons working on occupied school premises be screened for previous convictions for certain types of offences. The Contractor shall screen all employees, sub-contractors, suppliers and other persons entering the building site for previous criminal convictions by ensuring that they: are the holder of a federal police criminal record check that is no more than 2 years old; or have completed a “Confidential Declaration” form contained in Appendix B. A person need only complete a “Confidential Declaration” form once for entry to the school in relation to this contract. The Contractor shall maintain a register of employees, sub-contractors, suppliers and other persons accessing the Contractor’s site. On a weekly basis, the Contractor shall provide to the school principal the following information: - A list of persons who have entered the site, sorted by:

- Those with a federal police certificate; - Those who have already provided a “Confidential Declaration” form to the school; - Those who have completed a “Confidential Declaration” form for the Contractor.

- A copy of all federal police criminal record certificates and “Confidential Declaration” forms provided to the Contractor.

Once the Contractor ceases to maintain a controlled building site, or where the nature of the work makes a controlled site impractical, all access to the school/site shall be through the school office. The Contractor shall cooperate with the school principal to maintain effective control of access to school premises and site throughout the contract period.

13. Compliance with Ordinances, etc.

Comply throughout with the requirements of relevant sections of the National Construction Code (NCC).


Whenever work or type of plant or machinery, etc. is required either by the specification or by the relevant statutory authority, provide full details of such work, plant, etc. to the relevant statutory authority and make such applications, etc. as may be required within 2 weeks of receipt of Letter of Acceptance. In such cases, approval given by the architect to data submitted by the builder will not necessarily imply that such data meet the requirements of the relevant statutory authority.

14. Site Amenities and Meetings A. Provide statutory and necessary amenities and sanitary facilities for site workers where such are not

already available in suitable locations. Maintain in working condition and clean daily. Comply with legislative requirements.

B. Provide accommodation on the site of sufficient size to hold regular site meetings of building foreman, architect and consultants with table and chairs, lighting and heating.

C. Arrange for site meetings to occur at regular intervals throughout the contract period. Advise architect and consultants of meeting times, keep accurate records of each meeting, and issue to each attendee a copy of the record within 3 days of each meeting.

15. Temporary Fire Extinguishers

Maintain fully charged, and accessible fire extinguishers and other plant and equipment as are necessary for the care and safety of the works, as required by local fire authority and/or NCC. Provide temporary fire services as required by conditions of approval.

16. Telephone and Email Provide a telephone and email service and means of graphic communication. Pay costs of installation, rental, calls and removal as required.

17. Light and Power Provide temporary electric light and power supply during construction and pay charges connected therewith to AS 3102 Electrical installations, construction and demolition sites. Provide sufficient of each as required for execution of work specified. Ensure permanent power is compliant with AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (known as the electrical wiring rules)

18. Water Provide potable drinking water and adequate signage if relevant to identify same, and maintain a temporary water supply sufficient for executing the work under the contract. Disconnect and clear away same on completion and pay costs and charges in connection therewith. Provide tapping of main supply if required.

19. Commencement of Work Notwithstanding that possession of the site has been given to the builder, the builder is not permitted to commence work on the site until he has provided: A. Security required by the Conditions of Contract, as stated in the Annexure to the Conditions of Contract.

Refer Document 00200 Annexure and DOCUMENT 00610 PERFORMANCE BOND. B. Insurances: refer Clause 6 above and DOCUMENT 00650 CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE. C. Verify the existence of site pegs and check that they are complete. If needed data is missing, advise

proprietor to have a licensed surveyor replace them in their correct positions. Maintain site pegs in good condition and ensure their visibility.

D. Ensure the set out of the works is executed by a licensed land surveyor and submit documentation to the architect.

E. Secure the site to prevent access by unauthorised persons and install signage “DANGER entry by authorised persons only” installed on boundaries.

20. Adjacent Premises

Ensure where access to an adjacent property is required that the written approval of the owner, not the tenant, is obtained prior to entry, and the permit as signed and witnessed, details the scope, time and arrangements to protect owner or other persons at or near the property and that the work is carried out without damage to, and with a minimum of nuisance or annoyance to, the occupants of adjacent premises. Provide a thorough digital photographic record of surfaces of existing buildings on and adjacent to the site.

21. General Attendance on Sub-contractors General attendance includes taking delivery, assisting to unload, storing and protecting sub-contractor's materials and for allowing sub-contractors ample working space, free use of water, electricity (unless otherwise described), scaffolding, hoists and ordinary plant, etc., and messing and sanitary accommodation and for cutting away, building in and protecting finished work and making good. Refer Document 00870 SCHEDULES AND TABLES Part III.

22. Precautions in Carrying Out Work Under the Contract Unless otherwise specified in the contract, observe, in the absence of statutory requirement to the contrary, the relevant current Australian Standard published by SAI Global relating to storage, transport, use of materials, explosives, fire precautions in arc or flame cutting flame heating and arc or gas welding operations, plant and equipment, work processes and safety precautions.


23. Joining Up to Existing Buildings Where the method of joining up of old and new work is not otherwise specified, the cutting away and joining up is to be carried out in a manner approved by the architect and made good by relevant trades to match existing adjacent work.

24. Existing Services Prior to commencing construction work on site, undertake Electromagnetic Locating and Ground Penetrating Radar surveys to locate existing underground services. Contact Dial Before You Dig or service provider(s), or contact service owners to obtain details of existing services. Distribute to all relevant subcontractors and suppliers, and ensure all requirements for working on, or near any relevant service provider service(s) are complied with, without exception during the works on the site. Notify and provide the architect with an existing services plan, indicating the location, depth and type of connection, disconnection or interference with existing services. Repair, to the satisfaction of the architect, damage which occurs to services during currency of the contract.

25. Damaged Services Where existing services at or adjacent to the site are in non-optimum condition, arrange for an inspection by the architect and the officer-in-charge of the area responsible for such service. At such meeting, record the condition and follow instructions when issued in writing by the architect.

26. Solid, Liquid and Gaseous Contaminants A. Be aware of legal and other requirements for the proper storage, decanting, use and/or disposal of

solids, liquid and gaseous contaminants and B. Be responsible for the proper disposal of solids, liquid and gaseous contaminants. C. Discharge gaseous contaminants in such a manner that they will be sufficiently diluted with fresh air that

the toxicity will be reduced to an acceptable level. D. Subject to statutory and local requirements, liquid contaminant may be diluted with water to a level of

quality acceptable in the sewer system or contained in approved vessels for disposal at sites approved by the relevant authority.

E. Dispose of solid contaminants by removal from the site to locations approved by the relevant authority and obtain certificates of disposal to demonstrate compliance.

27. Disposal of Refuse

Remove refuse from construction operation (including food scraps and the like) from the site at frequent intervals. Prior to removal, ensure the refuse is contained so as to prevent it being discharged in the air or onto adjoining property.

28. Explosive Devices Do not use free flight explosive power tool(s). Use only piston-driven tools, except as approved by the architect. Explosive powered tools that are free flight type may only be used by competent persons authorised by their employer.

29. Dimensioning Do not scale drawings which are clearly diagrammatic and/or marked 'not to scale' or NTS.

30. Shop Drawings Shop Drawings mean complete drawings showing details of fabrication, assembly, installation, fixing and waterproofing methods of specific items or components, including necessary explanatory notes and specifications. When preparing Shop Drawings, do the following: A. Include provision in construction programme for the production and distribution of Shop Drawings. B. Refer discrepancies discovered in the contract documents to the architect for direction. C. Verify relevant dimensions. Dimension drawings so that the items or components fit accurately into the

required positions. D. Ensure that Shop Drawings conform with the requirements of the contract. E. Drawings are to be of consistent standard size and presentation. F. Submit drawings in PDF format. G. When the Shop Drawings are satisfactory, 1 PDF copy will be stamped by the architect. Provide as

required for the builder's site office, manufacturers or sub-contractors. H. Acceptance of Shop Drawings are to imply only that the builder's interpretations of the relevant

requirements of the contract are generally correct, but are to in no way relieve the builder of his obligations under the contract to construct and complete the works correctly and accurately.

I. Do not order, manufacture, assemble or supply any item or component needed according to requirements of Shop Drawings until the architect returns the applicable stamped drawings.

J. The builder is to provide as built drawings and details of all installed in-ground services, including type, location and depth, referenced against known data or reference points so as to prevent unintended contractor damage during future excavation works.

31. Care of the Works

A. Delivery, handling and storage: deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and by methods and means which will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including theft. Control delivery schedules to minimise long-term storage of products at site and over-


crowding of construction spaces. In particular, co-ordinate delivery and/or installation to ensure minimum holding or storage times for products recognised to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and other sources of loss.

B. Limiting exposure of work: to the extent possible, through control and protection methods, supervise performance of work in a manner which will ensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected to harmful, dangerous, or damaging exposures during construction period.

C. Cleaning and protection of finished work. General: during handling and installation of work as project proceeds, clean site and protect work in progress and adjoining work on a basis of perpetual maintenance. Apply suitable protective covering on newly installed work where required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration at a time of Practical Completion; otherwise, clean and perform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary throughout remainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure equipment operates as intended.

32. General Product Compliance

A. Provide products which comply with requirements, and which are undamaged and unused at time of installation, and which are complete with accessories, trim, finish, features required by regulation, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and for intended use and effect.

B. Standard products: where available, provide standard products of types which have been produced and used previously and successfully on other projects and in similar applications.

C. Continued availability: where additional amounts of a product, by its application, are likely to be needed by principal at a later date for maintenance and repair or replacement work, provide a standard, domestically produced product which is likely to be available to principal at such later date.

D. Manufacturer's recommendations: where installations include manufactured products, comply with manufacturer's current and applicable recommendations for installation, to whatever extent these are more explicit or more stringent than applicable requirements indicated in contract documents. At completion of project, provide to the architect a copy of each set of manufacturer's recommendations which have been used in the work of each trade.

E. Manufacturer's data sheets: where this specification requires, obtain 2 copies of the current data sheets issued by the manufacturer of specified component. Retain 1 copy for use on site and submit the other to the architect as a record of instructions followed on the site.

33. Builder's Quality Control

A. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation and reject damaged or defective items.

B. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing materials properly as they are installed, true to line and level, and within recognised industry tolerances unless otherwise indicated. Allow for expansion and building movements. Provide uniform joint widths in exposed work, organised for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual effect choices to the architect.

C. Re-check measurements and dimensions of the work as an integral step before starting each installation.

D. Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure and weather which will ensure the best possible results for each part of the work, or component or treatment as necessary to prevent damage and deterioration.

E. Co-ordinate enclosure and closing-in of work with required inspections and tests, so as to avoid necessity of uncovering work for that purpose.

34. Occupational (Workplace) Health and Safety

Be responsible for the maintenance of a satisfactory safety system on site. Ensure Risk Assessments are made and amended as conditions change and prepare appropriate Risk Management Statements that fully comply with relevant workplace regulations. Provide evidence to the architect of full compliance with the provisions of the relevant state health and safety act, and that all relevant documents are approved by Workcare representatives. It is the responsibility of the contractor and sub-contractors to use the safety equipment and procedures as required by law. Refer 00819 OHS & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS.

35. Material/Colour Selections A. The architect will prepare a master Colour Schedule indicating the required colour, finish, pattern,

material, texture and other pertinent information in connection with interior and exterior finishes. B. Submit colour chips for items having colour unless otherwise directed or approved by architect. C. To facilitate the preparation of such a schedule, submit within 15 days following date of award of

contract, unless otherwise extended by the architect, the names and products of those manufacturers whose products are proposed for use within the framework of the specifications wherever colour, finish, pattern, texture and other related information is a consideration.

36. Miscellaneous Completion Procedures

A. Removal of protection: except as otherwise indicated or requested by architect, remove temporary protection devices and facilities installed during course of the work to protect previously-completed work. Where secured to exposed-to-view new work or existing to remain, remove evidence of protection devices. Remove protection within 5 days before Practical Completion.

B. Trade cleaning: as each trade completes its work in each area of the building, the sub-contractor is required to be responsible for "broom clean" standard of cleaning in that area.


37. Final Cleaning Final cleaning: provide final cleaning of the work of this specification, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface of unit of work to normal 'clean' condition expected for a first class building cleaning and maintenance programme. Examples of required cleaning are: A. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. B. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, removing

substances which are noticeable as vision-obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials.

C. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard surfaces finished, to a dirt free condition, free of dust, stains, finger marks, films and similar noticeable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated, avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition.

D. Wipe clean surface of mechanical and electrical equipment, including lift and similar equipment; remove excess lubrication and other substances.

E. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces. F. Clean concrete floors broom clean. G. Vacuum clean carpet and similar soft surfaces. H. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary and polished condition, free of stains including those resulting from

water exposure. I. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. J. If permanent lighting fixtures have been used for construction purposes replace globes with new. K. Clean project site, including planted sections and footpaths, of litter and foreign substances. Sweep

paved areas to a broom clean condition; remove stains, petro-chemical spills and other foreign deposits. L. Label keys for locks accurately and provide in duplicate to the architect at the completion of the project.

38. Clean Site and Access Roads Be responsible for ensuring environmental requirements, policies and standards are maintained at all times, including maintaining clean roads and access. Remove and clean away mud, building debris from footpaths, gutters, drains, walls etc. when such occurs.

39. Warranties Provide written warranties as set out in the relevant trade specification sections.

40. Authority Approvals and Certificates A. Prior to the issue of Practical Completion Notice for the whole or section of the work, lodge with the

architect relevant certificates required by local authorities for the Occupancy Permit. B. Produce to the architect a certificate of clearance of reinstatement of damage to footpaths and road, etc.

from the appropriate road authority or city engineer before issue of Practical Completion Notice. C. Provide as constructed drawings and operations and maintenance manuals prior to the issue of the

Notice of Practical Completion.

41. Contract Stamp Duty If contract is liable to stamp duty, the builder is to provide to the architect at time of signing the contract, duty stamps to the value required by the state in which the project is being constructed, together with 1 new copy of the printed Conditions of Contract being used in this project.

42. Asbestos No asbestos products or asbestos based materials are to be used in any part or parts of this building or its services and the builder is to ensure that sub-contractors, nominated sub-contractors, suppliers and others are advised of this restriction.

43. Patent Rights Ensure that no patent is infringed and that unless otherwise specified, amounts payable and conditions imposed in respect of the manufacture, use or exercise of patented invention are paid and complied with and will indemnify the principal against claims, damages, costs, charges and expenses in any way whatsoever arising out of the manufacture, use or exercise by the builder of patented invention.

44. Record of Services Obtain from the architect, 2 additional copies of the drawings and mark thereon the exact position and route of underground piping as actually laid, by dimensions from boundaries, buildings and other fixed points. The position of valves, branches, inspection openings and the like, will be dimensioned and checked by the builder before the work is covered up. Record on the drawings the invert levels of drains and other relevant piped services. Variations in position of size of the pipes, valves and the like within the building, will also be marked on these sets of drawings and checked by the builder. Return the dimensioned drawings to the architect on completion to enable an exact record of the whole installation to be made for use in future maintenance.


45. Payment of Workers and Sub-contractors A. Before the principal makes each payment to the contractor, the architect may, not less than 5 days

before a payment certificate is due, in writing request the contractor - B. To give the architect a statutory declaration by the contractor or, where the contractor is a corporation,

by a representative of the contractor who is in a position to know the facts declared, that all workers who have at any time been employed by the contractor on work under the contract have at the date of the request been paid all moneys due and payable to them in respect of their employment on the work under the contract; and:

C. To provide documentary evidence to the architect that at the date of the request all workers who have been employed by a sub-contractor of the contractor have been paid all moneys due and payable to them in respect of their employment on the work under the contract.

D. Not earlier than 14 days after the contractor has made each claim for payment, and before the principal makes that payment to the contractor, the contractor is to give to the architect a statutory declaration by the contractor or, where the contractor is a corporation, by a representative of the contractor who is in a position to know the facts declared, that all sub-contractors have been paid all moneys due and payable to them in respect of work under the contract.

E. If the contractor fails: Within 5 days after a request by the architect to provide the statutory declaration, or the documentary evidence (as the case may be) required, or fails: To comply with these requirements, payment of moneys to the contractor may be withheld by the principal until the statutory declaration or the documentary evidence (as the case may be) is received by the architect. If the contractor provides to the architect satisfactory proof of the maximum amount due and payable to workers and sub-contractors by the contractor, the principal is not entitled to withhold any amount in excess of the maximum amount. At the written request of the contractor, from and out of, moneys payable to the contractor, the principal may on behalf of the contractor make payments directly to any worker or sub-contractor. If any worker or sub-contractor obtains a court order in respect of moneys referred to in clause B or C above and produces to the principal the court order and a statutory declaration that it remains unpaid, the principal may pay the amount of the order, and costs included in the order, to the worker or sub-contractor and the amount paid is to be a debt due from the contractor to the principal. After the making of a sequestration order or a winding up order in respect of the contractor, the principal is not to make any payment to a worker or sub-contractor without the concurrence of the official receiver or trustee of the bankrupt or the liquidator as the case may be.

46. Tree Preservation

Clearly mark and protect all trees and vegetation identified on the site plan.

47. Separable Portions Complete the works in Separable Portions 1and 2 as described on the drawings and Annexure Part A to the General Conditions of Contract.

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 21 of 26 00819 OHS & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

00819 OHS & ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Compliance

Prepare an Occupational Health, Safety and Environmental Management Plan for the works that complies, as a minimum, with statutory and other legal requirements of the locality the works are to be undertaken in, including all licensing, permits, fees, charges, etc. relevant to the works they will undertake Develop a “Hazard and Risk Register” for the construction phase of the project and:

• Include all hazards/risks they have identified as possible, during the conduct of the construction phase, and

• Rate each hazard/risk level. Where the risk is greater than a first aid injury or minor illness… • Identify and include specific controls to reduce the risk so the consequence is minor injury or illness

and … • Re-assess the risk after the introduction of the control so as to ensure the selected control will be

effective in preventing identified injury or illness in the relevant hazard/risk identified and… • Identify and document how the hazards and risks, as identified, will be monitored and reviewed, and

the frequency of such monitoring and review, during the conduct of the works on the project Include, where applicable the following hazard categories and associated risks as a minimum in the “Hazard and Risk Register”:

• Working at height and at same level. • Working in excavations and trenches. • Working on or near essential services, including electricity, gas, telecommunications, water, sewer

etc. • Delivery, storage, decanting, use and disposal of a hazardous chemical/substance. • Delivery, unloading/loading, servicing, maintenance use and repair of plant. • Using a confined space. • Activities generating excessive noise, manual and materials handling risks. • Asbestos and demolition works. • Other categories of hazards, as included in the relevant Occupational Health, Safety and

Environmental Act, Regulation, Policy, Code of Practice, Australian Standard etc. Prepare “Safe Work Method Statements (SWMS)”, or equivalent, so as to control identified hazards and risks documented in the “Hazard and Risk Register”, in consultation with workers, or providing training to workers, in the way they will undertake the work, so as to prevent injury or illness during the conduct of the works. Controls will include the requirements of any Regulation, or where no regulation exists, controls to be equal to or better than a Code of Practice, Australian Standard, Ministerial Notice, statutory or industry alert, relevant to the identified hazard and risk, Provide supervision, training and instruction, as relevant, to all affected workers on the project, so as to ensure that during the conduct of the works the potential for injury or illness, as identified in the “Hazard and Risk Register”, and documented in “Safe Work Method Statement” is minimised to an acceptable level. At the completion of the project, provide a copy of all identified and unresolved hazards and risks that remain to be controlled by the end user or end user servicing, maintenance or repair personnel, so that they are not put at risk by the completed project.

2. Submissions Develop and submit, prior to commencing work on the project, a copy of the contractors: • Occupational Health Safety and Environmental Management plan, and • Hazard and Risk Register, and • Safe Work Method Statement. Document, and make available as necessary: • The intended training, supervision, induction and inspection processes and procedures to be

undertaken on the project and … • The notification of all Incidents occurring at the project, including reporting, investigation, findings and

corrective actions and … • Any occupational health, safety and environmental visitation, prosecution or consultation, including any

recommendations or finding provided by external parties to the project.

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 22 of 26 00860 DRAWINGS

00860 DRAWINGS

ARCHITECTURAL

Number Name Revision No. A101 Overall Site Plan A102 Part Site Plan 0 A103 Part Site Plan 0 A104 Part Site Plan 0 A141 Ground Floor Demolition Plan 0 A142 First Floor Demolition Plan 0 A201 Ground Floor Plan 0 A202 First Floor Plan 0 A211 Ground Floor Setout Plan 0 A212 First Floor Setout Plan 0 A221 Ground Floor Plan Details 0 A222 First Floor Plan Details 0 A241 Roof Plan 0 A301 Elevations 0 A302 Elevations 0 A401 Sections 0 A402 Sections 0 A411 Sectional Details 0 A412 Sectional Details 0 A413 Sectional Details 0 A415 Sectional Details 0 A501 Ground Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan 0 A502 First Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan 0 A601 Room Layouts 0 A602 Room Layouts 0 A603 Room Layouts 0 A604 Room Layouts 0 A605 Room Layouts 0 A606 Room Layouts 0 A607 Room Layouts 0 A608 Room Layouts 0 A650 Joinery Details 0 A651 Joinery Details 0 A652 Joinery Details 0 A653 Joinery Details 0 A701 Door and Window Schedule 0 A702 Door and Window Schedule 0 A703 Door and Window Schedule 0 A704 Door and Window Schedule 0

CIVIL

Number Name Revision No. C01 Civil General Notes 0 C10 External Levels Site Levels and Stormwater Drainage 0 C20 Proposed Staff Carpark Site Levels and Stormwater Drainage 0 C21 Existing Carpark Site Levels and Stormwater Drainage 0 C30 Standard Details 0

STRUCTURAL

Number Name Revision No. S 01 General Notes 1 0 S 02 General Notes 2 0 S 10 Ground Floor Plan 0 S 11 Footing Detail Sheet 1 0 S 12 Footing Detail Sheet 2 0 S 20 First Floor Plan 0 S 21 Concrete Beam Details 0 S 22 First Floor Details 0 S 30 Roof Plan 0 S 40 Elevations Sheet 1 0 S 41 Elevations Sheet 2 0 S 42 Elevations Sheet 3 0

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 23 of 26 00860 DRAWINGS

S 51 Steel Detail Sheet 1 0 S 52 Steel Detail Sheet 2 0 S 53 Steel Detail Sheet 3 0

HYDRAULICS

Number Name Revision No. H 01 Site Plan- Drainage, Water, Fire, Gas 0 H 02 Part Site Plan- Drainage, Water, Fire & Gas 0 H 03 Ground Floor Plan -Drainage 0 H 04 First Floor Plan - Drainage 0 H 05 Ground Floor Plan – Water, Fire & Gas 0 H 06 First Floor – Water & Gas 0 H 07 Roof Plan - Drainage 0

ELECTRICAL

Number Name Revision No. E 01 Legend 0 E 02 Electrical Services Site Plan 0 E 03 Ground Floor Power Layout 0 E 04 Ground Floor Lighting Layout 0 E 05 First Floor Power Layout 0 E 06 First Floor Lighting Layout E 07 Single Line Diagram & Details 1 of 4 0 E 08 Single Line Diagram & Details 2 of 4 0 E 09 Single Line Diagram & Details 3 of 4 0 E 10 Single Line Diagram & Details 4 of 4 0

MECHANICAL

Number Name Revision No. M 01 Ground Floor Air Conditioning & Exhaust Overview 0 M 02 Ground Floor Air Conditioning, Evaporative Cooling & Exhaust

Layouts 0

M 03 First Floor Air Conditioning & Exhaust Layout 0 M 04 Roof Plan Condensing Units, Fans & Cowls Layout 0 M 05 Plantroom Layout, Sections & Details 0 M 06 Sections Sheet 1 0 M 07 Sections Sheet 2 0

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 24 of 26 00870 SCHEDULES AND TABLES

00870 SCHEDULES AND TABLES

PART I MONETARY SCHEDULES

Provisional Sums Definition: Provisional Sum An amount of money included in the contract documents to cover works proposed as part of the contract for which full information cannot be made available prior to the calling of tenders and letting of a contract. A provisional sum includes labour, materials, and all costs and margins. Allow the following Provisional Sums:

Section No. Section Name $ Amount (excluding GST). Unidentified services diversions $ 10,000.00 Water Corporation Fees $ 5,000.00 07600 Siphonic Roof Drainage $ 17,000.00 07725 Fall Arrest Equipment $ 3,500.00 08710 Door Hardware $ 30,000.00 10400 Identification Signs $ 2,500.00 10520 Fire Extinguishers $ 5,000.00 Refurbishment of Existing Rooms $ 150,000.00

Contingency Definition: Contingency Sum A sum of money included in the contract documents to cover the cost of unforeseen items. It can be expended in full or in part as required by the superintendent during the progress of the works under the contract. Allow the following sum for contingencies $ 200,000.00 + GST Definitions are quotes from (Standards Australia “Glossary of Building Terms”) SAA HB 50.

PART II BUILDER’S WORK SCHEDULES

SCHEDULE OF BUILDER’S WORK ITEMS - MECHANICAL SERVICES Provide for the mechanical services contractor: A. Clear openings through the building structure for passage of ductwork, pipes etc., and openings in doors

or walls for the passage of return and relief air.

B. Access openings in ceilings, bulkheads, walls and at other positions as required for adjustment and access by mechanical services sub-contractor.

C. Cutting, patching, framing up, furring in and making good associated with the building structure for the

passage of pipes, ductwork, grilles, etc. Details will be supplied by the mechanical services sub-contractor.

D. Supply and installation of door grilles, as nominated or required by mechanical services sub-contractor.

E. Supply and installation air intake and discharge louvres complete with bird screens if required.

F. Sealing air-tight of ceilings plenums where used for passage of return air. G. Penetrations through roof and walls, including flashings, collars etc.

H. Provision of temporary lighting, 415/240V power, gas, water and other services required for the

installation and testing of the mechanical services. I. Provision of hot water outlets and connection pipe tails to outlets. The mechanical services sub-

contractor will provide hot water piping terminating in tails adjacent to outlets.

SCHEDULE OF BUILDER’S WORK - ELECTRICAL SERVICES

Provide for the electrical services contractor:

A. Provision of temporary lighting, 415/240V power and other services as required for the installation and testing of the electrical services, as per AS 3012 2010 Electrical installation- Construction and

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 25 of 26 00870 SCHEDULES AND TABLES

demolition sites and AS/NZS 3000 Electrical installations (Australian & NZ Wiring rules) for finished building or structure.

B. Slab penetrations for floor mounted GPOs, telephone outlets, etc.

C. Chasing and making good for conduit access for skirting wiring duct, GPOs, switches etc. D. Supply and installation of access openings where required.

E. Provision of electrical and telephone riser cupboards and floor penetrations.

F. Provision of sign writing to Main Switchroom, Distribution Board and telephone cupboards, etc. G. Provision of openings for luminaires to sizes required by the electrician.

SCHEDULE OF BUILDER’S WORK - HYDRAULIC SERVICES Provide for the hydraulics contractor: A. Pit for sewer pump.

B. Clear openings through building structure for passage of piping and fittings.

C. Access openings as required for hydraulic pipes. D. Access doors as required for sewer inspection points.

E. Trenching and back filling and making good of existing road works, for underground hydraulic works,

including gas. F. Excavate hole for grease traps.

G. Signage for hose reel cupboards.

H. Plinth for domestic hot water service.

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 26 of 26 00900 ADDENDA

00900 ADDENDA

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION

SECTION 02050 DEMOLITION

PART I GENERAL100 101 General

Comply with Statutory requirements for demolishing work, supervisors, workers and to the approval of the Principal Certifying Authority. Provide all temporary works on site such as structural, sediment controls and dewatering. Protect adjacent properties. Demolish all sections of the built environment including services as shown in the specification and described within the architectural and services engineers documentation. Provide work as follows: A. Scope

The work of this section includes but is not limited to the following items: Provide and manage all demolition works including: Identification of existing services including type of service, depth of service and location of service, coordinate required termination, alteration or protection of services as per service provider requirements, detail same on a site plan and provide a copy to the architect and other trades or activities undertaking work at the project. Note that all work is to be in “as found” condition. Ensure all underground and overhead services that could be affected by the demolition works are made safe and or terminated in compliance with service owner. Include all relevant service provider requirements in documentation and control processes and procedures. Investigate site conditions and provide all temporary site works prior to commencing demolition Examine documents: examine parts of the drawings and this specification for requirements which affect the work of this section. In particular, take note of related work. Where Hazardous Materials Report and the Geotechnical Report are enclosed, these are provided for general information only and the builder is to evaluate site conditions and remove all material in as found condition.

B. Ensure only competent and approved persons, working under compliant business licence for the class of demolition, are employed and perform in accordance with statutory requirements.

C. Provide copies of all relevant documents, e.g. Asbestos clearance certificate, Dilapidation report, burial of waste and other certifications, in accordance with requirements by statutory bodies having jurisdiction.

D. Cleaning the site thoroughly on completion.

102 Related Work Coordinate with other trades affecting or affected by work of this section, cooperating as necessary to ensure steady and satisfactory progress of the work. Read in conjunction with council conditions of approval. Disconnection of existing services by appropriate other trades Site preparation – Excavation Asbestos removal Water distribution Sanitary sewerage Storm drainage Structural and civil engineer’s documentation Services engineer’s documentation

103 Quality Assurance Relevant business licence for demolition work. Provide data indicating a minimum of 3 years of experience in such work as required by this specification. Supply names of contacts, with telephone numbers, who can verify performance quality.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 2187 Explosives - Storage, transport and use.

2187.2 2006 Use of explosives. There are 4 other parts, 1998 – 2006.

AS 2436 2010 Guide to noise and vibration control on construction, demolition and maintenance sites.

AS 2550.1 2011 Cranes, hoists and winches – Safe use - General requirements AS 2601 2001 Demolition of structures. AS 4687 2007 Temporary fencing and hoardings. AS 4970 2009 Protection of trees on development sites.


Comply also with the requirements of applicable building regulations, environmental requirements, statutory and local authority having jurisdiction, including local council.

105 Public and Property Protection Obtain local or environmental approval to demolish where applicable. Provide measures required by national, municipal and state ordinances, laws and regulations Codes of Practice, Australian and other relevant standards so as to ensure for the protection of surrounding property, footpaths, streets, kerbs, the public, occupants and workmen during demolition operations. Comply with the above ordinances, laws etc. in carrying out measures including hoardings, barricades, fences, warning lights and signs, rubbish chutes, etc. No blasting for demolition purposes will be permitted. Exercise due care in executing this work. Make good to original condition, damage to structures to be retained and to adjacent property which results from demolition operations. Perform restoration work without expense to the proprietor.

106 Fees and Approvals Pay all fees due to statutory, local or other relevant authority requiring same in connection with the work of this section. Obtain all approvals as required for the proposed work.

107 Services Before demolishing and removing parts of building having essential services installed, i.e. electrical or other wiring, gas and water pipes, tanks, conduits or similar items embedded in them, notify the architect, owners of services, authorities having jurisdiction, and make sure that these items are out of service so that they can be removed without danger. Dial before you dig where required. Divert services and provide temporary services to the work to the approval of the supply authority.

108 Photographic Record

109 Tree Preservation Where applicable, clearly mark and protect all trees and vegetation identified on the site plan during demolition. Comply with conditions of approval as applicable to this item.

110 Pest Management Where applicable, produce Pest Management Plan.

PART II MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 201 Demolished Materials

Material required to be demolished becomes the property of the builder. Remove it from the site.

202 Equipment A. Supply equipment required to perform the work of sufficient capacity to meet the time schedule. B. Provide suitable, approved, if relevant, disposal containers that prevent a spill to the environment

for disposal required. C. No containers may be located on public streets or pavements without obtaining required

municipal permits for same. Cooperate with sub-contractors doing work in or near container locations to prevent disruption of their work.

PART III EXECUTION300 301 Examine The Site Conditions

Examine the site conditions and provide all temporary works to suit site requirements. Note that all associated reports are submitted for information only. Builder is to evaluate all site conditions and remove all materials and components in as found condition. Refer specifically to the council conditions of approval. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions. For all structural issues refer queries to structural engineer. Provide all dewatering and sediment control measures as required for site conditions.

302 Existing Reinforced Concrete Neatly cut back or trim to new alignment with a clean true face on material to be retained. Cut with diamond saw where necessary. Refer to structural engineer’s documentation for reference and seek structural engineer’s advice if required.


303 Shoring Provide necessary shoring in accordance with structural engineering instructions. Confirm all structural issues with the structural engineer. Alter, adapt, and maintain temporary works as necessary, and strike or withdraw them progressively as the work proceeds. Obtain the written consent of the architect/structural engineer if such works are to be left in position at the completion of the work.

304 Exposed Excavations Leave excavations open and protected as required by the statutory authority after removal of work below ground level until completion of inspection by architect/structural engineer as applicable.

305 Methods and Operations A. Ensure, where applicable, a copy of asbestos clearance certificate is received and maintained

with the demolition plan at the site. B. Demolish and remove completely parts of structure listed and/or drawn for demolition. The

methods of cutting and removal of floors, walls, and other items to be removed are to be approved by authorities having jurisdiction, or certified practising engineer.

C. Furnish flame-cutting required to dismantle sections of equipment too large to be otherwise removed. Flame-cutting is to be performed only by experienced and qualified mechanics. Protect combustible surfaces during flame cutting. Maintain fire extinguishers, required by the fire authority, at hand.

D. Do not drop or throw material, other than as detailed in Safe Work Method Statement. Lower by means of hoists, cranes or rubbish chutes etc. Wet down thoroughly during demolition to prevent nuisance of dirt and dust. Equip trucks used in hauling debris with tarpaulins to cover the loads. Do not load so excessively as to spill debris on streets.

E. Plaster removal: in general, removal of existing plaster showing cracks, bulges or drumminess is required. Refer to architect if in doubt.

F. Except as placed in approved disposal containers, do not allow combustible material and rubbish to accumulate on the site. Remove daily, or as directed. Burn no debris on site.

G. Upon completion of wrecking, demolition and the removal of rubbish and debris, remove equipment.

306 Reinstatement

Restore to original condition, without expense to the proprietor, any damaged parts of the remaining construction resulting from failure to provide adequate protection. Refer also clause 105.

308 Disposal of Waste Dispose of asbestos and other hazardous waste as per statutory or local requirements.

309 Completion Complete contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the architect. Leave the site in an entirely clean condition, ready for the work of other trades.

END OF SECTION

02 SITE, URBAN AND OPEN SPACES 0221 Civil Works

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 21 0221 CIVIL WORKS

0221 CIVIL WORKS

1 SURVEY SETOUT

1.1 SURVEY AND TESTING – SET OUT The works shall be set out and constructed in accordance with the alignments, levels, grades and cross sections as shown on the approved drawings or as directed by the Architect in accordance with this specification. The Contractor shall have on site at all times survey equipment of a standard suitable to accurately confirm detailed setout and levels, plus personnel skilled in the proper operation of this equipment. All such equipment and personnel, if required, shall be made available for the Architect's use upon request. This requirement shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of their responsibilities with regard to accuracy of setout, levels and falls, etc. The works shall be set out, using all the necessary survey equipment, from the pegs and bench marks given and these shall be used constantly during the progress of the works to check the accuracy thereof. It shall be the responsibility of the contractor's surveyor to obtain digital setout information from the Principal's surveyor. The contractor's surveyor shall confirm dimensions and scale on the drawings prior to setting out any works on site. Any discrepancies shall be reported to the Architect for confirmation or resolution prior to proceeding with any works. The Contractor shall allow for lot boundaries to be re-established and confirm all setout dimensions prior to beginning works on site. Any discrepancies shall be reported to the Architect for confirmation or resolution prior to proceeding with any works. Care shall be taken not to disturb any survey peg, survey recovery pegs or survey marks and none of these are to be removed without the prior approval of the Architect. Where it is necessary to cover a survey peg, such a peg must have a substantial stake driven beside it and this stake shall extend at least 75mm above the finished surface and be appropriately marked to identify it. Any State Survey mark affected by the works shall be identified and reported to the Department of Lands and Surveys for replacement or relocation. The Contractor shall protect and keep protected the bench mark and any other survey control marks established by the Licensed Surveyor. All costs involved in re-establishing these marks should they be removed as a result of the Contractor's neglect shall be met by the Contractor. Re-establishment of such marks shall be carried out by a Licensed Surveyor only. Setout amendments, if required, shall only be undertaken on site in conjunction with the Architect and are subject to Approval. Approval to proceed shall not constitute acceptance of the accuracy of the work nor relieve the Contractor of their contractual obligations and responsibility for the work. Payment for survey set out will be assumed to be included in the relevant schedule item for each activity. Should major survey be required to replace pegs during progress of the works, the superintendent shall be informed at an earlier prior time and the Contractor shall keep him informed as to all survey requirements.

1.2 SURVEY AND TESTING – SURVEY RESPONSIBILITY AND CONTROL The Licensed Surveyors appointed by the Principal shall be responsible for all cadastral surveys, pre-calculated plans and the provision of a bench mark to Australian Height Datum. Recovery and referencing of this control is the responsibility of the Contractor. For roadworks and stormwater drainage, the Surveyors shall, on completion of earthworks and on request three days prior to requirement, re-peg the road centre line providing pegs at Intersection Points and Tangent Points. Should major survey be required to replace pegs during progress of the works, the Engineer shall be informed at an earlier prior time and the Contractor shall keep him informed as to all survey requirements.



2 TESTING

2.1 GENERAL - It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide all materials for the completion of this project and to

provide verification that all materials comply with the requirements of the contract documents. - In addition it is the contractors responsibility to undertake all necessary testing of subgrade,

subbase, basecourse and, asphalt to ensure conformance with this specification for compaction, moisture content, level, dryness, shape, finish etc. The costs for all testing shall be at the Contractor's expense.

- All compaction testing shall be undertaken by an approved, independent NATA registered testing laboratory in accordance with A.S. 1289.1.4.1.

2.2 STANDARDS The work shall comply with relevant current Australian Standards including but not limited to the following: Comply with particular specifications in building regulations and/or local council publications.

- AS 1141 Methods for sampling and testing aggregate - AS 1152 Specification for Test Sieves - AS 1254 PVC-U pipes and fittings for stormwater and surface water applications - AS 1260 PVC-U pipes and fittings for drain, waste and vent application - AS 1289 Methods for testing soils for engineering purposes - AS 1379 The specification and supply of concrete - AS 1650 Hot-dip galvanised coatings on ferrous articles - AS 1725 Galvanised rail-less chainwire security fences and gates - AS 1726 Geotechnical site investigations - AS 2032 Installation of PVC pipe systems - AS 2423 Galvanised wire fencing products - AS/NZS 2566 Buried Flexible Pipelines - AS/NZS 2566.2 Buried Flexible Pipelines Installation - AS 2758 Aggregates and rock for engineering purposes - AS 2891 Methods of Sampling and Testing Asphalt - Test Methods 731.1 Stability and Flow of Asphalt” - AS 3660 Termite management. - AS 3705 Geotextiles - Identification, Marking and General Data - AS 3706 Geotextiles - Methods of Test - AS 3798 Guidelines on earthworks for commercial and residential developments - AS 3972 Portland and Blended Cements - AS 4058 Concrete Pipes - AS 4133 Methods of Testing Rocks for Engineering Purposes - AS/NZS 4200 Pliable building membranes and underlays. . AS/NZS 4200.1 1994 Materials. Plus 1 Amdt, 1994. . AS/NZS 4200.2 1994 Installation requirements.

- AS 4678 Earth-retaining structures - AS 4687 2007 Temporary fencing and hoardings. - AS/NZS 5065 Polyethylene and polypropylene pipes and fittings for drainage and sewerage

applications



2.3 MATERIAL TESTING SCHEDULE Table 2.3 Material Testing - Compaction Performance Criteria - To Pavements & Structures Material Definition

Material Type Method Minimum Density

Frequency - area per portion (2)

Subgrade Sand PSP - to A.S. 1289.6.3.3 (1)

95% SMDD >1000m2 1 test per 500m2 or three per portion

500-1000m2 1 test per 500m2 or three per portion

Clay / Clayey NDT - to A.S. 1289.5.2.1

98% MMDD

<500m2 2 tests per 500m2 or three per portion

Filling Sand PSP - to

A.S. 1289.6.3.3 (1)

95% SMDD >1000m2 1 test per 500m2 or three per portion (all per layer)(3)

500-1000m2 1 test per 500m2 or three per portion (all per layer)(3)

Clay / Clayey NDT - to A.S. 1289.5.2.1

98% MMDD

<500m2 2 tests per 500m2 or three per portion (all per layer)(3)

Sub-base Limestone NDT - to A.S.

1289.5.2.1 95% MMDD 1 test per 500m2 or three per

portion Road Base Crushed Rock NDT - to A.S.

1289.5.2.1 98% MMDD 1 test per 500m2 or three per

portion Wearing Course

Asphalt 94% Marshall Maximum Density

1 test per 500m2 or three per portion

Notes on Table 2.3. 1. PSP testing shall be used in sandy locations where deemed appropriate. Refer section 1.10 of 0222 Earthworks for details. 2. The contractor shall determine which sections of the works will constitute a portion in accordance with the criteria indicated, and submit to the Superintendent for approval. A portion shall have been produced by the same works process and be brought to completion at the same time. Portions shall appear to be of consistent quality without obvious changes in attribute values. 3. Testing frequency to be completed per each fill layer installed loose and compacted.



- Density shall be measured in situ by use of a nuclear moisture/density meter in accordance with Test Method AS 1289.5.2.1-2003. All measurements shall be made using the direct transmission mode. The cost of all testing for direct transmission testing methods shall be borne by the contractor. Indirect density tests using correlations will not be accepted.

- The nuclear moisture/density meter can be calibrated for the range of density 1.3 t/m³ to 3.05 t/m³. - If the in situ density is outside the range of densities for which the nuclear moisture/density meter

has been calibrated the "Sand Replacement Method" shall be used. - For the purpose of conformance judgement of subgrade, and basecourse, the in situ density shall

be expressed as a percentage of the maximum dry density. - The maximum dry density shall be determined by the appropriate Australian Standard method. Density - Asphalt Density shall be calculated on the basis of the results of tests of core samples of asphalt randomly sampled form the pavement, after laying and compaction, in accordance with AS 2891 “Methods of Sampling and Testing Asphalt” with MRD Test Methods 731.1 "Stability and Flow of Asphalt”. Moisture Content The moisture content shall be determined using the appropriate Australian Standard method. Remedial Works - The Contractor shall be responsible for patching holes made during earthworks, subgrade or

pavement testing. - The test holes shall be backfilled immediately after sampling or testing by the person who made the

holes. Backfilled material shall have similar properties and shall be compacted at or near optimum moisture content to densities matching the surrounding material.

2.4 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES The surface of all unpaved areas, roadways, subgrade, and embankments constructed or disturbed by the Contractor shall be graded to a smooth surface. The slope of batters shall not exceed the specified slope. The finished surfaces of earthworks shall be accurate within the tolerances set out in the Table below.

Table 2.4 REQUIRED TOLERANCES

Vertical Deviation Horizontal Deviation

3m Straight Edge Deviation

Bulk earthworks levels +50 mm, -25 mm

Deviation of batter line at any point <150 mm <150 mm

Subgrade level +5 mm, -35 mm +100 mm, -0 mm

Sub-base level +5 mm, -25 mm +50 mm, -0 mm

Basecourse level +5 mm, -5 mm +20 mm, -0 mm Max 6mm

Asphalt wearing course +5mm, -0 mm +0 mm, -0 mm Max 5mm

Trafficable brick pavers +5mm, -0 mm +0 mm, -0 mm Max 5mm

Base of foundations and ground surfaces prior to placement of structures

+ 0 mm, -10 mm



Concrete kerbs and footpaths +5 mm, -5 mm +5 mm, -5 mm

Stormwater Drainage +5 mm, -5 mm +5 mm, -5 mm

Retaining Walls +5 mm, -5 mm +5 mm, -5 mm

All earthworks shall be final graded to the underside of the pavement stage including, but not limited to: - evenly graded changes between design levels and existing ground levels; - smoothly finished surface, no ruts or disturbances;

3 AS-CONSTRUCTED

- Records for all underground works shall show the location of the item referenced from the boundary or road centre line as applicable with chainage and offset at all changes of direction and 20m maximum centres on straights.

- "As Constructed" detail shall be at cross sections to coincide with cross sections, chainages and all offsets on the approved drawings at 20m intervals.

- Final As-Constructed information shall be provided in accordance with the General Requirements work sections. Additionally, as-constructed locations of all kerbing and centrelines shall be accurately located by a licensed surveyor. A digital copy of the as-constructed location shall be provided to the Architect in Autocad dwg and pdf formats for client records.

- Under no circumstance will payment be made for works which have not received the Architects approval of the "As Constructed" information.

4 ROADWORKS

4.1 SCOPE OF WORKS The work of this section comprises but is not limited to subgrade preparation, lay and compact subbase, base course and wearing course, provide and install kerbing, signing and lining, stormwater pipes, manholes and gullies and all other works necessary to complete the bitumen paving and stormwater drainage.

4.2 RELATED WORK - Site preparation and earthworks - Concrete - Landscaping

4.3 PAVEMENTS General The pavement shall be constructed to the widths, grades, crossfalls, depths and lengths shown on the drawings. Subgrade - The finished levels of the subgrade shall be within tolerance of design levels per table 2.4. - During sub grade preparation, the works shall be maintained in such condition that they are

thoroughly drained at all times. Sub-Base - The sub-base material shall be crushed limestone from an approved source and crushed to comply

with the grading given below. The crushed limestone shall be free of sand, capstone, roots and other foreign material. The compacted thickness of limestone sub-base shall be as shown on the Drawings.



- The limestone shall comply with the following requirements, when sampled and tested in accordance with AS 1141 and AS 1189: . Percentage of wear by Los Angeles test - not more than 60%. . Calcium carbonate content - not less than 60% nor more than 80% by weight.

AS Sieve Size % Passing By Weight

75 mm 100

19 mm 50 - 75

2.36 mm & less 30 - 50

- No limestone shall be placed until the subgrade has been approved by the Superintendent. - The limestone rubble shall be placed so that the subgrade is not disturbed and broken up.

Limestone shall not be spread upon a water logged subgrade. If at any time the subgrade material becomes mixed with the limestone sub-base, the Contractor at his own cost shall remove the mixture and reshape with clean limestone.

- The limestone shall be compacted by rolling and watering to a firm, even and unyielding surface to the satisfaction of the Architect.

- Where in the opinion of the Architect, damage to adjoining properties may result, the use of vibrating rollers will not be permitted.

- The finished surface shall be tested by template to ensure accuracy within tolerance of design levels per table 2.4

4.4 CRUSHED ROCK BASE COURSE - The base course material shall be diorite or granite fine crushed rock from an approved source.

The compacted thickness of the base course shall be as shown in the drawings. - The crushed rock shall comply with the following requirements when sampled and tested in

accordance with AS 1141 and AS 1289. - Percentage of wear by Los Angeles test not more than 45%.

AS Sieve Size % Passing By Weight

19 mm 100 9.5 mm 70 - 80 4.75 mm 40 - 65 2.36 mm 30 - 50 0.425 mm 12 - 30 0.075 mm 3 - 12

- The ratio of the portion passing 0.075 mm sieve to the portion passing 0.425 mm sieve shall fall

within the range of 40 60%. - The portion retained on the 0.425 mm sieve shall conform to the following: . Linear shrinkage not greater than 1% . Lower liquid limit not greater than 25 . Plasticity index not greater than 5 nor less than 2. . Dry compressive strength not less than 1.75 MPa.

- No rock base shall be placed until the sub base has been approved by the Architect. - The fine crushed rock shall be maintained at optimum moisture content, within a tolerance of + 2%

(two per cent) until spreading and compaction is completed, additional water being added as necessary during rolling.

- Materials shall be spread without segregation of large or fine particles. Segregated materials shall be re mixed by harrowing and blading or, if ordered by the Superintendent, they shall be cast to waste.



- Fine crushed rock shall not be spread upon a waterlogged sub base. If at any time the sub base material should become churned up or mixed with the pavement, the contractor shall, without additional compensation, remove the mixture and re shape with clean material, which shall be satisfactorily compacted uniformly with the surrounding surface.

- The finished surface shall be tested by template to ensure accuracy within tolerance of design levels per table 2.4

4.5 PRIMING OF PAVEMENT - No surface shall be primed until the finished base course has been approved by the

Superintendent. - A short time before the priming is to be commenced, the surface shall be finished by light watering,

planing and rolling with multi wheeled, pneumatic tyred rollers. - The mulch which forms on the surface shall be removed from the pavement by light grading and

brooming to provide a surface free from loose stones, dirt and foreign matter. At this stage, the pavement shall be dry, or at most, only slightly damp and the surface pores free from water down to a depth of 12 mm.

- The pavement shall be primed with a medium curing cut back bitumen containing at least 70% by volume bitumen. The rate of application shall be not less than 1.20 litres/m2 measured at 15°C. The spraying temperature shall be between 70°C and 120°C.

- Alternatively, a bitumen emulsion prime containing at least 60% by volume bitumen may be used, subject to the Architect's approval. The rate of application shall be not less than 1.36 litres/m2 measured at 15°C.

- The method of application shall be in accordance with standard practice adopted by Main Roads WA.

- The primed spray shall be blinded after spraying. - For cutback prime, sand or 1.5 mm aggregate shall be applied after penetration of the primer but

while sufficient bitumen is on the surface to allow adhesion. - For emulsion prime, 5 mm diorite aggregate shall be evenly applied at a rate of 100 square metres

coverage per cubic metre. The surface shall be rolled until the aggregate is firmly embedded in the primer.

- On no account shall the bituminous concrete material be placed on a section of the primed base course until such section has been inspected and approved by the Architect. A minimum of 72 hours after application of the primer shall elapse in all cases.

4.6 WEARING COURSE - The wearing course shall be "bituminous concrete" consisting of coarse aggregate, fine aggregate

and mineral filler uniformly coated and mixed with a bituminous binder. - The nominal size of the bituminous concrete shall conform to the following requirements. . 35 Blow Marshall Mix, Class 170 Bitumen . (Tolerance + 5 mm – 0mm).

- Aggregate shall be 7mm nominal size unless noted otherwise. Minimum compacted depths as specified on the Drawings.

- The aggregate for the course shall consist wholly of crushed granite or diorite material produced from sound stone having a Los Angeles Abrasion Test value of not greater than 30 or a mixture of crushed material and natural sand provided that, if natural sand is included in the mixture, the amount used shall be so limited that the mixture of aggregate passing the 4.75 mm A.S. Sieve will contain not less than 50% by weight of crushed particles. The flakiness index of the aggregate shall not exceed 35%.

- Filler, if required, shall consist of Portland Cement, ground limestone or stone dust. - The paving mixture for the surface coarse shall meet the following requirements by weight when

determined by A.S. sieves. The residual binder, that is the residual asphaltic bitumen, shall be determined as a percentage by weight of the total mixture.

AS Sieve Size % Passing By Weight Nominal Size 7 mm

13.2 mm 100



9.50 mm 100 6.70 mm 80-100 4.75 mm 70-90 2.36 mm 49-67 1.18 mm 37-53 600 um 25-41 300 um 15-27 150 um 8-16 75 um 4-8

Total Mineral Matter 100

Nominal Agg Size 7 mm

Bitumen Binder (% of total mix by mass)

5.2-7.0

Marshall Stability Test (minimum)

5.5kN

Marshall Flow Value (mm) 2-5

Range of air voids in total mix when compacted

3-7

- Strict control of temperature shall be maintained to avoid burning of the binder and to also provide

maximum laying qualities in the mix. - The following limits shall apply: . Maximum aggregate temperature = 190°C . Maximum bitumen temperature = 160°C . Maximum temperature of mix leaving plant = 175°C . Minimum temperature of mix at spreader = 135 C

4.7 TACK COAT - A tack coat of rapid breaking cationic bituminous emulsion (CRS / 50 - 60 Grade) shall be applied to

the primed surface at a rate between 0.20 and 0.50 litres per sq. metre. - The existing surface shall first be swept to the satisfaction of the Architect to a clean, dry surface. - When ordered, splash guards shall be supplied and used to protect property, traffic and adjoining

work from damage. The Architect shall direct the length of tack coat which may be put out beyond the point at which the spreading of bituminous concrete is to be undertaken and the period of time which must elapse before spreading commences on the tack coat. This time shall normally be not less than 30 minutes nor more than 2 hours.

4.8 PLACING THE MIXTURE - The mixture shall be laid upon a base which is dry and only when weather conditions are suitable

and atmospheric temperature above ten (10) degrees centigrade. - The mixture shall be spread to line and camber without tearing, gouging or shearing to produce a

surface free from waves. - The mixture shall be spread in such a manner as to minimise the number of joints in the pavement.

More than one longitudinal joint will not be permitted if the total width is 7.4 m or less.



- Longitudinal and transverse joints shall be made in a careful manner well bonded and sealed. Joints between old and new pavements or between successive days work, shall be carefully made to ensure a thorough and continuous bond between the old and new surfaces.

- Immediately after any course is spread and before roller compaction is started, the surface shall be checked, any inequalities adjusted, all fat, sandy, segregated hungry or dusty accumulation from the screed removed by a rake or hoe and replaced with satisfactory material.

4.9 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE - After spreading, the mixture shall be thoroughly and uniformly compressed as soon after being

spread as it will bear the roller without undue displacement. For the compaction of the mixture, the Contractor shall provide self propelled and reversible rollers approved by the Architect and complying with the following requirements: . Steel static three wheeled rollers, weighing not less than 10 tonnes nor more than 12 tonnes. The

wheel pressures of the rear wheels shall be not less than 60 kg/cm width. . Steel static tandem wheeled rollers weighing not less than 10 tonnes nor more than 12 tonnes.

The wheel pressures of the rollers shall be not less than 45 kg/cm width. . Pneumatic tyred multi wheeled rollers equipped with pneumatic tyres capable of being inflated to

700 kPa. The rollers shall be so constructed that the total weight of the roller can be varied to produce an operating weight per tyre of up to 200 kg.

. Vibrating rollers each of minimum static mass of six (6) tonnes capable of varying the amplitude and/or frequency of vibration may be used subject to the approval of the Architect. Vibratory compaction shall be discontinued in areas where it is considered such vibration could cause damage to adjacent buildings or structures.

- An approved brush or similar device shall be fitted so that each tyre or roll is kept clean of foreign material and kept uniformly wet. Tyres shall be free of pit marks.

- The Contractor shall provide a minimum of one steel three wheeled roller and one pneumatic tyred roller for each asphalt paver in use on the job, but the Architect may require the provision of additional rolling equipment if, in his opinion, the rollers on the job are not obtaining the required compaction of the mixture.

- For compacting confined areas, the Contractor shall provide a small roller and/or a mechanical impact type or vibrating type hand operated compactor of size and mass acceptable to the Architect.

- Undue delays in rolling freshly spread mixture will not be tolerated. Initial compaction of the asphalt shall be achieved using the self propelled steel wheel roller. Rolling shall start longitudinally at the sides and proceed toward the centre of the pavement overlapping on successive passes by at least 150 mm. Successive passes of the roller shall be of slightly different lengths. A minimum of three passes shall be given to the asphalt and these passes shall be completed as soon as practicable but before the asphalt temperature falls below 110 degrees Celsius. Subsequent to at least three passes of the static wheel roller, rolling shall be carried out using the pneumatic tyred roller.

- Where the width of the pavement permits, the pavement shall then be subjected to diagonal rolling in two directions with a tandem roller weighing not less than 10 tonnes, the second diagonal rolling crossing the lines of the first.

- The speed of the steel wheeled roller shall not exceed 5 km/hour, or 10 km/hour in the case of a pneumatic tyred roller and shall be at all times slow enough to avoid displacement of the hot mixture. Any displacement occurring as a result of reversing the direction of the roller, or from any other cause, shall at once be corrected by the use of rakes and of fresh mixture where required. Rolling shall proceed continuously until all roller marks are eliminated and no further compression is possible.

- Along kerbs, channels, headers, manholes and similar structures, and at all places not accessible to the roller, thorough compaction shall be secured by means of hot tampers and at all contacts of this character the joints between these structures and the mixture must be effectively sealed.

- After final compaction the course shall conform to the following requirements. It shall: . be smooth and true to the established crown and grade, and be within a tolerance of + 5 mm of

the design level; . shall at no point vary more than - 0 mm to + 5 mm from the specified thickness indicated on the

drawings. Any low or defective places shall immediately be remedied by cutting the course at such spots and replacing it with fresh hot mixture which shall be immediately compacted to



conform with the surrounding area and shall be thoroughly bonded to it. The surface of the finished course shall be free from depressions exceeding 5 mm as measured with a three metre straightedge;

. shall have crown or crossfall as directed by the Architect;

. surface slope shall also be such that ponding of water cannot occur at any point.

4.10 CONCRETE KERBS - Concrete kerbs shall be constructed to the dimensions shown on the drawings. - Kerbs shall be constructed in situ by an approved kerbing machine. They shall be placed in straight

lines and horizontal and vertical curves as shown on the drawings, and to the levels shown on the drawings.

- The concrete used shall have a minimum compressive strength of 32 MPa at twenty-eight days. This strength shall be determined in each test by the average of two duplicate specimens moulded from concrete actually being placed in the work, selected to represent truly the whole of the concrete poured on the day of moulding. The concrete shall be composed of a mixture of screenings, sand and cement to give the strength specified with a maximum slump of 90mm.

- Ready mixed concrete shall conform to the requirements of AS 1379 - 2007. - The contractor shall provide all materials, labour and facilities for the manufacture of cylindrical

concrete test specimens, including the necessary moulds at such times during the course of the contract as may be required. The test specimens shall be made, cured and tested in accordance with AS 1012. The whole cost of obtaining concrete samples shall be borne by the contractor.

- Contraction joints shall be provided at 2.5 m intervals and formed perpendicular to the kerb length by either a joint tool capable of cutting 20 mm deep or a 5 mm wide cut 66% though.

- Immediately after the contraction joints have been formed the extruded kerb shall be finished by the application of a 2 part sand to 1 part cement mortar by means of a kerb shaped screed. The finishing shall bridge over the contraction joints to form a continuous cover.

- Not less than 24 hours after the placement of the kerb, transverse expansion joints shall be provided in vertical planes at right angles to the kerb lines and at intervals not exceeding 5 m, coinciding with formed construction joints, and at sides of drainage gullies. The joints shall be made with a full 10 mm thickness cut filled with an approved butyl mastic compound and foam or polyurethane backing as detailed in the drawings. Alternative filling materials may be used if specifically approved in writing by the Architect.

- The first 150 mm of extruded kerb shall be neatly cut away and removed. - Care shall be taken to joint the new kerb to existing kerbs with a smooth join. All curves and arises

shall be smooth and true. Uniformity of colour must be obtained. - Within two hours of surface finishing, all exposed faces of kerb shall be protected from moisture loss

for not less than ninety six hours after extrusion by covering with plastic sheeting or spraying with an approved curing compound.

- Place backfilling to kerbing after kerb has cured and jointing is completed.

5 TRAFFICABLE BRICK PAVING

5.1 GENERAL This section of the Specification covers the following paving works; - Supply and installation brick paving units (concrete and clay).

5.2 MATERIALS Cement Cement shall be Type A Portland Cement complying with AS 3972-1997 unless specified otherwise. Concrete Premix concrete shall comply with the requirements of AS 1379-2007. All concrete used in the works shall develop a minimum compressive strength of 20 MPa at 28 days and shall be composed of a mixture of screenings, sand and cement to give the strength specified with a maximum slump of 90mm. All concrete shall have an approved high strength additive to give rapid hardening.



Bedding Sand - Bedding sand shall be a well graded sand passing a 4.75mm sieve and suited to concrete

manufacture and conforming to the following grading limits : A.S. Sieve % Passing 9.52mm 100 4.75mm 95 - 100 2.36mm 80 - 100 1.18mm 50 - 85

600 microns 25 - 60 300 microns 10 - 30 150 microns 5 - 15 75 microns 0 - 5

- The bedding sand shall be free of deleterious soluble salts or other contaminants likely to cause

efflorescence or lead to reduced skid resistance. - The sand shall be of uniform moisture content when spread and shall be protected against rain

when stockpiled on site prior to spreading. - Bedding sand for all pavers shall be 'Gin Gin' sand as available from Monier Resources. - Bricklayers sand and single sized dune sands shall not be used as bedding sand. The bedding

sand shall be non plastic and free from deleterious materials such as stones, clay lumps and organic material.

Jointing Sand - Jointing Sand as used for filling the joints in all pavers shall be clean and free of any organic matter

and/or soluble salts or contaminants likely to cause efflorescence or staining and shall conform with the following grading specification:

Sieve Size % Passing 2.36mm 100 1.18mm 80 - 100

600 microns 65 - 90 300 microns 30 - 70 150 microns 10 - 35 75 microns 0 - 10

- Jointing sand shall be stable and of a nature that once installed it will not be eroded under normal

conditions. Bedding sand is not suitable for use as jointing sand. 76mm Roadway Standard Clay Brick Pavers Clay brick paving units to be supplied for the construction of interlocking segmental pavements in roadways, pedestrian crossings and parking shall be high temperature fired with exposed faces of an extruded, wire cut or pressed finish and shall comply with the following requirements. - Dimension Tolerance : The paver shall be of 230mm nominal length and 114mm nominal width with

a minimum depth of 76mm or otherwise as approved and shall have a + 2mm tolerance on all dimensions, providing the brick complies with the length to width relationship as determined by Paver Note 1.

The brick shall be true in shape with all intersecting faces subtending an angle of 90 deg. The perpendicularity of faces will be determined by diagonal measurements on all faces of the brick. In this regard, when measured, diagonal dimensions on any face shall not vary by more than 1mm. When pavers have bevelled or rounded edges the plan width of a bevel shall not exceed 5mm and the radius of a rounded edge shall not exceed 7mm. The brick face shall be free from dishing and warping and when tested with a straight edge placed on any face, the maximum permissible deviation from the contact edge shall not exceed 2mm. The maximum and minimum limits of length and width for a sample of 20 pavers when measures in accordance with AS 1226.2 shall comply with the recommendation of Paver Note 1 (+40mm). - Transverse Strength (modulus of rupture) : The transverse strength shall be determined by the

procedure outlined in AS 1226.3 and the characteristic transverse strength shall not be less than 2.0 MPa. Alternatively, when sampled in accordance with AS 1226.1 and measured in accordance with



the method given in Appendix A of Paver Note One (Clay Brick and Paver Institute publication August 1989) the minimum transverse breaking load of individual pavers shall be 5 kN.

- Wear Resistance Abrasion Test : The abrasion test to be used to determine wear resistance is Procedure C of ASTM C779 76, "Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces" as modified by the Perth City Council. The tests provides impact and sliding friction under ball bearings to give rate of wear (depth) versus revaluation evaluations. A sample of bricks tested in accordance with procedure shall have an average abrasion index exceeding 1.5.

- Resistance To Salt Attack : Resistance to salt attack shall be determined by the sodium sulphate test described in AS 1226.10. Pavers which are likely to be tested to severe salt attack in service shall withstand 40 cycles of the test.

- Pitting Due To Lime Particles : When tested in accordance with AS 1226.7 the liability of clay paver to pitting due to the expansion of lime particles shall not be worse than Moderate as defined by AS 1225-1984.

- Liability To Efflorescence : Liability to efflorescence when determined in accordance with AS 1226.6 shall be determined as nil to sight.

- Absorption : Water absorption properties of the brick when determined in accordance with AS 1226.9 (twenty four hour test) shall be less than 12.5%. Variations between bricks tested in accordance with this method shall not exceed 2%.

- Compressive Strength : The minimum characteristic compressive strength when determined in accordance with AS 1226.4 shall be 30 MPa.

- Permanent Expansion : The estimated long term (five year) unrestrained expansion when determined in accordance with AS 1226.5 shall not exceed 0.6mm/m.

- Slip/Skid Resistance : The slip/skid resistance (BPN) of a paver shall be determined by using the British Pendulum Skid Resistance Tester. The BPN values form tests carried out on five unused pavers in accordance with the procedure detailed in Appendix B of Paver Note One (August 1989) shall not be less than 60 BPN.

- Midland Brick High Performance brick paving units as specified have been previously approved as roadway pavers however it is to be expressly understood that the Contractor is responsible to ensure the materials specification is adhered too and that appropriate testing, as requested by the Architect, is undertaken to ensure compliance.

- Alternative brick suppliers (to Midland Brick) will be considered only if the colour, surface texture and quality of the alternative clay brick is deemed by the Architect to adequately match the Midland Brick High Performance brick. All testing costs associated with nominating and obtaining approval from the Architect for an alternative brick shall be at the Contractors expense.

Concrete Paving Units Concrete Paving Units shall comply with the Cement Masonry Association of Australia specification for segmental Paving Units (MA20). All pavers shall be Shape Type A as detailed in section 6.2 of MA20 Concrete Edge Restraints Concrete Edge Restraints shall be constructed from ready mixed concrete as supplied by an Approved ready mixed firm. Methods of mixing and delivery shall be in accordance with AS 1379-1991. Concrete for the edge restraints shall have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 20Mpa, a maximum slump of 80mm and a nominal aggregate size of 20mm.

5.3 PAVING General All areas which are required to be block paved are indicated on the Drawings. These areas shall first be treated with a residual weed-killer of a type and in a manner which will not affect existing trees and shrubs. The pavement shall consist of interlocking block pavement units complying with Clause 8.100 and shall be laid to the lines and levels as shown on the Drawings. Detailed Set Out It should be noted that a higher than normal trade standard of finish will be required for all paving work within this Contract and particular attention should be paid to the set out so as to minimise the requirement for cutting any units except where this is absolutely unavoidable.



Prior to the commencement of any paving works the Contractor should familiarise themselves with the design of each of the paving unit types so as to gain a clear understanding as to how the various units are designed to match in their coursing and interlock with one another. Sub-Base The subgrade and sub-base to paved areas shall be set out and constructed in accordance with this specification and laid to a finished thickness as indicated on the Drawings. The sub-base shall be of sufficient width to extend to the rear of all edge restraints. Edge Restraints - Edge restraints shall be provided along the perimeter of all areas to be paved in the form of either

precast or extruded concrete kerbing as indicated on the Drawings and shall comply with relevant section of this Specification.

- Border restraints for paving shall consist of concrete kerbing or where kerbing does not exist concrete edge beams as detailed on the Drawings.

- Edge restraints shall be installed to the contour of the surrounding pavements without affecting the flow of surface water run off. Where edge restraint beams are used to support pavers, the pavers shall be set into the wet concrete unless the Architect approves an alternative method.

- Edge restraint for roadway pavers to pedestrian crossings and carparks may consist of a bond beam. The preferred method of installation for transverse bond beams (ie. at pedestrian crossings) is to construct the pavement (including asphalt) past the bond beam and trench out the pavement and cast concrete in the trench to form the bond beam. Asphalt shall be cut using a saw.

Bedding Sand - The sand bedding shall be spread loose on to the sub-base, in a uniform layer. The precise depth

shall be determined in the field prior to spreading. - The sand bedding shall be screeded in a loose condition to the nominated design profile with

sufficient surcharge to allow for compaction to a uniform thickness as shown on the Drawings. Under no circumstances shall the bedding sand layer exceed 40mm following compaction of the pavement.

- The spread sand shall be carefully maintained in a loose condition and protected against precompaction both prior to and following screeding. Any precompacted sand or screeded sand left overnight shall be loosened before further paving units are placed. Sand shall be lightly screeded in a loose condition to the predetermined depth only, slightly ahead of the laying of the paving units. Under no circumstances shall the sand be screeded in advance of the laying face to an extent to which paving will not be completed on that day.

- Screeded sand must be fully protected against accidental precompaction including compaction by rain or dew. Any screeded sand which is precompacted prior to laying of units shall be removed and brought back to profile in a loose condition.

- Where paving units abut fixed items, such as stormwater grates, pits, manholes or similar, with the exception of kerbs, the Contractor shall incorporate 2 6% cement (by volume) into the bedding sand within 600mm radius of each such item. All paving unit surfaces shall finish flush with the surface level of all such fixed items as specified above.

- Where paving units abut bond beams then the paving shall be finished +0mm to +5mm above the bond beam to allow for future settlement.

Sample Sections - Prior to the commencement of any laying of paving the Contractor shall confer with the Architect to

determine the precise locations and requirements for the installation of sample sections for each paving type.

- Following detailed set out and Approval to proceed the Contractor shall lay in accordance with this Specification a sample section of each paving type as described herein for the approval of the Architect. Each section shall measure no less than 2.0 x 6.0m. If this sample does not meet with the approval of the Architect it shall be removed and re layed to the satisfaction of the Architect. All subsequent paving work for each type shall conform to the respective Approved sample sections.

- Subject to approval by the Architect these sample sections of paving may be incorporated into the finished works.

Performance of Pavers - The Contractor shall select and lay to the best laying face of all clay bricks at time of laying. Any

unit exhibiting signs of excessive chipping or spalling on the proposed laying face should be turned



over and layed on the alternative face, providing this face is acceptable. If both faces are deemed unacceptable, the paver shall be put aside for use during the cutting in process or rejected altogether if considered unsuitable for cutting in.

- Where the paving materials supplied exhibit a variation in colour or other finishes, as deemed permissible by the Architect within the scope of this and/or the material supply specifications, such materials shall be selected and laid so as to distribute the variations in finishes uniformly throughout any given paving area. A similar technique shall be adopted where one batch of materials might vary from another. The mixing of such material with variations to their finishes shall be done so that any areas treated thus cannot be distinguished from adjacent areas paved in the same basic materials.

- The following performance criteria shall be met with regard to finished layed surfaces: The pavers shall be true to shape with no transverse cracking or surface crazing. No chip or spall shall have greater depth than 2.5mm or be greater than 5% of the surface area of the paver with the provision that should the chip or spall have a surface area greater than 100 sq mm, the maximum depth shall be 1.0mm. In addition, no more than 2% of all pavers shall contain a chip or spall exceeding 3% of the surface area of the paver.

- Similarly as the modular concrete paving units are single sided only if excessive chipping or spalling is present on the proposed laying face of any such units these pavers shall be put aside for use during the cutting in process or rejected altogether if considered unsuitable for cutting in.

Laying Paving Units - Paving units shall be placed on the uncompacted screeded sand bed to the herring bone laying

pattern configuration with their long axis at 45 degrees to the direction of traffic unless specified otherwise. All modular concrete paving shall be laid to match, such that the longitudinal joints also run at 45 degrees to the direction of traffic.

- Further to the above it should be noted that a 45 deg. herringbone pattern inherently offers two options for the layout of the pattern. All 45 deg. herringbone paving shall be laid with the backbone of the pattern running at right angles to the direction of traffic as per the detailed Drawings. Paving units shall be laid with a header course using standard rectangular bricks at 90� to all edge restraints except adjacent to manholes or as otherwise shown on the drawings.

- Where the two products, ie clay and concrete, are used in combination with one another the coursing shall be laid to match precisely. Should there be any minor discrepancies in the paving unit dimensions when compared to those specified, the Contractor shall allow for these in the laying process by the discreet tempering of the coursing. Such adjustments shall be by way of marginally increasing the joint sizes in the proportionally smaller paving type, subject to the Architect's approval. In the above circumstances a maximum increase of up to 1mm greater than the nominated joint size shall be considered Acceptable.

- All unrestrained edge pavers shall be bedded into the wet concrete edge beams as specified above and as shown on the Drawings. When laying pavers, all edge pavers shall be laid with a contrasting header or double header course, as shown on the Drawings, with their short side butting against existing edge restraints or resting on new edge restraints as applicable. In this context the term contrasting shall mean concrete in the case of clay brick paving units and vice versa.

- The size of joints abutting cut bricks and/or concrete paving units shall be as specified herein for uncut brick and/or concrete paving units.

- When cutting or trimming pavers, insertion of pieces less than one third of total surface area of whole paver shall be avoided by altering the bond pattern as necessary and by the replacement of these pieces with half, two thirds or three quarter sized pieces as indicated on the Drawings.

- Where it is necessary to cut pavers to fit around walls, pits, service covers, manholes, precast tree grate surrounds or the like, the pavers shall be accurately cut by saw to fit neatly with joint sizes as previously specified. All pavers, edge pavers and closure pavers shall be placed prior to compaction of the pavement.

- In filling spaces with mortar or concrete will not be allowed. - Adjacent pavers shall not differ in level by more than 2mm and shall not vary by more than +10mm

when tested with a three (3) metre long straight edge and shall not allow the ponding of water. - With the exception of the zone within one (1) metre of the unrestrained laying face no area of paving

shall be left with part spaces left uncut or unfilled, or the paving un compacted, or the joints unfilled at the completion of the day’s work. Compaction shall be carried out on pavement laid to existing edge restraints.



- A uniformly even layer of approximately 10mm of jointing sand may be required to be maintained over the surface of the completed sections of pavement to ensure complete filling of the joints and to protect the paving units from damage and/or staining from adjacent works for a period of time to be determined in conjunction with the Architect.

- Nominated side entry pit and manhole lids (inserts) shall have brick pavers installed on a mortar bed as per the drawings. Nominated sewer lids shall have cut brick slivers installed on an approved epoxy base as per the detail on the drawings.

- Paving units shall be placed to achieve gaps nominally 2 to 4mm wide between adjacent units such that all joints are correctly aligned.

- The first row shall abut an edge restraint with a gap to 2 to 4mm and shall be laid at a suitable angle to the edge restraint to achieve the required visual orientation of paving units in the completed pavement.

- In each row all full units shall be laid first. Closure units shall be cut and fitted subsequently. Such closure units shall consist of not less than 25% of a full unit. Units may be cut using a mechanical or hydraulic guillotine, bolster, or by power sawing.

- Except where it is necessary to correct any minor variations occurring in the laying bond the paving units shall not be hammered into position. Where adjustment of position is necessary care shall be taken to avoid premature compaction of the sand bedding.

- Any foot or barrow traffic shall use boards overlaying paving to prevent disturbance of units prior to mechanical compaction. No other construction traffic shall be allowed on the pavement at this stage of construction.

- After laying the paving units they shall be compacted to achieve consolidation of the sand bedding and brought to design levels and profiles by not less than two and preferable three passes of a suitable plate compactor. The compactor shall be a high-frequency, low amplitude mechanical flat plate vibrator having a plate area sufficient to cover a minimum of 12 paving units. Compaction shall proceed as closely as possible following laying and prior to the acceptance of any traffic. Compaction should not be attempted, however, within one metre of the laying face. Compaction shall continue until lipping has been eliminated between adjoining units. Joints shall then be filled and compacted as hereinafter described. All work to within one metre of the laying face must be left fully compacted at the completion of each day's laying.

- Any units which are structurally damaged during compaction shall be immediately removed and replaced.

- As soon as practical after compaction and in any case prior to the termination of work on that day and prior to the acceptance of construction traffic, sand for joint-filling shall be spread over the pavement. The sand should pass a 1.28mm sieve and have some 10% of silty material but be free of all soluble salts or contaminants likely to cause efflorescent or staining.

- The filling sand should be broomed to fill the joints. At least one pass of the plate vibrator is required to achieve compaction of the joint filling sand. Excess surface sand shall be removed by brooming.

- As soon as possible after the filling of joints construction traffic should be encouraged to use the pavement to assist in the development of 'lock-up'. Such traffic should traverse the greatest possible area of the pavement.

- Where a pavement is to carry heavy loads soon after construction the compactive effort applied during construction must be appropriate to initial traffic conditions. The plate vibrator may be insufficient for this purpose and where directed by the Architect the pavement should receive not less than 5 and up to 10 passes of a pneumatic-tyred roller, or its equivalent, having a gross weight not less than 10 tonnes.

- The finished surface of the pavement shall be true to line and levels, grades, thicknesses and cross sections shown on the Drawings. It shall be smooth and free from ruts or other irregularities.

Completion and Cleaning Up - The Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning up of all paving works and maintaining them in a

clean and tidy condition up until the Date of Practical Completion. - The Contractor shall take whatever precautions are necessary to ensure that no spillage of any

materials, occurs on completed sections of the paving and shall arrange their operations so as to not damage the works of other trades.



- The stability of the pavement shall be such that creep movements by the pavers do not create joints greater than 5mm in width nor affect the location or stability of the kerbing or adjacent bituminised or brick pavements. Rotation of blocks shall be minimal with no other detrimental effects permitted.

- Surface polishing shall be minimal. A minimum Slip Resistance pendulum classification of 'W' at the Date of Final Completion shall be achieved in accordance with A.S. 4586 Appendix A - Wet Pendulum Test Method.

- All joints shall be maintained in the condition specified.

5.4 MAINTENANCE WORK Maintenance work shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following procedures: - Cleaning of Paving Units, Kerbs etc where necessary including the treatment of efflorescence,

staining, mortar smears, oil spills etc. All such operations shall be undertaken in accordance with the specific directions and/or otherwise intent of this Specification all to the Architect's satisfaction.

- All paving joints shall be maintained in the condition specified. - Faults in constructed items attributable to the workmanship or materials used by the Contractor shall

be made good immediately to the satisfaction of the Architect. - Reinstatement of Subsidence in paved areas, around or under walls, etc shall be undertaken in

accordance with the specific directions and intent of this Specification all to the Architect's satisfaction. In paving areas paving shall be removed prior to reinstating levels and then replaced with the same unites, unless they are damaged under which circumstances new units shall be used, all as specified.

- Treatment of Ant Infestation: The contractor shall report any incidence of ant infestation within paved areas. Where bating or spraying is required as a means of control, the Contractor must first advise the Architect of the extent of work and the type of chemical intended for use before Approval for such work will be considered. Spraying shall only be carried out on windless days the Architect shall be informed when this operation is to be undertaken.

- Under no circumstances are pesticides to be used without consent of the Architect. Where required to be used, pesticides and their application shall comply with requirements of the Pesticides Act, 1978 and the manufacture's written directions.

- Removal of Unwanted Debris from the site including litter, off cuts, etc, so that the site appears to be in a clean and tidy condition at all times.

6 PAVEMENT MARKING & SIGNAGE

6.1 GENERAL This section of the Specification covers the provision of pavement marking and other surface delineations.

6.2 STANDARDS Work carried out and testing performed under this part of the Specification shall comply with the following standards to the extent that they are relevant. - AS 1742 Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices - AS 1906 Retroreflective Materials and Devices for Road Traffic Control Purposes - AS 2009 - 2006 Glass Beads for Road Marking Materials - AS 4049 Paints and Related Materials - Road Marking Materials - AS 2890.6 Off-street Disabled Parking

6.3 SETTING OUT The Contractor shall be responsible for the setting out of works from details shown on the Drawings and the reference points provided therein. Additionally, kerbs and other pavement structures may be adopted for the purposes of alignment.

6.4 MATERIALS Pavement Marking Paint - Unless otherwise on the Drawings paint for non-reflectorised pavement marking shall be plain type

suitable for application by spray, ie Type 1, Class A in accordance with the requirements of AS 4049



whereas paint for reflectorised pavement marking shall be retro-reflective (beads in paint) type suitable for application by spray, ie Type 3, Class A in accordance with the requirements of AS 4049.

- Colours shall be white, yellow or blue as detailed or as per standard practice and shall not be subject to discolouration by bitumen from the pavement surfaces.

Glass Beads Spherical glass beads shall comply with the requirements of AS 2009 - 2006. Raised Pavement Markers Non-reflective ceramic markers shall be 100 mm nominal diameter and approximately 16 mm height. The exposed surface shall be smooth, free of marks and of the colour specified on the Drawings. Spray Equipment Mechanical spraying equipment shall be capable of applying paint uniformly to the road surface at the application rate specified. It shall be equipped with a device for the application of glass beads located immediately behind the paint jets. Paint Tank The paint tank shall be equipped with a suitable device such as a dip stick for the determination of its contents.

6.5 PAVEMENT MARKING DETAILS - Pavement marking shall comply with the details shown on the Drawings and AS 2890.6 - 2009 - Off-

street parking for people with disabilities, or if not otherwise indicated, with the relevant section of AS 1742.

- Pavement lettering and numerals shall be as detailed in Figure 7.5 of AS 1742.1 - 2006 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

- Pavement arrows shall comply with details illustrated in Figure 7.6 of AS 1742.1 - 2006 unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.

6.6 APPLICATION - Unless otherwise permitted, all paint shall be applied by mechanical sprayer. - The road surface shall be clean and dry at the time of painting. - Paint shall be applied at a wet thickness in the range 0.35 to 0.40 mm

6.7 SIGNAGE - All signs are to be Class 2 reflectorised unless scheduled otherwise. - Posts shall be as per the Drawings with the tops closed by means of an approved galvanised cap or

by flattening. Posts shall be of sufficient length so that each signboard can be positioned at the required height above the pavement. Signboards shall be fixed to posts in an approved manner.

- The clearance to the bottom of the sign in pedestrian areas shall be 2100 mm.

6.8 ACCEPTANCE All sampling and testing of pavement marking paint and glass beads shall be carried out in accordance with procedures specified in AS 4049 and AS 2009 - 2006.

6.9 MAINTENANCE - Defects developing during the Defects Liability Period shall be made good immediately and all

faded, cracked, chipped and discoloured linework shall be re-marked as directed at no additional cost to the Principal.

- All line work shall be in good condition at the end of the Defects Liability Period. - Where required existing pavement marking is to be completely obliterated by a method approved by

the Architect.

7 LIMESTONE RETAINING WALLS

7.1 RETAINING WALL – SCOPE OF WORKS The work specified in this section includes but is not necessary limited to the following:-



- Blocks for Retaining Wall Construction - Wall Construction - Mortar for joints - Backfilling of walls All as shown on the drawings and specified, complete and ready for use and/or subsequent construction.

7.2 RETAINING WALL – APPLICATION DOCUMENTS The following applicable documents shall apply to this section. - AS3972 Portland and Blended Cements - AS1379 Ready Mixed Concrete - AS1289 Methods of testing soils for Engineering purposes and others where quoted in the text of the specific clauses.

7.3 RETAINING WALL – MATERIALS Blocks for Retaining Wall Construction - Blocks for wall construction shall vary according to the type of finish required and are specified on

the drawings. - Where mass limestone walls with coursed facing stones are specified on the drawings, the blocks

shall generally consist of cut blocks, nominally 350mm wide x 350mm high x 1000mm long. Samples & Testing - A sample of all face blocks shall be provided for inspection and approval by the Architect prior to

blocks being delivered to site. Variations to colour of face blocks are to the discretion of the Architect only. The material shall be dense and even in consistency and colour, without solution cavities or other imperfections.

- Where reconstituted blocks are used, the blocks shall be in the "natural earth" colour. - Testing certification of proposed blocks to be used for face and backing blocks shall be provided at

the rate of 1 per 200 blocks for natural limestone, and 1 per 500 for reconstituted blocks. - The blocks shall be from an approved supplier and have a minimum density of 1500kg/m3 for

Natural Limestone blocks and 1800kg/m3 for Reconstituted blocks. Compression Strength of blocks shall be not less than 3.0Mpa for Natural Limestone blocks and 5.0Mpa for Reconstituted blocks.

- Extensive cutting of blocks shall not be undertaken on site without prior approval from the Architect. Cement - All cement used shall be Portland cement Type A in accordance with AS 1315 and obtained from an

approved manufacturer. - Cement shall be delivered to the site fresh and in sealed bags and there stored in a water-proof

shed until such time as it is to used. Any bags showing signs of deterioration or setting shall be rejected.

Aggregate - Fine aggregate shall be well graded, clean, sharp and free from clay and organic impurities in

accordance with AS 1141 and AS 2758 Pt.1 - Course aggregate shall be crushed granite or diorite, clean and free from all impurities and dust in

accordance with AS 1141 and AS 2758 Pt.1 - The maximum particle size shall not exceed 20mm. Sand - Sand for mortar shall be crushed stone or natural sand free from all deleterious substances and

have uniform grading. - Sand for bedding or backfilling shall be clean and free from roots, clay or any deleterious matter in

accordance with the requirements of 0222 Earthworks. Water - Water for use in concrete and mortar shall be of potable quality free from any impurities harmful to

concrete, mortar or steel.



7.4 RETAINING WALL – WALL CONSTRUCTION Foundations - Walls constructed of mass blocks shall be founded on a compacted base of clean sand fill in

accordance with the requirements of 0222 Earthworks. - Where foundation is bedded in rock the base of the wall shall be prepare by placing mortar and

suitably sized stone to form a level pad. Footings shall be stepped on sloping ground. Blocks for Walls - Blocks for walls shall be in accordance with Clause 8.3 (a). - The size of surface blocks is to retain consistent throughout the job and no rubble to be used. - All blocks forming the face of all retaining walls are to be laid integrally with the rising of the wall. No

blocks are to be applied as a facing to the retaining wall. Backfilling Walls - Backfilling behind the retaining walls is to proceed in accordance with the requirements of section

"Clearing and Earthworks" of this specification. - In addition to these requirements, the height of any retaining wall must not be raised more 1.0m

above the level of backfill which is to be introduced and compacted in layers progressively as the wall is constructed, as specified elsewhere.

Pipe Penetration and Ducts - The Contractor shall install all pipe ducts as nominated on the drawings. - Pipe materials unless noted otherwise shall generally be PVC pipe ducts, solvent jointed over

contract colour pipe cleaning preparation fluid. Mortar Joints - Mortar joints (perpendicular and horizontal) shall consist of a mixture of clean sand, lime and

Portland cement as specified below:- . 1 part cement . 1 part lime . 3 parts sand . All joints shall be fully mortared throughout the entire wall construction.

- Finished joints shall be finished flush with the surface of the wall of where bevelled blocks are utilised shall be flush with the recessed bevelled edge and shall match in colour the block material used.

- Other finishes may be selected by the Principal at his discretion and wall finishes shall be approved by the Architect prior to the commencement of works.

Vertical expansion joints - Vertical joints shall be provided generally at intervals as indicated on the Drawings, or as nominated

on wall elevations. Otherwise, 20mm wide vertical joints shall be provided at 20 meter centres. Joints shall be sealed with a flexible, UV resistant mastic on a backing rod. Colour strictly to the Architect’s selection.

Mortar Mixing - Where the mortar is used in large quantities, a mixer of approved type shall be used. In hand

mixing, materials shall be thoroughly mixed on a boarded platform. Mortars shall be mixed only for immediate use and any mortar that has once set or in any way deteriorated shall not be used.

Drainage - 50 dia PVC-U weep holes shall be provided through the cross section of the wall at centres

nominated on the Drawings, where the wall is founded in rock, capstone or less than 600mm of sand. A continuous, blue metal aggregate drain at the back of wall connecting to upstream end of weep holes shall be provided at the height nominated on the Drawings for the full length of the wall.

7.5 RETAINING WALL – TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION DRAINAGE - The Contractor shall provide and maintain slopes, crowns and ditches on all excavated and filled

areas to ensure satisfactory drainage at all times during the construction period. - During wet weather conditions the Contractor shall, at his own expense, provide cut off drains along

the high side of the embankments and shall maintain sufficient drainage of both fill and cut to



prevent ponding and scour. All softened material shall be removed before proceeding with further filling of excavation.

7.6 RETAINING WALL – MAINTAINING ACCESS AND SECURITY Where indicated on the drawings, the Contractor shall note that several residences and existing facilities are located adjacent to and within the development. Services and access are to be maintained to these properties, where such access traverses work site.

7.7 RETAINING WALL – CLEANING UP - On completion, the whole work shall be cleared and all debris etc shall be removed to render the

entire job neat and tidy. - Remove all rubbish and debris from construction activities and leave the site tidy.

7.8 RETAINING WALL – CERTIFICATION OF RETAINING WALLS The Contractor shall be responsible for the Certification of the Limestone Retaining Walls being as Constructed in accordance with the contract documents and shall be responsible for the appointment of a practicing Structural Engineer to provide letter of certification for the As Constructed limestone retaining walls at practical completion.

8 LIMESTONE WALLS ANTI-GRAFFITI COATING

8.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall allow to provide an anti-graffiti protection treatment system to all exposed surfaces of retaining walls. Anti-graffiti protection treatment shall be non-sacrificial and approved by the superintendent prior to application. - Non-Sacrificial Anti-Graffiti Coatings shall indicate those coatings intended to be resistant to graffiti

removers. - All coatings and treatments shall be applied in accordance with good painting practice and in

accordance with the manufacturer’s published recommendations. - The selected anti-graffiti coating system used shall carry a guaranteed “Graffiti Removal” life of not

less than 10 years from the date of application for non-sacrificial coating. - The system shall be non-yellowing & UV resistant for the guaranteed life of the coating system.

8.2 SURFACE PREPARATION - The surface to be treated shall be prepared in accordance with AS/NZS 2311 and the

manufacturer’s published recommendation for the anti-graffiti coating system. - All dust, dirt, grease and oil contaminants, including remnants of curing membranes, and any other

surface contaminants shall be removed by non-destructive means followed by water washing. - Where a clear anti-graffiti coating system is specified, the substrate shall be free of all graffiti, graffiti

shadows, paint or any other surface contaminants which would be visible through the coating unless the substrate or steel work is intentionally painted.

- Where shadows of previously removed graffiti are likely to be clearly visible through a coating, the Contractor shall advise the Superintendent prior to the application of the anti-graffiti coating system.

- Some of the smoother concrete surface may require whip blasting with a fine grade garnet or surface etching with an approved acid wash followed by a water wash in order to provide adequate adhesion of the coating system. Whip blasting operations shall be carried out in accordance with the appropriate regulations.

- Excess materials shall be disposed of to the Contractor’s spoil site.

8.3 APPLICATION - Anti-graffiti coatings shall be applied in accordance with the Manufacturer’s publish

recommendations and AS/NZS 2311. - Anti-graffiti coating shall NOT be applied under the following conditions: . the site of work is exposed to a wind speed exceeding 20km/hr; . where wind borne debris may contaminate the uncured surface of the freshly applied coating; . when the ambient temperature exceeds 35 C or is below 15 C;



. when the relative humidity exceeds 85%;

. when there is any chance of rain spatter, or run off, including leakage through deck joints, contaminating the surface and adversely affecting the adhesion to the substrate;

. where the surface temperature of the substrate is less than 3 C above the dew point or exceeds 40 C; or

. where the substrate surface is wet or damp.

02 SITE, URBAN AND OPEN SPACES 0222 Earthwork

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 10 SECTION 02220 EARTHWORK

0222 EARTHWORK

1 CLEARING & EARTHWORKS

1.1 SCOPE The work of this section comprises but is not limited to excavation, disposal of surplus excavated material both on and off the site, supply of compaction and filling material and the preparation necessary to bring the areas to correct shape and level prior to building construction and as follows: - Site management - Site preparation - Supply and installation of waterproofing membrane - Termite Treatment - Temporary site fence

1.2 STANDARDS Standards The work shall comply with relevant current Australian Standards including but not limited to the following: - AS 1289 Methods of testing soils for engineering purposes. - AS 2159 2009 Piling - Design and installation. Plus 1 Amdt, 2010. - AS 3660 Termite management. . 3660.1 2000 New building work. . There are 2 other parts, 2000.

- AS 3798 2007 Guidelines on earthworks for commercial and residential developments. - AS/NZS 4200 Pliable building membranes and underlays. . 4200.1 1994 Materials. Plus 1 Amdt, 1994. . 4200.2 1994 Installation requirements.

- AS 4687 2007 Temporary fencing and hoardings. Comply with particular specifications in building regulations and/or local council publications.

1.3 DEFINITIONS - Common Material - is defined as any material which can be excavated by any excavation equipment

up to and including a 20 tonne excavator at a rate of 50 bank m3/ hour. - Excavation in Soft Rock - Soft rock shall be defined as rock that cannot be excavated with a 20

tonne excavator with a G.P bucket at a rate of 50m3 per hour and requires the use of a rock bucket and/or single tine ripper.

- Excavation in Hard Rock - Hard rock shall be defined as rock that cannot be excavated with a 20 tonne excavator using single tine ripper and rock bucket and therefore requires use of an excavator with a hydraulic rock breaker.

- Sub-grade: the natural ground below the excavations. - Filling: a general term for material spread and compacted over the sub-grade to make up finished

levels or levels to the under-side of the base. - Sub-base: selected filling spread and compacted over the sub-grade to make up levels to the

underside of the base. - Base: a selected filling layer spread and compacted to form an acceptable working surface directly

under the building. - Water – Any flow or seepage, either underground or overland from any source including but not

limited to rainfall, precipitation, ground water, perched ground water. - Comply with particular specifications in Building regulations and/or Local Council publications.



1.4 CERTIFICATION The builder is to engage and pay for a suitably qualified NATA approved laboratory approved by the Architect to instruct on and certify the following: - Compaction of sand pad to building envelope and pavements. - Compaction under all footings and covered areas. - Confirm fill and natural ground have been compacted to specification requirements.

1.5 PROVISIONAL DEPTHS Actual depths on the site shall be to the approval of the Architect. If there have been variations to the Contract levels or dimensions of excavations, do not commence back filling or place permanent work in excavations until the Architect has made measurements and approved them.

1.6 GROUND CONDITION DISCREPANCIES - 'Discrepancy' for the purposes of this Section means a difference between Contract information

about the site and conditions encountered on the site, including but not limited to discrepancies concerning: . The nature or quantity of the material to be excavated or placed, . Existing site levels, . Services or other obstructions beneath the site surface.

- If the Contractor considers that he has discovered a discrepancy, they shall notify the Architect immediately, and obtain a determination before proceeding with the Works, otherwise no claim for extra cost shall exist.

- Differing ground conditions during ground works can be encountered, in formation type and / or density. Should ground conditions encountered differ to Contract Information and not respond to remediation techniques to achieve the required performance criteria, the Contractor shall in the first instance consult their engaged Geotechnical Engineer. All remediation shall be to the approval of the Superintendent at all times prior to beginning works.

- The site investigation information provided in the geotechnical report, shown on the drawings or both, is information on the nature of the sub-surface conditions at each tested location of the site at the time of inspection. It is not a complete description of conditions existing below the surface. The accuracy of the information is not guaranteed and will not be a basis for cost variation.

- The Contractor shall submit, independent of the tendered amount, rates per cubic metre for excavation in common material and in subgrade materials. The rates shall be used for payment for work which may be required as an extension of the contract and ordered by the Architect in writing.

- The material classification shall be agreed on site at the time of excavation by the Contractor and the Architect and payment shall be made on quantities determined by field measurement.

- Should the Architect and the Contractor fail to agree on the assessment of quantities the Architect will calculate the quantity and payment will be made accordingly.

- All cubic metre rates provided shall include excavation, removal from site & disposal of materials. - Any material that becomes saturated and softens during excavations or general ground works and

changes consistency, workability, plasticity, ‘compactibility’ from increased moisture content or exposed to ponding will not be treated as a ground condition discrepancy. Removal and replacement of this material will not attract a variation.

1.7 NATURE OF EXCAVATION A geotechnical report has been carried out on the site by ATC Williams, report number 116196-01LR01. A copy is available for review at the architect's office. The following is an excerpt from the report: Summary of Site Conditions The ground conditions expected to be encountered is:



- Topsoil - medium dense, fine and medium, brown sand with grass roots, to a depth of between 0.05m and 0.1m.

- Sand - dense, fine and medium, light grey sand below the topsoil to the full depth of exploration. - Groundwater was not encountered during the investigation. Site Preparation & Construction Considerations The entire site needs to be cleared of trees and stripped of grass, grass roots, topsoil and any other unsuitable material, and removed from site. The sand encountered below the topsoil is considered suitable as fill provided that any tree roots and other unsuitable materials are removed. All cut areas and exposed subgrade should be proof compacted, on completion of excavation and prior to fill placement

1.8 ROCK The geotechnical report has not identified rock on site. Should rock exists on site and unless specified to the contrary the Contractor shall include in his Tender Price an amount for excavation in rock. It will be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that the amount tendered allows for excavation in rock of varying hardness and depth for the entire works. The contractor shall include all but excavation in Hard Rock in their tender price. Where rock is encountered below road pavements or building foundations, such material shall be removed to a depth of 100mm minimum below the design subgrade level and the area filled as specified. In addition, the Contractor shall submit to the Superintendent independent of the tendered amount, rates per cubic metre for excavation in common material and in rock based on the definitions in section 1.3: - Common Material. - Excavation in Soft Rock. - Excavation in Hard Rock. The rates shall be used for payment for work which may be required as an extension of the contract and ordered by the Architect in writing. The material classification shall be agreed on site at the time of excavation by the Contractor and the Architect and payment shall be made on quantities determined by field measurement. Should the Architect and the Contractor fail to agree on the assessment of quantity of rock the Architect will calculate the quantity and payment will be made accordingly.

1.9 EXPLOSIVES Do not use explosives in groundworks.

1.10 TOLERANCES Finish groundworks to reasonably smooth and uniform surfaces conforming to the tolerances per section 2.4 of 0221 Civil Works:

1.11 SITE MANAGEMENT General - Seek approval from the Local Authorities for all works and site access beyond of the site boundaries

prior to commencing work on site. The builder shall ensure that existing roads are protected from damage. If damage does occur, the builder shall reinstate to a like new state without cost to the client.

Dust Control - The builder is advised that this site has a classification. The builder is responsible for maintaining

dust control on the site at all times during the works. Dust control measures must comply with EPA and City of Rockingham requirements.

- If the Contractor complies with the previously mentioned dust control measures and dust problems persist then further measures will be adopted (wind fencing, hydromulch, etc). The Contractor shall at all times however be responsible for implementing the necessary measures to prevent sand or dust drift and shall be liable for damages as a result of sand or dust drift.



- To avoid dust nuisance to adjacent owners the Architect may direct that no earthworks, including stripping or replacing of topsoil, shall be carried out when a wind is blowing towards surrounding properties and in the opinion of the Architect will cause sand drift or dust to reach those properties.

Inspection Give the Architect at least two working days’ notice that the following are ready for inspection: - rock encountered in the excavations - excavation completed to Contract levels - filling completed to Contract levels - completed sub-base - completed placement of waterproof membrane

1.12 TESTING - Obtain the tests specified from an independent NATA approved testing authority. Do not proceed

with work subject to testing until tests are satisfactorily completed and the approval of the Superintendent has been given.

- Perth Sand Penetrometers (PSP) are not able to accurately measure the compaction in soils which contain limestone, buried cobbles or boulders. Should the contractor elect to use a PSP for construction testing in sandy areas the following guidelines shall be followed: . The PSP shall be calibrated for the sand type. . Topsoil shall not be tested with a PSP. . Where limestone, cobbles, boulders or the like exist at the test site, if these particles are greater

than 5mm diameter, a PSP shall not be used for compaction testing . Where the test site has not been disturbed by earthworks and the insitu material is lightly

cemented in the form of a weak limestone, a PSP shall not be used for compaction testing. - Compaction (density): Test for compliance with the specified criteria. - Field dry density: To AS 1289 Method 5.8.1. - Density index: To AS 1289 Method 5.6.1. - Standard maximum dry density: To AS 1289 Method 5.1.1 or 5.2.1. - Filling: Sample to AS 1141.3 and AS 1726 and test to AS 1141 or AS 1289, as appropriate, for

compliance with the criteria specified. - California bearing ratio: Sample and test to AS 1289 Method 6.1.1, 6.1.2, or 6.1.3, as appropriate.

1.13 SITE CLEARING Before commencement of clearing refer to all drawings and specification for areas beyond the buildings, roads and carpark to be cleared for landscaping works. General Clearing Unless otherwise shown on drawings remove all vegetation from the Site surface, including rubbish, organic debris, scrub, timber, stumps, boulders, rubble, and the like. Dispose off site at an approved disposal facility. Remove all vegetation down to the bottom of the root zone including tree stumps and other debris and all organic topsoil and surficial fill. The removal of topsoil as specified is to occur, but not limited to all areas under paving and any areas to be filled. This is required to allow free drainage through soakage to the water table. Only the trees specifically designated on the drawings are to be removed. No other trees are to be removed with our written instruction from the Architect. All trees in the road reserve shall be maintained & protected at all times. Grubbing Grub out stumps and roots over 75 mm diameter to a minimum depth of 500 mm below subgrade under buildings or paving, or 300 mm below finished surface in unpaved areas.

1.14 DE-WATERING - Keep groundworks free of water. Place construction, including masonry, concrete, services and the

like, on ground from which water has been removed. Prevent water flow over freshly laid work.



- When excavations or trenching is below water table, keep water from excavations by pumping or other suitable means and provide adequate means for disposing of water to Local Authority & EPA requirements.

- Maintain all natural soil in a dry condition. Shape and batter ground to fall away from buildings. Dispose of surface water where clay or clayey soils are exposed during the works. The builder shall take all necessary measured to protected the site and prevent softening of the soils due to water ponding including, but not limited to the provision of blue metal drains, sumps, pumping and grading away of the surface to ensure falls away from area of works.

1.15 EXISTING SERVICES - All works shall be carried out in accordance with proprietary service provider standard procedures

when working near or adjacent services in the road reserve. - Do not excavate by machine within 1m of existing underground services without prior approval - The builder must locate all existing services. Protect or Relocate as required referring to services

drawings.

1.16 SPOIL - Remove from the site, including debris, tree stumps and the like resulting from site clearance.

Dispose off-site at an approved disposal facility. - The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safe and harmless disposal of surplus excavated

material. Do not burn without permission.

1.17 SUPPORTING EXCAVATIONS - Support sides of excavations as necessary to ensure safe working. The builder is responsible for all

temporary retaining structures required for construction of the footings and other in ground structures.

- If, in the opinion of the architect any support provided is insufficient, he may order the provision of additional support fully at the cost of the contractor. No such instruction shall relieve the Contractor of sole responsibility for the sufficient support of the excavations.

- Remove temporary supports progressively as backfilling proceeds, unless otherwise instructed.

1.18 SITE RESTORATION Unless otherwise specified, restore the developed and undeveloped ground surfaces of the site to the condition existing at the commencement of the work under the Contract.

1.19 SUBGRADE PREPARATION Unless otherwise instructed by the Superintendent, all subgrades shall be proof compacted by rolling the surface with modern, efficient, heavy duty vibration compaction plant that shall provide uniform compaction across the subgrade area. The Contractor is responsible for the correct selection of plant based on the expected ground conditions, however generally, the type of plant required is: Gravels & sands without surface boulders - Smooth Drum Roller Clay & Clayey materials - Pad Foot Roller Subgrade compaction shall proceed in an orderly fashion at constant speed to ensure the whole site has been given a single pass, without the addition of surface watering. Under no circumstances shall the initial pass speed be less than that recommended by the plant manufacturer for efficient compaction. Should any subgrade be shown to be weak or deform under compactive effort, cease compaction to these zones and these area shall be marked for further inspection. Subsequent passes shall be carried out except where any non-uniform conditions are encountered. Non-uniform ground conditions revealed by proof compaction as not improving with compaction shall be the subject of further investigation. The Contractor shall provide all labour and machinery required to conduct further investigation. Once it has been confirmed on site that subgrade areas are not responding to compactive effort or deforming, the contractor shall initially advise the Superintendent in writing that a discrepancy has been encountered, in accordance with section 1.6 Ground Condition Discrepancies. Should no notification be provided prior to proceeding with any remediation works, no claim for extra cost shall exist. Additional passes may be necessary over non-uniform conditions or where deformations occur.



In accordance with section 1.6 Ground Condition Discrepancies, following notification to the Superintendent, the Contractor shall in the first instance consult their engaged Geotechnical Engineer on advise on how to proceed. All remediation shall be to the approval of the Superintendent at all times prior to beginning remediation works. Should the material be inconsistent and of variable quality, the Contractor shall consult with their engaged Geotechnical Engineer to establish an appropriate method of compaction. Following initial passes and provision of a consistent subgrade across the site, the moisture content of the subgrade shall be controlled to be within 90%-110% of the optimum moisture content for that material. The material shall be lightly water or dried as required to maintain the moisture content. The completed subgrade profile shall be in a homogeneous, uniformly bonded condition with no evidence of layering or disintegration.

1.20 FILLING MATERIAL Bring filling on to the site unless it can be provided from spoil recovered from site. Filling shall be sound material, free of organic or perishable material, or material that will form stable fill, but subject always to Architect’s approval. Filling shall be of the following types: - Approved Excavated Material: The best of the clean inorganic excavated material, approved by the

Architect. - Approved Imported General Fill Material: Clean, well graded, compactable granular sand fill, with

less than 5% fines approved by the geotechnical engineer. Fill must be evenly graded to allow for free draining of stormwater.

Clay soils shall not be used in fill.

1.21 EXCAVATIONS - Excavate as required or as shown on the Drawings, including but not necessarily limited to the

following: . Site Surface : Excavate over the site to give correct levels and profiles as the basis for

construction, paving, filling, landscaping and the like. Make allowance for compaction or settlement.

. Footings : Excavate for footings, pits, wells, shafts and the like, to the required sizes and depths.

. Where footings overlay rock, ensure this rock material is removed to a depth of 600mm below the underside of footing and replaced with fill material compacted to the standard specified below.

. Services : Excavate for underground services as specified in service trenches. - No excavation is to be carried out closer to an existing footing than a line extending down from its

bottom edge at 45 degrees. - Suspend ground works during inclement weather, which would result in unsatisfactory work.

1.22 GRADING Grade the site as shown and to give falls away from the building, minimum 1:100 unless otherwise shown.

1.23 BEARING SURFACES - Provide even plane bearing surfaces for loadbearing elements including footings and the like. Step

as necessary, or as shown on the Drawings, to accommodate level changes. Make the steps to the appropriate courses if supporting masonry (e.g. brickwork, blockwork).

- If the bearing surface deteriorates after approval because of water or other cause, excavate further to a sound surface before placing the loadbearing element, without extra charge if the deterioration has resulted from the Contractor's actions or failure to act.

1.24 EXCESS EXCAVATION The Contractor shall not be entitled to contract variation or extension of time for excavation in excess of that required by the Contract, including excavation below required depths, or additional excavation which the Contractor may elect to undertake to permit the use of certain constructional plant, and any consequent additional backfilling, compacting or testing.



1.25 REINSTATEMENT Where excavation exceeds the required depths, whether as a result of instructions given by the Superintendent, excess excavation by the Contractor as defined in section 1.24 EXCESS EXCAVATION, or the discovery of voids, fissures and the like, reinstate to the correct depth and required bearing value by filling with approved granular material compacted to the compaction density specified for the area per section 2.3 Material Testing Schedule of specification 0221 Civil Works. Prior to the back-filling of a void created from the excavation of any unsuitable material, the Contractor shall give the Superintendent at least 48 hours’ notice of if a digital ground survey is necessary, for the purpose of accurate measurement of material removal.

1.26 PREPARATION FOR FILLING Generally Suitably prepare the ground surface to receive filling. Under Slabs or Paving Water and roll the subgrade to achieve the densities stated for these locations in dry density ratio.

1.27 PLACING FILLING - Place and compact filling to the dimensions, levels, grades and cross section as required by or as

shown on the Drawings, and so that the surface is constantly self draining. - Place filling in layers not exceeding the thickness stated below when measured loose, and compact

each layer as specified in COMPACTION. The thickness of layers shall be chosen to suit the compaction equipment and method.

- Maximum layer thickness: granular material 300mm. - Do not place filling against concrete or masonry until the concrete has been in place for fourteen

days, unless otherwise approved. - Any obviously loose, wet or otherwise unsuitable material should be removed but not replaced from

the base of the excavation. - Trim the sub grade surface evenly to the levels shown on the Drawings. - Make allowance for settlement and compaction. - Allow for falls in pavements on grade to street and access road crossovers. - Prepare for underground services. - Carry out additional excavation where necessary to permit full use of suitable mechanical equipment

(e.g. rippers) and back fill with appropriate material as specified in this Section. - Where excavation exceeds the required depth, fill back to correct depth with material as follows: . In service trenches: 1:2:4 concrete or approved compacted pipe bedding material.

1.28 COMPACTION - Compact each layer of filling to the specified density index. - Compact to achieve a dry density ratio per section 2.3 of 0221 Civil Works. . not less than 1.5m below the proposed strip and pad footing levels; . not less than 0.5m below the proposed floor slab, pavement areas and parts of the site to be

filled. - Protect the works during compaction from damage by compaction operations. Compact by hand if

necessary to prevent damage or disturbance to services, pipe joints, and the like. - Prior to and during placing, bring the materials to within 2% of the optimum moisture content

determined to AS 1289 5.1.1 for the filling type. The surface may be lightly sprinkled with water during compaction if necessary to replace moisture loss.

- Compaction shall be obtained by passing a plate compactor as many times as necessary and having a zone of influence of sufficient depth to achieve the required results.

- The degree and uniformity of compaction shall be tested by use of a standard penetrometer calibrated for Perth sand.

- For Perth sand and sand of a similar nature the contractor shall best the degree of compaction using a Perth Sand (16mm diameter tip, 9kg falling weight) penetrometer in accordance with AS1289 6.3.3.



- For sand of a different nature to Perth sand the Contractor must carry out penetrometer tests in accordance with AS.1289.6.3.3 using a penetrometer calibrated by a soil testing laboratory. This calibration will be the accepted criterion for ensuring that the specified density is achieved. The cost of calibrating the penetrometer shall be borne by the Contractor.

- The Contractor shall arrange for all tests including penetrometer tests to be carried out by an approved testing laboratory registered with NATA. The Contractor shall allow for all costs.

- The tests shall be carried out in the zone between 0mm and 1500mm below foundation level and below the base level of any excavations. The frequency of testing shall be . under pad footings: 1 test per pad . under strip footings: 1 test per 3m length . under slabs and paved areas: On 5 x 5 grid

- An acceptable degree of compaction as measured by the penetrometer shall be:

Testing Depth Below Ground Surface at Time of Testing (m) Required Blows per 300 mm Penetration

0 – 0.45 8

0.45 – 0.90 10

0.90 – 1.50 14 - Under pad footings, strip footing, slabs and paved areas. - Compaction result certificates shall be sent to the consulting structural engineer prior to seeking

permission to pour footings and slabs. - Do not compact backfilling to retaining walls until they are a minimum of 14 days old and material on

the low side of the wall has been compacted. - Keep heavy vibrating equipment as far back from the wall as the height of the backfill on which it is

operating. Use only small compaction immediately behind retaining walls. - *Under buildings includes 1000 beyond 'lines of influence'.

1.29 PROTECTION TO MEMBRANES Protect waterproofing, vapour barrier, or tanking membranes from damage by subsequent operations including backfilling and the like.

1.30 SERVICE TRENCHES - Excavate to the lines, levels and grades as required for underground services specified in the

relevant services sections, including drainage, hydraulic, electrical and the like. Unless otherwise specified make the trenches straight between manholes, inspection points, junctions and the like, with vertical sides and uniform grades.

- Excavate trenches in sections of suitable length, lay and bed the relevant service length, and backfill the trench section, with the minimum of delay, and if possible on the same working day, unless otherwise specified or permitted.

- Subject to regulatory authority requirements, keep trench widths to the minimum consistent with the laying and bedding of the relevant service, and the construction of manholes and pits.

- Trench depth to be as required by the relevant service and its bedding method. - Cut back roots encountered in trenches to not less than 600mm clear of the relevant service.

Remove such other obstructions including roots, stumps, boulders and the like which may, in the opinion of the Principal, interfere with the proper functioning of the service.

- Laying and bedding services to be in accordance with the relevant services section.

1.31 BACKFILLING SERVICE TRENCHES - Backfill service trenches as soon as possible after approval of laid and bedded service, generally as

specified in placing filling. Compact as specified in compaction to the compaction density which applies to the location of the service trench.

- Pipe trenches to be compacted so that the pipe is buttressed by the walls of the trench.



- Unless otherwise specified, backfill with general filling, with no stones retained on a 25mm sieve occurring within 150 mm of the service. For materials other than the above as cover or backfilling to particular services, refer to the relevant services Sections.

- Where service excavations occur in topsoil areas, complete the backfilling with topsoil. - All backfilling to Service Trenches shall be placed in layers and compacted as under: . Pipe Bedding: 150mm layers, 95% MMDD . Pipe Surround: 150mm layers, hand tamped with 9kg minimum weight tampers . Trench Under Pavements: 250mm layers, 98% MMDD compaction as previously specified . Trench Under Buildings: 250mm layers, 98% MMDD compaction as previously specified . Other Trenches: 500mm layers, equal or better than adjacent in situ material

- Backfill Material: Backfill with general filling, with no stones larger than 25mm occurring within 150mm of the service.

- Topsoil: Where service excavations occur in topsoil areas, complete with the backfilling with topsoil.

1.32 STABILISATION Prior to stabilisation, all areas to be treated shall be graded so as to present a smooth even surface on completion of the stabilisation application. Vehicle and pedestrian movement along the treated areas shall be avoided to reduce failures as a result of erosion.

1.33 TERMITE TREATMENT Provide certification in accordance with AS 3660, stating method of application and certificate of completion. Refer to termite work section of the specification.

1.34 WATER PROOF MEMBRANE - Provide approved flexible polymeric film 0.2mm thick to the Architect’s specification. Deliver

underlays to the site in suitable protective packaging, bearing the name of the manufacturer. Handle and store the underlay so that it is not punctured, torn or otherwise damaged and in accordance with the manufacturers requirements.

- Lay on approved sand blinding. Where necessary, cut sheets to maximum practical width, to suit the layout, and arrange laps to face away from the direction of the pour.

- Provide laps as recommended by the manufacturer, but not less than 200mm. Seal laps with pressure adhesives or tapes as recommended by the manufacturer of the underlay and ensure that the adhered surface of the underlay is dry and clean.

- Take the underlay up walls to level of top of concrete slab or as otherwise documented and instructed. Seal service pipes and similar elements when they penetrate the underlay. Allow ample slack to avoid pulling at tape junctions.

- Cover vertical or inclined surfaces in an unbroken sheet where possible. Otherwise arrange laps vertically to avoid pulling at joints. Fix at the top with tape or other recommended fixing.

- Inspect membrane after laying and before concrete is poured. Patch and seal punctures.

1.35 TEMPORARY FENCING - Supply and install temporary 1800mm high continuous fence structure in the location nominated on

the site plan and as required to prevent public access to areas of work such as service installations throughout the campus.

- At practical completion the contractor shall remove the temporary fencing and leave the site in a clean, compacted and level state free of rubble and building material.

1.36 ADJOINING PROPERTIES - Carry out a comprehensive dilapidation survey of existing buildings, services and structures within

the vicinity of the works before proceeding with any excavations or filling or compaction like operations for the project.

- The survey shall include the recording by approved persons and approved means of the existing conditions of those properties in detail prior to the commencement of the works.



1.37 PROTECTION OF SITE & ADJACENT PROPERTIES - Carry out shoring or other forms of support, shielding, fencing or whatever protective and

precautionary measures are necessary to ensure the safety, freedom from interference, damage or injury to all adjacent public or private lands, properties, ways, services, personal property and all persons in the vicinity of the site.

- Unless shown on the drawings supporting of adjoining properties is not to be carried out without consultation with the Architect.

- It is recommended that non-vibratory compaction techniques be adopted within a distance of approximately 10m of any existing structures.

- Take all reasonable steps to minimise nuisance, especially from dust, debris, noise and obstructions arising from the works, and comply with all reasonable requests for the cessation of such nuisance.

02 SITE, URBAN AND OPEN SPACES 0224 Stormwater Drainage

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 4 SECTION 02240 STORWATER DRAINAGE

0224 STORMWATER DRAINAGE

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement: Provide stormwater drainage, as documented.

2 STORMWATER DRAINAGE

2.1 EXCAVATION - The Contractor shall excavate pipe trenches to the lines, levels, grades and widths shown or

specified on the Drawings, and in the Specification. Where necessary the trench shall be widened and/or deepened to facilitate the making of joints, casing pipes with concrete and/or to accommodate timbering while still maintaining the clearances specified between the timbering and the pipes.

- The Contractor shall establish prior to commencing excavation whether or not other services exist in the path of or parallel to excavation. In the event of existence of any such services the contractor shall take every care not to damage such services. Any damage caused shall be made good at the entire cost of the Contractor.

- Open cut excavation of trenches will be an acceptable alternative to timbered trenches, provided the following requirements are complied with: . The widths of open cutting shall be the absolute minimum practical and necessary for

construction procedures; . Backfilling over the whole width shall be carried out as provided in this specification; . The trench width for the first one metre depth (or pipe diameter plus 300mm whichever greater)

shall be confined to the specified widths; and, . Where indicated on the drawing or ordered by the Architect, the trench shall be timbered to

protect adjacent works or trees. Damage to adjacent works, whether or not the Architect has given directions in this regard, shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.

- The maximum width of trench shall be the diameter plus 225 mm clearance on each side, subject to a minimum width of 850 mm.

- The Contractor shall maintain the works area in a suitable dry condition in order that each and every part of the works may be constructed to a high standard and for the protection of the works against damage due to water.

- During the construction of the Works the Contractor shall, at the cost of the Contractor, take every precaution necessary and provide all plant, materials and labour required for the effective diversion and removal of surface and sub surface water from the works.

- Trenches in which the bottom is likely to be adversely affected by rain or seepage shall have the last 150 mm of excavation removed as a separate operation immediately prior to the laying of the pipes or placing of bedding material. Such measures shall be carried out at the Contractor’s expense.

- If pipe trench is excavated deeper than required, the extra depths shall be filled with 1:3:6 cement concrete or other approved material compacted to a density exceeding the natural surrounding ground.

- Spoil from excavation shall be kept at least one metre from the edge of excavation. - The Contractor shall take whatever measures necessary to prevent the spoils of excavation from

being carried away by water or wind from the site. - Excavation in rock or hard soil will not be carried out be carried out by blasting.

2.2 PIPE BEDDING - Unless special bedding or pipe supports are shown on the Drawings or specified elsewhere, the

bedding material shall be clean sand. - One type of bedding support only shall be used along each length of line.



- Clean sand from the excavation may be used. The bed shall be carefully shaped to receive the pipes with grooves to receive the pipe sockets so that the barrel shall be uniform bearing along its length.

2.3 BACKFILLING - Initial backfilling shall be undertaken using selected fill, being defined as sand, gravel or other

approved granular materials free of all stones retained on a 25 mm sieve. - Initial backfilling at the sides and for 150 mm above the top of the pipe shall be hand tool placed and

compacted ensuring that no joints or pipes are disturbed or damage. Refer to Standard Drawings. - The joints shall be left fully exposed for inspection during testing. - No part of the works or any length of pipes or fittings shall be covered up until they have been

inspected and approved by the Architect. The Contractor may still be required to uncover and repair at the expense of the Contractor, during the period of maintenance, any unsatisfactory work.

- The material excavated from the trench may, subject to the approval of the Architect, be used for ordinary backfill, provided it is free of rocks and vegetable matter.

- The backfilled material shall be thoroughly rammed and consolidated in 150 mm layers with hand rammers weighing not less than 9 kg to a height of 600 mm above the top of the pipe, and thereafter in 250 mm layers with power rammers or in 150 mm layers with hand rammers. The compaction of the backfill shall be equal or better than the adjacent in situ material, except under roads and where indicated on the Drawings the compaction shall be equal to or 98% of the modified maximum dry density.

- Any deficiency found in backfill shall be made good by adding and compacting approved backfill material at the entire cost of the Contractor.

- After the trench has been filled in, the Contractor shall immediately restore the surfaces, other than in roads and driveways, to equal or better than their pre existing conditions.

- In roads and driveways, the Contractor shall immediately effect an interim restoration to a safe and reasonable condition for traffic. The Contractor shall make good any settlement, deterioration etc., as they occur.

- The permanent reinstatement of roads shall not be commenced until the Architect is satisfied that sufficient trench settlement has taken place. The materials used in permanent reinstatement of roads shall be identical to materials used in adjacent roadwork. The roads shall be restored to pre existing or improved standards ensuring a good match of restored and existing surfaces.

- The Contractor shall make good at the expense of the Contractor any subsidence or consolidation that occurs in the backfill and any damage caused by the subsidence before the end of the maintenance period.

2.4 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT - For payment purposes, the ground has been classified as common material, soft rock or hard rock.

Definitions of each are covered in the earthworks specification. No rock shall be paid for unless the amount has been measured and agreed by the Architect. For payment purposes, the trench width shall be prescribed minimum width applicable to the size of the pipe.

- Measurement of trench depths for the purpose of determining the appropriate scheduled rate for payment for excavation and refilling shall be made only at manholes, pits and head walls and the depth of the trench at intermediate points shall be allotted to the several depth groups on the assumption that the ground surface slopes uniformly between successive points of measurement.

- Work shall include all excavation, bedding, backfilling and compaction testing. Payment will be made only for completed work, i.e. after the trench has been tested, backfilled and consolidated and surplus spoil removed.

2.5 DRAINAGE Materials - Stormwater pipes shall be reinforced concrete, PVC-U up to 225 diameter manufactured to AS 1254

or polypropylene with SN8 equivalent grade as shown on the Drawings. - Reinforced concrete pipes shall be socketed, rubber ring jointed, manufactured and tested in

accordance with AS 4058 - 2007 and shall be 1, 2, 4 or 4 class as indicated on the Drawings.



- Polypropylene pipes – to comply with AS/NZS 5065-2005 - Polyethylene and Polypropylene pipes and fittings for drainage and sewerage applications.

2.6 PIPE LAYING - All pipes shall be laid to the lines levels and grades shown on the Drawings and shall be placed with

sockets uphill in a straight line between manholes (or gullies). - All dirt and foreign matter shall be removed from inside the pipe and the outside of the spigot and

the inside of the socket and spigots shall be fully homed into the sockets. - The barrels shall be uniformly bedded and supported throughout their length. The sockets of the

pipe shall be laid clear of the trench bed. - Concrete pipes with elliptical reinforcement shall be laid with the top uppermost.

2.7 MANHOLES AND GULLIES - Manholes and gullies shall be constructed as shown on the Drawings. - Manholes of a depth greater than 1.2 m shall be fitted with approved step irons. - Where constructed in roads, footpaths and driveways, all stormwater shall be finished flush with the

level and slope of the surrounding surface. Manholes located in the road carriageway or carparks shall be fitted with a “Gatic” or similar type heavy duty trafficable, cast iron frame and lid.

- Lids and grates shall be class D & cycle safe to AS 3996. - In wet ground or unstable trench bottom, the Contractor may be required to provide pile and keel

bearer footings for the manholes if directed by the Architect. - Gully surrounds shall have a broom type finish at the upper face to provide a key for prime bonding.

2.8 CULVERTS All drainage culvert crossings under roads, crossovers and at culvert entries and outfalls shall have approved, proprietary headwalls installed to suit the culvert size and type.

2.9 TESTING - It is the contractor’s responsibility to provide all materials for the completion of this project and to

provide verification that all materials comply with the requirements of this specification. In addition it is the contractor’s responsibility to undertake all necessary testing of, subgrade and trench backfill to ensure conformance with this specification for compaction, level, dryness, shape, finish etc.

- The costs for all testing shall be allowed for. - For the purposes of testing, the works shall be divided into sections referred herein as "portions".

The definition of a "portion" shall be that section between manholes, drainage structures or terminating end to a maximum length of 100m and to a maximum depth per test of 1.0m.

- All compaction testing for drainage in clean sand shall be undertaken by an approved NATA registered laboratory unless: . The Architect specifically permits otherwise or, . The specialist drainage contractor has an acknowledged Quality Assurance Accreditation

(recognised by the Architect) in which case a maximum of 90% of tests (using a Perth Sand Penetrometer only) may be undertaken by the contractor/subcontractor so long as a minimum of 10% of tests are undertaken by a NATA registered laboratory and the P.S.P. is calibrated for the site sand at the commencement of the works.

2.10 AS CONSTRUCTED - The Contractor is entirely responsible to undertake "As Constructed" survey for all stormwater

drainage installations. - Records shall include the lengths, alignments, chainage, diameters and invert levels of all pipes

entering access chambers or stormwater entry pits, and the lid levels of the of the access chambers or stormwater entry pits.

- Preliminary stormwater "As Constructed" information shall be maintained, progressively updated and available for review by the Superintendent on site. This shall be in the form of a “mark-up” of the current civil Drawings.



Measurements shall be taken while trenches and pipe are exposed, prior to backfill to record pipe depth and location of the pipe on site relative buildings, roads, cadastral boundaries or other relevant site features.

- Where works are completed in stages, the preliminary as-constructed “mark-up” plan with complete as-constructed information for the stage will be accepted however at the completion of the project, the final as-constructed Drawing will be required.

- Final As Constructed information shall be provided in accordance with the General Requirements work sections. Additionally, as-constructed locations of all soakwells, access chambers, gully pits and the like shall be accurately located by a licensed surveyor. A digital copy of the as-constructed location shall be provided to the Architect in Autocad dwg and pdf formats for client records.

- Under no circumstance will payment be made for works which have not received the Architects approval of the "As Constructed" information.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 02360 TERMITE CONTROL

SECTION 02360 TERMITE CONTROL

PART I GENERAL100 101 Scope

The work of this trade section includes but is not limited to the control and/or management of termites on building sites for both new and existing buildings. Note that this is a design and construct item and the contractor is to provide all coordination and complete the design for the selected system with provision of samples and shop drawings as well as the method statement. Obtain approval from the principal certifying authority prior to commencing work as to the adequacy of the proposed system and suitability for the intended use.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with each trade involved in the construction of the building, and in particular: Site Preparation

103 Quality Assurance Where specialist sub-contractors are engaged, provide formal documentary evidence of experience and skills which meet the requirements of the Australian Standards.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards which are requirements of the Building Code of Australia: AS 3660 Termite management.

3660.1 2014 New building work. 3660.2 2000 In and around existing buildings and structures. There is 1 other part, 2014.

AS 4349 Inspection of buildings. 4349.3 2010 Timber pest inspections. There are 2 other parts, 2007.

Comply with requirements of statutory and local authorities having jurisdiction.

105 Submissions Obtain a written statement, from each proposed sub-contractor tendering for the work, that the work to be performed will comply with the relevant Australian Standard.

106 Warranty Provide a written warranty from the sub-contractor stating the period of years of protection from termite damage. Provide also a written statement that the work performed complies 100% with the requirements of AS 3660.

PART II MATERIALS200

201 Acceptable Manufacturers HomeGuard

202 Materials Termite and Moisture Barrier, Damp Proof Course and Collars to form an integrated termite barrier system.

203 Equipment Provide equipment needed to effect a treatment which complies with the Australian Standards.

PART III EXECUTION300

301 Examination Visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to the drawings before delivery of materials to site. Rectify any discrepancy or unsuitability of substrata. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Coordination Arrange for cooperation of other trades to ensure effective pest control. Take care of materials. Prevent damage before and during installation.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 02360 TERMITE CONTROL

303 Preparation Coordinate with and ensure preparatory work by other trades is done prior to commencement of work and arrange for provision and fixing grounds.

304 Installation Comply with appropriate Australian Standard. Take care of and protect surrounding work, including other finishes, equipment and components, during installation. Provide protective covering where necessary.

305 Installation Particulars Comply in all respects with manufacturer’s recommendations contained in technical bulletins. Call for technical advice where necessary. Refer clause 105. Comply with occupational health, safety and environmental requirements of the statutory and local authority during the conduct of the works, including preparation of Safe Work Method Statement, training, instruction and supervision of involved workers.

306 Protection Protect finished work.

307 Cleaning Clean the site where work of this trade is performed. Remove surplus material.

308 Completion Complete contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the architect. Certify the completed system for compliance with statutory regulations and the Council Conditions of Approval. Hand over to the architect on completion.

END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 02780 MASONRY UNIT PAVERS

SECTION 02780 MASONRY UNIT PAVERS


General: supply and install the complete unit masonry paving to areas indicated, including but not limited to the following: A. Labour and materials. B. Plant and equipment. C. Cleaning. Surplus units: in addition to needed paving units, supply the following spare units for the proprietor's future use in the amendment to or repair of the paving:

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Site preparation – Excavation Sanitary sewerage Storm drainage Concrete pavement Lawns and grasses Exterior plants

103 Quality Assurance Provide assurance from the manufacturer that the paving units are of the nominated type and that they comply with: Approved samples: before commencing laying, arrange with the architect to designate a beginning section of paving as the control sample. Each section of at least 2 square metres in area which, when approved, becomes the control standard for remaining sections of the work. Include in each sample the required edge treatment of paved areas.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following publications, including, as appropriate, the Australian Standards to which they refer: AS 2876 2000 Concrete kerbs and channels (gutters) - Manually or machine placed. AS 3727 1993 Guide to residential pavements. AS/NZS 4455.2 2010 Masonry units, pavers, flags and segmental retaining wall units – Pavers and

flags. AS/NZS 4586 2013 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface material. Plus 1 Amdt,

2005.

105 Submissions Submissions required prior to delivery: A. Name of proposed manufacturer of pavers. B. 2 of each paver as described below. C. Evidence of payment of any relevant fees. D. Copies of minutes of pre-installation conference.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage

Deliver and handle materials on site and store in suitable, convenient locations to ensure no damage, deterioration or contamination.

PART II MATERIALS 201 Pavers

Pavers Concrete Pavers A Manufacturer Brikmakers Brikmakers Name Grandpave 60 Flagstone 60 Size 330 x 330 x 60mm (see clause 306) 330 x 165 x 60mm (see clause 306) Colour Refer Exterior Finishes Schedule Concrete Pavers B Manufacturer Brikmakers Name Twinpave 60 Size 220 x 110 x 60mm Colour Refer Exterior Finishes Schedule Concrete Tactile Pavers Manufacturer Brikmakers


Pavers Name Grandpave 60 Tactile (Allow for 18no. pavers – locations as directed on site) Size 330 x 330 x 60mm Colour Refer Exterior Finishes Schedule

202 Capping Layer, Sub-base and Roadbase/Basecourse Materials

Comply with: A. Capping layer:

Refer clause 104 above. B. Sub-base:

Refer clause 104 above. C. Roadbase:

Refer clause 104 above. D. Basecourse:

Refer clause 104 above.

203 Bedding Sand Comply with: Design manual.

204 Joint-Filling Sand Comply with: Design manual.

205 Edge Restraints 300 wide x 200 deep mass concrete.

PART III EXECUTION 301 Examination

Visit the site, inspect the conditions and compare them with the drawings. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Records Obtain essential services information (Dial Before You Dig).

303 Excavation Create the formation, maintain the sides and keep it free from water. Refer section 02315 SITE PREPARATION – EXCAVATION.

304 Edge Restraints Install 300 wide x 200 deep mass concrete edge restraint beam to all perimeter edges.

305 Base Construction Spread, roll and consolidate in layers to create the required base courses to the thicknesses shown. Refer to Section 0221 Civil Works for ground preparation for Paving Type B.

306 Bedding Sand Spread and treat to create a bedding sand course to the thickness shown.

307 Laying Pavers Lay to the patterns shown including needed trimming units at edges and against interruptions. Comply with instructions in selected publications referred to in clause 104. Paving Type A: Stretcher bond alternating two courses Grandpave 60 one course Flagstone 60. Boarder paving with one course Flagstone 60 Paving Type B: 45 degree herringbone bond.

308 Joint Filling and Vibrating Fill joints and vibrate to create an interlocked pavement.

309 Extra Stock Retain at the site 0.5% of each different type of paver. Place these on the site in a location nominated by the architect.


310 Completion Complete contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the architect. Clean up and remove broken units, plant and the like, leaving the whole pavement in first class condition to the satisfaction of the architect.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 03320 CONCRETE

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 12 SECTION 03320 CONCRETE

03320 CONCRETE 1. GENERAL 1.1 Scope The work required under this section includes the design, supply, fabrication, erection and stripping of form

work, the scheduling, supply, placing and supporting of reinforcement and the design supply, testing, placing, finishing and curing of concrete. It also includes the placing of embedded items and the supply and installation of waterstops and waterproofing.

1.2 Standards Materials and construction: To AS 3600. Formwork design and construction to AS3610. Concrete: To AS 1379. Reinforcement to AS/NZS 4671. Concrete structures for retaining liquids: To AS 3735.

1.3 Interpretations Definitions:

A. Hot weather: Surrounding outdoor shade temperature > 32oC. B. Contraction joint: An unreinforced joint with a bond-breaking coating separating the concrete joint

surfaces. C. Expansion joint: An unreinforced joint with the joint surfaces separated by a compressible filler. D. Control joint: A weakened plane contraction joint created by forming a groove, extending at least one

quarter the depth of the section, either by using a grooving tool, by sawing, or by inserting a premoulded strip.

E. Isolation joint: A joint without keying, dowelling, or reinforcement, which imposes no restraint on movement.

1.4 Inspection

A. Witness Points: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made of the following: 1. Base prepared for membrane installation.

2. Membrane or film underlay installed on the base. 3. Completed formwork, and reinforcement, cores and embedment’s fixed in place. 4. Shrinkage/Control Joint strengthening plates installed. 5. Commencement of concrete placing. 6. Surfaces or elements to be concealed in the final work before covering.

B. Rejection: Remove rejected concrete from the site. 1.5 Submissions Builder shall engage a qualified CPE to design all formwork. Formwork must comply to all requirements of

Work Safe WA. Builder to have calculations available for review by the Superintendent if requested. A. Tests:

1. Void formers: Submit test certificates to confirm that the formers comply with the following requirements, under laboratory conditions, when placed on damp sand and loaded with a mass of wet concrete at least the mass of the beams or slabs they are required to support: Deflection during placing and compaction of the concrete is less than the span of the beam or slab divided by 1000.

Additional deflection between initial set and 7 days does not exceed span/400. 2. Collapse and loss of load carrying capacity will occur not more than 48 hours after flooding with

water, creating a void at least 60% of the original depth of the void former. 3. Reinforcement: Certificate of compliance: Submit either the manufacturer's certificate of compliance

with the relevant standard, or an independent testing authority's test certificates demonstrating compliance.

B. Execution: 1. Builder must have all documentation available for review by the Superintendent on formwork

documentation and details of proposed form linings, form coatings, release agents and, where applicable, reuse of formwork.

2. Reshoring: If intended, submit proposals. 3. Surface repair method: Before commencing repairs, submit the proposed method. 4. Changes: Submit proposed changes, if any, in the reinforcement shown on the drawings, including

additional splicing.



5. Mechanical splices: If mechanical bar splices are proposed or required submit details and test certificates for each size and type of bar to be spliced.

6. Damaged galvanizing: If repair to AS 1650 Appendix F is intended, submit proposals. 1.6 Material Tests A. Material Tests Schedule

Material Test method Test frequency

Portland and blended cement (each type used)

To AS 3972

Fly ash To AS 3582.1

Ground slag To AS 3582.2

Admixtures (each type used) To AS 1478

Coarse aggregate:

Dense and lightweight: - Particle size analysis

To AS 1141.11 and AS 1141.12

- Particle density and water absorption

To AS 1141.6.1

- Particle shape To AS 1141.14

- LA value To AS 1141.23

- Soundness To AS 1141.24

- Potential reactivity To AS 1141 Section 39

Fine aggregate: - Particle size analysis To AS 1141.11

and AS 1141.12

- Bulk density and water absorption

To AS 1141.5

- Friable particles To AS 1141.32

- Organic impurities To AS 1141.34

- Soundness To AS 1141.24

- Light particles To AS 1141.31

- Sugar To AS 1141.35

- Potential reactivity To AS 1141 Section 39

B. Dissemination of production information: If concrete is manufactured off site, register the project in accordance with AS 1379 clause 6.4.3.

1.7 Concrete Tests A. Concrete Testing Methods 1. Sampling and testing: To AS 1012. Sample the concrete on site. 2. Test authority: NATA Approved Testing Laboratory B. Test Records

1. Records and reports: To AS 1012 C. Control Tests: Acceptance criteria 1. Average strength of all samples must exceed the required value.

2. Strength of any one sample must be at least 0.85 of the required value. D Control Test Requirements Schedule: for concrete strength requirements refer to structural drawings.

E Acceptance Testing: All concrete testing shall be carried out in all respects with the provisions of AS1012 and 1379 and AS3600, as currently amended and any relevant N.A.T.A. regulations currently in force.

Before any concreting is commenced, the Superintendent will ensure that any testing done by the Contractor will conform with these requirements. The Contractor shall pay the costs of all tests. The supply of testing equipment and suitable personnel to carry out the tests will be the responsibility of the Contractor. All test specimens are to be cured and broken



at an approved N.A.T.A. laboratory. All samples of concrete are to be obtained from a full flow of concrete at the truck discharge chute and shall be taken after 25% of the load and before 75% of the load has been discharged. Compression test samples shall be taken in accordance with AS1012 and 1379 and AS3600 at the frequency set out below:- 1 Truck - one sample 2 to 5 Trucks - two samples 6 to 10 Trucks - three samples 11 to 20 Trucks - four samples For each additional 10 Trucks, one additional sample shall be taken. Test samples shall in all cases be cylinders. Each sample shall consist of three test cylinder specimens. The Superintendent may order an increase in this rate of testing if considered necessary. One specimen shall be tested at seven (7) days while the other two shall be kept for testing at twenty-eight (28) days. The Contractor shall keep accurate records of all concrete tests made on site. Consistency (Slump Test) samples shall be taken at the rate of three samples from each load or separately sampled where discharge is extended over a period of thirty minutes or more all in accordance with AS1012 and 1379.

F. Embedded Pressure Pipes: 1. Leak tests: Before embedment, leak test pipes which will contain liquid or vapour at a pressure

> 10 kPa. 1.8 Cast in Items

A. Trim and Build in: Trim openings in the work as required. Build in all necessary plugs, bolts, ties and fastenings required by other trades. Build in bolts and fixings etc provided and set out by others. Every care shall be taken to do as little cutting as possible after pouring is completed.

B. Cast In: To all floors and concrete works, allow for holes as required for casting in electrical or plumbing pipes.

C. Brass Trim : Cast in as required all necessary brass edging to mat-sinking, weatherbars, thresholds and floor finishes.

D. Inspection of Pipes : No concrete floor slabs shall be poured until all plumbing, electrical and gas service pipes have been inspected and passed by the Superintendent and the appropriate Authority.

E. Fabricate shrinkage control joint plates as per the structural drawings and install in place. F. Install all cranes holding down bolts, cast in plates, junction boxes and conduits as shown on

structural, architectural, and services drawings as well as manufactures data sheets. G. Materials

1. General: Submit details of proposed sources of materials. 2. Foamed concrete: Submit details, including aggregate grading and mix proportions. 3. Curing compounds: If it is proposed to use a liquid membrane-forming curing compound submit the

following information: Certified test results for water retention to AS 3799 Appendix B. Evidence that an acceptable final surface colour will be obtained. Evidence of compatibility with applied finishes, if any. Methods of obtaining the required adhesion for toppings and render.

H. Ready Mixed Supply 1. Delivery docket: For each batch, submit a docket listing the information required by AS 1379, and

the following additional information: The concrete element or part of the works for which the concrete was ordered. The total amount of water added at the plant and the maximum amount permitted to be added at

the site. The amount of water, if any, added at the site.



2. FORMWORK 2.1 Formwork A. General

1. General: Design and construct formwork so that the concrete, when cast in the forms, will have the required dimensions, shape, profile, location and surface finish. Allow for dimensional changes, deflections and cambers resulting from the application of prestressing forces, applied loads, temperature changes and concrete shrinkage and creep. 2. Openings: In vertical forms provide form openings or removable panels for inspection and cleaning. 3. Cleaning: Remove free water, dust, debris and stains from the forms and the formed space before

placing concrete. B. Stripping of Forms : Forms shall not be disturbed until the concrete in contact with them has

hardened sufficiently to withstand such action without damage. In the absence of any specific direction by the Engineer, the following table shall be used in determining stripping times for concrete made with Portland cement Type 'A'. This table is based on construction loads not exceeding 100 kg per square metre.

Bottom Forms of Beams and Slabs

Average of Daily Minimum Temperatures

Vertical Surfaces

less than 3000 span

3000 to 5000 span

5000 to 7500 span

over 7500 span

Above 200C 2 days 7 days 12

days 14

days 28 days

10 - 200C 3 days 10 days 14 days

21 days

28 days

5 - 100C 5 days 14 days 21 days

28 days

28 days

Under 50C Special precautions shall be taken and stripping times lengthened.

The Builder may use the following aalltteerrnnaattiivvee to determine stripping times.

Forms shall not be stripped before the concrete supported by them has attained the strength designated in TTaabbllee AA. The strength of the concrete at stripping shall be taken as the average strength of 2 cylinders taken from the pour to be stripped. TABLE ‘A’ % of F’c (28 days value)

Proportion of Design Load on slab at stripping

1/4 1/2 3/4 1.0

Element Surface Span

Beams and Slabs

Horizontal 2000 and less 55 60 75 100

3000 and less 55 65 80 100 5000 and less 55 70 85 100 6000 and less 80 85 100 7500 and less 90 85 100 above 95 85 100

Removal of bottom forms between bearers or props, prior to the removal of supports may be permitted by the Engineer, provided the formwork has been designed to allow such removal without disturbance of the supports. The Builder shall provide sufficient tomming to ensure that the loading caused by green concrete floors, (not up to design strength F'c as shown on the drawings) formwork, building equipment and material is supported by such a number of concrete floors that no floor carries loads exceeding its capacity based on Table A. The number of floors to remain tommed will depend on the design dead and live loads of the floors, the pouring cycle and the rate at which the concrete gains its strength. Neither walls nor any permanent loading shall be erected on any part of the structure while it is still supported by formwork - unless approved by the Engineer. Reshoring: Do not reshore.

C. Release Agent : Before placing reinforcement, apply a release agent compatible with the contact surfaces, to the interior of the formwork, except where the concrete is to receive an applied finish for which there is no compatible release agent. Clean the reinforcement to remove all traces of release agent.



D. Defective Formwork : Remove rejected concrete, form construction joints, reconstruct the formwork and recast concrete.

E. Formwork Removal : Remove formwork, other than steel reinforcement decking, including formwork in concealed locations.

2.2 Dimensional Tolerances

Position: Construct formwork so that the position of finished concrete is within the tolerances stated in the Position tolerances table. Plumb of vertical elements: 1:1000 Position tolerances table

Formwork class to AS 3610 1 2 3 4

Maximum deviation from correct position (mm) +/- 2mm 10

15

20

25

2.3 Formed Surface Finish A. Visually Important Surfaces : For concrete of surface finish classes 1, 2 or 3, set out the formwork to

give a regular arrangement of panels, joints, bolt holes, and similar visible elements in the formed surface. Form 45o bevels, 25 mm on the face on corners and angles.

B. Formed Surfaces Schedule : Only approved type form hardware will be permitted and shall in general be of a type which precludes any ferrous material, i.e. wire etc. being exposed on the concrete surface after stripping. Where perforation of formwork is necessary for the passage of electrical conduits, ducts, etc., the contractor shall design the formwork to accommodate such perforations or sleeves.

Unless otherwise specified the minimum standard of finishes to formed concrete surfaces shall be as follows :

Concrete Element or Surface Formwork Class Colour Control

Normal Architectural work and surfaces not otherwise specified

2

Yes

Civil engineering works

3

Yes

Surfaces to be rendered or hidden by other finishes

4

No

Surfaces permanently concealed (eg. footings, rear faces of retaining walls

5

No

2.4 Form Tie Bolts A. Removable Bolts : Remove the bolts without causing damage to the concrete. B. Cover : Position formwork tie bolts left in the concrete so that the ties does not project into

the concrete cover. C. Bolt Hole Filling

1. General: Provide material matching the surface colour. 2. Recessed filling: Fill or plug the hole to 6 mm below the surface.

2.5 Lost Formwork Type: Permanent or lost formwork, chloride free, which will not impair the structural performance of the

concrete members. 2.6 Void Formers

Cast designated suspended ground floor slabs and beams on unwaxed cardboard or fibreboard void formers which are collapsible on absorption of moisture. Keep void formers dry until use, place them on a firm level surface, cover with a waterproof membrane, and place reinforcement and concrete with minimum delay.

3. MATERIALS 3.1 Polymeric Film Underlay

A. General : Under internal slabs on ground including integral ground beams and footings, provide a vapour barrier or, in areas prone to rising damp or salt attack, a damp-proofing membrane.



B. Standard : Vapour barriers and damp-proofing membranes: To AS 2870. C. Base Preparation : According to base type, as follows:

1. Graded stone base: Blind with sufficient sand to create a smooth surface free from hard projections. Wet the sand just before laying the underlay.

2. Concrete working base: Remove projections above the plane surface, and loose material. D. Installation : Lay over the base, lap joints at least 200 mm and seal the laps and penetrations with

waterproof adhesive tape. Face the laps away from the direction of concrete pour. Take the underlay up vertical faces as far as the damp proof course where applicable, and fix at the top by tape sealing. Locate vertical laps only on vertical or inclined surfaces. Patch or seal punctures or tears before pouring concrete.

3.2 Concrete Materials Cement shall be locally manufactured normal Portland cement, Type A complying with AS3972. Blended cement type SA is permissible only in accordance with Clause 4.1 and shall comply with AS3972.

3.3 Concrete A. Concrete Schedule : Refer to structural drawings for concrete strength & grade. B. Ready Mixed Supply

1. Method: Use the batch production process. Deliver in agitator trucks. 2. Admixtures: Do not provide admixtures containing significant chlorides. 3. Addition of water: Do not add water at the site. 4. Plastic cracking: Design the concrete mix to minimise plastic settlement and shrinkage cracking. C. Elapsed Delivery Time : Elapsed time between the wetting of the mix and the discharge of the mix at

the site must not exceed the criteria in the Elapsed delivery timetable. Elapsed Delivery Time Table

Concrete temperature at time of discharge (oC)

Maximum elapsed time (hours)

< 24 2.00

24 - 27 1.50

27 - 30 1.00

> 30 0.75

Emergencies: Do not mix by hand.

D. Where specified on the drawings provide concrete with Xypex water proofing additive. Concrete mix to be in accordance with manufactures recommendation for the proposed conditions. Provide certification from the additive supplier on completion of the concrete works.

3.4 Concrete Types A. Foamed Concrete : Cement, fine aggregate, water and foam.

B. Fine Aggregate : Fine aggregate shall be clean, coarse, well graded sand free from all deleterious matter and shall comply with AS2758.

C. Coarse Aggregate : Coarse aggregate shall be clean, crushed granite, diorite or other approved stone free from all deleterious matter and shall comply with AS2758.

D. Water : All water used in mixing with cement for concrete, mortar or grout, in cleaning out or wetting forms, in washing materials or in curing concrete, shall be clean and fresh, free from impurities and of drinking quality.

E. Admixtures : Admixtures shall not be added to the concrete unless specified.

4. REINFORCEMENT 4.1 General A. Steel reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of:-

1. AS/NZS 4671 Steel reinforcing materials. Where galvanised reinforcing is specified, tie-wire and other similar items shall also be galvanised. Reinforcement shall be free from scale, loose rust, oil, grease or other deleterious matter that may impair the bond between the concrete and reinforcement or cause disintegration of the concrete. All reinforcement shall be cut and bent to the tolerances set out in Clause 19.2 of AS 3600, and fixed in position to the tolerances set out in Clause 19.5.3. Reinforcement on site shall be stored clear of the ground and shall be tied free from any form of surface contamination.



No adjustment to reinforcement other than straight cutting of bars shall be made on site without the approval of the Engineer.

B. Dowels 1. Standard: To AS/NZS 4671 grade 250R.

2. General: Provide each dowel in one piece, straight, with square cut ends free from burrs. Apply 2 coats of bitumen emulsion to half the length of the dowel at one end. Embed the unpainted half of the dowels in the concrete placed first.

3. Tolerances: Location: ± half the diameter of the dowel. Alignment: 2 mm in 300 mm. C. Welding

1. General: Give notice before welding reinforcement. Do not weld reinforcement within 75 mm of a section which has been affected by bending or re-bending.

2. Standard: To AS 1554.3. 4.2 Protective Coated Reinforcement

A. Extent : For concrete elements containing protective coated reinforcement, provide the same coating type to all that element's reinforcement and embedded ferrous metal items, including tie wires, stools, spacers, stirrups, plates and ferrules, and protect other embedded metals with a suitable coating.

B. Galvanizing 1. Coating (minimum): 700 g/m2. 2. Preparation: Pickling to AS 1627.5.

C. Damage : If damage occurs to the coating replace the damaged reinforcement. D. Unencased Reinforcement

1. General: Provide protection for "starter bars" and other items projecting from cast concrete for future additions, and exposed to the weather.

2. Protection method: Cover in grout slurry wrap in approved grease tape. 4.3 Fixing Reinforcement A. Fixing Requirements

1. General: Secure the reinforcement against displacement by tying at intersections with either annealed iron 1.25 mm diameter (minimum) wire ties, or clips. Bend the ends of wire ties away from nearby faces of forms so that the ties do not project into the concrete cover.

2. Mats: For bar reinforcement in the form of a mat, secure each bar at alternate intersections, and at other points as required.

3. Beams: Tie ligatures to bars in each corner of each ligature. Fix other longitudinal bars to ligatures at 1 m maximum intervals.

4. Columns: Secure longitudinal column reinforcement to all ligatures at every intersection. 5. Bundled bars: Tie bundled bars together so that the bars are in closest possible contact. Provide tie

wire at least 2.5 mm diameter at centres £ 24 times the diameter of the smallest bar in the bundle. B. Concrete Cover

1. General structures: To AS 3600. 2. Structures for retaining liquids: To AS 3735.

C. Provision for Concrete Placement Notice: If spacing or cover of reinforcement does not comply give notice. For cover requirements refer to structural drawings.

4.4 Reinforcement Supports A. Support Types

1. General: Provide purpose-made concrete, metal or plastic supports. 2. Exposure classification A1: Provide a protective coating to ferrous metal supports which extend to

the surface of the concrete. 3. Exposure classifications more severe than A1: Provide either

plastic supports of adequate strength and of a shape appropriate to the location; or concrete supports of the same concrete quality as the concrete element.

B. Supports Over Membranes : Prevent damage to waterproofing membranes or vapour barriers. Place a metal or plastic plate under each support to prevent puncturing.

C. Support Spacing 1. Bars: £ 60 diameters.



2. Fabric: ³ 750 mm.

5. EMBEDMENTS, CORES AND FIXING 5.1 Fixings and Embedded Items

A. Adjoining Elements : For adjoining elements to be fixed to or supported on the concrete, provide for the required fixings. Where applicable provide for temporary support of the adjoining elements during construction of the concrete.

B. Structural Integrity : Fix cores and embedded items to prevent movement during concrete placing. In locating embedded items, do not cut or displace reinforcement, or cut hardened concrete.

C. Tolerances on Placement : Maximum deviation from correct positions: Embedded items generally: +/- 10mm. Fasteners, including anchor bolts: +/- 3 mm. Anchor bolt groups for structural steel: To AS 4100. D. Inserted Fixings Methods : Do not insert fixings using drilling (including masonry anchors), or using

explosive tools. E. Steelwork : Any structural steel used in conjunction with these works shall conform to AS4100. And

shall be heavily hot dip galvanised or similarly treated when external. See 'Structural Steelwork' section of specification.

6. PLACING AND CURING

6.1 Concrete Working Base A. Material : N20 concrete. Lay over the base or subgrade and screed to the required level. B. Thickness : Minimum 50 mm. C. Finish

1. Membrane support: Wood float finish or equivalent. D. Surface Tolerance : +/- 2mm from the correct plane, +/- 6mm form a 3mm straight edge. +/- 2mm

from correct plane areas to receive vinyl – 3mm from a 3mm straight edge. 6.2 Placing and Compaction A. Placing

1. General: Use placing methods which minimise plastic settlement and shrinkage cracking. 2. Layers: Place concrete in layers such that each succeeding layer is blended into the preceding one

by the compaction process. 3. Placing slabs and pavements: Place concrete uniformly over the width of the slab so that the face is

generally vertical and normal to the direction of placing. 4. Concrete to the factory and warehouse floors are not to be installed until building is fully weather tight

with all wall and roof structure installed.

B. Horizontal Movement : Use suitable conveyors, clean chutes, troughs or pipes. Do not use water to facilitate the movement.

C. Vertical Movement : In vertical elements, limit the free fall of concrete to 1500 mm per 100 mm element thickness, up to a maximum free fall of 3000 mm, using enclosed chutes or access hatches in forms. As far as practicable keep chutes vertical and full of concrete during placement, with ends immersed in the placed concrete.

D. Wet Weather Requirements : Concrete shall not be ordered for a pour in wet weather without the approval of the Superintendent. Where approval is given to proceed, the Builder shall undertake responsibility for making good all areas of mono finish which may be damaged by rain. Waterproof covers shall be kept close at hand to cover the screeded surface and prevent cement being washed out of the concrete during showers.

When a pour is in progress and is abandoned due to worsening conditions, it shall be carried to or subsequently cut back to a joint line to be nominated by the Superintendent. Concrete shall not be deposited on ponded areas of formwork, but worked in a face to push the water ahead of the pour. Holes will be cut as necessary to allow entrapped water to drain out of the forms. E. Sequence of Pours : Minimise shrinkage effect by pouring the sections of the work between



construction joints in a sequence such that there will be suitable time delays between adjacent pours. Minimum Time Delay Schedule

Between (pour locations) Minimum period between adjacent pours (days)

Adjacent pours abutting vertical construction joints in walls

7 days

Adjacent pours abutting horizontal construction joints in walls or columns

7 days

"Pour strips" and adjacent concrete 14 days

F. Compaction

1. General: Remove air bubbles and fully compact the mix. 2. Methods: Use immersion and screed vibrators accompanied by hand methods as appropriate. 3. Vibrators: Do not allow vibrators to come into contact with partially hardened concrete, or

reinforcement embedded in it. Do not use vibrators to move concrete along the forms. Avoid over-vibration that may cause segregation.

G. Placing Records : Keep on site and make available for inspection a log book recording each placement of concrete, including the following:

Date. The portion of work. Specified grade and source of concrete. Slump measurements. Volume placed.

6.3 Cold Weather Placing A. General : Maintain the temperature of the freshly mixed concrete within the limits shown in the Cold

weather placing table. "Outdoor" air temperature applies to the air temperature at the time of mixing and to the predicted or likely air temperature at any time during the subsequent 48 hours.

Cold Weather Placing Table Outdoor air temperature Temperature

of concrete

Minimum Maximum

Less Than 5oC 10oC 32oC

Greater Than 5oC 18oC 32oC

B. Additives : Do not provide calcium chloride, salts, chemicals or other material in the mix to lower the

freezing point of the concrete. C. High Early Strength Cement : Provide in severe weather conditions to enable the concrete to

develop sufficient strength to permit formwork removal within the specified time. Do not provide as a substitute for the heating of materials or for adequate protection of placed concrete against low temperatures. Do not provide high alumina cement.

D. Heating : Heat the concrete materials, other than cement, to the minimum temperature necessary to ensure that the temperature of the placed concrete is within the limits specified. Maximum temperature of water: 60oC when it is placed in the mixer.

6.4 Hot Weather Placing A. Mixing : Surrounding outdoor shade temperature > 38oC: Do not mix concrete.

B. Handling : Prevent premature stiffening of the fresh mix and reduce water absorption and evaporation losses. Mix, transport, place and compact the concrete as rapidly as possible.

C. Placing : Before and during placing maintain the formwork and reinforcement at £ 32oC using protection, cold water spraying, or other effective means. When placed in the forms, the temperature of the concrete must not exceed the criteria in the Hot weather placing table.

Hot Weather Placing Table Concrete element Temperature limit

Normal concrete in footings, beams, columns, walls and slabs

35oC

Concrete in large mass concrete sections; or concrete of strength 40 MPa or greater, in sections exceeding 600 mm in thickness

27oC



D. Temperature Control Methods : Select one or more of the following methods of maintaining the specified temperature of the placed concrete:

Use chilled mixing water. Spray the coarse aggregate using cold water. Cover the container in which the concrete is transported to the forms. Cool the concrete using liquid nitrogen injection before placing. 6.5 Curing A. General

1. Protection: Protect fresh concrete, during the curing period, from premature drying and from excessively hot or cold temperatures.

2. Curing period: Cure continuously until the total cumulative number of days or fractions of days, during which the air temperature in contact with the concrete is above 10oC, is at least the following: Fully enclosed internal surfaces: 3 days. Other surfaces: 7 days.

B. Curing Componds 1. Standard: To AS 3799 or ASTM-C309. 2. Substrates: Do not use wax-based or chlorinated rubber-based curing compounds on surfaces forming

substrates to concrete toppings and cement-based render. 3. Application: Provide a continuous flexible coating without visible breaks or pinholes, which remains

unbroken at least seven days after application. C. Hot Weather Curing : Do not use curing compounds. After placement, either

1. immediately cover the concrete using an impervious membrane, or hessian kept wet, until curing begins; or

2. if the temperature exceeds 35oC or if not protected against drying winds, protect the concrete using a fog spray application of aliphatic alcohol evaporation retardant.

D. Curing of concrete containing ≥30% fly ash cement replacement: 1. A high quality curing compound (90% min retention to ASTM C309 or AS/NZS 3799) must be applied

as soon as possible after finishing the concrete. 2. After final setting, water curing shall be applied for 14 days. A curing compound only is not suitable. 3. For formed concrete components such as columns and walls, shuttering is to remain in place for a

minimum of 7 days. Where ambient temperature is less than 15°C this is to be 10 days. 4. Take all necessary measures to keep the concrete moist during finishing.

6.6 Protection A. Loading

1. Notice: Give notice before loading the concrete structure. 2. Protection: Protect the concrete from damage due to load overstresses, heavy shocks and excessive

vibrations, particularly during the curing period. Do not place construction loads on self-supporting structures which will overstress them.

B. Surface Protection : Protect finished concrete surfaces from damage. 7. JOINTS 7.1 Construction Joints

A. Location : Do not relocate or eliminate construction joints, or make construction joints not shown on the drawings. This includes emergency construction joints made necessary by unforeseen interruptions to the concrete pour.

B. Joint Preparation : Roughen and clean the hardened concrete joint surface, remove loose or soft material, free water, foreign matter and laitance. Dampen the surface just before placing the fresh concrete. Additional joints in the factory or warehouse slabs on grade are not permitted and any unfished section will need to be demolished and replaced.

C. Finish at Construction Joints : Butt join the surfaces of adjoining pours. In visually important surfaces make the joint straight and true, and free from impermissible blemishes relevant to its surface finish class.

7.2 Expansion Joints A. Jointing Materials

1. Type: Provide jointing materials compatible when used together, and non-staining to concrete in visible locations.

2. Foamed materials (in compressible fillers): Closed-cell or impregnated types which do not absorb water.



3. Bond breaking: Provide back-up materials for sealants, including backing rods, which do not adhere to the sealant. They may be faced with a non-adhering material.

B. Jointing Material Schedule Location of joint Jointing material

Primer Backing rod Sealant

Vertical Joint 10mm n/a Closed cell Tremco Mono 555 or approved equivalent

Fire Rated 10mm n/a Closed cell Sika Firerate or approved equivalent

Horizontal Joint 10mm n/a Closed cell Tremco Mono 555 or approved equivalent

C. Joint Filling

1. Preparation: Before filling, dry and clean the joint surfaces, and prime. 2. Joint filling: Fill with jointing materials. Finish visible jointing material neatly flush with adjoining

surfaces. 3. Watertightness: Apply the jointing material so that joints subject to ingress of water are made

watertight. 7.3 Waterstops

Provide waterstops as specified on the drawings where required. 8. PLINTHS AND DUCTS 8.1 Concrete Plinths A. Construction

1. General: Provide galvanized steel surround at least 75 mm high and 1.6 mm thick, fixed to floor with masonry anchors minimum M12 Hilti HSL 3B at 300c/c. Fill with concrete.

2. Reinforcement: Single layer of SL102 fabric. 3. Concrete: Grade N32. 4. Finish: Steel float flush with the surround.

9. FINISHES GENERAL 9.1 Tolerances

A. Tolerance Classes : Determine tolerance classes using a straight edge placed anywhere on the surface in any direction.

B. Tolerances Class Table Class Measurement Maximum deviation

(mm) A 3 m straight edge 3

B 3 m straight edge 6

C 600 mm straight edge 6

Class A shall apply unless noted otherwise

Additional requirements to factory and warehouse slab on grade. 0.1m straight edge 1mm 1.0m straight edge 2mm 3.0m straight edge 3mm 10m straight edge 12mm 15m straight edge 15mm

9.2 Surface Modifiers A. Seal Stripper :Thoroughly clean the surface before the application of finishes to masonry and



cementitious floors. Remove wax (buffable, self-polishing and acrylic paste types), heavy duty polymer finishes, and clear resin sealer using a seal stripper.

B. Clear Resin Sealers 1. Type: Transparent acrylic resin sealer, resistant to ultraviolet rays, suitable for exterior or interior

applications, rendering the surface impervious to stains of oils, grease, water and acids, non-yellowing, non-discolouring to the base surfaces, cut with a combination of hydrocarbon solvents to give good penetration into the surface.

2. Total solids: At least 14%. C. Surface Hardeners : Suitable for cementitious toppings or as laid surfaces. Apply to clean surfaces.

Do not apply to non-slip topping. 10. INTEGRAL FINISHES 10.1 Unformed Surfaces A. Screeding : Finish slab surfaces to finished levels, to tolerance class A.

Finish slab surfaces: Class A B. Finishing Methods : Surfaces not otherwise specified to have steel trowelled finish.

1. Scored finish: After screeding, give the surface a coarse scored texture using a stiff brush or rake drawn across the surface.

2. Machine floated finish: Finish the screeded surface to a uniform smooth texture using a machine float. Hand float in locations inaccessible to the machine float.

3. Steel trowelled finish: Use steel hand trowels to produce the final finish free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance.

4. Wood float finish: Produce the final finish using a wood float. 5. Broom finish: After floating use a broom to produce an even textured slip-resistant surface. 6. Pattern paving: Proprietary treatment producing integral coloured and patterned surface for in situ

paving and ground slabs. 7. Sponge finish: After machine floating, obtain an even textured sand finish by wiping the surface using

a damp sponge. Surfaces not otherwise specified to have Machine floated finish. 10.2 Formed Surfaces

A. Evaluation of Formed Surfaces : If evaluation of formed surface tolerance or colour is required, complete the evaluation before surface treatment.

B. Smooth Rubbed Finish : Remove the forms while the concrete is green, patch immediately, and complete the rubbing not later than the following day. Wet the surface and rub using a carborundum or similar abrasive brick until a uniform colour and texture are produced. Do not provide cement grout other than the paste drawn from the green concrete by the rubbing process.

C. Exposed Aggregate Finish : Remove the forms while the concrete is green. Wet the surface and scrub using stiff fibre or wire brushes, using water freely, until the surface film of mortar is mechanically removed without the use of acid etching, and the aggregate uniformly exposed. Rinse the surface with clean water.

D. Bush Hammered Finish : Remove the minimum matrix using bush hammering to expose the coarse aggregate without recessing the matrix deeper than the aggregate, to give a uniform texture with insignificant random tool marks.

E. Floated Finishes 1. Sand floated finish: Remove the forms while the concrete is green. Wet the surface and rub using a

wood float. Rub fine sand into the surface until a uniform colour and texture are produced. 2. Grout floated finish: Remove the forms while the concrete is green. Dampen the surface and spread,

using hessian pads or sponge rubber floats, a slurry consisting of one part cement (including an appropriate percentage of white cement) and one and a half parts sand passing a 1 mm sieve. Remove surplus until a uniform colour and texture are produced. Cure.

F. Blasted Finishes 1. Abrasive: Blast the cured surface using hard, sharp graded abrasive fine aggregate particles until the

coarse aggregate is in uniform relief. 2. Light abrasive: Blast the cured surface using hard, sharp graded abrasive fine aggregate particles to

provide a uniform matt finish without exposing the coarse aggregate. 10.3 Schedule Integral Finishes Schedule : Refer to drawings for finishes type and location.

END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 4 SECTION 04210 BRICKWORK

SECTION 04210 BRICKWORK

PART I GENERAL 101 Scope

General: supply and build the brickwork shown on the drawings or needed to complete the brickwork, including but not limited to the following: Labour and materials. Building in of miscellaneous items provided by others. Staging and scaffolding. Cleaning.

102 Related Work Co-operate and co-ordinate with the following trades:

Doors and door frames Metal windows Structural steel Concrete

103 Quality Assurance Approved samples: at the start of brick laying, arrange with the Superintendent to designate a beginning section of each type of face brickwork not less than 6 courses high x 1200 long as the control sample. When approved by the Superintendent, the section/s become the control standard/s for brickwork and remain part of work.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1316 2003 Masonry cement. AS/NZS 1576 Scaffolding.

There are 6 parts to this Standard, 1995 – 2016. AS 1672.1 1997 Limes and limestones – Limes for building. AS/NZS 2904 1995 Damp-proof courses and flashings. AS 3700 2011 Masonry structures Plus 2 Amdts to this Standard, 2012-2015. SAA HB 124 – 2007 Design of concrete masonry buildings on CD

105 Submissions A. Submissions required with tender:

Name of proposed manufacturer of bricks. B. Submissions required prior to ordering:

1. Product data: showing the following information where appropriate: a. Manufacturer's name and product details including a designation of proposed types and

sizes. b. Other

2. Samples: submit if requested by the Superintendent. C. Submissions required prior to delivery:

1. Four of each type of face brick to represent the range of colours, textures and surface, arris and shape irregularities.

2. Other.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Co-ordination: reach agreement with the Superintendent about site provision for storage of sand, cement and other materials and for mixing of mortar. Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and prevent damage, deterioration or loss.

PART II MATERIALS200 201 Bricks

Type: Face Brickwork Type: Utility Manufacturer Midland Brick Manufacturer Midland Brick Brick: Mexicut Cream Brick: Verticore Common Size: 230 x 110 x 76mm Size: 305 x 90 x 162mm

Exposure environment: Marine Exposure locations: To AS 3700 clause 5.4.

202 Mortar and Grout Materials and Types A. Materials: comply with AS 3700 as follows:

1. Mortar: restrict the amount of fine aggregate passing a 75 micron test sieve to 5% maximum. 2. Grout: 3. Pigment: powdered metallic oxides used in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.


4. Refractory mortar: approved refractory mortar, treated as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Types: comply with AS 3700, providing materials in the proportions described below:

1. Mortar:

Classification Mix Proportions (by volume) Type A Portland Cement

Building Lime Sand

M1 0 1 3 M2 1 2 9

1 2 8 M3 1 1 6

1 0 5 M4 1 0.5 4.5

. Mortar for load bearing brickwork: M4 Mortar for grouted and reinforced brickwork: M4 Mortar for non-load bearing brickwork: M4 Mortar for repair of lime mortar brickwork: M1 Mortar for bagging: Same mortar as used for laying. M3 mortar. M3 mortar, with powdered metallic oxide pigment added to achieve a dry colour approved by the Superintendent. Cement: To AS 3972. - Type: GP. White cement: With ≤ 1% iron salts content. Lime: To AS 1672.1. Sand: Fine aggregate with a low clay content and free from efflorescing salts, selected for colour and grading. Water: Clean and free from any deleterious matter. Admixtures: To AS 3700 clause 11.4.2.4. Pigment: To BS EN 12878, and as follows: 2. Grout: f'c not less than 12 MPa AS 3700.

203 Miscellaneous Materials Comply with AS 3700 as follows: A. Wall ties and accessories: Stainless Steel.

Where building is to be located within 10 kilometres of the coast wall ties: B. Reinforcement: C. Lintels and other steel in brickwork:

Extend lintels 230mm minimum past each jamb of openings. D. Caulking: elastomeric sealing compound, coloured to match mortar; for general caulking including

movement control joints: Liquid polysulphide polymer. Neutral silicone

E. Head Restraint: 100 x 100 x 6 x 450 long mild steel angle masonry anchored to concrete soffit on either side of wall, at 1000 maximum centres.

F. Damp-proof courses: G. Flashings:

Note: both to comply with AS/NZS 2904. H. Expansion joint material: I. Control joint material:

204 Steel Lintels A. Provide lintels in accordance with the drawings and where brickwork is to be supported over openings

and no special lintels are detailed, build in mild steel lintels, in accordance with the Building Code of Australia.

B. Set angles with the first dimension vertical. C. Hot dip galvanise steel lintels in exterior openings. D. Fix angles to concrete columns or beams with the bearing leg cut and bent to the height of the vertical

leg and bolted to concrete with 2 no. 16mm masonry anchors. PART III EXECUTION300 301 Mortar Mixing

Measure materials to ensure that the specified mix proportions are maintained as per AS 3700. Mix in a suitable mixing machine until a uniform blending of the components is achieved. Add water to create a mix that is as wet as can be conveniently used by the bricklayer.


Except for the previously specified methyl cellulose water thickener, use no chemical to affect the plastic or other properties of mortar or as a substitute for lime without the Superintendent's permission.

302 Mortar Life Re-tempering to replace water lost by evaporation is encouraged until initial set begins. Reject mortar which has begun its initial set and do not re-temper.

303 Preparation Review the project with other trades in relation to ducts, piping, conduits, thimbles, sleeves, etc. or other item penetrating or to be built into brickwork and co-ordinate their installation. Obtain built-in items from their suppliers prior to starting brickwork. Clean the surface of concrete before laying bricks thereon. Set up pressed metal door frames plumb and level and brace as required. Maintain bracing until walls are at least 1000 high and frame grouting has set.

304 Laying General: comply with applicable provisions of AS 3700. Set out brickwork so as to reduce cutting to a minimum and, in facework, to avoid irregular or broken bond. Make cuts in facework with a masonry saw. Carefully position openings for other trades to eliminate cutting. Build in accordance with the dimensions, thicknesses and heights shown on drawings, plumb, level and in the designated position within the tolerances of AS 3700. Allow no part to rise more than 1000mm above adjacent unfinished work. Rake back advanced work, build brickwork in bond and avoid toothing wherever possible. Build in as necessary reinforcements, arch bars, lintels, frames, straps, bolts, lugs, wall ties, metalwork, damp-proof courses and flashings, etc. Provide weepholes 1200 mm apart over damp-proof course and flashings where these span across cavities. Re-lay, in fresh mortar, bricks accidentally moved after initial laying. Keep mortar stains to a minimum and protect horizontal ledges, finished sills and the like from mortar droppings as work proceeds. Before mortar sets hard, remove excess mortar. Scrub brickwork within 24 hours of laying using a bristle brush plus detergent if necessary. Protect new and incomplete brickwork with coverings, temporary bracing or the like - AS 3700.

305 Jointing and Finishing Joint thickness: 10mm within the tolerances given in AS 3700. Joint finish brickwork for plaster: cut off flush. Face brickwork: Raking Bagged finish: spread the mortar on exposed external/internal surfaces with a brush, sponge float, rough cloth or other suitable device and then rub to achieve a uniform texture approved by the Superintendent. Protect adjacent surfaces as necessary and promptly remove bagging mortar spilt, splashed or otherwise lodged on them. Carry out bagging as the work proceeds. Carry out bagging as a separate operation after bricklaying has been completed.

306 Bonding and Tying Build work in stretcher bond. Space wall ties in accordance with AS 3700. Keep cavities clean and free from mortar droppings. Fix to concrete or steel columns and at junction with concrete walls with frame ties built at least 250mm into brick joint and fix to the structure as close as possible to the course line.

307 Door Frames Build in door frames as the work proceeds. Generally allow for lugs at 400 to 450mm centres except FU door frames which have lugs to sizes and centres required by the fire test report pertaining to the particular type of door. Grout solid cavities behind frames.

308 Incidental Work Chases: refer to AS 3700, and, as far as possible, provide for chases to be made as the work rises. No horizontal chase may exceed 1200mm in length and no vertical chase may be closer than 600mm to an element providing lateral support. No chase may be more than 1/3 of the thickness of the wall. Perform miscellaneous incidental brickwork as required throughout and for other trades. Make good after other trades.

309 Field Quality Control A. Tests.

Have the following tests performed in a laboratory NATA registered for the particular test. Supply copies of the resulting test certificates to the Superintendent.

TEST: TEST METHOD: For mortar: sampling method Refer structural engineer


Chemical composition Other For brickwork: compressive strength AS 3700 Appendix A Bond strength Characteristic strength AS 3700 Appendix B Other

B. Test frequency.

For mortar: For special masonry: For other masonry:

310 Cleaning of Facework Take care to keep walls clean constantly. Should further cleaning be necessary, use hydrochloric acid not stronger than 5%, treating only a small area at one time. Wet the wall prior to applying the acid, work from the top down and thoroughly wash off after brushing. Do not leave acid solution on wall at stoppage of work.

311 Completion Complete contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the Superintendent. On completion, clean up mortar droppings, debris, etc., remove scaffolding, make good put-log holes and blemishes and leave work in a first class condition. Protect facework surfaces where necessary to avoid damage during other building operations.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 04220 BLOCKWORK

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 4 SECTION 04220 BLOCKWORK

SECTION 04220 BLOCKWORK WALLS

PART I GENERAL

101 Scope General: Supply and build all the block work shown on the Drawings or needed to complete the works, including but not limited to the following:

1. All labour and materials 2. Building in of miscellaneous items provided by others 3. Staging and scaffolding 4. Flashings and services 5. Cleaning

Specifically

A. 190mm core filled reinforced loadbearing blockwork as shown on the drawings.

102 Related Work Co-ordinate and co-operate with the following trades: Structural steel Doors and door frames Concrete Fire-rated doors and door frames

103 Quality Assurance Provide manufacturer's certification that bricks and blocks supplied are of the specified type and strength, and were manufactured in accordance with AS 1225, AS 1653 or AS 2733.

104 Reference Standards Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards:

AS 1576 Code of Practice for Metal Scaffolding AS 1684 SAA Timber Framing Code AS 1694 Code of Practice for Physical Barriers Used in the Protection of Buildings against

Subterranean Termites AS 2423 Coated Steel Wire Fencing Products for Terrestrial, Aquatic and General Use AS 3700 Masonry Structures including all The Standards to which it refers (Clause 1.2). AS/NZS 4671 Steel Reinforcing Materials

1 Submissions A. With tender: name of proposed block manufacturer. B. Prior to ordering:

1. Product data: showing the following information where appropriate: a. Manufacturer's name and product details including a designation of proposed types and

sizes. b. Schedule of lintels. c. Other.

2. Samples: submit if requested by the Superintendent. C. Submissions required prior to delivery:

2 of each type of unit described below.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Coordination: Reach agreement with the Superintendent about site provision for storage of sand, cement and other materials and for mixing of mortar.

Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and prevent damage, deterioration or loss.



PART II MATERIALS

201 Blocks A. Solid bricks and Blockwork:

1. Capping’s and top courses to all other walls B. Blockwork:

1. Boral Besser 390L x 190H x 190W grey smooth faced blocks. 2. Boral Besser 390L x 190H x 90W grey smooth faced blocks.

202 Mortar and Grout Materials and Types A. Materials: Comply with AS 3700 as follows:

1. Mortar: Restrict the amount of fine aggregate passing a 75 micron test sieve to 5% maximum.

2. Grout: Clause 3.5, 10.7

B. Types: Comply with AS 3700; Clauses 2.23.1, 3.3 and 10.4, 10.7 and Table 10.1, providing materials in the proportions described below: 1. Mortar:

Mix Proportions Classification Portland Cement Lime Sand M3 1 1 6 M4 1 0.5 4.5

Mortar for Load Bearing Brickwork and Blockwork: M4 Mortar for Grouted and Reinforced Brickwork and Blockwork: M4 Mortar for Non-Load Bearing Brickwork and Blockwork: M4

2. f'c not less than 21 MPa for load bearing common brick.

3. Concrete cavity fill as specified on the drawings. 20mpa, 6mm aggregate supper plasticized, 200 slump.

203 Miscellaneous Materials Comply with AS 3700 as follows:

A. Wall Ties and Accessories: Clause 3.4, 10.5 B. Reinforcement: Clause 3.6, 10.8 C. Lintels and Other Steel in Blockwork: Clause 10.5 D. Caulking: Elastomeric sealing compound, coloured to match final paint colour; for general caulking

including movement control joints: Liquid polysulphide polymer equal to Thioseal 5000. Neutral silicone, equal to Dow Corning 790, E. Damp Proof Courses: 'Master black' laid to all leaves at ground floor level. F. Flashing: Allow to build in cover flashings where necessary to render building watertight. Built-in flashings to all walls to be 0.8mm zincalume bitumen painted and shaped as required. At ground floor level turn up waterproof membrane the required courses and build in. G. Expansion Joint Material: Provide foam backing strip set 25mm into joint and seal over with

approved caulking compound. H. Control Joint Material: As for expansion joint. I. Fire Rated Vertical Expansion Joints: Fill 10mm thick expansion joints with Nullifire System J

flexible J10.45 in full accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Point exposed face with waterproof mastic sealant.

204 Source Quality Control Refer Clauses 11.6 and 11.7 of AS3700.

205 Steel Lintels A. Refer Lintel Table on Structural Drawings. B. Set all angles with the first dimension vertical.



C. All steel lintels to be hot dip galvanised. D. Fix all angles to concrete columns or beams with the bearing leg cut and bent to the height of the

vertical leg and bolted to concrete with 2 no. 16mm masonry anchors. E. All cast in shelf angles are to be hot dip galvanised.

206 Reinforcement A. Ref: drawings

PART III EXECUTION

301 Mortar Mixing Measure materials to ensure that the specified mix proportions are maintained (AS 3700, Clause 11.3.3).

Mix in a suitable mixing machine until a uniform blending of the components is achieved.

Add water to create a mix that is as wet as can be conveniently used by the bricklayer.

Except for the previously specified methyl cellulose water thickener, use no chemical to affect the plastic or other properties of mortar or as a substitute for lime without the Superintendent's written permission.

302 Mortar Life Re-tempering to replace water lost by evaporation is encouraged until initial set begins. Mortar which has begun its initial set must be rejected and may not be re-tempered.

303 Preparation Review the project with all other trades in relation to ducts, piping, conduits, thimbles, sleeves, etc. or other item penetrating or to be built into blockwork and coordinate their installation.

Obtain all built-in items from their suppliers prior to starting the blockwork setout.

Clean the surface of concrete before laying any blocks thereon.

Set up pressed metal door frames and aluminium shopfront and partition units plumb and level and brace as required. Maintain bracing until walls are at least 1000 high and frame grouting has set.

304 Laying General: Comply with all applicable provisions of AS 3700. Set out all brickwork and blockwork so as to reduce cutting to a minimum and, in facework, to avoid irregular or broken bond.

Make cuts in facework with a masonry saw only. Carefully position openings for other trades to eliminate cutting.

Build in accordance with the dimensions, thicknesses and heights shown on drawings, plumb, level and in the designated position within the tolerances of AS 3700, clause 11.5

Allow no part to rise more than 1000mm above adjacent unfinished work. Rake back advanced work, build all blockwork in bond and avoid toothing wherever possible.

Build in as necessary all reinforcements, arch bars, lintels, frames, straps, bolts, lugs, wall ties, metalwork, damp-proof courses and flashings, etc.

Re-lay, in fresh mortar, bricks/blocks accidentally moved after initial laying.

Keep mortar stains to a minimum and protect horizontal ledges, finished sills and the like from mortar droppings as work proceeds.

Before mortar sets hard, remove excess mortar. Scrub brickwork and blockwork within 24 hours of laying using a bristle brush plus detergent if necessary. Removal of excess mortar with acid is not permitted.



Protect new and incomplete brickwork with coverings, temporary bracing or the like - AS 3700, clause 11.9.

Form control joints where directed by the Superintendent and in accordance with AS 1640.

305 Jointing and Finishing Joint thickness: 10mm within the tolerances given in AS 3700 Joint finish:

Blockwork for plaster: Cut off flush

Internal Blockwork: Where not rendered to be lightly rolled joints suitable for painting. To Preparation and Food Trading areas to be dense flush joints..

306 Bonding and Tying Build all work in stretcher bond and maintain existing bond.

Wall ties shall be stainless steel grade 316.

Space wall ties in accordance with AS 3700, Clause 3.4 and as specified in the Structural drawings.

309 Completion Complete all contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the Superintendent.

On completion clean up all mortar droppings, debris, etc., remove all scaffolding, make good all put-log holes and blemishes and leave all work in a first class condition.

Protect all facework surfaces where necessary to avoid damage during other building operations.

END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 05080 METAL FINISHES - SHOP-APPLIED

SECTION 05080 METAL FINISHES - SHOP-APPLIED


Supply all labour and material, services and equipment necessary for the preparation, application and finishing of metal surfaces as indicated on drawings, schedules and as specified herein, to internal and external metal surfaces as follows: Refer Schedule of Finishes.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Metalwork Structural steel Metal door frames and fire doors Metal windows Metal decking and roof plumbing

103 Quality Assurance A contractor with wide experience in this class of work is required for the work of this section.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1231 2000 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Anodic oxidation coatings. AS 1627 Metal finishing - Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces.

1627.6 2003 Chemical conversion treatment of metals. There are 6 other parts, 1997 – 2005.

AS 2832 Cathodic protection of metals. There are 5 parts, 2003 – 2015. AS 3715 2002 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coating for architectural applications of

aluminium and aluminium alloys.

105 Submissions Submit the following materials: A. Product literature on all proposed finishing systems. B. Colour samples for all approved finishing materials. Provide samples identified with:

1. Manufacturer's colour code and colour name. 2. Match to schedule colour code and name.

C. Samples not less than 100 x 100mm and of the same gloss level as the scheduled colour.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Handle all materials with care. Do not store on site. Install directly in place.

107 Warranty Provide a written warranty stating the preparation of surfaces, materials and material application under this contract will show no deterioration and remain in good condition for a period of 10 years from date of Practical Completion.

PART II MATERIALS200 201 Materials – General

Where manufacturer makes more than one grade of any material specified, use the highest grade of each type, whether or not the material is mentioned by trade name in these specifications.

202 Metal Finishes A. Anodising

Anodise to colour selected and approved by the architect. Pre-treat and apply anodising by applicators approved by the architect. Minimum coating thickness of 25 microns subjected to random testing after installation. Remove and replace non-conforming material.

B. Polyester powdercoat Apply polyester powdercoat, to colour approved by the architect to metal surfaces specified. Perform pre-treatment and application of powder coating by applicators approved by the architect and by the manufacturer of the powder material.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 05080 METAL FINISHES - SHOP-APPLIED

Minimum coating thickness of 50 microns subjected to random testing after installation. Remove and replace non-conforming material.

C. Fluoroset FP (Dulux Product).

203 Schedule Refer to Finishes Schedule. PART III EXECUTION300 301 Examination

Inspect all surfaces and determine that they are in proper condition to receive the work to be performed under this section. The starting of work under this section means acceptance of such surfaces as being satisfactory and any defects in work resulting from accepting poor surfaces are to be corrected at no cost to the proprietor.

302 Preparation A. General: prepared to a standard not less than that described in AS 1627. B. Clean base metal surfaces of all mill scale, rust, grease, oil, dirt or other foreign matter then

properly wash with spirit or other approved cleaning agents. After cleaning, etch, pickle or prepare as recommended by manufacturer of the finish applied.

303 Protection

Protect finished metal surfaces as necessary during handling, transport and erection to prevent mechanical imperfections such as scratches, scrapes, dents, spots, stains and streaks. Do not use adhesive protective coating. Protect by other means with the approval of the architect.

304 Application Execute all work in this section in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the provisions of the Australian Standards which are incorporated by reference as part of this specification and apply to the work in this section to same extent as if written herein. In the event of conflict between manufacturer's recommendations and the provisions of the Australian Standards, manufacturer's recommendations govern.

305 Cleaning At completion of work, keep and maintain finished surfaces clean and free from dust, dirt and other foreign matter.

306 Completion Complete all contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the architect.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 9 SECTION 05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL

05100 STRUCTURAL STEEL

1. GENERAL 1.1 Scope

The work required under this section includes the preparation of shop drawings and the supply, fabrication, surface treatment, transport and erection of all structural steelwork.

All work shall be in accordance with the Architectural and Structural Drawings and this specification. 1.2 Standard A. General: Materials, construction, fabrication and erection: To AS 4100. B. Quality: The quality of all materials and workmanship in the execution of this contract shall comply with the requirements of the Codes and Standard Specifications:-

AS3678 Structural Steel – Hot Rolled Plates and Floor Plates & Slabs AS3679 Hot Rolled Bars and Sections AS1163 Welded and seamless steel hollow Sections and Amendment 1 AS 1110 ISO metric hexagon precision bolts and screws AS1111 ISO Metric Hexagon Commercial Bolts and Screws AS 1112 ISOmetric hexagon nuts AS 1237 Flat metal washers for general engineering purposes AS1252 High Strength Steel Bolts AS 1627 Metal finishing - Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces BS1642 Arc Welding of Carbon-Manganese Steels AS1214 Hot Dip Galvanised Coatings on Threaded Fastenings AS4100 Steel Structures AS/NZS 4600 Cold-formed Steel Structures AS/NZS 4680 Galvanised Coatings AS1554 Structural Steel Welding AS1553.1 Low carbon........manganese steels AS1553.2 Low carbon........alloy steels AS1553.3 Corrosion resisting...electrodes AS 1796 1993 Certification of welders and welding supervisors AS 2312 1994 Guide to the protection of iron and steel against exterior atmospheric corrosion AS/NZS 2717 Welding – Electrodes - for GMAW AS/NZS 4791 1999 Hot dipped galvanised coatings on ferrous open sections AS/NZS 4792 1999 Hot dipped galvanised coatings on ferrous hollow sections AS/NZS 4855 Welding Consumables – covered electrodes for MMAW AS/NZS 4857 Welding Consumables – covered electrodes for MMAW of high strength steels AS3828 Guidelines for the Erection of Building Steelwork

1.3 Adjoining Elements Provide for the fixing of adjoining building elements to be fixed to or supported on the structural steel. 1.4 Inspection A. Witness points – off site:

1. Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages: 2. Testing of welding procedures and welder qualification tests. 3. Commencement of shop fabrication. 4. Completion of fabrication before surface preparation. 5. Surface preparation before shop painting. 6. Completion of protective coating before delivery to site.

B. Witness points – on site: 1. Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages:



2. Steelwork on site before erection. 3. Steelwork and column bases erected on site, before grouting, encasing, site painting or

cladding. 4. Anchor bolts in position before casting in.

1.5 Testing

A. The Architect may at any time require any materials to be tested in accordance with the requirements of the above listed codes and specifications. The cost of all such tests shall be borne by the client but the contractor shall, if required, promptly supply at his own expense, test pieces as required by the Architect.

B. Should the presence of faulty workmanship be suspected, the contractor will be directed to cut out the parts affected and remove them for examination and testing. The contractor shall carry out all such cutting and dismantling and making good to the approval of the Architect.

C. Should faulty workmanship and/or materials be disclosed by inspection the cost of dismantling, cutting out and making good shall be borne by the contractor.

2. SUBMISSIONS 2.1 Subcontractors Submit names and contact details of proposed fabricator, shop detailer and installer. 2.2 Shop Drawings A. General: Submit shop drawings showing the following information:

1. Relevant details of each assembly, component and connection. 2. Information relative to fabrication, surface treatment, transport and erection.

Subcontractor shall also submit a 3D Shop Detailed model in Strucad (or equivalent) format to assist in the review of the printed shop drawing deliverables.

B. Particular: Include the following information: 1. Identification. 2. Steel type and grade. 3. Dimensions of items. 4. Required camber, where applicable. 5. Fabrication methods including, where applicable, hot or cold forming and post weld heat

treatment. 6. Location, type and size of welds or bolts. 7. Weld categories and bolting categories. 8. Orientation of members. 9. Surface preparation methods and coating system. 10. Procedures necessary for shop and site assembly, and erection. 11. Temporary works such as lifting lugs, support points, temporary cleats and bracing which

are required for transport and erection of the structural steelwork. 12. Required fixings for adjoining building elements.

Architectural Fixings – The contractor is to show on the shop drawings, all architectural requirements for cleats, fixings, brick ties and the like. The fixings are shown on the architectural drawings.

C. Engineer fabrication may commence prior to the shop drawing review at the builder’s risk. Variation or substitutions made to equivalent non Australian member sizes should not occur until approved by the structural engineer. Builder must allow sufficient time in his program for checking and review of shop drawings if fabrication is not to occur until completion of the review, a minimum of 6 weeks from receipt of all required information is required for the review. The shop drawings must be forwarded to the Structural Engineer as PDF and 3D model files for the review. No approval will be provided it is the builder’s responsibility to confirm compliance with the structural design intent.

D. Steel work and the shop drawings are to be fully coordinated with all mechanical, electrical and hydraulic

services shop drawings and requirements.



2.3 Tests A. Steel: Submit evidence that the steel used in the work complies with the cited Australian material standards. B. Acceptable evidence: Certified mill test reports, or test certificates issued by the mill. C. Alternative: Have the steel tested by an independent testing authority for compliance with the chemical composition and mechanical test requirements of the cited Australian material standard. D. All bolts must comply to all relevant Australian standards and be minimum grade 8.8S structural bolts. 2.4 Materials and Components Masonry anchors: If masonry anchors are required or proposed for the support or fixing of structural steel,

submit evidence of the anchor capacity to carry the load. 2.5 Splicing : If Splicing of Structural Members is Intended, Submit Proposals A. Welding procedures: Submit details of proposed welding procedures, using the form in Appendix C of AS/NZS 1554.1. B. Distortions: If a member is distorted during the galvanizing process, submit proposals for straightening. 3. MATERIALS AND COMPONETS 3.1 Steel Types and Grade A. Standards - Cold-formed sections: To AS/NZS 4600. 3.2 Steel Grade Table A. Steel grade schedule

Type of steel Grade

Steel castings to AS 2074 250

Hot-rolled plate, sheet and strip to AS/NZS 1594 300

Cold-rolled sheet and strip to AS 1595 G450

Hot-dipped zinc-coated or aluminium/zinc-coated sheet and strip to AS 1397

G450

4. EXECUTION 4.1 Fabrication A. Dimensions : The contractor shall check all steel dimensions before erection and shall draw the attention of the Architect to any inaccuracies. B. Splicing : Provide structural members in single lengths. C. Beam Camber : If beam members have a natural camber within the straightness tolerance, fabricate and

erect them with the camber up. D. Site Work : Other than work shown on the shop drawings as site work, do not fabricate or weld structural

steel on site. E. Variation : Should the contractor wish to make any variations from the sizes specified he shall include the proposed variation in his tender and no extra for such alterations will be allowed in the contract.

F. Cutting and Bending : All members, plates, brackets and the like shall be neatly and accurately sheared, sawn or profiled to the required shape as shown on the drawings. Where Steel is oxy-cut to shape, care shall be taken to preserve the full finished sizes of the sections. After cutting, all rough edges shall be ground off.

G. All drill holes to be trimmed double-sided.

Type of steel Grade

Universal beams and columns, parallel flange channels, large angles to AS/NZS 3679.1

300

Flat, small angles, taper flange beams and columns to AS/NZS 3679.1

300

Welded sections to AS/NZS 3679.2 300

Hot rolled plates, floor plates and slabs to AS/NZS 3678 300

Hollow sections to AS 1163 300

Cold formed purlins and girts to AS 1397 G450 Z350



H. Hole press cuts are not allowed for supporting building elements. I. Thermal cuts are to be machine made only free from rough scratches and blowholes. Grid flush before

treatment . 4.2 Bolting A. Connection Bolts : For connection bolts not shown on the drawings, provide hot-dipped galvanized high strength bolts, nuts and washers to AS/NZS 1252 and snug tight bolting category 8.8. B. Bolting category schedule : Refer to drawings for bolt numbers and locations. C. Foundation bolts : Provide each foundation bolt with 2 nuts and 2 oversize washers and provide sufficient thread to permit the levelling nut to be set below the base plate.

1. Hexagonal commercial bolts: To AS/NZS 1111. 2. Hexagonal nuts: Class 5. 3. Extra large flat washers: To AS 1237 Appendix A.

D. Locknuts : Provide lock nuts for bolts in moving parts or parts subject to vibration and for vertical bolts in tension. E. Punching and Boring

1. Unless otherwise specified, holes for black bolt and friction grip bolts shall be drilled or sub-punched and reamed to 2mm larger in diameter than the specified bolt size.

2. When holes are drilled on one operation through two or more thicknesses of material, the parts shall be separated after drilling for removal of burrs.

3. Holes for bolts shall not be flame cut. F. Lengths of Members : All bolts used shall be such length that at least one full thread is exposed beyond the nut after the nut has been tightened. G. Where a nut or bolt head would bear on an inclined surface, a bevelled washer of the correct shape shall be placed between the two surfaces. Bevelled washers shall not be allowed to get our of position during bolting up. All bots shall be provided with one washer under bolt head and one washer under nut. All nuts, bolts and flat washers shall be galvanised. 4.3 Welding A. Weld Category

1. Category SP welds: For weld categories not shown on the drawings, provide category GP to AS/NZS 1554.1.

2. Category SP welds: All welds UNO. B. Electric Welding

1. Surface to be welded shall be free from loose mill scale, slag, rust, grease, paint and other deleterious material.

2. Surfaces to be welded shall be smooth, uniform and free from fins, tears and other defects. Preparation of edges for welding shall be carried out by planning or machine flame cutting, except that manual flame cutting may be permitted by the Architect in certain circumstances.

3. If not shown or specified otherwise, all welds shall be 6mm continuous fillet welds. 4. Welding by methods other than electric arc will not be permitted. All welds not otherwise

shown on the drawings or specified herein shall be shop welded and work carried out by fully qualified and experienced tradesman.

C. Shop Connection and Assembly 1. All shop connections shall be electric welded. All connections shall be designed to transmit

the loading at stresses laid down in AS4100. No connection shall be made with less than two bolts of minimum diameter of 16mm unless otherwise indicated on drawings. No weld of length less than four times the normal filled size shall be deemed capable of carrying load. Minor details not shown on drawings shall comply with AS4100.

2. Frames shall be carefully set out to dimensions shown. 3. The contractor shall furnish all facilities for inspection and testing of the work and shall notify

the Architect on each occasion when material is ready for inspection. D. Site Welds : Wherever possible locate site welds in positions for down hand welding. E. Welding Consumables

1. Electrodes shall comply with the following: Base Material Grade Electrode Standard 300 PLUS E43XX AS/NZS 4855 W50XX AS/NZS 2717



C350, C450 E49XX AS/NZS 4855 W55XX AS/NZS 2717 Rebar E6218 AS/NZS 4857

F Exposed welds: Where welding is exposed provide continuous welds. Grind welds flush where required by

the Architect. Provide a minimum of 6mm continuous fillet weld unless shown otherwise on drawings. Any

members that do not have continuous welds are to be seal with an approved sealant compatible with the paint treatment prior to painting. 4.4 Erection A. General

1. The contractor shall provide all equipment, gear and labour for the erection of structural steelwork. All erection shall be carried out by competent and qualified men and the contractor shall take every care to safeguard the public, workmen and adjoining property. All gear used shall be of adequate strength and shall comply with all regulations current at the time, and all steelwork shall be properly guyed and braced as required during erection.

2. The Builder is to engage a CPE to confirm that all temporary bracing, scaffolding, handrails etc. comply with Work Safe WA requirements.

B. Handling 1. Steelwork shall be carefully handled at all times and when being erected shall be lifted at

such points and in such a manner as will preclude any possibility of damage due to erection stresses.

2. Permanent bracing shall be placed in position as soon as possible. The contractor shall be held responsible for all damage caused to the structure, workmen or building during erection.

C. Temporary Connections: Do not attach cleats except as shown on shop drawings. D. Erection or transportation: Where the contractor desires splice joints due to transportation or erection requirements, the details of position of the proposed splice is to be submitted to the Architect and is subject to approval. No extra to the contract will be allowed for this type of joint. E. Hand flame cutting : Do not hand flame cut bolt holes. F. Movements : Provide for thermal movements during erection. G. Anchor bolts : For each group of anchor bolts provide a template with setting out lines clearly marked for positioning the bolts when casting in. H Handle and store materials by methods and appliances that will not over stress or deform the

members. Separate materials on site from surface of ground. I Members bent or buckled from handling or storing will be rejected. J Supply bolts, nuts and washers in grit free containers and stored in water tight premises. Reject

burred, damaged, corroded or otherwise unserviceable bolts. K Builder is to supply test certificates confirming compliance with All Australian codes, specifically for

high strength bolts. H. Grouting at supports

1. Temperature: Do not grout if the temperature of the base plate or the footing surface exceeds 38oC.

2. Method: Non Shrink Grout 3. Type: Manufactures specifications. 4. Minimum compressive strength (MPa): 40MPa 5. Minimum thickness (mm): 15mm 6. Maximum thickness (mm): 40mm

I. Suspension of services from structural steelwork 1. Approval to suspend services from the structural steelwork is to be obtained from the

Architect. Holes may not be drilled in steelwork without approval. 2. Generally, ceiling, A/C ducting and pipes not exceeding 50mm diameter may be suspended

from purlins, but other plumbing or fire sprinkler pipes are to be suspended only from beams or trusses. Fixings are to be made to the webs of purlins. No attachments are to be made to the flanges.

3. Beams or truss members may not be drilled to attach fixings but in lieu, welding or clamps are to be used. Except for minor fixings, attachment shall be made to the top chord adjacent to a panel point.

J. Tolerances



1. Steelwork shall finish to the levels and positions noted on the drawings to within a tolerance of + or – 3mm.

2. Beams and the like are to be fabricated and erected so that the mid point of any such member is within 1/1000 span of its correct position (including camber).

3. In making connections, drifting of unfair holes will not be permitted and holes not matching properly shall be reamed or drilled out and larger bolt inserted.

4. No member or part of member which has been bent or distorted shall be erected in that condition. All straightening shall be done on the ground.

5. All bolts and tie rods shall be left tight and all bevelled washers and plates properly positioned.

6. Crane rail alignment tolerance beam erection tolerance refer attached table extract AS 1418.1-2002 for crane classes C5 to C9

4.5 PURLINS AND GIRTS A. Supply and fix all purlins and girts as noted on the Structural Drawings complete with all bridging

pieces, sag struts, brackets and bolts and the like, necessary to complete the works. B Ensure all steel purlins, girts and bridging pieces are aluminum/zinc coated in accordance with AS

1397. Use bolts for fixing of these items that are hot dipped galvanised in accordance with AS 1397 with 275 g/m2 minimum coating mass.

C Ensure purlins and girts do not deviate from straightness by more than one five hundredth of their length with a maximum deviation of 20 mm. Ensure the tops of purlins prior to erection of the roof sheeting, are substantially in a plane parallel to the specified roof slope and do not deviate from this plane by more than one two hundredth of the purlin spacing.

D Identify any lack of purlin straightness by sighting along each purlin prior to erection. Arrange for each purlin to be erected in the hogged position. Provide the top surface of the purlin thus identified with a mark such as spray can paint.

E Purlins which do not meet these specifications will be rejected. F Fix purlins so that the top flange of the purlin points up the slope of the roof. Use 8 mm plate cleats

with M12 bolts for all purlins. If the length of the cleat exceeds 250mm use a 75x8ea angle cleat up to 500mm long.

G Lap purlins and girts at locations indicated on structural drawings so that the offset in the plane of the attached sheeting does not exceed twice the thickness of the purlin material. Where necessary clamp the purlins and/or girts and fix with counter sunk head bolts.

H Temporarily brace purlins and girts as required, particularly for monoslope roofs, before fixing cladding, gutters and the like. No variations or time delays will be accepted for this temporary work.

I Prop girts temporarily if necessary prior to installation of the sag struts and sheeting. J Use strut and rod bracing where the "Spring Lok" bridging system is not appropriate. Use bolts with

counter sunk heads for fascia purlins. K Unless noted otherwise on the structural drawings, purlins should be orientated with their top flange

facing up the slope of the roof. L Ensure purlins, bracing, tie rods and other items associated with purlins are securely fixed true and

straight before insulation, support mesh and roof covering is fixed. M Unless otherwise shown on drawings, hanging straps, rods and bracing for supporting items

suspended from cold form purlins shall be attached to webs of purlins. Do not attached to bottom flange.

N Do not support mechanical plant or ducting on/from cold formed purlins until roof sheeting is fixed to purlins.

4.6 CLEATS AND FITTINGS Provide all cleats and fittings as detailed on the Structural Drawings, and all necessary cleats, bolts,

etc not necessarily shown on the Structural Drawings for erection purposes and for fixing of Architectural elements and finishes as detailed on the drawings.

4.7 CLEATS AND FITTINGS A. Allow for all trimming of purlins and girts as required for roof and wall penetration for ducts, flues,

windows, doors, angle cut cladding, access panels and the like whether or not they are shown on



the drawings. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings use trimmers the same size as the adjoining members fixed with 3 mm galvanised cleat plates and 2 M12 bolts to each member.

B. At valleys and hips and all unsupported edges of roof and wall sheeting, fix continuous 75 x 75 x 1.6mm cold formed galvanised mild steel angles to the ends of purlins for fixing of sheeting and

4.8 LADDERS AND WALKWAYS Where ladders and walkways have been shown on the Drawings ensure they conform to this

Specification, to AS 1657 and to the Building Regulations, whichever is deemed more appropriate. 4.9 CONNECTIONS A General: Supply end cleats, brackets and other connections, not specifically detailed on the Drawings, to suit

the location and forces shown thereon with gauge and edge distances in accordance with AS 4100. B Bolting General: Supply bolts in bearing of such lengths that no threaded portion shall cross the interface of

the parts joined. Place at least one washer under the bolt head or nut, whichever is to be rotated. Provide taper washers where the part under the bolt head or nut is not perpendicular to the centre line of the bolt.

C Welding: Do manual welding in accordance with AS 1554. Do semi-automatic welding in accordance with AS 1554.

D Miscellaneous Attachments: Allow for the drillings, cleat and other fitments indicated on the Contract Drawings or shown on other relevant Drawings and required by other trades. Be entirely responsible for supply of necessary information to the Steel Fabricator.

5. FINISHES 5.1 Identification Marks

A. General: Provide marks or other means for identifying each member, and for the setting out, location, erection and connection of the steelwork. If the work includes more than one bolting category, mark bolted connections to show the bolting category. Pressed steel tags fixed with at least 2mm thick wire or embossed directly to steel members.

B. Grinding off: Grind off brand marks and butt welds where visible to a neat finish. Note: Visible fillet welds are not to be ground off where they are load bearing. These welds are to

be made as neat even welds.

C. Labelling with chalk, oil based chalk or others are not to be used during shop fabrication. 5.2 Surface Preparation A. General

1. Methods: To AS 1627. 2. Site connections: After completing the connection, prepare the surface of the connection,

adjacent unprimed surfaces and surfaces damaged during erection. 3. Steel surfaces generally: Remove loose millscale, loose rust, oil, grease, dirt, globules of

weld metal, weld slag and other foreign matter. B. Marking : On the contact surfaces of friction type joints, confine the use of marking ink to the minimum necessary for marking hole positions. C. Abrasive blast cleaning: Do not use silica abrasive for dry blasting. Use phosphate inhibitors when wet blasting. 5.3 Protective Coatings A. Surface treatment to AS2312-2002 (unless noted otherwise). B. Durability – Years to first maintenance: Exposed (visible) 15 years C. Paints referenced below are Dulux Protective Coatings

Type A: Class 2.5 blast clean. 75µm Zincanode 402, 75µm Duramax GPE, 75µm Weathermax HBR Type B: Hot Dipped Galvanised pacified , plus 75µm Durebuild STE, 75µm Duramax GPE, 75µm Weathermax HBR (Colour selected by Superintendant) Type C: 400µm Durebild STE (2 coats),100mm above ground/finished floor level, over Type A or B Type D: Hot Dipped Galvanised in accordance with AS/NZS 4791 and 4792

Minimum Coating mass 600kgs/m3

* Ensure compatibility of all coatings.



Surface Treatment

Atmospheric Corrosivity Category

Parts of Steel Work

Type A B Internal Steel non wash down areas Type B C Internal Steelwork Wash Down Areas &

Steelwork Exposed to Weather, including glass canopies.

Type C D Members in contact with the ground or below finished floor level.

Type D C External Steelwork Exposed to Weather

D. Site Repairs (e.g. after site welding) Bristle blast or power tool clean area to be treated. Apply 250µm Duramax STE. Where Architectural finish is

required, apply suitable primer and final coat to suit the required treatment. E. Apply finish coats in accordance with Architectural requirements. 5.4 Hot Dipped Galvanising

A. Where steel is specified as being galvanised, prepare surface to Class 2½ AS 1627.4 and then treat by pickling and neutralising in accordance with the best trade practice.

B. Carry out galvanising to steel members by the Hot Dip process in accordance with AS/NZS 4791 and 4792 to provide a uniform zinc coating thoroughly adherent and weighing at least 600 g per square metre for general purposes.

C. Galvanise bolts and nuts by the hot dip process in accordance with AS 1214. Internal threads shall be tapped after galvanising. Surplus zinc shall be removed from external threads by centrifuging, brushing or similar. External threads shall not be recut.

D. Take care with all members, but in particular with unsymmetrical sections such as angles and channel members, to avoid distortion. Members may be straightened by an approved method to achieve the original shape, provided the galvanised coating is not damaged.

E. Wherever damage occurs to a galvanised surface or edge, apply two coats of an approved 2 part cold galvanising compound or an approved zinc rich paint strictly in accordance with manufacturers requirement to provide a total film thickness of 0.1 mm.

F. Where galvanised surfaces are affected by welding, use a zinc/tin lead alloy in a stick form such as CIG Galvanising Bar or similar, for repair. Apply the stick to the damaged areas after vigorous cleaning with a wire brush. Apply the stick to the weld area while it is still hot or, alternatively, pre-heat the surface to be treated to 315�C. Spread the molten alloy with a wire brush or flexible blade.

G. Where the galvanised coating is specified as architectural finish, finish to the member the galvanising is to be architectural grade and quality. Builder is to prepare samples for the architect to view and approve if acceptable standard. An approved sample will be used as a measure of the finish and members outside this will be rejected and require replacement at the builders cost.

H. Rough Areas surrounding the welding or cutting should be buffed to a uniform appearance. I. Sharp edges will normally be heavily coated with zinc but may sometimes need post galvanizing

inspection and dressing. J. At the design stage, ensure that the article to be galvanized will fit inside the galvanizing bath in a

single dip and discuss with galvanizer provisions for adequate filling, venting and draining. Ensure that the design will allow even zinc runoff. This can have a significant effect on the ability to achieve a smooth finish. As a general rule, the drainage should be a minimum of 30% of the cross sectional area of the article.

K. Specify steel which when galvanized, will produce a 'normal' coating in appearance. Certain steels containing silicon and / or phosphorous can produce coatings which can be dull or patchy grey in colour, with a rough finish and may be brittle. As a general rule the following criteria should be used:

% Si < 0.04 % % Si + (2.5 x % p) < 0.09 % While dull coating denotes thicker and longer lasting protection, appearance is adversely affected. L. In extreme cases shot blasting of deformed surfaces may be necessary depending on the finish

required. Examples of a requirement for blasting would be structural CHS (Circular Hollow Sections0 particularly lacquer coated in the warehouse where part removal has allowed corrosion and texture to affect the steel surface.

M. Specify the steel to be galvanized in accordance with Australian Standard AS/NZS4680:1999 and highlight the need for the coating to be free from runs, dags, spikes, uneven surfaces and roughness or other defects that could affect appearance.

N. Welding quality should be free from porosity, all weld slag removed and grinding marks minimized. O. Inspection of the finished galvanized work must take place at the galvanizer's yard prior to dispatch. P. To maintain optimum appearance, it is important that care be taken to ensure the coating is not

dirtied or damaged during transportation, site storage and or erection. Q. If the galvanized coating is to be subsequently painted (Duplex Coating) the galvanizer should be

advised of the paint system to be used at the time of order, as certain operating procedures may need to be taken to ensure the paint coating can be properly applied.



R. Differing time periods will temporarily show brightness variations at the early stages of exposure but are a transitory effect.

S. Care is required with site storage to provide open ventilation which prevents moisture entrapment with resulting wet storage stain. This is normally a temporary condition which does not affect the lift of the coating.

T. As the galvanizing surface texture can vary and is dependent on steel chemical composition, consult with the galvanizer on procurement.

5.5 INSPECTION A The Sub Contractor is to employ and pay for the services of an Inspector, registered with the Australian Corrosion Authority, to ensure that all exposed steelwork has been inspected and that each of the following has been complied with to the satisfaction of the Inspector. 1 All exposed steelwork has been blast cleaned to specified levels prior to painting 2. All protective treatments have been checked and comply with specification 3. All site welded and site damaged paint has been prepared, in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations, prior to touching up 4. Paint application including environmental conditions all comply with the manufacturers recommendations. B On completion of the job, the sub contractor is to issue a certificate of compliance for all of the above, from the inspector to the Project Manager and copy to the Architect and Structural Engineer 6. COMPLETION 6.1 Temporary Connections Remove temporary cleats on completion and restore the surface.

END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING

SECTION 05400 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING


Provide load bearing and non-loadbearing cold formed metal framing to locations shown on the drawings and to meet the structural engineer’s design. Provide all components to approved submission of samples and shop drawings. Design, engineer, supply and install a complete cold formed metal framing, including but not limited to: Load bearing wall framing Non-loadbearing wall framing Loadbearing roof framing Other

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the tradesmen preparing floors, installing windows and doors and weatherproofing material, including casting in of anchors where required.

103 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer qualifications: not less than 6 years continuous experience in the manufacture of

the product types specified. B. Installer Qualifications: installer is to have not less than 3 years continuous experience in the

erection of specified material.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS/NZS 1170 Structural design actions.

1170.1 2002 Permanent, imposed and other actions. Plus 2 Amdts,2005 – 2009.

1170.2 2011 Wind actions. 1170.3 2003 Snow and ice actions. Plus 1 Amdt, 2007. 1170.4 2007 Earthquake actions in Australia. Amdt 1 2015 There is 1 other part, several Supplements and Amdts, 2002 – 2011.

AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding. 1554.1 2014 Welding of steel structures, 1 Amdt 2015. 1554.2 2003 Stud welding (steel studs to steel) Plus 1 Amdt, 2003. 1554.3 2014 Welding of reinforcing steel. 1554.4 2014 Welding of high strength quenched and tempered

steels. 1554.5 2014 Welding of steel structures subject to high levels of

fatigue loading. 1554.6 2012 Welding stainless steels for structural purposes. 1554.7 2014 Welding of sheet steel structures.

AS 3623 1993 Domestic metal framing. Comply with relevant authority's requirement for fire.

105 Submissions Required Prior to Fabrication A. Complete system description including the following information:

1. Names of manufacturers of products. 2. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local representatives for products. 3. Types, model numbers and names of products, and indication whether products are "off

the shelf" or custom fabricated. Include specific information on finishes - thicknesses, patented process name, process description and test data.

4. Detailed information on products manufactured specifically for this project. 5. Detailed system description including standard details and manufacturer's literature; and

large-scale details of specially fabricated products. B. Statement that the proposed system meet(s) the regulatory requirements, thermal, aesthetic and

wind loading, construction, warranty requirements specified; noting in detail exceptions. C. Shop drawings: refer DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT,

clause 27. Provide shop drawings showing the following information where appropriate to the items: 1. Layout (sectional plan and elevation of complete assembly). 2. Full size section of members. 3. Methods of assembly, type and location of exposed screws. 4. Methods of installation, including fixings, anchorage, flashings. 5. Provision for expansion (thermal).


6. Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces. 7. Fittings and accessories.

D. Engineer's calculations on wind loading, live and dead loads.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Handle materials with care. Do not store on site. Install directly in place as instructed by manufacturer. Where possible, deliver pre-assembled panels of framing, roof trusses etc., ready for immediate placement and connection.

PART II MATERIALS200 201 General

Provide all work in accordance with approved shop drawings and samples as well as technical data information from approved manufacturers and certified by the structural engineer for adequacy. The following manufacturers of frames are acceptable:

202 Materials Wall, floor and roof framing components manufactured from corrosion resistant steel materials. Match components detailed on drawings or an alternative approved in writing by the architect.

203 Structural Criteria Adopt Terrain Category: 3.0 Refer AS/NZS 1170. Wind loading: design: Frame assemblies to suit the static and dynamic wind forces as indicated on the tables in the AS/NZS 1170. Structural members of units of such strength that when tested at the specified design wind values they do not deflect by an amount greater than span/240 and do not cause permanent deflection. Fix members so that the above loading is generated in the members without stress causing failure or movement becoming evident at any joint. Movement: permit free and noiseless movement of the components due to thermal effects, structural effect, wind pressure, effect of dead loads, without strain to the frames, without buckling of components and without excessive stress to members or assemblies. Contact with other materials: coat metal surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, plaster, masonry, wet-application of fire-proofing and absorbent materials with an anti-galvanic, moisture barrier material. Isolate, with inert material, dissimilar metals for the prevention of electrolytic action and corrosion. Distortion: design the assembly to minimise visual distortion.

204 Detail Design Provisions A. General: the architect's drawings are to be considered essentially schematic except for profiles of

exposed surfaces and panel arrangement where indicated. If, in the opinion of the builder a change of profile is required in order to meet the specification, arrange through the architect for a review of the condition. Design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to suit each specified condition in an acceptable manner complying with the requirements specified herein.

B. Tolerances: design frames to accommodate building tolerances, and when completed, within the following tolerances: 1. Deviation from plumb, level or dimensioned angle within 3mm per 3.5m of length of

member, or 6mm in total run in line. 2. Deviation from theoretical position on plan or elevation, including deviation from plumb,

level or dimensioned angle not to exceed 9mm total at location. 3. Change in deviation not to exceed 3mm for 3.5m run in direction.

205 Fabrication

Form junctions so that no fixings, such as pins, screws, pressure indentations and the like are visible on exposed faces. Show on shop drawings fixings which will be exposed. Cut edges, drill holes, rivet joints and clean flat sheets, neat, free from burrs and indentations. Remove sharp edges without excessive deformation. Fit mitred joints accurately to a fine hairline. Pre-assemble and match mark before delivery.

PART III EXECUTION300 301 Examination

Inspect site conditions before start of work on site, before delivery of materials. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation. Perform rectification required before delivery of materials.


Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the requirements of the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice and relevant Australian Standards. Prepare surfaces affected by the installation in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions.

303 Frame Anchorage Fabricator is required to supply the anchorage devices to the builder for building in by others and check that devices are located as required to suit the requirements of the fabrication for positive and permanent fixing. Insulation: isolate dissimilar metals at interfaces with bitumen based or nylon shim materials to prevent galvanic action. Make good concrete or masonry damaged during the installation of masonry anchors at no cost to the proprietor.

304 Installation Wall frames: vertical. Permitted maximum tolerance is 3mm in 3000mm. Floor frames: horizontal. Permitted maximum tolerance is 3mm in 3000mm. Except where otherwise directed. Secure in place in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

305 Cleaning Debris: remove rubbish and debris resulting from the fabrication and erection operations, each day.

306 Completion Complete contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the architect.

END OF SECTION

Regent College Page 1 of 5 SECTION 05500 METALWORK

SECTION 05500 METALWORK


Provide items listed on the drawings and where scheduled. Supply, engineer and install required general and architectural metalwork items including but not limited to: Floor finish trims Sundry metalwork items Furniture Steel Roof Walkway

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trade sections:

103 Quality Assurance Ensure that all items of this trade section are adequate for the intended task and meet all statutory requirements of the National Building Code. Work of this section will be performed by experienced craftsmen familiar with the quality required in this class of work. Comply throughout with manufacturer's instructions.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding. There are 7 parts, 2003– 2014. AS 1627 Metal finishing - Preparation and pre-treatment of surfaces.


AS/NZS 1734 1997 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Flat sheet, coiled sheet and plate. AS/NZS 1866 1997 Aluminium and aluminium alloys - Extruded rod, bar, solid and hollow shapes. AS 4100 1998 Steel structures. Plus 1 Supplement 1999, 1 Amdt 2012. AS/NZS 4673 2001 Cold-formed stainless steel structures. AS/NZS 4680 2006 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles. Comply with requirements of statutory and local authorities.

105 Shop Drawings Comply with DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, clause 27. Provide shop drawings for major items supplied hereunder. A. Contract drawings and details provided are indicative as to general and minimum requirements,

and do not show conditions. Develop details not shown and in conformity with the indicative details shown.

B. Take and confirm dimensions on site, before preparing Shop Drawings where possible. C. Submit detailed shop drawings for fabrication and installation of major metalwork. Show plans,

elevations and detailed sections; indicate materials, finishes, types of joinery, fasteners, anchorages and accessory items. Provide setting diagrams and full-scale templates of blocking, anchorages, sleeves and bolts installed by others.

106 Samples

Sample welds: if requested, provide samples of weld types, including samples of railings joined at right angles and at typical acute angles, welded and ground smooth, for approval. If not acceptable, provide additional samples until approved. Approved samples establish quality of similar work of this section. Check on delivery: request architect to check materials on delivery to site for quality, and materials not meeting the requirements of this specification or equal to approved samples will be rejected. Return rejected materials to the fabricator at the fabricator's expense. Finish: provide samples of specified finishes when requested.

PART II MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

Before ordering materials obtain and provide to the architect written evidence that items to be installed comply with Australian Standards and are approved by statutory authorities having jurisdiction. If non-approved materials or components are installed, replacement will be at contractor’s expense.


201 Materials and Components

Provide all materials and components suitable for the intended use and meeting the statutory and the industry standards for the required performance. Confirm with technical data and samples at the submission stage of the specification and obtain an approval prior to commencing work. Metalwork Components Schedule

ITEM Manufacturer Cat No. Material Finish/ Colour

Details

Liquid Soap Dispensers

Bobrick B2111 Stainless Steel

Satin Supply & install as shown on the drawings

Paper Towel Dispenser

Bobrick B262 Stainless Steel

Satin Supply & install as shown on the drawings

Bench supports

N/A N/A Mild steel Powdercoat Refer drawings

Toilet Roll Holder

N/A N/A N/A N/A Install Owner supplied item

Door Grilles Refer Mechanical

Refer Mechanical

Aluminium Powdercoat -

Grab rails Metlam MLR103 Stainless Steel

Satin 90° Flush Mount Side Wall & Cistern Grab Rail LH Set

Grab rails Metlam MLR112 Stainless Steel

Satin 90° Ambulant Grab Rail

Grab rails Metlam ML332 Stainless Steel

Satin 750mm straight grab rail

Folding Shower Seat

Metlam ML995CL Compact Laminate

- -

Coat Hooks (UAT)

Metlam 202SCP Diecast zinc

Satin Chrome

Concealed Fix Coat Hook (2 No.)

Shower Screen

Sonata Shower cube

Polyester WHITE Finish 10mm minimum above floor surface.

Shower Screen Track

JD MacDonald JDMTRACK-L1200A

Aluminium Anodised -

Roller Blind Vertilux Easydrive BGS 1.02a

- Refer Interior Finishes Schedule.

Supply and install to windows as scheduled

Linear Threshold drain

Aco Refer Hydraulics Services section

Stainless Steel

Refer Hydraulics Services section

Refer Hydraulics Services section and drawings

Handrails and balustrades

Monowills Monowills Link Balustrade

Mild Steel Galvanised Refer to drawings for locations and extent.

Hose tap wall box

Pride Industries

Hose tap box - regular

Stainless Steel

Polished Refer Hydraulics drawings for locations

Furniture frame

- - Mild Steel Powdercoat Refer drawings for details and extent

Welding Benches

- - Mild Steel Hot dip galvanised

Refer to drawings for details and locations

Plywood Storage Rack



Long metal storage rack



Vertical metal storage rack



Bulk timber storage rack



Model Storage Shelving

- - Mild Steel Powdercoat Refer to drawings for details and locations


ITEM Manufacturer Cat No. Material Finish/ Colour

Details

Welding Bay Partitions

- - Steel / Compressed sheet

Hot dip galvanised


Welding Bay Curtains

Flexshield Weldflex 2mm thick strip curtain

Refer to drawings for locations and extent

Machine Room Floor Trench Cover

6mm Checker plate

Galvanised Refer to drawings for extent

202 Roof Walkway System

Fabricate and install roof walkway system comprising roof walkway, permanent access ladders and ladder access platforms in locations shown on the drawings.

A. Permanent Access Ladders (PAL) I. All permanent roof access ladders to be of aluminium or hot dipped galvanised

construction designed, constructed and installed in accordance with AS1657 and manufacturer's specifications.

II. Ladder rungs/treads shall be equally spaced and terminate level with the step off point. III. All ladder stiles/handrails are to extend minimum 1000mm past the step off point. IV. All ladder support fixings and brackets to be installed to the building structure. V. Base of ladders shall be fixed to suitable platforms in accordance with manufacturer’s

specifications. VI. Contractor to confirm final locations on site including all equipment sizes, heights,

clearances, fixings and any additional structure required prior to fabrication and installation.

VII. Allow for shop detailing required to fabricate and assemble equipment. VIII. All fixings, brackets & ancillary items required for a complete installation shall be included. IX. All cuts, burs and sharp edges shall be ground down and left smooth. X. Use bolted connections for ladder components and install plastic caps to excess bolt

threads. XI. Contractor to provide details prior to fabrication and installation to superintendent for

approval.

B. Walkway I. Walkways shall support minimum design loads for maintenance purposes in accordance

with AS1657. II. Walkway systems shall be proprietary (Juralco or similar approved) and comply with

AS1657. Contractor to provide details of any proposed alternative product for approval by superintended prior to supply and installation.

III. Proprietary battens used to fix walkway material direct to roof sheeting shall be provided at minimum spacing in accordance with manufacturer’s specifications and AS1657.

IV. Contractors to observe requirements for supporting walkway over translucent sheeting (where required). Battens fixed direct to roof sheeting shall use minimum 5mm rivets (or as specified by the manufacturer) with adhesive butyl rubber membrane provided between surfaces to ensure waterproofing between fixings.

V. Battens fixed direct to roof sheeting shall be fixed to the rib of the sheet profile. VI. All cut edges of walkways shall have edge strips or joiner bars riveted to the walkway

edge. VII. All components to be installed as per manufacturer’s specifications.

VIII. Walkway panels laid side by side shall include a maximum vertical height tolerance of ±5mm.

IX. All dimensions on the drawings are approximate. Contractor to survey the roof and confirm lengths and paths following construction and placement of all roof mounted services and equipment. Any variance to walkway quantities shall be submitted to the superintendent for approval prior to supply and installation.

X. Provide all additional hardware and ancillary items for a complete installation.

C. Permanent Level Platform (PLP) I. All Permanent Level Platforms (PLP) to consist of trafficable expanded metal mesh

(Juralco or similar) and comply with AS1657. II. Platform material to be level and supported on battens and sub-frame to suit roof or

structure below. Requirements for supply, fabrication and installation of battens and support frame to be as per manufacturer’s specifications.


III. Battens fixed direct to roof sheeting shall use minimum 5mm rivets (or as specified by the manufacturer) with adhesive butyl rubber membrane provided between surfaces to ensure waterproofing between fixings.

IV. All cut edges of platforms shall have edge strips installed. V. Provide all additional hardware and ancillary items for a complete installation.

203 Finish Materials exposed to weather may be either: Mild steel - hot dipped galvanised after fabrication or chromate pre-treated followed by polyester powder coating. Finish internal steel after fabrication with zinc-rich organic primer, or with inorganic zinc silicate paint. Comply with relevant codes of practice or manufacturers' recommendations.

204 Welding Steel General: details of joints, the techniques of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds made and the methods used to correct defective work; conform to requirements of AS/NZS 1554. Welds exposed to view: grind smooth to architect's approval. Concealed welds: grind smooth before galvanising. Tack or skip welding: at regular intervals, very neat. Not permitted if material is to be hot dip galvanised. Remove weld spatter. Certification: only welders who have previously been qualified by tests may weld. Tack welding or skip welding will NOT be permitted where items are to be galvanised. Weld continuously form joints and connections to exclude water and to permit draining during galvanising. Stainless steel welding: refer AS/NZS 1554.

205 Connection Design General: design fabricated items so that possible work is done before delivery. Fully protect for shipment. Take possible care to prevent damage. A. Welding external items: conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS 1554, noting particularly the

design criteria. B. Flanges: concealed where possible. Sleeve connecting railings inside railing sections and

secure with flush or set screws. Except where access is impossible, connection screws and bolts will be on the underside of joints.

C. Fasteners on the top of railing sections will not be permitted. D. Weld shop connections for steel fabrications, and bolt field connections. E. Provide smooth finishes to exposed surfaces with sharp well-defined lines and arrises. Mill to a

close fit machined joints. Design necessary lugs, brackets and similar items so that work can be assembled and installed in a neat, substantial manner.

F. Provide ample strength and stiffness by using appropriate metal thickness of assembly and supports.

G. Provide holes and connections as required to accommodate the work of other trades and for site assembly of metalwork. Drill or punch and ream in the shop.

206 Miscellaneous

Fasteners: provide required bolts, screws, inserts, fasteners, templates and other accessories required for a complete installation. Coordinate with other trades as to the proper fastening systems suitable for the substrates to which the item is to be secured. Refer to architect if in doubt. Fasten galvanised items with galvanised fasteners.

207 Dissimilar Metals In moist environments, e.g. swimming pools of either fresh water or sea water etc., prevent totally contact between dissimilar metals (any metals). This instruction takes priority over any drawing, detail or instruction and will prevent cathodic reaction between the metals. Refer this instruction to the structural engineer.


Inspect site conditions before fabrication, where possible, and before delivery of materials. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation. Arrange for rectification required. Start of work means total acceptance of relevant conditions.

302 Preparation Field measurements: do not delay job progress. Allow for adjustments and fitting of the work in the field where taking of measurements might cause delay.


Coordination with work of others: furnish to each relevant trade foreman anchorages and setting drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for installation of items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the project site.

303 Inspection and Reinstatement Check fabrications as they are unloaded at the project site for evidence of physical damage. Treat damaged fabrications as follows: A. Damage through galvanising: perform immediate inorganic zinc silicate paint or cold-galvanising

repair. Do not install until reinstated. B. Architectural metalwork: returned to shop for repair or replacement. Verify anchors, bolts and other required anchorage items for proper size and accurate location prior to erection.

304 Installation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or relevant Australian Standards, Anchorage: except for anchorages furnished herein but placed by other trades, set and secure necessary anchorages, including concrete and masonry inserts, bolts, wood screws and other connectors as needed. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as needed, locating anchorages and holes to ensure proper positioning of completed work. Fit: during installation and assembly, form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted, and reveals uniform. Finish work accurately, plumb, level, square and true in reference to adjacent construction. Make tolerances conform to Australian Standards. Finish: do not cut or abrade shop finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field. The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted under conditions. Fabrications may be cut shorter with power hacksaws on site. Isolate dissimilar metals likely to be subject to moisture with inert materials, not visible on completion of installation.

305 Field Quality Control Where considered necessary by the architect, arrange for the manufacturer of products to instruct installers regarding correct installation.

306 Protection Cover work: immediately following installation, wrap or cover architectural metalwork to avoid wear and tear of finish during subsequent construction.

307 Cleaning Clean materials installed to the satisfaction of the architect. Remove temporary protective coatings.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES

SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES


Design, fabricate, supply and install exterior and interior handrail, and rails (which form a balustrade) including but not limited to: Metal pipe handrails and railings. Associated material: composite timber balusters. Certify on completion for compliance.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following other trades: Floor construction Carpentry Wall construction Metal work Concrete Metal finishes – Shop applied

103 Quality Assurance A. Submit samples and shop drawings with calculations for structural adequacy for approval. B. Installer qualifications: installer is not to have less than 5 years continuous experience in the

erection of specified material.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding. There are 7 parts, 2003 – 2014 AS 1627 Metal finishing - Preparation and pretreatment of surfaces.

1627.6 2003 Chemical conversion treatment of metals. There are 6 other parts, 1997 - 2005

AS 4100 1998 Steel structures. Plus 1 Supplement, 1999, 1 Amdt 2012. AS/NZS 4673 2001 Cold-formed stainless steel structures. Comply with requirements of statutory and local authorities.



201 Acceptable Manufacturers Monowills

202 Materials

Monowills Link balustrade system installed to comply with AS 1170.1 in locations and to the extent shown on the drawings.

203 Finish Galvanised

204 Fabrication Before delivery to site, pre assemble where possible all items to ensure proper fit and dimension of each item. Disassemble and pack carefully for shipping to the site. On delivery and unloading, inspect for damage and arrange immediate replacement if necessary.

205 Source Quality Control Advise architect when material is ready for inspection before delivery. Arrange for architect to inspect each item and indicate approval or otherwise by marking a check list of every item required for the project.



South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 05520 HANDRAILS AND BALUSTRADES

302 Preparation

A. Field measurements: do not delay job progress. Allow for adjustments and fitting of the work in the field where taking of measurements might cause delay.

B. Coordination with work of others: furnish to each relevant trade foreman anchorages and setting drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for installation of items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the project site.

303 Inspection and Reinstatement

A. Check fabrications as they are unloaded at the project site for evidence of physical damage. Treat damaged fabrications as follows: 1. Damage through galvanising: perform immediate inorganic zinc silicate paint or cold-

galvanising repair. Do not install until reinstated. 2. Architectural metalwork: returned to shop for repair or replacement.

B. Verify anchors, bolts and other required anchorage items for proper size and accurate location prior to erection.

304 Installation

A. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant.

B. Anchorage: except for anchorages furnished herein but placed by other trades, set and secure necessary anchorages, including concrete and masonry inserts, bolts, wood screws and other connectors as needed. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as needed, locating anchorages and holes to ensure proper positioning of completed work.

C. Fit: during installation and assembly, form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted, and reveals uniform. Finish work accurately, plumb, level, square and true in reference to adjacent construction. Make tolerances conform to Australian Standards.

D. Finish: do not cut or abrade shop finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field. The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted under conditions. Fabrications may be cut shorter with power hacksaws on site. Isolate dissimilar metals likely to be subject to moisture with inert materials, not visible on completion of installation.

305 Field Quality Control

Where considered necessary by the architect, arrange for the manufacturer of products to instruct installers regarding correct installation.




END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 06165 FIBRE CEMENT PRODUCTS

SECTION 06165 FIBRE CEMENT PRODUCTS


Supply and install fibre cement products and associated equipment and fixings including but not limited to: External cladding. Soffit Linings.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Wall framing Ceiling framing

103 Quality Assurance A tradesman with wide experience and knowledgeable in this class of work is to undertake the work to be performed.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 2329 1999 Mastic adhesives for fixing wallboards. AS/NZS 2908 Cellulose-cement products.

2908.1 2000 Corrugated sheets. 2908.2 2000 Flat sheet.

AS 3740 2010 Waterproofing of domestic wet areas. 1 Amdt, 2012 Relevant Technical Bulletins and published instructions produced by manufacturers. Telephone Customer Services of state office for technical assistance. Comply with requirements of relevant statutory authorities.

105 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver materials in bundles or packages with care. Stack on edge or lie flat under cover and keep dry until installed. Protect edges and covers from chipping.

106 Warranty Provide warranty covering the work against defective materials and workmanship for a period years from the date of Practical Completion. Include a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with relevant Australian Standards and codes and manufacturer's instructions in effect at the time of installation.

PART II MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS200 201 Acceptable Manufacturers

James Hardie Australia. Rondo Building Services Pty Ltd. CSR Building materials. BGC

202 Materials

A. James Hardie Exotec Façade System comprising compressed fibre cement 9mm thick sheet together with all accessories.

B. James Hardie 6mm Versilux soffit lining with expressed joints. C. James Hardie 6mm Villaboard ceiling lining with flush joints. D. Black PVC extrusion expressed jointer for 6mm Versilux sheet. E. James Hardie 9mm Villaboard internal wall lining with flush joints.

203 Equipment Supply equipment required for the erection and installation of the specified materials as recommended by the manufacturer.



Visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to the drawings before delivery of materials to site. Rectify any discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Coordinate with and ensure preparatory work by other trades is done, prior to commencement of work and arrange for fixing grounds required for satisfactory execution of the work of this trade, including penetrations through cement sheet for services.

303 Installation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Comply with the manufacturer's installation instructions. Anchor and fasten materials and components to comply with ratings and performance requirements, and to comply with governing local regulations. Comply with appropriate Australian Standard. Take care of and protect surrounding work, including other finishes, equipment and components, during installation. Provide protective covering where necessary.

304 Installation Particulars Comply in all respects with manufacturers’ recommendations contained in technical bulletins. Call for technical advice where necessary. Refer clause 104. A. James Hardie ExoTec® Façade Panel Fixing System.

Incorporating ExoTec top hat, Intermediate JH tophat, ExoTec Gasket snap strip, ExoTec backing strip’s and ExoTec façadewasher. Install framing in strict accordance with the manufactures instructions. Fasteners shall be Countersunk head self-drilling screw No.10x30mm (Class 3 minimum coating to AS 3566). Panels to be screw fixed to framing through pre-drilled holes. Drill with a 6mm masonry drill, which provides a 6.2mm to 6.3mm diameter hole. Joints - Colorbond backed Horizontal joints: Proprietary Colorbond steel backing strip fixed to the rear face of the panel with adhesive tape horizontal gasket. Seal the joint with a 3 mm epoxy fillet. Vertical joints: Proprietary top hat framing and adhesive gasket. Intermediate supports - top hat backed Fixing: Double side tape fix to proprietary top hat intermediate frame. Use full sheet lengths and minimise joints where possible. Refer façade layout drawings for setouts. Comply in all respects with manufacturers recommendations contained in technical bulletins. Call for technical advice where necessary. Refer Clause 104. Refer Section 07200 Insulation for sarking and thermal breaks. FINISH: Paint as scheduled.

B. Versilux® 6mm Soffit Lining

SUPPORT FRAMING: Furring channels fixed to soffit framing at 500 mm maximum spacing within 1200 mm of the corners of the building and 600 mm maximum spacings elsewhere. FASTENERS: Fastener Durability: Ensure that all fasteners have the appropriate level of durability required for the prevailing environmental conditions. Fasteners must be fully compatible with all other materials that they are in contact with to ensure the durability and integrity of the assembly. Fastener Type: 22 mm "HardieDrive" self-embedding head screws by James Hardie Australia Pty Ltd. Do not over drive fasteners. Do not use adhesives. Material: To AS3566.2 Class 3. Fastener Spacing: Locate fasteners not less than 12 mm from sheet edges and 50 mm from sheet corners. Fastener Centres: Within 1200 mm of Building Corners: 300 mm maximum. Elsewhere: 300 mm maximum. JOINTS: Form expressed joints by black PVC extrusion expressed jointer. Joint Layout: Grid. INSTALLATION: Install in accordance with James Hardie's current instructions and recommendations. APPLIED FINISH: Painted as scheduled in the 'Finishes Schedule'.


305 Finishing Details Finish joints and secure fasteners. Remove surface defects to achieve uniform appearance of each type of installation.

306 Protection Protect finished work. Make good damage in every respect at no additional cost to the proprietor.

307 Cleaning Clean exposed surfaces including trim, edge moldings, and comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove spatterings, droppings and surplus material.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 06400 JOINERY

SECTION 06400 JOINERY


The work of this trade section covers the supply and installation of caseworm joinery items. It includes, but is not limited to: Trim, architraves, skirtings, pelmets etc.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Floor construction Wall construction Ceiling construction Window trades Doors and door frames Plaster trades Electrical installations Hydraulic installations

103 Quality Assurance Prototype: at a location selected by the architect construct a complete prototype installation of: Include in each prototype elements required by this specification, finished in every respect. When approved by the architect, each prototype remains part of the work and becomes the standard for the remaining work.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the Australian Standards listed in SECTION 06100 CARPENTRY, plus those following, current edition: AS/NZS 1859 Reconstituted wood-based panels - Specifications

1859.1 2004 Particleboard. Plus 2 Amdts, 2006 - 2011. 1859.2 2004 Dry processed fibreboard. Plus 2 Amdts, 2006. 1859.3 2005 Decorative overlaid wood panels. Plus 1 Amdt 2009. There is 1 other part, 2004.

AS 2754.2 1991 Adhesives for timber and timber products - Polymer emulsion adhesives. AS 2796 Timber - Hardwood- Sawn and milled products. There are 3 parts, 1999-

2006. AS 4785 2002 Timber - Softwood- Sawn and milled products.

4785.1 2002 Product specification. 4785.2 2002 Grade description. 4785.3 2002 Timber for furniture components.

AS 4786.2 2005 Timber flooring - Sanding and finishing.

105 Submissions Submit the following prior to fabrication: Product literature on proposed hardware items. Technical data on melamine laminates proposed for use. Technical data and samples of substrate materials (particleboard etc.). Thickness of materials at typical locations.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Do not deliver until completion of anything which could soil, damage or deteriorate joinery. Prevent soiling, damage or deterioration during delivery, storage and handling. Keep site storage to a minimum. If circumstances make storage necessary in areas other than the final location, store only in those that meet the requirements specified for installation areas.

PART II MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS 201 General

Provide all casework joinery items on site fully coordinated with services, check for site dimensions and constructed from approved high moisture resistant materials. Provide to an approved sample component if required by the architect.

202 Materials Medium Density Fibre board. Refer Finishes Schedule.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 06400 JOINERY

PART III EXECUTION300203, G 301 Examination

Visit the site and inspect conditions. Check dimensions and compare aspects with the drawings and specification. Resolve differences before ordering materials or starting work. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation for Joinery Installation

Prior to installing, condition joinery to the average humidity conditions prevailing in the installation areas. Deliver anchoring devices and similar inserts required to be built into substrates well in advance of the fixing of fittings and provide full details when they are to be fixed by others. Prior to installation, examine shop-fabricated work for completeness and remedy deficiencies. Include back priming and the removal of packing. Thoroughly clean floors and walls that will be permanently concealed by joinery.

303 Installation of Joinery Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Use concealed shims as required to install the work plumb, level, straight and distortion free within the following tolerances:

- 1mm in 800mm for plumb and level (including bench tops), - 0.5mm maximum offsets in flush adjoining surfaces, - 2mm maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces.

Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work; refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finishes at cuts. Secure joinery with anchors or blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required to complete the installation. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails, countersunk and filled flush. Use a matching filler where a transparent finish is required. Install casework without distortion so that doors will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned.

304 Hardware Install joinery hardware as scheduled, listed and required in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust as needed to centre doors in openings.

305 Adjustments, Cleaning, Finishing and Protection A. Finish the work specified in this trade section and remedy anything not finished at the shop or

other stage prior to completion. B. Adjust joinery to achieve a uniform appearance. C. Lubricate and clean hardware, making final adjustments needed for proper operation.

Remove handling marks from visible joinery surfaces. D. Protection: do everything needed to ensure that work is without damage or deterioration at

Practical Completion.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 7 SECTION 07130 WATERPROOFING AND TANKING

SECTION 07130 WATERPROOFING AND TANKING


This trade section identifies requirements for the supply and installation of 4 different types and areas of waterproofing. It covers preparatory and protective work and associated materials including but not limited to: A. System Type A, Wet Area membrane as in bathrooms, showers, laundries, garbage rooms and

similar areas. B. System Type B, External membrane applied to outside of walls, roof decks, balconies and similar

locations. C. System Type C, Tanking membrane applied to retaining walls, planter boxes, lift pits and other

walls to be backfilled. D. System Type D, Waterproofing added to concrete mix before placement.

Refer to Concrete trade sections.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Concrete Masonry Surface finishes Roofing Excavation and fill Windows Concrete screeds (granolithic)

103 Quality Assurance Use experienced and trained installers licensed by the material manufacturer. Provide evidence of the licence to the architect.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1884 2012 Floor coverings – Resilient sheet and tiles – Laying and maintenance

practices. AS 3600 2009 Concrete structures. Plus 2 Amdts, 2010, 2013, 1 Supplement 2014. AS 3740 2010 Waterproofing of domestic wet areas. 1 Amdt, 2012 AS 3799 1998 Liquid membrane-forming curing compounds for concrete. AS 4654 Waterproofing and membranes for external above-ground use

4654.1 2012 Materials 4654.2 2012 Design and installation

AS/NZS 4858 2004 Wet area membranes.

105 Manufactured Products Identification of a particular manufacturer’s product does not exclude alternative products by others. It is a quality standard required to be met. Submit request for alternatives to be approved to the architect with full description including recommended installation procedures and procedures relating to Occupational Health and Safety of applicators and other site personnel. Written evidence is to be supplied verifying compliance with relevant Australian Standards and the requirements of statutory authorities having jurisdiction. Do not order materials until written approval of alternatives has been received. Submit manufacturer’s approval of installers where manufacturer’s own licensed installers are not employed and a warranty is required.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Keep on-site storage of materials to a minimum, delivering them as required for direct installation. Be responsible for loss and damage to delivered materials, both stockpiled and in place. Deliver materials in sealed containers showing manufacturer’s name. Arrange for inspection of materials by the architect before using them.

107 Warranty Requirement Prior to completion of the waterproofing systems installation, provide each warranty, in the appropriate form; executed by the sub-contractor and the warrantor (or warrantors in the case of joint warranties); and for the required warranty period. Warranty Conditions Sub-contractor's obligations: the provision of a warranty does not relieve the sub-contractor of any of his contractual obligations.


Guarantee of performance: where the warrantor is a subsidiary of another organisation, provide that organisation's guarantee of performance of the warranty. Adjustment of warranty period: where any part of the work is required to be repaired or made good under a warranty, the warranty period does not terminate until that part has been satisfactorily repaired or made good; and in respect of that part, recommences from the date of completion of the repair or making good. Product warranties Provide separate product warranties for each of the waterproofing systems. System warranty Provide separate warranties for each of the waterproofing systems, signed jointly by the manufacturer and the installer, stating that the products applied comply with this specification, are suitable for the conditions to which they will be subjected and were correctly installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s published recommendations and details, the contract documents and provide a complete waterproof membrane. Warrant each of the waterproofing systems against any defects that affect their performance or appearance Defects include failure of any element of the waterproofing system, whether or not the failure causes the system not to achieve the design criteria or specified performance. The warranty must cover the repair and/or replacement of all other building elements, finishes etc. to which damage occurs as a consequence of a defect in, or repair work carried out, to the waterproofing system. Warranty Period As noted beside each of the waterproofing systems described in this specification.

PART II SYSTEM DESCRIPTION200


201 Waterproofing System Type A SYSTEM TYPE A – Wet Area Membrane Typically to floors and walls of wet areas: including bathrooms, ensuites, laundries and garbage rooms, and to wall areas immediately adjacent to and behind a bath, sink or similar fixture. Carry the membrane under fixtures, baths, shower bases, toilets, vanities and the like, and extend into the full area of shower recess: to a minimum height of 2100mm to walls of shower recess extending 300mm beyond the horizontal extent of the designated tiled wall area; to a height and width not less than 450mm to wall areas immediately adjacent to and behind a bath, sink or similar fixture. System Type: liquid applied, moisture curing, polyurethane liquid membrane. Proprietary item: Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Undertile non-exposed membrane system by Parchem. Substrate Curing: allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days prior to the application of the membrane. Cleaning: clean down the substrate surface to remove all curing agents, wax, grease, oil, dirt, dust and other foreign material and leave it clean, dry, dust free, smooth and free of undulations. Voids: patch with a non-shrinking quick setting grout and allow to cure for a minimum of 7 days prior to applying the membrane. Application Fillet: wherever a vertical penetration or upstand occurs, install Emer-Proof Elastic Joint Band System at the intersection of the vertical and horizontal surfaces. Primer: prime porous substrate (concrete/cement) typically with Emer-Proof Primer Porous. Prime non-porous materials (metals/plastics) typically with Emer-Proof Non-Porous Primer. Joints and penetrations: on the same day as priming, seal joints and penetrations with Emer-Seal PU 25 or PU 40 and subsequently covered with polyethylene bond breaker tape in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations. Application: apply two coats of Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Undertile non-exposed membrane to a minimum wet film thickness of 1.5mm to floors and walls in a single operation. Detailing Detail the membrane in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, as shown on the drawings and as follows: Turn the membrane down into the puddle flange of outlets. Turn the membrane up at, and seal to, all penetrations, pipes, waste outlets, etc. Turn the membrane up for 100mm at all walls, plinths, and other upstands. Dress the membrane over the horizontal leg of angle tile trims at doorways and turn up the vertical face of the angle to terminate level with the bottom of the floor tiles.


Similarly, dress the membrane up the face of door jambs to terminate at the underside of the floor tiles. The membrane turn up is to create a complete waterproof envelope to the floor area of the space being treated. Detail the membrane at movement joints in the substrate as detailed on the drawings. Membrane curing: allow 72 hours for the membrane to cure prior to carrying out water tests or applying finishes, toppings etc. Warranty Provide a warranty for materials and application of the membrane for a period of 20 years from the date of Practical Completion, to be in a form approved by the principal. Alternatives Type: any proposed alternative to the system specified below is to be a proprietary liquid applied or sheet membrane system which: has a current Australian Building Product and Systems Certification Scheme certificate (Australian Building Codes Board); or has a current technical opinion issued by the Australian Building Systems Appraisal Council (CSIRO) stating that the system is suitable for use as a waterproofing system for use in wet areas, shower recess bases and associated floors and wall/floor junctions which are to be tiled.

201B Waterproofing System Type B SYSTEM TYPE B – External Membrane Location - Refer Waterproofing Table and drawings: System: Parchem Index High performance, two layer torch-on, reinforced, polymer-bitumen waterproofing membrane system Substrate Curing: allow concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days prior to the application of the membrane. All surfaces shall be prepared, primed and the membrane applied strictly in accordance with the current manufacturer technical data sheet. All work shall be carried out by a pre-qualified contractor, who is well trained in the application of the specific, documented, membrane system. All materials used in conjunction with the new membrane system, shall be approved by the membrane manufacturer. Surface Preparation All surfaces to which the new membrane is to be applied, shall be smooth, clean, dry, and free from irregularities. Once all contaminants, existing membranes/coatings are removed, mechanical grind to eliminate all contaminants and to create a key for optimum performance adhesion of new membrane system. Sand / cement fillets, polymer modified, shall be installed at all change in direction of substrate locations (e.g. from horizontal to vertical). With sheet membranes all internal and external corners shall be double detailed in accordance with the manufacture’s recommendations. All substrate cracks and surface imperfections are to be filled, sealed and dry prior to membrane application. Application The base layer is to be 3 mm minimum thickness, elasto-plastomeric, polymer bitumen membrane based on distilled bitumen blended with both plastomers and elastomers polymers, reinforced with non-woven polyester fabric and stabilised longitudinally with glass fibres. When tested in accordance with UEAtc directive Jan 1984, it shall exhibit the following properties: Apply as per TDS and Methodology Statements. Details including upturns/downturns/penetrations etc to be installed as per Index Installation Guide, please refer to with Parchem Specification. Tensile strength longitudinal: 450 N/5 cm (ENI2311-1)

transverse: 400 N/5 cm Ultimate elongation longitudinal: 40% (EN12311-1)

transverse: 40% Service temperature: -10C to 100C (continuous ambient) Application temperature: 5C to 45C (ambient) The top layer is to be 4.0mm, elasto-plastomeric, based on distilled bitumen, plastomers and elastomers, reinforced with non-woven spunbonded polyester fabric. When tested in accordance with UEAtc directive Jan 1984 shall exhibit the following properties: Apply as per TDS and Methodology Statements. Details including upturns/downturns/penetrations etc to be installed as per Index Installation Guide, please refer to attached with Parchem Specification. Impermeability to water >= 60 kPa (EN1928) Tensile strength longitudinal: 750 N/5 cm (UNI8202)

transverse: 650 N/5 cm Ultimate elongation longitudinal: 50%

transverse: 50% Service temperature: -10C to 100C (continuous ambient) Application temperature: 5C to 45C (ambient0


Detailing Detail the membrane in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, as shown on the drawings and as follows: Turn the membrane down into the puddle flange of outlets. Turn the membrane up at, and dress to, all penetrations, pipes, waste outlets, etc. Turn the membrane up for a minimum of 150mm or level with the top of paving or tiles, at all walls, plinths, and other upstands. Refer to the drawings for extent as well. Where the membrane turns up against hobs etc., and where indicated on the drawings, provide a cover flashing. Capture the horizontal leg of the flashing in the bed joint of blockwork or by sealing into saw cuts or reglets in blockwork or concrete. Dress the vertical leg down over the membrane to achieve a minimum 75mm cover. Use Colorbond finished zincalume for cover flashings generally and marine grade stainless steel where the flashing is built into concrete or cement beds, toppings or pavements. Where indicated on the drawings, provide a K pressure seal to terminate the top of the membrane. Provide cover flashings over the turn up of membranes at all services penetrations. Form the flashing from material that is compatible with the material of the individual service and the membrane. Seal the flashing to the service and dress down over the membrane to achieve a minimum 150mm overlap. Detail the membrane at movement joints in the substrate as detailed on the drawings. Outlets: proprietary funnel shaped sump cast into the roof slab, set flush with membrane, with a flat removable grating and provision (e.g. clamp ring) for sealing the membrane into the base of the outlet. To AS CA55. Membrane curing: allow 72 hours for the membrane to cure prior to carrying out water tests or applying finishes, toppings etc. Topping screed and tiling: refer Concrete Screeds trade section. Warranty Provide a warranty for materials and application of the membrane for a period of 20 years from the date of Practical Completion, to be in a form approved by the principal.

201C Waterproofing System Type C SYSTEM TYPE C – Tanking Membrane Location Refer clause 101 and Waterproofing Table and drawings. Retaining walls. System Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Landscape high performance single component water based bituminous rubberised waterproofing membrane. Substrate Preparation: Clean down the concrete surface to remove all curing agents, wax, grease, oil, dirt, dust and other foreign material and leave it clean, dry, dust free, smooth and free of undulations. Voids: patch with a non-shrinking quick setting grout and allow to cure for a minimum of 7 days prior to applying the membrane. Penetrations: wherever a vertical penetration or upstand occurs, install a 50mm x 50mm sand cement fillet at the intersection of the vertical and horizontal surfaces. Primimg: Substrates must be primed, prior to the application of EmerProof Landscape. Dilute Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Landscape 1:1 by weight, stir until homogeneous and then apply using a brush or a roller. Always add water to Landscape and do not dilute more than 1:1. Application: Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Landscape may be applied with a roller (12 mm nap recommended), brush or standard airless sprayer (piston pump unit, 21 - 25 thou tip size) – thoroughly mix product befor spraying. Its smooth texture and non-sag formulation makes it suitable for vertical and horizontal application. The Emer-Proof Elastic Joint Band System should be installed first. Apply the mixed Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Landscape across the substrate joins extending approximately 70mm either side of the join. Whilst the Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Landscape is still in a wet state install the Emer-Proof Joint Sealing Tape / corners and accessories ensuring that all air voids are expelled. Emer-Proof Elastic Joint corner should be placed in first followed by the Emer-Proof Joint Sealing Tape. The Emer-Proof Joint Sealing Tape, corners and pipe detailing squares can be joined via a 50mm overlap, sandwiching a small amount Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Landscape liquid membrane between the overlapping faces. Each successive coat should be applied at 90 degrees to the previous coat. Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Landscape is laid onto the surface continually in one direction; it should not be brushed out. Brooms, brushes etc. should be regularly washed during the operation and at any breaks as follows: Keep available a container filled with sufficient strong detergent / water solution to fully cover the broom or brush. Soak the brush in the solution and shake out before use. As work progresses, rinse the brush at frequent intervals to prevent it clogging, and again shake out before resuming. During any breaks in work the brushes should be left to soak in this solution. Allowing a drying time of 4 hours between coats. Conduct a final inspection on the surface of the membrane prior to commencing back-filling to ensure no pinholes exist. A further coat may be required if imperfections or pinholes are present in the membrane. Detailing: Detail the membrane in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations,


Warranty: Provide a warranty for materials and application of the membrane for a period of 20 years from the date of Practical Completion, to be in a form acceptable to the principal. Alternatives: Any proposed alternative to this membrane system will only be considered if it is equal to this system in every performance criteria, details of which are to be submitted with the proposal.

201D Waterproofing System Type D SYSTEM TYPE D – Xypex Additive General Location: to all concrete up to the floor level of the ground floor. Proprietary item: the concrete waterproofing material is to be manufactured by Concrete Waterproofing Manufacturing Pty Ltd trading as XYPEX Australia, and is to be of the cementitious crystalline type known as XYPEX Waterproofing by Crystallization. Cement content:: the cement (o.p.c.) content of the mix is not to be less than 10% by weight. Special applications: chemical storage and constant high water pressure applications should be referred to Xypex Australia for suitable dose rates. Batching and Mixing Batching plant procedures, facilities and manpower will dictate the preferred/required batching technique. For example it is anticipated that the method described for central mix plants is not generally feasible in Australian conditions. XYPEX soluble bags are most suited for use in the Dry Batch operation. Maximum water cement ratio should not exceed 0.5. Requirements for higher water cement ratios must be referred to XYPEX Australia. The XYPEX Admix C-1000NF/ C-2000NF will act as a plasticiser and takes at least 10 minutes to become fully activated and will last approximately 30 minutes after placement of concrete. Extension of set time may occur when using XYPEX Admix C-1000NF/C-2000NF. Amount of extension will depend on concrete mix design, temperatures and dosage rate of XYPEX. Care should be exercised when other admixtures are being used; when mixed with XYPEX extended set times can result. This category includes set retarders and may include water reducers, plasticisers etc. Reinforcement General: to be in accordance with the pertinent, current Australian Standards. Concrete slabs: all reinforcement is to be "Rib deformed bar" or “welded wire fabric” (other than fitments) and designed in accordance with Australian Standard AS 3600. Exposed concrete decks: joint free exposed concrete decks must contain reinforcement to minimise thermal movement, for which the content and placement of reinforcement steel required is to be sufficient to satisfy the requirements of AS 3600 clause 9.4.3.4. Refer AS 3600 section 4 para 4.3 (Exposure Classification) in its entirety. Minimum steel: in the event that the requirements of AS 3600 be less than 1.0% (exposure classification A1 or A2) reinforcement steel requirement will in no case be less than 1.0% applied proportionately throughout the concrete and apportioned at not less than 0.5% on the top and 0.5% on the bottom face of the concrete. (i.e.; 0.25% either direction at both faces). 1.0% equates to a degree of crack control between moderate and strong as defined by AS 3600, clause 9.4.3.4. Pre-stressing (Post Tensioning): is to conform to the above standards and or other current pertinent standard and requirements where applicable. Compaction Standard: must comply with AS 3600, clause 19.1.3. General: the concrete is to be compacted until the following conditions are attained: Entrapped air is expelled; formwork is completely filled to the intended level; all reinforcement, penetrations and the like are completely surrounded, and the required properties of the concrete are achieved. Finishing Standard: must comply with AS 3600, clause 19.1.4. General: finishing of the concrete is to include the process of "re-working" the surface of the concrete. This will involve either power trowelling of the surface and/or vigorous hand steel trowelling. Subsequent to this, finishing any desired finish can then be applied.


Alcohol: in hot weather (above 25°C) aliphatic alcohol must be used during placement and finishing to control the early loss of bleed water, and which may also assist in the control of shrinkage. Curing Standard: must comply with AS 3600, clause 19.1.5. General: the concrete is to be cured in accordance with the above references, to enable the achievement of maximum potential XYPEX crystalline growth. Curing should begin immediately following the final set. The use of aliphatic alcohol does not take the place of standard concrete curing practices. In formed concrete, formwork provides good protection and curing for concrete, and should be left in place for a period of 7 days. Only exposed surfaces need to be kept moist. Alternate Curing (AS 3799): curing compounds complying with the above and having retention levels of 90% or more are a satisfactory curing agent for XYPEX Admix C-1000NF/C-2000NF treated concrete. Backfilling Normal backfilling procedures, after curing of the concrete, may take place. If backfilling takes place within 7 days after the initial set, the backfilling material must be moist so as not to draw moisture from the concrete. Applied Finishes The crystalline formation of dendritic fibres will fill the pores and capillaries, thus reducing the suction characteristics of the concrete. Therefore, an additional bonding system may be required for the adhesion of applied finishes such as paint, epoxy, grout, cement parget coat, plaster, stucco or the like. It is the responsibility of the installer of the applied finish to take whatever measures are necessary, including testing, to ensure acceptance by, or adhesion, to the concrete surface.


A. Inspect conditions before delivery of materials and start of work on site to ensure that everything is satisfactory. Arrange with builder for needed rectification. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

B. Waterproofing Table

Waterproofing materials Location and Extent System Type A, B, C or D

Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Undertile Male and Female Toilets, UAT. A Parchem Index High performance N/A B Parchem Index High performance N/A B Emer-Proof Aqua Barrier Landscape

Retaining walls C

Xypex Additive N/A D

302 Substrates Substrates for membranes Apply membranes to dry, smooth, firm, continuous surfaces, clean and free from loose or foreign matter. Provide coving or fillets on internal corners. Round or arris external corners and edges. Dryness tests for substrates: to AS 1884. Acceptance of substrate: certify that the building structure, including the building tolerance, provision of reference lines and marks, is satisfactory for receiving the application of the waterproofing system. Approval of installer: if the installation of the waterproofing system is not by the manufacturer, and a manufacturer’s warranty is conditional on approval of the installer, then obtain the manufacturer’s approval of the installer. Make a photographic record of prepared substrates.

303 Protect Adjacent Surfaces Protect adjacent surfaces from splashes over sprays and the like during the application of the waterproof membranes. Plug drainage holes prior to the application of waterproofing membranes to prevent the material from entering outlets beyond what is necessary to dress the material into the outlet to complete the membrane system. Remove plugs on completion. Protect waterproofing membranes upon completion of each area of the application and maintain that protection until such time as the installation is approved and covered up by other finishes.

304 Protection of Installed Membranes Location Protect planter boxes, retaining walls, footings and any other location where the membrane is in direct contact with backfill or other potential damaging materials.


Type Provide protection board made from 6mm thick fibre cement or 3mm thick, hollow polypropylene, co-polymer sheet or proprietary protection board equal Tremco Pty Limited. Installation Protect waterproofing membranes upon completion of each area of the application and maintain that protection until such time as the installation is approved and covered up by other finishes. Following completion of the waterproof membrane to planter boxes install protection board to the membrane on vertical faces. Restrain the board by trapping the top edge under the bottom edge of the K shaped pressure flashing used to terminate the top of the membrane. Retaining Walls and Footings Refer to 02315 SITE PREPARATION - EXCAVATION for membrane protection to retaining walls and footings built against existing site fill or rock.

305 Cleaning During the application, promptly remove foreign material from the work area without damaging the waterproofing system.

306 Installation of Waterproofing Systems Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Refer to the systems specified in Part II System Description. Follow the specified instructions.

307 Quality Control – Inspections Notice Give sufficient notice so that inspections can be made at the following stages: All substrate surfaces prior to the application of the waterproofing system. Upon delivery of the system component material on site in sealed containers, prior to opening. At completion of the application of the waterproofing systems, and prior to covering up with other finishes. During the carrying out of flood tests. Minimum notice required: 3 days. Manufacturers’ Inspections Arrange for and pay the cost of inspections by the waterproofing systems manufacturer at each of the above stages and at regular frequent intervals during the application of the waterproofing systems. Maintain a logbook on the site and record the time and date of each inspection, work complete and underway, at the time of each inspection, and comments by the manufacturer’s representative. Have the manufacturer’s representative sign the logbook at the completion of each inspection and record the observations made.

308 Testing Reports Test installations prior to application of finishes to membranes. To each membrane in wet areas, test 20% of area of membrane with a minimum of 10 tests. Submit a report on the preparation of areas to be treated, working progress and on completion. In each report include a photographic record.

309 Cleaning Thoroughly clean work on completion, including affected adjacent surfaces.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3SECTION 07200 INSULATION (THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC)

SECTION 07200 INSULATION (THERMAL AND ACOUSTIC)


The scope of work includes, but is not limited to, the supply and installation of thermal insulation. It also includes the supply and installation of acoustic insulation.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Carpentry Wall and roof framing Brickwork Blockwork Metal roofing Roof tiles Plasterboard Suspended ceiling

103 Quality Assurance Installers are required to be widely experienced in relevant aspects of the work and with the requirements of Australian Standards appropriate to the work. Coordinate the installation with all adjacent trades and ensure that installation of insulation does not contribute to condensation problems by using breathable type of sarking membranes. Check with the membrane manufacturer and submit confirming data for approval.

104 References Comply with the applicable portions of these Australian Standards: AS 1366 Rigid cellular plastic sheets for thermal insulation. There are 4 parts, 1989-

1992, and 2 Amdts, 1992 - 1993. AS/NZS 2107 2000 Acoustics - Recommended design sound levels and reverberation times for

building interiors. AS 3671 1989 Acoustics - Road traffic noise intrusion - Building siting and construction. AS 3999 2015 Thermal insulation of dwellings - Bulk insulation - Installation requirements.

AS/NZS 4200 Pliable building membranes and underlays. 4200.1 1994 Materials. Plus 1 Amdt, 1994. 4200.2 1994 Installation requirements.

AS/NZS 4859.1 2002 Materials for the thermal insulation of buildings - General criteria and technical provisions. Plus 1 Amdt, 2006.

Comply with the requirements of the Building Code of Australia.

105 Submission Provide to the architect before ordering, samples, literature and technical data of each specified material. Confirm compliance with an approved national energy rating system etc. as applicable to the works.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver, handle and store products so that damage, deterioration and loss will be prevented. Control delivery schedules to minimise long-term storage at the site. Store above ground with secure impervious material.

PART II MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

201 Approved Material Suppliers

CSR Bradford CSR Martini Kingspan Fletcher

202 Materials – Thermal A. Roof: Bradford Anticon 80mm glasswool blanket adhered to 730 Thermofoil Medium Duty

reflective foil, non-glare (foil facing downwards), to be laid over safety wire mesh and held firmly against all sheet metal roofing. R-Value 1.8 minimum.

B. External soffits and stud framed walls between soffit and suspended slab: Bradford Glasswool Building blanket 80mm thick, R-value R1.8 minimum.

C. Exterior Masonry walls: 25mm foil faced Kingspan Kooltherm K8 Cavity Board, R-value R1.2 minimum. Note; Insulation board to be fitted against internal leaf with foil facing outward.


D. Spandrel Glazing: Spandrel Glazing: Bradford Gold High Performance 90mm thick batts, R-value R2.5 minimum.

E. Metal clad and CFC clad external walls: Bradford Gold High Performance 90mm thick batts, R-value R2.5 minimum.

F. Suspended ceilings: Bradford Gold batts, R-value R2.5 minimum.

G. Sarking to Metal clad and CFC clad external walls: Bradford Enviroseal ProctorWrap Commercial Wall vapour permeable membrane.

H. Thermal breaks to metal clad external walls: James Hardie HardieBreak minimum R-value R0.2 thermal break strips to all external wall studs or girts between cladding and stud / girt.

Comply with manufacturer’s recommendations and the relevant Australian Standards.

203 Materials–Acoustic A. Internal framed walls: Bradford Gold wall batts, 76mm thick,minimum density 10.8kg/m2.

B. Suspended ceilings and soffit fixed ceilings: Bradford Gold batts, R-value R2.5 minimum.

C. Acoustic lagging: Install Pyrotek 4525 Soundlag acoustic lagging to internal rain water pipes, soil and waste pipes above and within internal spaces.

D. Semi-rigid board soffit lining; Martini Absorb 50mm thick white panels. Fix to manufacturers written recommendations. Butt joint panels with 10mm nominal gap.

E. Plantroom / Dust Extractor room interior walls & roof: Bradford Anticon 80mm glasswool blanket adhered to perforated 730 Thermofoil Medium Duty reflective foil, non-glare (foil facing downwards), to be laid over safety wire mesh and held firmly against all sheet metal roofing, fix to masonry walls with power clip fasteners and washers. R-Value 1.8 minimum.


Visit the site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to site. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Prepare surfaces and/or framing material and ensure that no obstructions will prevent rapid and effective installation.

303 Installation General (Thermal) Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Comply with manufacturer’s current written recommendations and the relevant Australian Standards. Install membrane to metal roofing, walls,. Install bulk thermal insulation to: Walls; restrain bulk insulation in stud wall sides with no sheeting by stringing-in. Roof Ceiling space Install rigid thermal insulation to areas shown on the drawings: roof, walls, etc.

304 Installation General (Acoustic) Install acoustic attenuation type material in accordance with the manufacturer’s current written recommendations. Comply with AS/NZS 2107. Install acoustic absorption material in accordance with the manufacturer’s current written recommendations. Seal junctions and around penetrations where indicated by the acoustic systems designs. Spray surface after providing protection and masking to surrounding surfaces, in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Restrain bulk insulation in stud wall sides with no sheeting by stringing-in.

305 Cleaning Remove surplus material on completion and arrange for inspection(s) by manufacturer’s representative.


306 Completion Complete contracted work in accordance with the contract document and written variation orders issued by the architect.

END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 4 SECTION 07600 METAL ROOFING, SIDING AND ROOF PLUMBING

SECTION 07600 METAL ROOFING, SIDING AND ROOF PLUMBING


Supply and install a complete roofing and siding (external cladding) installation as shown on the drawings including but not limited to the following: A. Metal deck of zincalume steel, aluminium, copper etc., including accessories, fastening clips,

apron flashings, gutters, parapet linings, copings, sumps, overflow pipes, downpipes. Refer to External Finishes Schedule project specific document and to the product manufacturer’s specification for adequacy of each proposed installation.

B. Roof insulation and wire mesh. C. Roof penetrations and sealing thereof. D. Metal cladding.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Structural steel Metal windows and glazing Doors and door frames Roller shutter doors Carpentry Drainage

103 Quality Assurance Tradesmen are required to be experienced in and knowledgeable about the work to be performed and the various Standards to which the work is to comply. The architect will make random inspections during the execution of the work.


There are 5 parts, several Supplements and Amdts, 2002 – 2011. AS 1273 1991 Unplasticised PVC (UPVC) downpipe and fittings for rainwater. AS/NZS 1562 Design and installation of sheet roof and wall cladding.

1562.1 1992 Metal. Plus 3 Amdts, 1993 - 2012. 1562.3 2006 Plastic. There is 1 other part, 1999.

AS/NZS 2179 Specifications for rainwater goods, accessories and fasteners. 2179.1 1994 Metal shape or sheet rainwater goods, and metal

accessories and fasteners. AS 3566 2002 Self-drilling screws for the building and construction industries. There are 2

parts. AS 3999 2015 Thermal insulation of dwellings - Bulk insulation - Installation requirements.

AS/NZS 4256 Plastic roof and wall cladding materials. There are 5 parts, 2006.

AS/NZS 4389 1996 Safety mesh. HB 39 2015 Installation code for metal roof and wall cladding. HB 114 1998 Guidelines for the design of eaves and box gutters.

105 Submissions Submit prior to ordering materials: A. Samples and product data of specified products. B. Calculation of sizes for gutters and downpipes. C. To roofer - supply layout showing exact roof framing member positions.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver to site, unload and stack in a location away from potential damage, preferably directly on to installed roof framing. Inspect on arrival and reject bent or damaged material.

107 Warranty Provide to the proprietor a warranty on the whole of the roof and roof plumbing including penetrations for pipes, flues, upstands etc. performed for mechanical equipment sub-contractor which states that work will remain waterproof and weather-tight for the period of 15 years from the date of Practical Completion.

PART II MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS200

201 Acceptable Manufacturers Fielders Lysaght Bluescope Steel Siphonic Solutions


202 Materials- Metal Roofing

Item Manufacturer Material Base Metal Thickness

Finish Colour Size Details

Roofing Lysaght Zincalume 0.48mm Colourbond Refer Finishes Schedule

- Trimdek profile

Wire support mesh

Galvanised steel

2mm Galvanised - 300x 150x 2mm

Gutters Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond To match roofing

Refer drawings

Box gutter Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond To match roofing

Refer drawings

Sumps over downpipes

Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond To match roofing

Refer drawings

Downpipes PVC Sewer class

- - Refer drawings

Downpipes Galvanised steel

See drawings

Galvanised Galvanised

Refer to drawings

Downpipes Siphonic Solutions

- - - - - Refer to clause 206

Cappings Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond To match roofing

Refer drawings

Flashings Zincalume 0.60mm Colourbond To match roofing

Refer drawings

Cover flashings


Refer drawings

Apron flashings


Refer drawings

Gutter flashing


Refer drawings

Overflows PVC Sewer class

- - Refer drawings

Insulation R value

Refer Insulation Section

Sealing of penetrations

Dektite Premium

203 Metal Siding (Cladding) for Walls

Item Manufacturer Material Base Metal Thickness

Finish Colour Size Details

Cladding Lysaght Zincalume 0.70mm Colourbond Surfmist N/A Spandek profile

Cappings Zincalume 1.00mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer drawings

Flashings Zincalume 1.00mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer drawings

Window flashings

Zincalume 1.00mm Colourbond Surfmist Refer drawings

Inside parapet cladding

Lysaght Zincalume 0.42 Colourbond Surfmist Refer drawings

Trimdek profile

Sarking Bradford Enviroseal ProctorWrap CW

Thermal Break Strips

R0.2 minimum

204 Fabrication

Form and fabricate components in accordance with AS/NZS 1562 and AS/NZS 2179.1, and other relevant Standards. Self-drilling screws are to conform to Class 3 as described in AS 3566.


205 Dissimilar Metals In moist environments, prevent totally contact between dissimilar metals (any metals). This instruction takes priority over any drawing, detail or instruction and will prevent cathodic reaction between the metals. Refer this instruction to the structural engineer.

206 Siphonic Rainwater System Allow a Provisional Sum of $17,000.00 + GST for the design, supply, installation and connection of a siphonic rainwater system to the first floor box gutters by Siphonic Solutions. The system shall include design, outlets and connections to the box gutter sumps, connections to the rainwater downpipe and acoustic lagging to pipes.


Inspect site conditions before installation. Ensure framing is entirely satisfactory. Ensure that delivery and installation will not be impeded by on-site conditions at time of delivery. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Terrain Category The site is zoned as Terrain Category: 3.0 Refer AS/NZS 1170.

303 Preparation Prepare framing and surfaces for installation.

304 Installation Install work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Australian Standards. Refer clause 104.

305 Flashing Lap flashing at least 150mm at junctions, and over flashings neatly dressed and finished. Where necessary to follow a roof slope, step flashings in even overlapping widths. Finish top corners to a line parallel to the roof slope. Fabricated flashings in materials which are compatible with, and same finish as, gutter and roofing materials. Complete work and leave an entirely watertight installation.

306 Penetrations Form penetration flashings neatly with material matching roofing material. Form flanged tubular collars 0.70mm sheet zinc not less than 150mm high and 12mm wider than penetrating item, or use EPDM collars. Where the width of a penetration is wider than a roofing trough or extends across several troughs, form a back gutter, using sheet material similar to the roofing material, well lapped under the roofing, double riveted and sealed with silicone sealant. Close and seal ends of cut ribs. Form back gutters not less than 100mm wide with falls towards the sides of the penetration collars. Form over-flashings of penetration collars neatly in material matching the roofing material but not less than 0.5mm thick, securely clipped and sealed to the penetrating items and dressed well down over the collars to finish at a straight line level with the tops of the ribs. Do not use lead or copper for over-flashings.

307 Downpipes Install in accordance with AS/NZS 2179.1 for metal. Install in accordance with AS 1273 for PVC. Comply also with manufacturer's instructions. Secure to building at recommended centres, minimum 1800mm with galvanised steel straps.

308 Cleaning To prevent contamination and corrosion, keep clean metal roofing and rainwater goods at times during the progress of the works. At the end of work each day, and immediately before each occurrence of rain, sweep the metal surfaces thoroughly to remove metal filing, swarf, off-cuts, dust, and other materials which could cause corrosion or blockages. Prevent waste materials from entering downpipes, rainwater heads, or drains. Remove unsecured nails, rivets, screws, bolts and similar fixing devices, guttering, etc., at the end of work each day and at the completion of roofing installation.

309 Testing On completion, test the entire installation in the presence of and to the satisfaction of the architect.



END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 07725 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT

SECTION 07725 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT


Supply and install fall arrest equipment including but not limited to: Anchor points, static line, eaves bracket and associated safety signs. Allow a Provisional Sum of $3,500.00 plus GST for the supply and installation of fall arrest equipment.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Roof framing Roofing materials

103 Quality Assurance Work of this trade section is to be performed by experienced craftsmen familiar with the quality required in this class of work. Where 5 or more items of a similar product are required, construct a prototype, full size. Finish the prototype in every respect. When approved by the architect, this sample remains part of the work and becomes the standard for the remaining work.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1657 2013 Fixed platforms, walkways, stairways and ladders – Design, construction and

installation. AS/NZS 1891.1 2007 Industrial fall arrest systems and devices – Harnesses and ancillary

equipment. There are 3 other parts, 1997 - 2009, 1 Supplement 2001, 2 Amdts 2007 – 2008.

AS/NZS 4801 2001 Occupational health and safety management systems - Specification with guidance for use.

AS 6001 1999 Working platforms for housing construction Comply with State requirements and codes of practice in relation to work on roofs. Comply with the requirements of relevant statutory authorities having jurisdiction on this product. Product manual produced by manufacturers of components.

105 Shop Drawings

106 Samples A. Sample welds: if requested, provide samples of weld types, including samples of railings joined

at right angles and at typical acute angles, welded and ground smooth, for approval. If not acceptable, provide additional samples until approved. When approved, samples will establish quality of similar work of this section.

B. Check on delivery: request architect to check materials on delivery to site for quality, and he will reject materials not meeting the requirements of this specification or equal to approved samples. Return rejected materials to the fabricator at the fabricator's expense.

C. Finish: provide samples of specified finishes when requested.

107 Warranty Provide a warranty to the proprietor covering the whole of the work for a period of 5 years after Practical Completion. Warranty to cover roof penetrations.

PART II MATERIALS200 201 Manufacturers

Acceptable manufacturers include: Safemaster Safety Products

202 Materials

Item Description Manufacturer/Supplier Anchors Surfacemount energy absorbing

safety anchor points Safemaster or equal approved

Static lines Anchor Strops Safemaster or equal approved Signage Access Control sign Safemaster or equal approved

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 07725 FALL ARREST EQUIPMENT

Item Description Manufacturer/Supplier Ladder access bracket Safemaster or equal approved

203 Fabrication

Visit site and accurately measure openings etc. before fabrication. Before delivery to site, pre-assemble where possible all items to ensure proper fit and dimension of each item. Disassemble and pack carefully for shipping to the site. On delivery and unloading, inspect for damage and arrange immediate replacement if necessary.

204 Miscellaneous Fasteners: provide required bolts, screws, inserts, fasteners, templates and other accessories required for a complete installation. Coordinate with other trades as to the proper fastening systems suitable for the substrates to which the item is to be secured. Refer to architect if in doubt. Fasten galvanised items with galvanised fasteners.



302 Preparation Check roof framing and other items to which safety equipment is to be fixed. Ensure that structures local to the installed items are secure. A senior technical representative of the material supplier is required to be present to check each part of the installation.

303 Installation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Secure each item in accordance with Australian Standards. Arrange with the builder and roofer for penetrations if required through roof materials. Ensure that penetrations are completely watertight after installation and on completion of the work.

304 Field Quality Control Arrange for inspection of the work before and after completion.

305 Testing Arrange for tests of each item of equipment. Replace items which fail the test.

306 Portable Equipment After tests are completed, provide and hand over portable equipment to the builder. Store where directed. Builder to hand over the material to proprietor on completion of the work.

307 Cleaning Remove surplus materials and leave the area clean on completion.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 07810 FIREPROOFING

SECTION 07810 FIREPROOFING


Design, fabricate and install materials with required components, fixings, fabrication techniques, coatings and finishes including but not limited to fire protection of structural steel columns.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Structural steel Concrete Wall framing Floor framing Mechanical Electrical

103 Quality Assurance A. The products specified herein are proprietary items manufactured and supplied by specialist

fabricators. Manufacturer is required to submit written verification of quality of aspects of materials and performance.

B. Provide certificates prepared by relevant testing authorities stating that the materials comply with fire-rating and other characteristics claimed by the manufacturer, and qualities required by the relevant statutory authorities.

C. Pre-installation conference. Arrange for a conference to establish and settle matters regarding the site installation methods and time schedule.

D. Installation and application at the site is required to be performed in accordance with the requirements of relevant statutory authorities.

104 References

Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1530 Methods for fire tests on building materials, compounds and structures.

There are 7 parts, 2 Amdt, 1992 – 2007. AS 1603 Automatic fire detection and alarm systems. There are 12 parts 1996 – 2011

and 4 Amdts, 1996 – 2001. AS 1670 Fire detection, warning, control and intercom systems - System design,

installation and commissioning. There are 4 parts, 1997 – 2015,. AS 1682 Fire Dampers.

1682.1 1990 Specification. 1682.2 1990 Installation.

AS 2118.4 Automatic fire sprinkler systems - Residential AS 3784.1 1990 Coatings for fire protection of building elements – Guide to selection and

installation of sprayed mineral coatings. AS 3959 2009 Construction of buildings in bushfire-prone areas. Plus 3 Amdts 2009-2011 AS 4072.1 2005 Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant separating

elements – Service penetrations and control joints. Plus 1 Amdt, 2006. AS 5414 2012 Bushfire water spray systems Bushfire Set 2009 HB 37.4 1994 Handbook of Australian fire Standards – Building materials, products and

construction.

105 Submission Required Prior to Fabrication A. Complete system description including the following information:

1. Names of manufacturers of products. 2. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local representatives for products. 3. Types, names of products, and indication whether products are "off the shelf" or custom

fabricated. Include specific information on finishes - thicknesses, patented process name, process description and test data.

4. Detailed system description including standard details and manufacturer's literature B. Statement that the proposed system meets the regulatory requirements, for fire protection and

warranty requirements specified. C. Shop drawings: refer Document 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT,

clause 27. Provide shop drawings showing the following information where appropriate to the items: 1. Layout (sectional plan and elevation of complete assembly). 2. Full size section of members. 3. Methods of assembly. 4. Methods of installation, including fixings, anchorage, caulking.


5. Provision for expansion (thermal). 6. Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces. 7. Fittings and accessories.

D. Sealants: submit manufacturer's product specifications, handling, installation/curing instructions, and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product required. Submit certificate of test reports for elastomeric sealants on aged performance, including hardness, stain resistance, adhesion, cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility, compression set, modulus of elasticity, water absorption and resistance (ageing, weight loss, deterioration), exposure to heat, ozone and ultraviolet light.


Deliver the materials to the site in a totally satisfactory condition. Provide security for materials not installed, from loss of damage by weather or other cause. Do not install damaged components or panels; remove and replace.

107 Project Site Conditions Do not install wet processes in wet weather, or when temperature is less than 4oC or more than 35oC.

108 Warranty Provide to the architect a written warranty stating that components of the complete installation will remain intact and in a satisfactory condition for years from the date of Practical Completion.



201 Acceptable Manufacturers Promat.

202 Design Criteria All materials to be erected/applied are to meet the following criteria. A. Structural movement (of building). B. Thermal movement. C. Wind load on panels. D. Dead load of panels and support structure. E. Fire resistance requirements. F. Anchor bolts to secure panels and support structure to building.

203 System Components Where proprietary items are specified, comply with manufacturer’s/suppliers recommendations.

204 Fabrication A. Provide and fabricate frame and support structures. B. Check site dimensions before fabrication of components. Tolerances are not to exceed +3mm, -

3mm. C. Schedule fabrication in accordance with builder's construction program. D. Mark each item for easy identification.

205 Source Quality Control The engineer and architect will make random inspections at various stages of works during installation. Make available items needed for inspection and verification of compliance with this specification.


Examine conditions at the site before delivery of materials and prior to the commencement of installation. Arrange with builder for correction of non-optimum conditions. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant.


Protect by appropriate means adjoining surfaces of the building which may be damaged during the installation.

303 Installation Install/apply Promatect 50 fireproofing materials to structural steel columns in locations as detailed on the documents to achieve an FRL of 120/120/120. Secure in final position. Comply with supplier's/manufacturer's installation recommendations.

304 Sealants At junctions with other materials, insert into opening a backing rod, wedged firmly in place. Apply over the backing rod an approved fireproofing sealant, to colour selected by the architect. Comply with supplier's/manufacturer's installation recommendations.

305 Field Quality Control A representative or system supplier is required to be present during the installation of fireproofing materials in the building.

306 Repairs Repair damaged surfaces which may have been damaged during installation. Make good the surfaces and reinstate material integrity, all in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

307 Protection Protect the installation until completion of the project. Prevent damage to completed work by necessary means.

308 Cleaning On completion, clean up debris, remove support structures, scaffolding and the like. Leave work and surfaces in entirely clean and uniform condition.


South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08200 DOORS, DOOR FRAMES AND HATCHES

SECTION 08200 DOORS, DOOR FRAMES AND HATCHES


Supply and install doors and timber [or steel] door frames including but not limited to: A. INTERNAL DOORS

Flush panel doors - solid core. Metal frames (jambs). Glazed doors.

102 Related Work

Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Carpentry Joinery Blockwork Brickwork Plasterboard Fire-rated doors and frames Metalwork Glass and glazing Painting Electrical Suspended ceilings

103 Quality Assurance Prototype: at a location selected by the architect construct a complete prototype installation of: Include in each prototype elements required by this specification, finished in every respect. When approved by the architect, each prototype remains part of the work and becomes the standard for the remaining work.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1288 2006 Glass in buildings - Selection and installation.

Plus 1 Supplement, 2006, and 2 Amdt, 2008 - 2011. AS 1428.1 Design for access and mobility. General requirements – New building work .. AS/NZS 1859 Reconstituted wood-based panels - Specifications

1859.1 2004 Particleboard. Plus 2 Amdt, 2006 - 2011. 1859.2 2004 Dry processed fibreboard. Plus 2 Amdts, 2006. 1859.3 2005 Decorative overlaid wood panels. Plus 1 Amdt, 2009. 1859.4 2004 Wet-processed fibreboard.

AS/NZS 2272 2006 Plywood – Marine. AS 2688 1984 (Obsolescent) Timber doors. AS 2689 1984 (Obsolescent) Timber doorsets. AS 4145 Locksets and hardware for doors and windows. There are 5 parts, 2001 –

2011 plus 2 Amdts, 2009, 2015. AS 5007 2007 Powered doors for pedestrian access and egress. AS 5039 2008 Security screen doors and security window grilles.

105 Submissions Submit the following for inspection by the architect before installation: Product literature on proposed hardware items. Samples of items as requested by architect.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver specified items shortly before installation is due to occur. Prevent damage and deterioration during transport and handling. Store carefully at site in a secure area. Prevent twisting and warping of doors. Note the condition requirements of clause 304.

107 Warranty Provide to the proprietor a warranty covering faulty materials, and installation, warping of materials and other faults which may occur within 5 years of Practical Completion.

PART II MATERIALS200 201 Acceptable Manufacturers

Lotus Folding Walls & Doors – Acoustic sliding doors and operable walls.


202 Internal Doors

A. Solid core, Flush panel. Comply with AS 2688

Frame of door: timber with top mid and bottom rails each 50mm deep Core: medium density particle board Face: 4.5mm hardboard Edge strips: to 2, 3 or 4 sides of door, 10mm thick hardwood Minimum thickness: 35mm Glazed panels to comply with AS 1288. Provide 10mm hardwood frame around glazed panel.

B. Steel jambs Steel frames: pressed steel 1.6mm thick single [or double] rebated fully welded frames with floor spreader. Provide 8 or 10, 3mm wire ties per frame for building into walls and 2 black stops on closing side. Grout back of frames with cement mortar. Supply steel frames with shop applied rust inhibitive paint.

C. Acoustic sliding doors: Lotus Series SL65C/36/CS2 top supported, manually operated Sliding panels that form a sound retardant closure. Panels shall be 65SL series with concealed panel junctions. Panels shall be constructed of a sandwich of board &/or steel separated by acoustic insulation to achieve the specified sound rating. Panel faces shall be contained within a perimeter frame with interlocking stiles. Panel faces shall be replaceable in the field. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the operable walls are of a construction to achieve RW 43 based on acoustic tests to AS1276 by a NATA approved independent Australian acoustic laboratory. The Acoustic slider shall be Cavity fixed using track type #100-1 When the Slider is opened the panels are parked in a single slider configuration. Suspension is two points per module. The Acoustic slider will have type 2 seals Panel surfaces shall be finished in Formica Glossy White Magnetic whiteboard laminate as nominated on the Door Schedule and Interior Finishes Schedule. Panel frames and Head track shall be Powdercoated –refer Interior Finishes Schedule.

203 Hatches

For ceiling hatches ensure that the ceiling performance levels are matched by the hatch construction and performance levels.


Inspect site conditions. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Prepare openings in walls or other structures before installation. Install fixing grounds and inserts as required to secure frames.

303 Installation of Door Frames Erect frames plumb and true. Brace as required until surrounding structure is complete. Comply with AS 2689.

304 Installation of Doors Comply with manufacturer’s instructions and AS 2689. Reject doors which do not comply with AS 2688 Appendix A. Condition doors to average humidity in area prior to hanging. Align doors to frame for proper fit and uniform clearance at edge and machine for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after machining. Provide clearance of 3mm at jambs and heads; 3mm at meeting stiles at pairs of door; 12mm from bottom of door to top of floor finishing or covering. At thresholds provide 6mm clearance.

305 Installation of Hardware Refer Schedule of Door Furniture and Hardware. Check deliveries on arrival. Keep items locked until needed. Assume responsibility for delivered items. Fit accurately and at correct heights, protect with heavy cloth until completion of project. Label keys, and hand over to builder. Master key locks as instructed.


306 Adjustment and Cleaning Adjust each door in its frame and ensure silent operation. Oil locks and hinges. Clean all surfaces marked during the installation of door frames, doors and hardware.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08330 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS

SECTION 08330 ROLLER SHUTTER DOORS


Supply, engineer and install roller shutter door(s) including but not limited to: Drum support. Door guides. Electric motors and controls. Locking devices. Wind locks. Weatherstrips. Tapered bottom rail. Powder coating.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Structural steel Brickwork Blockwork Concrete Electrical Painting Refer to mechanical engineers documentation where ventilation to roller shutter doors is listed.

103 Quality Assurance Craftsmen are required to be experienced and familiar with the quality required in this class of work. Comply throughout with manufacturer's instructions.

104 References Comply with applicable portion of the following Australian Standards: AS 1905.2 2005 Components for the protection of openings in fire-resistant walls – Fire-

resistant roller shutters. Comply with requirements of statutory and local authorities.


and do not show conditions. B. Develop details not shown and in conformity with the indicative details shown. C. Take and confirm dimensions on site, before preparing shop drawings where possible. D. Submit detailed shop drawings for fabrication and installation of major metalwork. Show plans,

elevations and detailed sections; indicate materials, finishes, types of joinery, fasteners, anchorages and accessory items. Provide setting diagrams and full-scale templates of blocking, anchorages, sleeves and bolts installed by others.

106 Samples

A. Sample welds: if requested, provide samples of weld types, including samples of railings joined at right angles and at typical acute angles, welded and ground smooth, for approval. If not acceptable, provide additional samples until approved. When approved, samples will establish quality of similar work of this trade section.

B. Check on delivery: request architect to check materials on delivery to site for quality, and materials not meeting the requirements of this specification or equal to approved samples will be rejected. Return rejected materials to the fabricator at the fabricator's expense.


107 Warranty Provide to the proprietor a warranty, counter-signed by the installer, on the whole of the installation, which states that work will remain intact, waterproof and fully operational for the period of not less than 5 years after date of Practical Completion.




201 Acceptable Manufacturers

Mirage Doors

202 Materials A. Mirage S75 Steel Roller Shutter

Curtain: 75 x 1.0mm roll formed galvanised steel interlocking slats, Drum: mild steel or galvanised tube with the outside diameter and thickness appropriate to the size and application of the steel roller shutter. Channel guides: 75MM X 37MM roll formed steel Brackets: fabricate from prime painted mild steel, with the steel gauge to suit the shutter sizes. Bottom rail: steel box section to accept a weatherseal. Operation: 1.5 h.p. Electric motor / gearbox c/- push button operation via a reversing contactor, including emergency chain operation in the event of power failure. Provide key switches Sliding padbolts (inside) Finish: Dulux Duralloy powdercoat. Colour: Refer Exterior Finishes Schedule.

B. Mirage Series 70 Heavy Duty Roller Grille Curtain: Steel / High Cycle Steel – 19mm x 1.2mm diameter galvabond steel tubes connected by 40mm x 2.5mm zinc plated blue mild steel links. The ends of every tube shall have a nylon sleeve to minimise noise. Drum: steel tube. Fit helical coil oil tempered springs to an axle inside the drum tube. Drum deflection shall not exceed 1/360th of the drum span. Guides: 86mm x 40mm extruded aluminium sections. Brackets: mild steel supplied in a prime painted finish. Bottom rail: steel box section. Operation: Electric operation 1 h.p. motor / gearbox c/- limit switches and reversing contactor; Finish: galvabond.

203 Miscellaneous Items




302 Preparation C. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian

Standards, as relevant. D. Field measurements: do not delay job progress. Allow for adjustments and fitting of the work in

the field where taking of measurements might cause delay. E. Coordination with work of others: furnish to each relevant trade foreman anchorages and setting

drawings, diagrams, templates and instructions for installation of items having integral anchors which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to the project site.


A. Check fabrications as they are unloaded at the project site for evidence of physical damage. Treat damaged fabrications as follows: 1. Misshaped items: return to shop for repair or replacement. 2. Damaged surface treatment: repair as recommended by application of the finish.


304 Installation

A. Anchorage: except for anchorages furnished herein but placed by other trades, set and secure necessary anchorages, including concrete and masonry inserts, bolts, wood screws and other connectors as needed. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as needed, locating anchorages and holes to ensure proper positioning of completed work.


B. Fit: during installation and assembly, form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted, and reveals uniform. Finish work accurately, plumb, level, square and true in reference to adjacent construction.

C. Finish: do not cut or abrade shop finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field. The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted. Fabrications may be cut shorter with power hacksaws on site. Isolate dissimilar metals likely to be subject to moisture with inert materials, not visible on completion of installation.

D. Comply with manufacturers' installation instructions throughout.

305 Field Quality Control Where considered necessary by the architect, arrange for supervision of the installation by a senior staff member of the manufacturer.

306 Protection Protect the completed installation from damage by appropriate means until completion of the project.

307 Cleaning Clean materials installed to the satisfaction of the architect. Apply necessary lubrication. Remove temporary protective coating.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 5 SECTION 08520 METAL WINDOWS AND GLAZING

SECTION 08520 METAL WINDOWS AND GLAZING


Design, engineer, supply and install a complete glazed system of windows, doors and screens, including but not limited to: Material type Finish type Openings Glass types Glazing methods Insect screens Ensure compliance with BCA requirements regarding the protection of openable windows.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the tradesmen preparing walls and frames to accept windows, including casting in of anchors. Read this trade section of the specification in conjunction with the following: Approved national energy rating system or Section J report as applicable to the project. Builder’s return schedule is to confirm all performance requirements for this item. .

103 Quality Assurance Manufacturer qualifications: not less than 10 years’ continuous experience in the manufacture of the product types specified. Installer qualifications: installer is to have not less than 5 years’ continuous experience in the erection of specified material. Manufacturers’ specifications: Submit product manufacturers’ specifications for approval prior to commencing work.


1170.0 2002 General principles. Plus 5 Amdts, 2003 – 2011. 1170.1 2002 Permanent, imposed and other actions. Plus 2 Amdts,

2005 – 2009. 1170.2 2011 Wind actions. 1170.3 2003 Snow and ice actions. Plus 1 Amdt, 2007. 1170.4 2007 Earthquake actions in Australia. 1 Amdt 2015 There are several Supplements and Amdts, 2002 – 2011.

AS 1231 2000 Aluminium and aluminium alloys – Anodic oxidation coatings. AS 1288 2006 Glass in buildings - Selection and installation.

Plus 1 Supplement, 2006 and 2 Amdts, 2008 - 2011. AS 2047 2014 Windows and external glazed doors in buildings - Selection and installation.

AS 3715 2002 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coating for architectural applications of aluminium and aluminium alloys.

AS 4145.2 2008 Locksets and hardware for doors and windows – Mechanical locksets for doors and windows in buildings. Plus 2 Amdts, 2009, 2015.

HB 125 2007 The glass and glazing handbook. Comply with relevant authority's requirement for fire-rated installation.

105 Submissions Required Prior to Fabrication Submit samples, shop drawings, confirmation of performance requirements and list of associated hardware that form part of the installation. Obtain approval prior to commencing work. A. Complete system description including the following information:

Names of manufacturers of products. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local representatives for products. Types, model numbers and names of products, and indication whether products are "off the shelf" or custom fabricated. Include specific information on finishes - thicknesses, patented process name, process description and test data. Detailed information on products manufactured specifically for this project. Detailed system description including standard details and manufacturer's literature; and large-scale details of specially fabricated products.


B. Statement that the proposed system meet(s) the regulatory requirements, thermal, aesthetic and waterproofing criteria and wind loading, construction, glazing and warranty requirements specified; noting in detail exceptions.

C. Shop drawings: refer DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, clause 27. Provide shop drawings showing the following information where appropriate to the items: Layout (sectional plan and elevation of complete assembly). Full size section of members. Methods of assembly, type and location of exposed screws. Methods of glazing. Methods of installation, including fixings, anchorage, caulking, flashings. Provision for expansion (thermal). Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces. Fittings and accessories.

D. Engineer's calculations on wind loading. E. Sealants: submit manufacturer's product specifications, handling, installation/curing instructions,

and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product required. Submit certificate test reports for elastomeric sealants on aged performance as specified, including hardness, stain resistance, adhesion, cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility, compression set, modulus of elasticity, water absorption, and resistance (ageing, weight loss, deterioration) and exposure to heat, ozone and ultraviolet light.


Handle materials with care. Do not store on site. Install directly in place. Store sealants as instructed by manufacturer.

107 Warranty Provide to the proprietor a warranty, counter-signed by the installer, on the whole of the installation, which states that work will remain intact, waterproof and fully operational for the period of not less than years after date of Practical Completion.

PART II MATERIALS 201 Acceptable Manufacturers

The following manufacturers of window frames are acceptable: Alspec Capral AWS

202 Materials A. Window frames: Alspec McArthur 101x44 centre pocket framing as scheduled on the drawings

with sub-head and sub-sill extruded aluminium components manufactured from aluminium alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6.

B. Doors: Alspec Swan 45mm commercial door series as scheduled on the drawings extruded aluminium components manufactured from aluminium alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6.

C. Glass: refer clause 206. D. Sliding windows: Alspec View-Max Commercial sliding window extruded aluminium components

manufactured from aluminium alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6. E. Security Insect Screens: Alspec Invisiguard steel security mesh screens manufactured from

grade 316 stainless steel as scheduled on the drawings. F. Double Glazed Window Frames: AWS 150 x 50 Soundout front glazed framing as scheduled on

the drawings with sub-head and sub-sill extruded aluminium components manufactured from aluminium alloy 6063, temper T5 or T6. Silica gel crystal inserts to sill.

G. Glazed Acoustic Sliding Door: Lotus Series SL80G/30/CS1 consisting of top supported, manually operated Sliding panels that form a sound retardant closure. Panels shall be 80SL series with standard panel junctions. Panels shall be constructed of a perimeter frame containing toughened safety glass to AS1288 & to meet acoustic build as tested. Standard Lockwood Pull handles by Lotus. Panel faces shall be replaceable in the field. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the operable walls are of a construction to achieve RW 30 based on acoustic tests to AS1276 by a NATA approved independent Australian acoustic laboratory. The Acoustic slider shall be Cavity track fixed. When the Slider is opened the panels are parked in a single slider configuration. Suspension is two point per module. The Acoustic slider will have Type 1 seals Panel surfaces shall be finished in clear toughened glass


Panel frames and head track shall be Powdercoated –refer Interior Finishes Schedule.

203 Structural Criteria

H. Adopt Terrain Category: 3.0 Refer AS/NZS 1170.

I. Wind loading: design: 1. Glazing and frame assemblies to suit the static and dynamic wind forces as indicated on

the tables in the AS/NZS 1170. 2. Structural members of glazed units of such strength that when tested at the specified

design wind values they do not deflect by an amount greater than span/240 and do not cause permanent deflection.

3. Fix members so that the above loading is generated in the members without stress causing failure or movement becoming evident at any joint.

J. Movement: permit free and noiseless movement of the components due to thermal effects, structural effect, wind pressure, effect of dead loads, without strain to glass, without buckling of components and without excessive stress to members or assemblies.

K. Contact with other materials: coat metal surfaces in contact with mortar, concrete, plaster, masonry, wet-application of fire-proofing and absorbent materials with an anti-galvanic, moisture barrier material. Isolate, with inert material, dissimilar metals for the prevention of electrolytic action and corrosion.

L. Distortion: design the glazed assembly to minimise visual distortion of reflected images.

204 Detail Design Provisions A. General: the architect's drawings are to be considered essentially schematic except for profiles of

exposed surfaces and panel arrangement where indicated. If, in the opinion of the builder a change of profile is required in order to meet the specification, arrange through the architect for a review of the condition. Design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to suit each specified condition in an acceptable manner complying with the requirements specified herein.



level or dimensioned angle not to exceed 9mm total at location. 3. Change in deviation not to exceed 3mm for 3.5m run in direction.

205 Finish

Ensure that in corrosive environment the proposed finish meets the product manufacturer’s warranty. The warranty may be subject to ongoing maintenance procedures, confirm these at shop drawings stage. Refer to Finishes Schedule for type and coating thickness. Polyester powder coat: Polyester powdercoated, to colour approved by the architect and by the manufacturer of the powder material, to metal of windows, doors and shop fronts. Perform pre-treatment and application of powder coating by applicators approved by the architect and by the manufacturer of the powder material. Minimum coating thickness of 50 microns subjected to random testing after installation. Non-conforming material will be removed and made good by the builder. Comply with requirements of AS 3715.

206 Glass Metal of windows, doors and shop fronts anodised to selected colour. Refer to approved national energy rating system or Section J for glass selection. A. Glass materials for external use: Viridian Comfort Plus Clear glazing, minimum 6.38mm thick. B. Glass material for internal use: Clear laminated glass minimum 6.38mm thick. C. Calculations: calculate glass sizes and thicknesses in accordance with Standards, and fixing

devices and connections to structure in accordance with engineer's computations where applicable.

207 Sealants and Accessory Materials

Refer to Acoustic Report as applicable. A. Provide non-structural external weatherproofing sealants of low modulus neutral curing silicone

rubber compounds by approved manufacturer. B. Generally comply with AS 1288, Part 2, Section 6 or 8. Supply spacer gaskets, glazing tapes and

setting blocks compatible with sealants, which do not contribute to sealant colour change or affect the sealants adhesion to substrates when exposed to ultraviolet light.


Prior to application, samples of materials receiving the silicone, including elastomeric sealants are to be evaluated by the silicone sealant manufacturer for compatibility and primer selection. Clearly identify the submitted materials as to manufacturer and product number. Silicone sealants generally will be clear in colour.

C. Interior sealers: acrylic-emulsion or latex-rubber-modified acrylic emulsion sealant compound, permanently flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding; recommended by manufacturer for protected exterior exposure and general interior exposure.

D. Joint primer/sealer: provide type of joint primer/sealer as recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit each surface.

E. Bond breaker tape: polyethylene tape or other plastic as recommended by sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler is to be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

F. Sealant backer rod: compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other flexible permanent, durable non-absorbent material as recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant.

G. Glazing tape: polyisobutylene tape of type, thickness and width as recommended by glass manufacturer and architect.

H. Exposed screws: countersunk type, anodised aluminium or non-magnetic stainless steel evenly and neatly located in an approved manner. Exposed fasteners: finished to match aluminium.

208 Fabrication

Comply with AS 2047. Framing system: fabricate from extrusions to profiles shown on approved shop drawings. Form junctions so that no fixings, such as pins, screws, pressure indentations and the like are visible on exposed faces. Show on shop drawings fixings which will be exposed. Cut edges, drill holes, rivet joints and clean flat sheets, neat, free from burrs and indentations. Remove sharp edges without excessive deformation. Fit mitred joints accurately to a fine hairline. Pre-assemble and match mark before delivery.

209 Dissimilar Metals In moist environments, prevent totally contact between dissimilar metals (any metals). This instruction takes priority over any drawing, detail or instruction and will prevent cathodic reaction between the metals. Refer this instruction to the structural engineer.

210 Acoustic seals Provide where listed on the drawings


Inspect site conditions before start of work on site, before delivery of materials. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation. Perform rectification required before delivery of materials. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Prepare surfaces affected by the installation in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions.

303 Frame Anchorage Fabricator is required to supply the anchorage devices to the builder for building in by others and check that devices are located as required to suit the requirements of window frame fabrication for positive and permanent fixing. Insulation: isolate dissimilar metals at interfaces with bitumen based or nylon shim materials to prevent galvanic action. Make good concrete or masonry damaged during the installation of masonry anchors at no cost to the proprietor.

304 Frame Installation Comply with AS 2047.

305 Glazing Secure glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations and AS 1288. Allow for thermal expansion of glass, the metal framing and spandrels.


306 Preparation for Sealants

Joint preparation sealants: clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which could interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces if recommended by sealant manufacturer. Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated, and where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate on to adjoining surfaces.

307 Installation of Sealants A. Install bond breaker tape where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that

elastomeric sealants will perform properly. B. Employ only proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in

uniform continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface slightly below adjoining surfaces.

C. Install sealant to depths as recommended by sealant manufacturer. D. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Advise architect of procedures required for cure and protection of joint sealers during construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at time of Practical Completion.

E. Remove excess caulking compound and sealant and leave surfaces neat, smooth and clean, without smears on surrounding work. Tool joints where recommended by manufacturer or where required. Remove cartons and debris from site as the work progresses.

308 Insect Screens

Refer Grilles and Screens specification section.

309 Protection A. Framing system: protect metal surfaces as necessary during erection. Finish surfaces free from

mechanical imperfections such as scratches, scrapes, dents, spots, stains and streaks. B. Glass: protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation and until Practical Completion.

Remove and replace glass and metal panels which are broken, cracked, abraded, chipped or damaged in other ways, before, during or after installation, at no additional cost to proprietor.

C. Be responsible for breakage and damage to installation until Practical Completion.

310 Cleaning A. Remove labels, excess glazing compounds, stains, spots and other foreign matter from glass,

frames, hardware and other finished surfaces immediately upon installation of glazing for each light.

B. Debris: remove rubbish and debris resulting from glazing operations, each day.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08710 DOOR HARDWARE


Supply and install door hardware including but not limited to: Wall mounted grilles for ventilation and other purposes. Hinges. Pivots. Latches. Locks. Door holders. Push plates.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Floor construction Painting Wall construction Doors and door frames Ceiling construction Fire-rated door and frames Concrete Roller shutter doors Carpentry Folding doors and grilles Metal finishing


104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1428 Design for access and mobility. There are 5 parts. 1992 – 2010. AS 1909 1984 (Obsolescent) Installation of timber doorsets. AS 2688 1984 (Obsolescent) Timber doors. AS 2689 1984 (Obsolescent) Timber doorsets. AS 4145 Locksets.

4145.2 2008 Mechanical locksets for doors in buildings. There are 4 other parts, 2001 - 2011 plus 2 Amdts 2009, 2015.

AS 4178 1994 Electromagnetic door holders. Comply with requirements of statutory and local authorities.

105 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver items to site in original packaging, each clearly labelled for the relevant door by door number.

106 Warranty Provide to the proprietor a warranty covering faulty materials and installation for 5 years from date of Practical Completion.



201 Manufacturers

202 Hardware Items Master key systems: refer schedule provided by manufacturer.

203 Miscellaneous Fasteners: provide required bolts, screws, inserts, fasteners, templates and other accessories required for a complete installation. Coordinate with other trades as to the proper fastening systems suitable for the substrates to which the item is to be secured. Refer to architect if in doubt.



Examine the materials to which door hardware is to be fixed. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Remove hardware from surfaces to be painted. Replace when paint is dry.

303 Installation Comply throughout with the written instructions of manufacturer.

304 Keys Supply duplicate labelled keys for each lock. Provide plastic tags for each key. Arrange with architect for location of a key cupboard. Fit cupboard with hooks for each key with room names or numbers. Install cupboard where instructed.

305 Testing Check each key in relevant lock for satisfactory operation. Replace defective keys or locks. Clean the materials installed. Remove construction locks.

306 Coordination Before finalising hardware order, review with security sub-contractor work related to reed switches, electric locks/strikes etc. Generally such items will be supplied by the security contractors and fitted to doors and frame by the builder.

307 Door Hardware Fixing Schedule Fix door hardware scheduled below to be supplied by a nominated supplier. ALUMINIUM DOOR AND FRAME HARDWARE

No. Item Location 88 Fast Fix Hinges Surface Fixed 16 Mortice Lockset and Accessories Fully Morticed 2 Mortice Deadlock and Accessories Fully Morticed

18 Door Closers Surface Fixed 21 Door Closer Accessories I.e. Hold Open Device Adjustment Only 16 Lever Furniture and Accessories Back to Back Fixed 3 Entry Pull Handles Back to Back Fixed 8 Strapbolts Surface Fixed 7 Floor Threshold Fixed to Floor 1 Door Bottom Seal Fixed to Door Bottom

20 Door Bottom Seal Fully Rebated into Door Bottom 13 Perimeter Frame Seal (Head and Jambs) Surface Fixed to Frame 13 Door Stops Floor Mounted

TIMBER DOOR HARDWARE 28 Butt Hinges Rebated Into Door and Frame 12 Fast Fix Hinges Surface Fixed 6 Mortice Lockset and Accessories Fully Morticed 2 Mortice Deadlock and Accessories Fully Morticed 2 Rebate Kit to suit Mortice Lock/Latch Rebated into Door Edge 6 Lever Furniture and Accessories Back to Back Fixed 1 Strike Boxes and Plates Recessed 1 Mortice Indicator Bolt Fully Morticed 1 Hat & Coat Hook Surface Fixed 3 Door Closers Surface Fixed 4 Strapbolts Surface Fixed 2 Push Plate and D Pull Handle Back to Back Fixed 3 Floor Threshold Fixed to Floor 3 Door Bottom Seal Fixed to Door Bottom 5 Door Stops Floor Mounted


308 Door Hardware Provisional Sum

Allow a Provisional Sum (PS) of $ 30,000.00 plus GST for the supply of door hardware by a nominated supplier.

END OF DOCUMENT

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 4 SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING

SECTION 08800 GLASS AND GLAZING


Supply and install a complete system of glass, glazing and sealants including but not limited to: Glass, clear float spandrel Glass, laminated Glass, tinted, heat reflecting, mirrored Glazing bars Glazing beads, strips Sealants and related materials

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Concrete Masonry Structural steel Roof flashings, etc. Electrical Security Fireproofing and fire services Timber windows and frames

103 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer qualifications: not less than ten (10) years continuous experience in the

manufacture of the product types specified. B. Installer qualifications: installer is to have not less than five (5) years continuous experience in

the erection of specified material. C. Testing agency qualifications generally: Perform tests, where required, by a NATA Laboratory or

by CSIRO Division of Building Research. Tests performed by recognised overseas testing laboratories certified by the American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) may be submitted and will be considered in evaluation of the products and systems proposed, but such tests will not relieve the builder from responsibility for providing tests from an approved testing agency.

D. Take responsibility for providing the trades of such Sections with complete information on the materials and equipment to be installed, the critical dimensions of such work, and other data affecting the work of the trades identified. Ensure sub-contractors and vendors cooperate in the proper sequence and fit of the work.

E. Review sub-contractor’s shop drawings and obtain architect’s approval in writing. Refer DOCUMENT 00800, clause 27.

F. Take care with tolerances and dimensional verifications.


1170.0 2002 General principles. Plus 5 Amdts, 2003 – 2011. 1170.1 2002 Permanent, imposed and other actions. Plus 2 Amdts,

2005 – 2009. 1170.2 2011 Wind actions. There are 2 other parts, several Supplements and Amdts, 2002 – 2011.

AS 1288 2006 Glass in buildings - Selection and installation. Plus 1 Supplement, 2006 and 2 Amdts, 2008 - 2011.

AS/NZS 2208 1996 Safety glazing materials in buildings. Plus 1 Amdt, 1999. AS/NZS 2343 1997 Bullet-resistant panels and elements. AS 4145.2 2008 Locksets and hardware for doors and windows – Mechanical locksets for

doors and windows in buildings. Plus 2 Amdts, 2009, 2015. AS 4666 2012 Insulating glass units HB 125 2007 The glass and glazing handbook. Comply with relevant authority's requirement for fire-rated installation.

105 Submissions Required Prior to Purchase and Fabrication A. Complete system description including the following information:

Names of manufacturers of products. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local representatives for products.


Types, model numbers and names of products, and indication whether products are "off the shelf" or custom fabricated. Include specific information on finishes - thicknesses, patented process name, process description and test data.

Detailed information on products manufactured specifically for this project. Detailed system description including standard details and manufacturer's literature; and large-scale details of specially fabricated products.

B. Statement that the proposed system(s) meet(s) the regulatory requirements, thermal, aesthetic and waterproofing criteria and wind loading, construction, glazing and warranty requirements specified; noting in detail exceptions.

C. Shop drawings: pursuant to DOCUMENT 00800, clause 27 and the provisions of this document, provide the shop drawings showing the following information where appropriate to the items: 1. Layout (sectional plan and elevation of complete assembly). 2. Full size section of members. 3. Methods of assembly. 4. Methods of glazing. 5. Methods of installation, including fixings, anchorage, caulking, flashings. 6. Provision for expansion (thermal). 7. Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces. 8. Fittings and accessories.


and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product required. Submit certificate test reports for elastomeric sealants on aged performance as specified, including hardness, stain resistance, adhesion, cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility, compression set, modulus of elasticity, water absorption, and resistance (ageing, weight loss, deterioration) and heat and exposure to ozone and ultraviolet light.


Handle materials with care. Do not store on site. Install directly in place. Store sealants as instructed by manufacturer.

107 Warranty In addition to the warranty requirements of the General Conditions of Contract, provide the following: A. Warranty: provide glass manufacturer's written warranty, agreeing to, within specified warranty

period, furnish freight paid to project site, replacement units for glass units which have defective hermetic seals (excluding that due to glass breakage), defined to include intrusion of moisture or dirt, internal condensation at temperatures above -2°C, deterioration of internal glass coatings, and other visual evidence of seal failure or performance failure; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installation, protection and maintenance have been adhered to during warranty period.

B. Warranty period is 10 years after date of installation and not less than10 years after date of Practical Completion.


The following manufacturers are acceptable for this project: Glass: Viridian

202 Structural Criteria A. Adopt terrain category: 3.0

Refer AS/NZS 1170. B. Wind loading: design glazing and frame assemblies to suit the static and dynamic wind forces as

indicated on the tables in the AS/NZS 1170. Structural members of glazed units: of such strength that they will not deflect by an amount greater than span/240 without causing permanent deflection when tested at the specified design wind values. Fix members so that the above loading is generated in the members without sufficient stress to cause failure or movement becoming evident at any joint.

C. Distortion: design the glazed assembly and erect to minimise visual distortion of reflected images.

203 Selection of Glass and Glazing Materials

Refer to detailed parts and sections of AS 1288. Part 1 deals with the selection of type and thickness of glass. Part 3 with unframed toughened glass assemblies. Note particularly:


Part 1, Section 4, Human Impact Safety Requirements, AS/NZS 2208. Part 1, Section 3, Non-Vertical Situations. Part 2, Glazing techniques. Choose the method directly from the eight sections of this part of the Standard.

204 Glass Materials Glass types (Refer drawings for location) External vision glazing: Viridian Comfort Plus Clear, 6.38mm minimum thickness. External spandrel glazing: Viridian Spectra Seraphic, Colour: Woodland Grey opaque.

Internal glazing: Clear laminated, 6.38mm minimum thickness and as nominated on the drawings

205 Sealants and Accessory Materials A. Comply with AS 1288. Refer the appropriate Trade Section, and comply with requirements

stated. B. For timber frames, use linseed oil glazing putty. C. For metal frames:

1. Non-structural external weatherproofing sealants: low modulus neutral curing silicone rubber compounds of approved manufacture.

2. Generally comply with AS 1288. Spacer gaskets, glazing tapes and setting blocks: compatible with sealants, which do not contribute to sealant colour change or affect the sealants adhesion to substrates when exposed to ultraviolet light. Evaluate prior to application, samples of materials receiving the silicone, including elastomeric sealants for compatibility and primer selection. Submit materials clearly identified as to manufacturer and product number. Silicone sealants generally: clear in colour.

3. Interior Sealers: acrylic-emulsion or latex-rubber-modified acrylic-emulsion sealant compound, permanently flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding; recommended by manufacturer for protected exterior exposure and general interior exposure.

4. Joint Primer/Sealer: provide type of joint primer/sealer recommended by sealant manufacturer for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.

5. Bond Breaker Tape: polyethylene tape or other plastic as recommended by sealant manufacturer to be applied to sealant-contact surfaces where bond to substrate or joint filler is to be avoided for proper performance of sealant. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

6. Sealant Backer Rod: compressible rod stock of polyethylene foam, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, butyl rubber foam, neoprene foam or other permanently flexible, durable non-absorptive material as recommended by sealant manufacturer for compatibility with sealant.

7. Glazing Tape: polyisobutylene tape of type, thickness and width as recommended by glass manufacturer and architect.

8. Exposed fixings: countersunk type, anodised aluminium or non-magnetic stainless steel evenly and neatly located in an approved manner. Exposed fasteners: finished to match aluminium. Show on shop drawings or discuss with the architect before fabrication and delivery of any fixings which will be exposed.


Inspect site conditions before start of work on site, before delivery of materials. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation. Arrange for rectification required before delivery of materials. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Prepare surfaces affected by the installation in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions.

303 Preparation for Sealants Joint preparation sealants: clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of sealant or caulking compound. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances which could interfere with bond of sealant or caulking compound. Etch concrete and masonry joint surfaces as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Roughen vitreous and glazed joint surfaces if recommended by sealant manufacturer and comply with his instructions. Prime or seal joint surfaces where indicated, and where recommended by sealant manufacturer. Do not allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate on to adjoining surfaces.


304 Glazing

Secure glass in accordance with glass manufacturer's recommendations and AS 1288. Allow for thermal expansion of glass, the metal framing and spandrels.

305 Installation of Sealants A. Install bond breaker tape where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure that

elastomeric sealants will perform properly. B. Employ proven installation techniques, which will ensure that sealants are deposited in uniform

continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of joint bond surfaces equally on opposite sides. Except as otherwise indicated, fill sealant rabbet to a slightly concave surface slightly below adjoining surfaces.

C. Install sealant to depths as recommended by sealant manufacturer. D. Cure sealants and caulking compounds in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and

recommendations, to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and surface durability. Advise architect of procedures required for cure and protection of joint sealers during construction period, so that they will be without deterioration or damage (other than normal wear and weathering) at time of Practical Completion.

E. Remove excess caulking compound and sealant and leave surfaces neat, smooth and clean, without smears on surrounding work. Tool joints where recommended by manufacturer or where required. Remove cartons and debris from site as the work progresses.


Arrange for visits to the site by the supplier's approved technical representative of each component. Such visits are to occur at the start of and during the first stages of installations and towards the end of installations. Follow instructions of the technical representatives. Call in the architect where appropriate for resolution of problems or difficulties.

307 Protection A. Framing system: protect metal surfaces as necessary during erection. B. Finish surfaces free from mechanical imperfections such as scratches, scrapes, dents, spots,

stains and streaks. C. Glass: protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation until Practical Completion.

Remove and replace glass and metal panels which are broken, cracked, abraded, chipped or damaged in other ways, before, during or after installation, at no additional cost to the Proprietor.

D. Be responsible for breakage and damage to installation until Practical Completion.

308 Cleaning A. Remove labels, excess glazing compounds, stains, spots and other foreign matter from glass,

frames, hardware and other finished surfaces immediately upon completion of each panel of glazing.

B. Debris: remove rubbish and debris resulting from glazing operations, each day.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 08850 MIRRORS

SECTION 08850 MIRRORS


Supply and install mirrors including but not limited to: Glass mirrors - laminated safety glass

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Cement render Hard plaster Plasterboard Masonry housework Particleboard backings Suspended exposed grid ceilings

103 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer's qualifications: not less than 10 years’ continuous experience in the manufacture

of the product types specified. B. Installer qualifications: not less than 5 years’ continuous experience in the fixing of the specified

material. C. Take responsibility for providing the trades with complete information on the materials and

equipment to be installed. D. Review sub-contractor’s shop drawings and obtain the architect's approval in writing.

Refer DOCUMENT 00800 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT, clause 27. E. Take care with tolerances and dimensional variations.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1288 2006 Glass in buildings - Selection and installation.

Plus 1 Supplement, 2006 and 2 Amdts, 2008 - 2011. AS/NZS 2208 1996 Safety glazing materials in buildings. Plus 1 Amdt, 1999.

105 Submissions If not specified in Part II Materials, the following submissions are required before ordering materials:

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Handle materials with care. Do not store on site. Install directly in place. Store sealants as instructed by the manufacturers.


202 Selection of Mirror Types

A. Laminated to 3mm clear glass with 0.38mm thick interlayer to comply with relevant sections of AS/NZS 2208.

203 Accessory Materials

A. Neutral curing (non-acetic) clear silicone adhesive: applied to the edges of frameless mirrors. applied to the edges of laminated glass mirrors.

B. Aluminium channel frame to suit glass thickness: selected colour polyester powdercoat finish applied in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Refer to Interior Finishes Schedule.

204 Fixing Holes Drill mirrors 8mm diameter at each corner to receive face fixing screws. Locate holes 75mm minimum from edges of mirrors.

205 Recessed Finger Pulls Grind and polish, 75mm long, 20mm wide, 3mm deep recessed finger pulls, 50mm back from one vertical edge of each sliding glass mirror door.

206 Proprietary Brand Mirror Systems A. Mirror faced proprietary brand sliding door system provided complete with components

recommended by its manufacturer.


B. Or an alternative mirror faced bi-fold door system provided complete with components recommended by its manufacturer.

207 Glass Edge Finishes

Finish edges of glass mirrors as follows: - aluminium channel frame.

PART III EXECUTION

301 Examination

Inspect site conditions before start of work on site, before delivery of materials. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation. Perform rectification required before delivery of materials. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Prepare surfaces affected by the installation in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions. Clean glass surfaces immediately before applying silicone sealants to the edges of mirrors. Remove dirt, insecure coatings, moisture and other substances that could interfere with the bond of the sealant. Thoroughly clean down the backings to remove dust, dirt and other substances that: - could interfere with the bond of the adhesive - could interfere with the bond of the double sided tape Sand down gloss surfaces of backings to provide porous type finish. Seal new plasterboard or hard plaster backings with 1 coat of pigmented sealer.

303 Edge Sealing to Mirrors Arris the outer corner of backings and seal around edges of the mirrors with clear neutral cure (non-acetic) silicone sealant gunned into place between the backings and the edges of the mirror and finished off to smooth even fillet lapping slightly over the back edges of the mirror.

304 Support Angles to Bonded Mirrors 12.70 x 9.53 x 1.57 Alcan H 9660 or similar extruded clear anodised aluminium angles provided continuously along the bottom edges of flannelette bonded glass mirrors. Set the support angles with the 12.70mm flange vertical. Fix the support angles to the backings using 13mm long counter-sunk head screws spaced 150 maximum o.c.'s along the angles. Glue the angles to the backings in addition to screwing using a clear 2 pot epoxy glue. Set to true straight level lines to ensure a continuous bearing surface along the bottom edge of the mirror.

305 Fixing of Polarex/Flannelette Bonded Mirrors Cover mirrors on the back surface with free brushed flannelette fabric pressed into the adhesive and thoroughly smoothed to remove air bubbles and wrinkles. The adhesive should not saturate the cloth, and keep the top surface of the cloth dry and fluffy. Leave to harden for approximately 12 hours. After this adhesive has hardened, apply a full coat of adhesive to the surface of the backing and spread evenly to cover the whole area of the mirror. When "tacky" press the mirror firmly into position until the mirror is bonded to the backing such that full adhesion is maintained over at least 90% of the mirror for approximately 1 or 2 minutes. Provide spaces of at least 2mm width between adjacent mirrors to allow for expansion and movement in the backing material. Paint the backing behind these spaces black. 5 litres of adhesive is sufficient for approximately 25 square metres.

306 Clip Fixing of Mirrors Fasten mirrors to the backings using chrome plated brass mirror clips screwed to the edges of the backings using chrome plated counter-sunk Phillips head screws. Provide flannelette pads between the clips and the mirror. The pads are to be of the same width as the clips.

307 Face Fixing of Mirrors Fasten mirrors to the backings using proprietary brand brass screws through holes drilled through the mirror. Provide domed caps screwed onto the threaded outer ends of the screws - refer to clause 203 of this trade section.


308 Proprietary Brand Systems A. Proprietary brand glass mirror faced sliding door systems installed in accordance with

manufacturer's printed instructions. B. Proprietary brand glass mirror faced bi-fold door system installed in accordance with the

manufacturer's printed instructions. C. Install in the exposed grid, suspended metal ceiling grid in accordance with the manufacturer's

printed instructions. Provide 3mm minimum clearance between the panels and the vertical flanges of the ceiling grid rails.

309 Protection

A. Aluminium components: protect metal surfaces as necessary during erection and until Practical Completion. Finish surfaces free from mechanical imperfections such as scratches, scrapes, dents, spots, stains and streaks.

B. Mirrors: protect mirrors from breakage immediately upon installation until Practical Completion. Remove and replace mirrors and metal parts that are broken, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways before, after or during installation up to the date of Practical Completion at no additional cost to the proprietor.

310 Cleaning

A. Remove labels, excess silicone, stains, spots and other foreign matter from mirrors, frames, hardware and other finished surfaces immediately upon completion of the installation of each mirror. Use cleaning systems recommended by the manufacturer of the mirror type.

B. Debris: remove rubbish and debris resulting from glazing operations each day.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09200 HARD PLASTER OVER RENDER BASE

SECTION 09200 HARD PLASTER OVER RENDER BASE

PART I GENERAL

101 Scope

The work of this trade section includes but is not limited to the supply and installation of new (render base and hardwall plaster) work on masonry surfaces as follows: Glass face cement render to walls

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Masonry Ceilings Electrical wiring Joinery Resilient wall linings Painting

103 Quality Assurance A. Supply and installation of render base (“float coat”) and plaster surface treatment (“set coat”) are

to be performed by an approved sub-contractor known for reliability, quality of work and performance. Submit evidence to the satisfaction of the architect.

B. At a location and time to be selected by the architect, construct a complete prototypical installation approx. 6m x 3m square (3m square render base, 3m square plaster finish). Include elements provided under this section and finish in every respect. On approval by the architect, the section of render base sample will be plastered and prototype will become the standard for the remaining work, and will remain as part of the work.

104 References

Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards; current edition: AS 3700 2011 Masonry structures. There is 1 Supplement 2012, Amdt 2015 AS 3972 2010 General purpose and blended cements. HB 161 2005 Guide to plastering

105 Delivery, Handling and Storage A. General: deliver manufactured materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing

the name of the manufacturer and the brand. B. Protect materials from dampness. Store off the ground or slab, under cover and away from wet

walls and other damp conditions, in secure storage.

106 Warranty On completion of the work, provide a warranty to the proprietor stating that the work is secure against defects including delamination from substrate, “blowing", "grinning" and "crazing" for the period of years from the date of Practical Completion.

PART II MATERIALS

201 Acceptable Manufacturers A. To comply with AS 2592:

Cement: Cockburn Cement, Swan Cement Lime:

B. Accessories Rondo

202 Render Base Materials

A. Cement: Grey Portland. Conform to AS 3972. B. Sand: clean, sharp washed free from loam, organic matter or soluble impurities, conforming with

the following table: Sieve size

No. Retained on each sieve

% 4 0 8 5 16 30 30 65 50 95

100 100 Soluble salts content (W/W%) 0.15 max.


NOTE: When instructed by the architect, arrange for laboratory tests to be carried out on sand samples at no cost to proprietor.

C. Lime (if required): Hydrated lime. D. Water: Clean, drinkable.

203 Render Base/Plaster Finish Accessories Rondo galvanised components: refer www.rondo.com.au. External corner bead: (R01) or (R02) or (R05). Bullnose external corner: R06. Stopping bead: (R11, R12 or R13 finished thickness) or (R11) or (R12) or (R13). Expansion joints: R45. Lathing: galvanised expanded metal lathing, Lysaght, PL 25 or other approved.

204 Mixes A. Render base (float coat):

Render over masonry and concrete substrates: sand: 6 parts by volume. lime: 1 part by volume. cement: 1 part by volume.

Use minimum water content to achieve workability and adhesion. Measure parts in mixes by dry volume in gauge boxes. Keep gauge boxes clean and free from hardened materials. Do not use any other additives without written permission of the architect.

B. Plaster finish (set coat): Mix Plaster 2 parts by volume. Lime: 1 part by volume Do not use any other additives without written permission of the architect.

C. Render base (glass face cement render); sand: 6 parts by volume. cement: 1 part by volume


D. Finish coat (glass face cement render); sand: 1 parts by volume. cement: 1 part by volume


E. Variations in mix Obtain the architect’s prior permission to vary mixes where necessary to match new work with existing adjacent work.

PART III EXECUTION

301 Examination Acceptance: notify the architect of discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Preparation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Remove foreign material, dust, dirt, oil, nails and other material which could reduce bonding of render base to the masonry substrate.

303 Application of Plaster Unless otherwise nominated, render base is required to all wall areas to receive hardwall plaster finish. Where render is applied over very smooth masonry, first apply 2 separate coats of Cemstik, Bondcrete or Bondseal. If in doubt, check with architect. Thickness - minimum 10mm. Where 2 coat work is required: Base coat: 8 - 10mm thick.

Finish coat: 6 - 8mm thick. (comb in 2 directions and allow to dry over 5 days minimum)

Produce surface suitable to accept plaster finish. Use material within 30 minutes of addition of the water. Beyond this time, discard the mix. Do not re-temper. Apply mixes containing cement within 1 hour of adding these materials to the mix.


Apply top coats on each plane in a single operation without joints or breaks. Dampen render base 3 hours after application. Do not allow finishes to dry out within 48 hours. Continue render base behind the full extent of unlined fittings. Finish curved surfaces to a true radius. At construction joints between different substrate sections or materials, install: Galvanised stopping beads fixed to substrates each side of joint. V-joint in render/plaster at construction joints. Wall finish control joint as detailed.

304 Application of Plaster Apply mixes containing hardwall plaster within 1 hour of adding these materials to the mix. Apply top coats on each plane in a single operation without joints or breaks. Do not apply plaster finish coats within 7 days of applying render base. Continue plaster finish behind the full extent of unlined fittings.

305 Movement Control Joints A. Locate wall finish movement control joints to coincide with junctions of differing wall materials

(reinforced concrete/blockwork). B. Form joints continuously to extend neatly and clearly up to adjacent abutting surfaces and finish

with approved sealant system.

306 Internal Corners Finish square internal (re-entrant) vertical corners of walls and columns.

307 External Corners Finish external vertical corners slightly rounded to approximately 5mm radius or to corner bead as nominated.

308 Extent of Finish Extend render base and plaster finish into recesses, door and window reveals, returns, etc.

309 Covering Concealed Chases Backgrout chases with 1:4 cement mortar up to face level of masonry at least 24 hours before commencing render base. Reinforce chases wider than 50mm with galvanised expanded metal lathing (fixed before first render coat) carried at least 150mm beyond each side of chase and fixed with galvanised fastenings at 300mm maximum centres.

310 Covering to Steelwork Unless otherwise detailed, wrap steelwork required to be plaster coated with expanded metal lathing applied with the cuts of the mesh horizontal and the bent strands sloping downwards and inwards. Fix lathing before first render coat. Overlap adjacent material at least 75mm. Lap lathing not more than 300mm at joints. Secure lathing to masonry with 4mm staples at 150mm maximum spacings. Secure lathing to mild steel with explosive powered fastenings and tie wire at 150mm maximum spacings.

311 V-Joints Unless otherwise detailed, form V-joints where plaster finish abuts insitu concrete, face brickwork, blockwork, plasterboard or timber surfaces.

312 Door and Window Frames Unless otherwise detailed, where plaster finish abuts door and window frames, stop render base and plaster finish short of frames, ensuring no bond to frame at base of render, raking back to a gap of approximately 3mm at the plaster surface. Finish frame/plaster gap with approved flexible paintable joint sealant.

313 Cleaning Clean up and remove from site excess materials and debris resulting from operations. Clean and restore to original condition adjacent materials affected by the work.



END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 09250 PLASTERBOARD

SECTION 09250 PLASTERBOARD


Supply and install a complete installation of plasterboard including but not limited to: Plasterboard Lining of concrete and masonry walls Lining of steel stud walls Lining with water-resistant plasterboard Ceilings, drop walls, bulkheads Cornices.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Masonry walls Electrical Stud walls Other: Suspended ceilings

103 Quality Assurance Prototype: at a location selected by the architect, construct a complete prototypical installation of plasterboard on each different substrate. Each sample, full height by 3600 wide includes elements required by this specification and finish in every respect. When approved by the architect, this sample will remain part of the work and becomes the standard for the remaining work.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS/NZS 2589 2007 Gypsum linings - Application and finishing. HB 161 2005 Guide to plastering

105 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver manufactured materials in bundles and packages bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand. Handle with care. Remove damaged materials from the site. Protect stored materials from damage and damp, or materials which may cause deterioration.

106 Warranty Provide warranty covering the work against defective materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of Practical Completion. The warranty includes a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with relevant Australian Standards and Codes and manufacturer's instructions in effect at the time of installation.


CSR Gyprock Boral Plasterboard BGC GTEK Rondo

202 Materials Supply materials in accordance with material supplier's recommendations for each application. Refer to the drawings for locations and extent of boards. 13mm thick impact resistant plasterboard, minimum mass 10.5kg/m2. 13mm thick plasterboard. 13mm moisture resistant plasterboard.

PART III EXECUTION

301 Examination Acceptance: visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to site. Rectify any discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 09250 PLASTERBOARD

302 Preparation A. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian

Standards, as relevant. B. Coordinate with and ensure preparatory work by other trades is done prior to commencement of

work; failure to do so will involve removal of plasterboard and immediate rectification. C. Arrange for provision of additional stud, nogging, trimmed openings, boxed studs, fixing grounds,

etc., required for satisfactory execution of the work of this trade including penetrations through plasterboard for services. Cooperate in installation of frames, duct openings, etc.

D. Space enclosure: do not install materials until space is enclosed and weatherproof, and until wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry.

303 Layout and Tolerances

A. Check dimensions of areas and surfaces to which material is applied before installation begins. B. Measure each area and establish layout pattern. C. All finished work is to be within + 2mm of the sizes shown on the relevant drawings.

304 Installation - General A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Anchor and fasten materials and

components to comply with ratings and performance requirements, and to comply with governing local regulations. Comply with appropriate Australian Standard.

B. Take care of and protect surrounding work, including other finishes, equipment and components, during installation. Provide protective covering where necessary.

305 Installation Particulars

306 Finishing Details

General: apply treatment at board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetration, fasteners, heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Pre-fill open joints and rounded or bevelled edges, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. Apply fibreglass joint tape at joints between boards, where a trim accessory is indicated, or where extra strength is required.

307 Protection Protect finished work. Make good damage in every respect at no additional cost to the proprietor, and without delay to job progress.

308 Cleaning A. Adjust and clean: clean exposed surfaces including trim, edge moldings, and comply with

manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate damage.

B. Remove spatterings and droppings resulting from work. Remove daily surplus materials and rubbish from the work area.

C. Leave floors broom clean at completion.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 09260 DRY WALL PARTITIONS

SECTION 09260 DRY WALL PARTITIONS


Supply and install drywall partitions including but not limited to: Steelwork Stud wall framing Plasterboard Pre-surfaced panels of plasterboard etc. Other:

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trade sections: Floor construction Ceiling construction Floor treatment Electrical wiring Skirtings Plumbing Wall construction Painting Wall finishing

103 Quality Assurance Prototype: at a location selected by the architect on site, construct a full size prototype of: Include in each prototype all elements required by this specification, and finish in every respect. When approved by the architect, such samples will be the control standard and remain part of the work.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1428 Design for access and mobility. There are 5 parts. 1992 – 2010. AS 1684 Residential timber-framed construction. There are many parts and

Supplements, 1999 – 2010 and Amdts 2012, 2013. AS/NZS 2589 2007 Gypsum linings - Application and finishing.

2589.1 1997 (Available Superseded) Gypsum plasterboard. 2589.2 1997 (Available Superseded) Fibre reinforced gypsum

plaster. AS 3623 1993 Domestic metal framing. AS/NZS 4600 2005 Cold-formed steel structures. Plus 1 Amdt, 2010.

105 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver manufactured materials in bundles and packages bearing the name and manufacturer, and the brand. Handle with care. Remove damaged materials from the site. Protect stored materials from damage and damp, or materials which may cause deterioration.

106 Warranty Provide warranty covering the work against defective materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of Practical Completion. Include a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with relevant Australian Standards and codes and manufacturer's instructions in effect at the time of installation.

PART II MATERIALS

201 Acceptable Manufacturers

CSR Gyprock Boral Plasterboard BGC GTEK Rondo

202 Materials Supply materials in accordance with material supplier's recommendations for each application. Refer to the drawings for locations and extent of boards and framing sizes. 13mm thick impact resistant plasterboard, minimum mass 10.5kg/m2. 13mm thick plasterboard. 13mm moisture resistant plasterboard.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 09260 DRY WALL PARTITIONS

76mm and 92mm lipped steel studs as nominated on the drawings, base metal thickness to suit maximum wall height in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.

203 Material Specials Not applicable

PART III EXECUTION

301 Examination Visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to site. Rectify discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions. Space Enclosure: do not install materials until space is enclosed and weatherproof, and until wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry.

302 Preparation A. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian

Standards, as relevant. B. Coordinate with and ensure preparatory work by other trades is done prior to commencement of

work; failure to do so will involve removal of dry wall partition and immediate rectification. C. Arrange for provision of additional stud, nogging, trimmed openings, boxed studs, fixing grounds,

etc., required for satisfactory execution of the work of this trade including penetrations through plasterboard for services. Cooperate in installation of frames, duct openings, etc.

303 Installation General

A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions. Anchor and fasten materials and components to comply with ratings and performance requirements, and to comply with governing local regulations. Comply with appropriate Australian Standard.

B. Take care of and protect surrounding work, including other finishes, equipment and components, during installation. Provide protective covering where necessary.

304 Installation Particulars

305 Protection

Protect finish work. Damage made good in every respect at no additional cost to the proprietor, and without delay to job progress.

306 Finishing Details General: apply treatment at board joints (both directions), flanges of trim accessories, penetrations, fasteners, heads, surface defects and elsewhere as required to prepare work for decoration. Pre-fill open joints and rounded or bevelled edges, using type of compound recommended by manufacturer. Apply fibreglass joint tape at joints between boards, where a trim accessory is indicated, or where extra strength is required.

307 Cleaning A. Adjust and Clean: clean exposed surfaces including trim, edge moldings, and comply with

manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate damage.

B. Remove spatterings and droppings from work. Remove daily surplus materials and rubbish from the work area.



END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE

SECTION 09300 CERAMIC TILE

PART I GENERAL100

101 Scope

Supply and install ceramic tile work including but not limited to: Preparation of surfaces before tiling or bedding. Bedding screeds where required. Wall tile. Floor tile. Cleaning of finished tiled surfaces.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Wall construction Floor construction

103 Quality Assurance A. Qualifications: tiling sub-contractor to submit to architect evidence of reliability in quality of work

and performance. B. Samples: provide samples of tiles specified; not less than 4 units of each. C. Sample panel: for each tile type, floor and wall, construct a sample panel, 1 metre square. When

approved by the architect this sample becomes the standard for the balance of the work and remain as part of the completed work.

104 References

Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1428.1 Design for access and mobility. General requirements – New building work.

There are 5 parts. 1992 – 2010. AS/NZS 3661.2 1994 Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces – Guide to the reduction of slip

hazards. AS 3740 2010 Waterproofing of domestic wet areas. 1 Amdt, 2012 AS 3958 Ceramic tiles.

3958.1 2007 Guide to the installation of ceramic tiles. 3958.2 1992 Guide to the selection of a ceramic tiling system.

AS 3972 2010 General purpose and blended cements. AS 4663 2013 Slip resistance measurement of existing pedestrian surfaces. Contact www.ardexaustralia.com for technical advice regarding waterproofing matters and technique.

105 Submissions Copies of minutes of pre-installation conference. Submissions required prior to installation: product specifications for: adhesives, primers, prepared grouts, moisture resisting admixtures.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver to the site in original, unopened containers with grade, type and quality indicated on the labels. Provide secure and dry storage.

107 Warranty Provide a warranty covering defects in materials and installation for a period of 5 years from the date of Practical Completion.

PART II MATERIALS200 201 Screed Materials for Masonry Walls, Concrete Floors

Item Type Required Cement Portland cement, comply with AS 3972, cement type A Sand Clean, washed, sharp, sieved and graded, complying with

the following limits: Sand grade No % Passing sieve 4 (4.75mm) 100 8 (2.36mm) 95-100% 100 (150 microns) 25% max 200 (75 microns) 10% max


Item Type Required Fineness modulus 1.6 to 2.5% Water demand ratio by weight 0.65% maximum Aggregate Passing 4.75m sieve 80%

Passing 6.00mm sieve 90% Passing 8.00mm sieve 100%

Water Clean, drinking quality Mesh Galvanised steel, welded wire fabric: minimum 2.5mm

diameter wires at 100mm centres each way.

202 Adhesives and Sealants A. Bond and seal all tiles with low or zero VOC sealants. B. Exterior/wet area adhesives: cement-based ceramic tile adhesive. C. Interior/dry area adhesives: organic based adhesive.

203 Underlay and Backing Boards A. Underlay over timber floors: B. Ceramic tile wall-backing for stud walls: C. Fastenings: Use fastenings supplied by material manufacturers in each case. D. Waterproof membrane: recommended by an approved manufacturer.

204 Tile Supply: specified tiles are available from the following suppliers: Refer Interior Finishes Schedule.

205 Table of Tile Finishes Refer Interior Finishes Schedule and drawings.

206 Grout

Prepared grout: inorganic Portland cement integrated, ready-to-use, dry-curing grout. Colours to architect’s selection. Supply waterproof grout for wet area tiling.

207 Expansion Joints Silicone rubber, as recommended by manufacturer. Colour to architect’s selection.

208 Spare tiles

Deliver to the site in unopened boxes, spare specified tiles equivalent to 5% of the total area of ceramic tiles laid. Do not deliver to the site until directed by the architect. Place in the final storage location.


Visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings, before delivery of materials to site. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Rectify any discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Conditions of Installation A. Install backing boards or panels in accordance with manufacturer's precise instructions. B. Allow cement-rendered surfaces to dry out at least 7 days, and preferably 14 days, before tiling.

Longer curing times are required if recommended by adhesives' manufacturers. C. Rectify substrate so that when checked with a 2m straightedge, gap under the straightedge does

not exceed 6mm. D. Allow new concrete to dry out for at least 4 weeks before rendering or direct fixing of tiles.

Wall screeds: uniform in plane and lightly combed. Floor screeds: broom finished. E. Consult the architect concerning changes of level in excess of 25mm or in compliance with AS

1428.1.

303 Setting Out A. As far as possible, set out work so that no tile less than half size occurs. Align joints in floor tile at

right angles to each other and straight with walls to conform to patterns selected. Verify locations of equipment before installing tile. Coordinate with plumbing and other trades. Fully tile surfaces under surface-mounted items.


B. Expansion Joints Set out panels of tiling so that tiles may expand or contract to and from corners of tiled walls and floors. Allow for expansion in each corner of 5mm minimum. Fill expansion joints with silicone rubber.

C. Control Joints 1. Provide control joint

At junctions of dissimilar wall construction. 2. In walls, no more than 2.5 apart. 3. At junctions of wall and floor in multi-storey buildings.

D. Form junctions of different materials (e.g. tiles to carpet) so that they occur under the centre line of doors.

304 Bedding Mixing A. Tile fixing mortar is to be adequately cohesive and water retentive but not richer than 1:3 nor

leaner than 1:4 cement/sand by volume. Within these limits the choice of the precise proportions is governed by the need to produce a mortar of the required properties with the minimum water content. These proportions will depend on the sand in use and is found by practical trial before tile fixing starts.

B. Once the proportions are established, make every attempt to minimise random variations. Batch by weight wherever possible. Do not batch with shovels.

C. The mixing of mortars by a suitable machine is to be preferred whenever it is practicable. D. Volume batching: base batching on multiples of a whole bag of cement (50kg, approximating

0.035m3 or 35 litres). In such cases measure by volume using correctly made gauge boxes or other suitable containers of fixed, measurable volume. This method allows water addition to be checked and thus permits approximate mix proportions to be established and maintained.

E. Where mixing by machine is not possible, mortars may be mixed on a clean non-absorbent surface using clean hand tools. Whatever method of mixing is used, blend the materials thoroughly in the dry state before water is added. Continue mixing until the batch has a uniform consistency.

F. No water should be added once mixing is complete. Discard mortar which is unused within 2 hours of adding the mixing water.

305 Bedding Methods

A. Portland Cement bedding, semi-dry mix method: 1. Mix: 1 part cement to 4 parts of sand by volume, mixed dry, with only sufficient water

added to make a crumbly consistency which retains its shape when squeezed in the hand. It is important to ensure complete mixing of the cement and sand.

2. Before laying the mix, establish finished floor levels by means of dots. Spread roughly to a thickness slightly greater than that required for the actual bed. Thoroughly compact and draw-off to the required level. Lay only sufficient bedding mix for one man to deal with satisfactorily in one operation.

3. Pour a slurry consisting of 1 part cement to 1 part sand by volume with sufficient water to make it slightly fluid, over the bedding and spread with a trowel until it is about 3mm thick. Place tiles, which preferably are dry, in position and firmly beaten into the bedding. Form joints of at least 2mm and regulating should be done at this time. Wash off if necessary after the joints have set thoroughly.

4. Minimum bedding thickness 25mm. B. Bedding with adhesives (walls only):

1. Apply adhesive to a thin bed or thick bed according to site conditions: a. Apply thin bed adhesives when the background is true to within 3mm when tested

with a 2 metre straight edge, at thickness not less than 1.5mm and not more than 3mm. Apply with a notched trowel.

b. Apply thick bed adhesives when deviations up to 6mm, over a 2 metre length, are present in the background, or when applying tiles having deep keys or ribs on their backs. Thick bed adhesives should be used at thicknesses not less than 3mm and not exceeding 12mm. Apply with either 10 x 10 x 10mm notched trowel, solid bed or buttering method.

2. Application methods: a. Notched trowel method: apply the adhesive to the background as a screed, then

form ribs by combing it with a notched trowel of the type recommended for the particular application. Do not apply adhesive in areas larger than 1 square metre at a time.

b. Solid bed method: apply the adhesive to the background as a screed and bring it to a true surface, working in 1 square metre area at a time.

c. Buttering method: spread the adhesive evenly over the back of the tile to a thickness slightly greater than the final bed thickness required, so that when the tile


is pressed or tapped firmly into position, the correct thickness is achieved and the tile is solidly bedded over its entire surface.

3. Apply dry tiles immediately into the adhesive, before it skins. 4. Press the first tile firmly into position and then remove it to check that complete contact is

being made with the adhesive. Make occasional similar checks throughout the tiling work. The whole of the back of the tile is to be in good contact with the adhesive. Do not allow voids to occur beneath tiles.

5. Remove surplus adhesive remaining on the face of the tile or in the tile joints, after fixing, before it skins.

6. Form joints straight and constant in width. Under no circumstances fix tiles with tight joints.

7. Allow tiles to set for a minimum 24 hours before grouting and protect from weather, water penetration, etc. during this period.

8. Expansion joints: refer clause 303 B, complying with AS 3958.1. See clause below. C. Cement based adhesive method for extruded, quarry or terracotta floor tiles:

Secure to a prepared concrete surface with cement based adhesive 10mm thick with a 10mm notched trowel. Comply with manufacturer’s current instructions

306 Installation - General

A. Wall tiling: comply with the recommendations of AS 3958.1 and AS 3740. B. Floor tiling: comply with the recommendations of AS 3958.1 and AS/NZS 3661.2. C. Adhesives: comply with recommendations of adhesive manufacturer. D. Sealing: where tiles are cut around penetrations for taps and outlets, seal thoroughly with silicone

rubber to prevent water entry behind tiles. E. Membrane: install to manufacturer’s instructions, with a 100% waterproof result.

307 Tolerances and Cleaning A. General: install tiles in true planes so that when checked with a 2m straightedge, gap under the

straightedge does not exceed 3mm. In sloped floor tiling this tolerance does not apply across intersections of fall planes. Adjust tiles within 10 minutes of fixing.

B. Cleaning: cleaned down using a damp cloth before cement smears and surplus mortar begin to harden on the surface or in the joint spaces, care being taken to avoid disturbance of the tiles during the setting of the bedding.

C. Lighting: whenever possible the lighting at the time of applying the bedded finish is not to be appreciably different from the ultimate permanent lighting.

308 Grouting

A. Except as otherwise required, do not commence grouting for at least 24 hours after placing of tile. Follow specific instructions of materials manufacturer.

B. Grout mix: 1. Floors: Prepared grout, acid resistive. 2. Walls: Epoxy-based mortar grout, mildew resistant. 3. Colours: as selected by the architect.

C. Grouting and curing: 1. Apply the grouting mix to as large an area as can be worked before hardening

commences. Apply with a squeegee working back and forth over the area until the joints are completely filled. Remove surplus grout from the tiles with the aid of a damp, not wet, cloth and the joints then tooled. After the grouting has dried, final polish using a clean, dry cloth.

2. Remove surplus grout from the floor surface; on no account use sawdust for this purpose, as there is a danger that sawdust entering moist joint surfaces may break down their strength, and cause them to become porous.

3. In dry weather, grout joints after maintaining damp condition for 3 days by sponging down, fog-spraying or other methods. Allow floors to set 48 hours before permitting ordinary foot traffic.

309 Protection

Prevent walking on or contact with floor or wall tiles for a minimum of 7 days. During that period, cover floor tiles.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 09500 SUSPENDED CEILING

SECTION 09500 SUSPENDED CEILING


Supply and install a complete system of suspended ceilings including but not limited to: Plasterboard ceilings. Acoustic tile ceilings. Bulkheads. Ceiling access panels. Insulating material.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Roof framing Structural steel Concrete Mechanical services Masonry Plasterboard

103 Quality Assurance A. Prototype

At a location and time to be selected by the architect construct a complete prototypical ceiling installation in one bay from one column to another of each ceiling type. Include elements provided under this trade section and finish in every respect. When approved by the architect, the prototype becomes the standard for the remaining work, and will remain as part of the work.

B. Acoustical ceilings installer Sub-contractor is to have not less than 3 years of successful experience in installation of ceilings similar to requirements for this project and who is acceptable to manufacturer of each ceiling type.

104 References

Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS/NZS 2785 2000 Suspended ceilings - Design and installation. AS 2946 1991 Suspended ceilings, recessed luminaires and air diffusers - Interface

requirements for physical compatibility. AS/NZS 4600 2005 Cold-formed steel structures. Plus 1 Amdt, 2010.

105 Samples A. Acoustical ceiling tile: provide samples of tile, as selected by architect to be supplied; not less

than 2 units of each. B. Provide one sample of each of the following elements:

1. Rounded cornice 2. Cornice internal angle 3. Cornice external angle

C. Suspension systems: provide sample of each component of suspension and acoustic suspension system, including both standard shapes and accessories.


Deliver manufactured materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer and the brand. Protect materials from dampness. Store off the ground or slab, under cover and away from wet walls and other damp conditions, in secure storage.

107 Warranty Provide warranty covering the work against defective materials and workmanship for a period of 10 years from the date of Practical Completion. Include a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with relevant Australian Standards and manufacturer's instructions in effect at the time of installation.


GSR Gyprock Boral BGC GTEK Rondo


Armstrong CSR Bradford

202 Materials A. Suspension system: Carrier rails shall be 45 x 38 x 0.8mm thick, roll formed steel sections

spread at 1200 centres. Fix carrier rails to 38 x 38 x 0.8mm thick galvanised coated steel angle hanger at 1200mm centres. Note; spring or friction type suspension clips are not approved for use.

B. Perforated plasterboard; CSR Gyptone 12mmsquare or Boral Echostop 12mm Square Hole Perforated (20 x 20 hole, 8 patterns/sheet), with 16% perforation with black scrim backing fabric.

C. Moisture resistant plasterboard, 13mm; to all wet area ceilings and bulkheads. D. Plasterboard: 13mm E. Mineral fibre acoustic tiles, Armstrong Ultima + (factory applied finish, fine textured surface),

1200x600x19mm, in Armstrong Blue Tongue Aluminium 24mm Flat Face Tee exposed T-grid proprietary suspension system and shadowline wall angle or a similar product / system equivalent in function, quality, etc. to the approval of the architect. NRC 0.70. CAC 41dB.

F. Acoustic Ceiling Panels: CSR Martini Absorb HD 50 grey 2400 x 1200mm panels adhesive fixed to soffit in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. Set out in brick-bond pattern with nom. 5mm space between panels.

G. Ceiling access panels: Gyptone 510 x 510 access panels and frame. H. Cornice: Prefinished shadowline wall angle or as specified on ceiling plans and detail drawings. I. Casing beads, stop-ends, etc.: Rondo trims as required or a similar product equivalent in

function, quality, etc to the approval of the architect. J. Insulation: refer Thermal and acoustic insulation specification.

203 Accessories Supply and install necessary accessories as indicated by component manufacturer for satisfactory and complete installation.

204 Equipment Supply equipment, forms, scaffolding, ladders, frames, etc. necessary for the satisfactory installation of specified items.


Acceptance: visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to site. Rectify unsuitable situation. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions. Comply with referenced Standards and manufacturer's recommendations regarding environmental conditions.

302 Preparation Space enclosure: do not install interior acoustical ceilings until space is enclosed, is weatherproof until wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry until work above ceilings completed, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy. Protect wood, metal, glass, flooring and other finished work during progress. Damage is to be made good in every respect at no additional cost to the proprietor. Prepare areas and surfaces against which installation will be constructed. Ensure work by other trades is completed before erecting suspension system. Powder driven fasteners are not approved for use.

303 Installation Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Comply throughout with applicable portions of AS/NZS 2785, or AS 2946, and with the data sheets supplied by material manufacturer.

304 Field Quality Control When requested by architect, arrange for manufacturer's representative to visit site and check installation.

305 Adjustment Adjust installation to permit installation of such items as light fittings, mechanical vent registers and the like.


306 Protection Protect completed installation from possible damage until issue of Practical Completion certificate.

307 Cleaning Clean surfaces exposed to view. Replace sections or components which cannot be cleaned. Make good damaged sections or panels affected by later work of other trades.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING

SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING


Supply and install resilient floor surfacing material with necessary accessories and related equipment required for the work including but not limited to: Vinyl sheet Moisture barrier

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Concrete Internal wall construction

103 Quality Assurance Suppliers and installers need to be widely experienced in the class of work required for the work of this section. At a place selected by the architect, construct a prototype of a completed installation of vinyl floor and skirtings, 3 square metres in area. On completion of the prototype and approval by the architect of aspects of the installation, the work remains in place and becomes the standard for the remaining work.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1884 2012 Floor coverings - Resilient sheet and tiles - Laying and maintenance

practices. AS/NZS 3661.2 1994 Slip resistance of pedestrian surfaces – Guide to the reduction of slip

hazards. AS 4586 2013 Slip resistance classification of new pedestrian surface materials. Comply also with instructions of manufacturers of materials to be installed.

105 Submissions Provide samples and data sheets of materials. Obtain architect's approval for each item before ordering.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver materials in the packaging of the supplier, bearing the brand name, colour, thickness and other relevant data. Store materials in a secure dry area away from other materials which may cause deterioration.

107 Warranty Provide a warranty covering aspects of the installation performed by this trade, against defective materials and workmanship for a period of 5 years from the date of Practical Completion. The warranty includes a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with AS 1884 and the instructions of the manufacturers of components in effect at the time of installation.

PART II MATERIALS 201 Materials

Vinyl sheet: refer to Interior Finishes Schedule. Adhesive: refer AS 1884. Moisture barrier: Crommelin WB2K.

202 Equipment Supply equipment required for the preparation of floor, and installation of vinyl materials as recommended by the material manufacturer.


Examine the site conditions applicable to each installation and comply with AS 1884. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING

302 Preparation Prepare each area to be surfaced in accordance with AS 1884. Test the dryness of concrete sub-floor in accordance with AS 1884.

303 Installation A. Moisture content: Test the moisture content of the concrete to AS 1884 Appendix A Submit

moisture content test results to the architect and obtain approval prior to application of the membrane. If the values required in clause A3.1.2 or A3.1.3 are not obtained apply Crommelin WB2K membrane barrier or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc. to the approval of the architect. Application shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Compatibility with the floor vinyl adhesive to be confirmed prior to application. If the required moisture content values are obtained the moisture barrier membrane will be deducted from the contract as a variation.

B. Adhesives: comply with AS 1884, and manufacturer's instructions. C. Install material in accordance with AS 1884, including conditioning of both the materials and the

sub-floor. 1. Weld joints of vinyl sheet.

D. Skirting, to manufacturer's instructions. E. Form junctions of different materials (e.g. tiles to carpet) so that they occur under the centre line

of doors.

304 Cleaning Remove excess adhesive and blemishes from the completed surfaces of flooring and skirtings.

305 Protection Apply suitable hardboard or plywood to completed floors and maintain in position until final cleaning prior to Practical Completion. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully repaired or cleaned.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 4 SECTION 09685 MODULAR CARPET (TILE)

SECTION 09685 MODULAR CARPET (TILE)


Supply labour, materials and equipment required for supply, delivery, storage, installation and testing for the complete Modular Carpet installation.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with: Installers of floors Joinery Preparation of surfaces under and adjacent to floors to receive carpet.

103 Quality Assurance A thoroughly experienced and skilled tradesmen familiar with projects of this nature, under the direction of a similarly experienced foreman, is required.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS/NZS 1385 2007 Textile floor coverings - Metric units and commercial tolerances for

measurement. AS/NZS 2270 2006 Plywood and blockboard for interior use. Plus 1 Amdt, 2007. AS/NZS 2455 Textile floor covering - Installation practice

2455.1 2007 General. Plus 1 Amdt, 2009. This standard provides full instructions of pre-installation requirements and installation methods. 2455.2 2007 Carpet tiles.

Maintain a copy of AS/NZS 2455.1 2007 General, at the project site until completion.

105 Submissions Submit the following data and obtain approval from the architect before ordering materials: A. List of recent projects with contact names and telephone numbers. B. Full size sample module of each carpet type. C. Confirmation of acceptance and compliance with the requirements of the builder in relation to the

time schedule for supply and laying. D. Schedule of laying rates per square metre.

These rates include supply and installation of adhesive (if required) and accessories, cutting (where required) and allowances for profit, overheads and administration costs.

E. Properties: provide test certificates from recognised authorities with the tender to confirm that the modular carpet complies with the properties set down in clause 204.

F. Certification by the manufacturer that the materials comply with this specification.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver manufactured materials in the original packages, containers, or bundles bearing the name of the manufacturer. Protect materials from dampness. Store off the ground or slab, under cover away from wet walls and other damp conditions in an approved location in the building.

107 Carpet Module Manufacturer's Guarantees Provide a written confirmation from the manufacturer or his accredited representative that the carpet modules have been properly installed and that subject to the carpet modules being properly maintained indoors in a commercial installation, the carpet modules to the affected area/s will be replaced by the manufacturer at his expense if any of the following occur: A. Surface pile in area wears more than ten percent (10%) within 10 years of installation.

On stains the period of this guarantee is 5 years. B. Horizontal dimensions of the modules vary from the specified dimensions by more than .2

percent (0.2%) within ten years of installation as measured by the Aachen Test undertaken by an independent test authority.

C. The modular carpet installation will not disrupt electronic office equipment (which is otherwise operating properly) to cause malfunction by induced static charges.

D. The modular carpet installation, in a commercial installation, is guaranteed to control static shock below 3.5 kilovolts when the relative humidity is no less than 20% and the room test is 70oF. (AATCC Test 134-1975).


108 Modular Carpet Installation Contractor's Warranty Provide a written warranty stating that materials supplied and installed under this contract will remain in good condition, secure against faulty workmanship and/or defective materials for a period of 7 years from the date of Practical Completion.


Carpet Tiles: Shaw Contract Moisture barrier: Crommelin WB2K.

202 Accessories Plain clear anodised aluminium (silver)

203 Carpet Refer Interior Finishes Schedule Tolerances: AS 1385

204 Properties

205 Non-slip Materials Water based substance recommended by its manufacturer as suitable for use as a pressure sensitive non-slip compound. 100mm wide double sided tape with a releasable pressure sensitive coating recommended by its manufacturer as suitable for the purpose of preventing the slippage of the modular floor tiles.

206 Testing Carpet

207 Carpet Colour Sample Before commencing the production of the carpet, supply three (3) tiles of the selected modular carpet to the architect for written approval of colour and pattern.

208 Identification Mark modular carpet tiles on the back to identify the manufacturer and the type of modular carpet.

209 Carpet Pattern Design Drawings Lay the modular carpet to patterns, colours and designs shown on the architect's drawings and noted on the Interior Finishes Schedule.

210 Laying Diagrams Prepare laying diagrams showing locations and directions of joints, types, patterns and colours of the modular carpet.

211 Inspection Before Laying Inspect modular carpet tiles before laying to ensure that: A. The tiles are of types, patterns and colours specified. B. Colour variations are within the specified tolerances. C. The tiles are free from colour streaks, oil or grease spots, etc. D. The carpet generally conforms to the Specification. Reject modular carpet tiles not conforming to the required standards.

212 Spare Carpet Modules Deliver to the site in unopened boxes spare modular carpet tiles equivalent to 5% of the total area of carpet laid. Do not deliver to the site until directed by the architect. Place in the final storage location.


Visit the site and inspect conditions comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to the site. Notify the architect of discrepancy or unsuitability of the substrate. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.


302 Preparation

A. Comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's recommendations regarding environmental and other on-site conditions.

B. Repair by approved means imperfections of the floor surface which might impair the finished carpeted surfaces.

C. Broom clean or vacuum clean surfaces upon which carpet is to be laid. D. On completion of cleaning, obtain architect's approval of surface and follow such standard as he

may determine for preparation throughout the project. E. Moisture content: Test the moisture content of the concrete to AS 2455.1 Appendix B. Submit

moisture content test results to the architect and obtain approval prior to application of the membrane. If the values required in clause 2.4.2 are not obtained apply Crommelin WB2K membrane barrier or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc. to the approval of the architect. Application shall be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Compatibility with the floor vinyl adhesive to be confirmed prior to application. If the required moisture content values are obtained the moisture barrier membrane will be deducted from the contract as a variation.

303 Space Enclosure Do not install material until space is enclosed and weather-proof and until wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry, and until ambient conditions of temperature and humidity will be continuously maintained at values near those indicated for final occupancy.

304 Nap-lok Bars Fix Nap-lok bars with each length fixed to the sub-floor using fastenings recommended by the manufacturer of the Nap-lok bars as suitable for the respective sub-floors. Comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 2455.1.

305 Setting Out Before laying modular carpet tiles, accurately establish two starting chalk lines towards the centre of the room or area and at precisely 90o to each other. Commencing only at the cross-over point of the chalk lines, complete one row of modules on each side of the centre line. From this point proceed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions.

306 Pressure "Sensitive" Non-slip Compounds Prevent modular carpet tiles for slippage in service by: Pressure sensitive water based pressure sensitive non-slip compound, applied by paint roller at the rate of 10-15 sq. metres per litre depending on the absorption rate of the sub-floor and in strict accordance with the non-slip compound manufacturer's printed recommendations. Pressure sensitive compound provided in a 350 gram pressure pack container, applied at the rate of 50-70 modules per container either to the whole of the sub-floor or the whole of the back of the modular carpet tiles in strict accordance with the non-slip compound manufacturer's printed recommendations. Properly ventilate the area of use. 100mm wide double-sided tape with a releasable pressure sensitive coating laid along the centre line of modular carpet tiles in both directions.

307 Laying – General Lay strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. Cut tiles from the back using a sharp knife and a cutting board. Open boxes on site 24 hours before laying and mix up tiles of similar pattern and colour from different boxes. Lay tiles hard up against each other and maintain tension on the tiles during laying by kneeling on the tiles as they are installed. Use a knee kicker to ensure that tiles are laid hard up against each other. Carefully scribe up to walls, columns, partitions and other fixed obstructions using techniques recommended by the manufacturer.

308 Partitions Partitions will be erected prior to the laying of the modular carpet.

309 Cleaning And Protection

On completion of laying each section of carpet, remove dirt, scraps of left-over carpet, etc., and vacuum the surface clean and free from dust, etc.


After inspection by the architect, cover the carpet in each section with continuous layer of 0.152mm thick clean polythene film with joints lapped 150mm minimum and continuously sealed with self-adhesive tape. Batten and nail perimeters to the floor. Maintain the cover in good order and condition and remove the same and finally clean the carpet at Practical Completion.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 6 SECTION 09910 PAINTING

SECTION 09910 PAINTING


Supply labour and materials, services and equipment necessary for the preparation, application and finishing of painting and staining as indicated on drawings, schedules and as specified herein, to internal and external surfaces of building, as follows: Refer Schedule of Finishes. Consult with the architect with regard to requirements of other trade sections of the specification which require painting, and include as part of the work of this trade section the appropriate preparation, painting, and finish required to complete the installation.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Substrates to be painted Cleaning and finishing Scaffolding

103 Quality Assurance A. Compatibility of shop and field paints:

Determine that the materials specified in the Schedule of Finishes are compatible with shop coats. Failure to do so will be construed as accepting the paints specified. Contractor is to correct, at his own expense, defects in his work resulting from the use of such materials.

B. Test samples: 1. Prepare test samples for painting types and typical locations, where determined by the

architect. Do not commence painting of the substrate type until the sample is approved by the architect. Apply samples in conditions approximating as closely as possible the lighting conditions of the finished work.

2. Test samples include the suitable preparation of substrates. 3. After approval, test samples are to be the standard for quality control of the completion of

work of same type.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS/NZS 2311 2009 Guide to the painting of buildings.

(NB: maintain this document at the project site by the contractor as a controlling general reference).

AS/NZS 2312 . Guide to the protection of structural steel against atmospheric corrosion by the use of protective coatings. There are 2 parts, 2014.

105 Submissions

Submit the following materials: A. Product literature on proposed painting systems. B. Colour samples for approved painting materials. Identify samples with:

1. Manufacturer's colour code and colour name (if any). 2. Match to Schedule colour code and name.

C. Samples are not to be less than 100 x 100mm, and are to be of the same gloss level as the scheduled colour.

D. Copies of pre-installation conference minutes.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Store materials in designated spaces in a secure manner which meets the requirements of applicable codes and fire regulations. When not in use, keep such spaces locked and inaccessible to those not employed under this section. Provide each space with a fire extinguisher of carbon dioxide or dry chemical type bearing a tag of recent inspection. Bring materials to the building and store in manufacturer's original sealed containers, bearing the manufacturer's standard label, indicating type and colour. Deliver materials in sufficient quantities in advance of the time needed in order that work will not be delayed in any way.

107 Project Conditions Temperature: comply with the requirements of clause 6.3 of AS/NZS 2311 The painting of buildings, and of paint manufacturers with regard to both ambient temperature and relative humidity.


108 Warranty Provide a written warranty stating that preparation of surfaces, materials and material application installed under this contract will show no deterioration and remain in good condition for a period of 7 years from date of Practical Completion.

PART II MATERIALS200 Before ordering materials obtain and provide to the architect written evidence that items to be installed comply with Australian Standards and are approved by statutory authorities having jurisdiction. If non-approved materials or components are installed, replacement will be at contractor’s expense.

201 Materials All internal paints are to be low VOC or environmental paints. General: where manufacturer makes more than one grade of any material specified, use the highest grade of each type, whether or not the material is mentioned by trade name in these specifications. Paints and finishes used for the project may be manufactured by the following manufacturers: Dulux. No other products will be approved by architect. Provide materials necessary for preparation of surfaces, and for application of paint finishes.

202 Schedules Schedules of Finishes is included in this specification.


203 Paint Types The architect will prepare a final Schedule of Colours in sufficient time before commencement of work. INTERIOR TIMBER as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2295 DULUX Aquanamel Semi Gloss Proprietary item (primer): Dulux Professional Enviro2 ASU Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Aquanamel Semi Gloss Location: Interior painted woodwork throughout the Works unless otherwise specified or scheduled INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR DOORS as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2295 DULUX Aquanamel Semi Gloss Proprietary item (primer): Dulux Professional Enviro2 ASU Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Aquanamel Semi Gloss Location: Interior and exterior painted timber doors throughout the Works unless otherwise specified or scheduled INTERIOR TIMBER as per Dulux Specification: AUSW4749 INTERGRAIN UltraClear Interior Satin Proprietary item (finishing coats): INTERGRAIN ULTRACLEAR SATIN Location: Timber skirtings, architraves and the like mouldings nominated for clear finishing. MEDIUM DENSITY FIBREBOARD as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2872 DULUX Aquanamel Semi Gloss Proprietary item (primer): Dulux Professional Enviro2 ASU Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Aquanamel Semi Gloss Location: Skirtings, sills, architraves and the like mouldings manufactured from MDF. PRETREATMENT OF GALVANISED STEEL & ZINCALUME SURFACES: Solvent clean and apply waterborne pre-treatment for galvanised iron using an abrasive nylon pad, allow to react, rinse off, allow to dry then apply one coat of specified galvanised iron primer. Proprietary item: (pre-treatment): DULUX PREP-GALV INTERIOR METALWORK as per Dulux Specification AUSD3152 Proprietary item Galvanised (primer): DULUX PROFESSIONAL Galvanised Iron Primer Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Aquanamel Gloss, Dulux Specification: AUSD2282 Location: All interior visibly exposed metalwork, including but not limited to:

• Interior steel stair strings, including brackets etc. • Interior handrails and balustrading. • Steel door frames. • Steel corner protection. • Interior exposed service pipework and ducts - colour identified in accordance with AS 1345.

INTERIOR STEELWORK , Shop Primed Metal, as per Dulux Specification AUSD5218 Proprietary item: (primer): DULUX Quit Rust All Metal (Water based) Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Aquanamel Gloss Location: All interior visibly exposed structural steelwork, shop primed (inorganic zinc silicate), including but not limited to:

• Exposed structural steel

EXTERIOR GALVANISED METALWORK AND STEELWORK – POLYURETHANE as per Dulux Specification:AUSI4217 Proprietary item (intermediate coats): DULUX DUREBILD STE. Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX WEATHERMAX HBR. Location: All galvanised exterior metalwork and structural steelwork, including but not limited to:

• Exterior exposed service pipework and ducts - colour identified in accordance with AS 1345. • Roof mounted equipment such as air handling units, hot water units, ductwork and the like.

EXTERIOR STEELWORK – HOT DIP GALVANISED STEEL (if nominated for painting), as per Dulux Specification: AUSI3393 Proprietary item (spot primer, applied as full prime coat): DULUX Durebild® STE - PC237 Proprietary item (intermediate coat): DULUX Durebild® STE MIO - PC565 Proprietary item (top coat): DULUX Weathermax® HBR - PC405 Location: All non-galvanised non-visibly exposed structural steelwork not otherwise specified, including but not limited to:

• Hot dip galvanised exterior structural steelwork and hot dip galvanised metalwork, if nominated for painting.

EXTERIOR STRUCTURAL STEELWORK – FIRE PROTECTED


Intumescent paint fire protective coating, as per specification 05100 Structural Steel Proprietary item (top coat): DULUX Weatherrmax® HBR - PC405; 2 coats at 50 microns per coat Location: All structural steel nominated for panting, required to be fire protected:

• Exterior structural steelwork at verandahs (support brackets). PLASTERBOARD (DRY AREA CEILINGS) as per Dulux Specification: AUSD4308 DULUX Professional Enviro2 Tintable Ceiling Flat for Plasterboard Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 ASU Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX Professional EnvirO2 Tintable Ceiling Flat Location: Ceilings lined with liner-faced plasterboard generally unless otherwise nominated on the ROOM DATA SHEETS. PLASTERBOARD (WET AREA CEILINGS) – LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification:AUSD5229 Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): DULUX Professional EnvirO2 Water Based Sealer Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX PROFESSIONAL ENVIRO2 LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC. Location: Ceilings to ‘wet’ areas lined with water-resistant plasterboard throughout the Works and as nominated on the ROOM DATA SHEETS. FIBRE CEMENT (VERSILUX & VILLABOARD) - LOW SHEEN EXTERIOR ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification: AUSD3458 Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): DULUX PROFESSIONAL TOTAL PREP. Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX PROFESSIONAL EXTERIOR LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC. Location: Exterior fibre cement soffits and eaves. FIBRE CEMENT (VILLABOARD) - LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2288 Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 ASU Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 Interior Low Sheen Location: General areas, interior painted fibre cement sheet as indicated on the drawings and schedules. FIBRE CEMENT (VILLABOARD) - LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification: AUSD4177 Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 ASU Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Wash & Wear 101 Advanced Low Sheen Location: Classroom walls, interior painted fibre cement sheet as indicated on the drawings and schedules. FIBRE CEMENT (VILLABOARD) – SEMI GLOSS ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification: AUSD3711 Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 ASU Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 Interior Semi Gloss Location: Food & Textiles, Materials & Technology area walls, interior painted fibre cement sheet as indicated on the drawings and schedules. PLASTERBOARD (LINER-BOARD FACED GENERALLY) – LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification:AUSD3087 Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 ASU Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 Interior Low Sheen Location: Plasterboard liner-faced board walls generally unless otherwise specified or scheduled. PLASTERBOARD (LINER-BOARD FACED GENERALLY) – MATT ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification:AUSD5662 Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Prepcoat Acrylic Sealer Undercoat Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Wash and Wear Matt Location: Plasterboard liner-faced board walls generally unless otherwise specified or scheduled. EXTERIOR RENDERED MASONRY WALLS, CONCRETE WALLS DULUX AcraTex 950 Roll On 00 and 955 AcraShield as per Dulux Specification: AUSA11496 Prep Coat: Dulux AcraTex Tiltwash Cleaner 1 coat: Dulux AcraTex Acraprime Solvent Based Clear. 1 coat: Dulux AcraTex 950 Roll On 00 Fine Texture Roller Finish 1 coat: Dulux AcraTex 955 AcraShield Location: Exterior concrete tilt up walls, masonry and rendered masonry nominated for texture finish unless otherwise specified or scheduled Warranty (all textured acrylic surface finishes): 7 years from Date of Practical Completion. EXTERIOR EXOTECH FIBRE CEMENT CLADDING SYSTEM WITH SEALED EXPRESSED JOINTS – MEMBRANE FINISH as per Dulux Specification : AUSI1810


Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): DULUX ACRA-PRIME 501/1. Proprietary item (finishing coats): DULUX ACRA-SHIELD 955 EXTERIOR CONCRETE SOFFIT – MEMBRANE FINISH as per Dulux Specification : AUSA3218 Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): DULUX ACRA-PRIME 501/1. Proprietary item (finishing coats): 2 coats DULUX AcraTex 958 AcraSand 1 coat DULUX AcraTex 955 AcraShield Note: repair all imperfections in the concrete surface before commencing painting. INTERNAL MASONRY SURFACES - LOW SHEEN ACRYLIC as per Dulux Specification: AUSD2300 Proprietary item (sealer-undercoat): Dulux Professional Enviro2 ASU Proprietary item (finishing coats): Dulux Professional EnvirO2 Interior Low Sheen Location: Painted face of masonry walls nominated on the ROOM DATA SHEETS. INTERNAL CONCRETE BLOCK WORK SURFACES – CLEAR SEALER: System: 2 coats waterborne, acrylic polymer matt sealer. Proprietary item (sealer): CROMMELINS BRICK AND RENDER SEALER. Sample: Provide sample block for approval prior to commencing application. Seal one half of the block with proposed sealer system and leave the other half untreated for comparison. Location: Clear matt sealer to visibly exposed interior fair faced concrete blockwork.

PLASTIC (UPVC) PIPEWORK System: Surface preparation as per AUSD4547 New PVC - Exterior - Weathershield Low Sheen Proprietary item (finishing coats): Weathershield Low Sheen Location: PVC pipework generally where specified to be painted PAVED AREA MARKINGS PROGRAMME: Apply paint markings to paved areas as late as the works programme permits after laying bitumen paving. SYSTEM: 1 coat low sheen 100% acrylic road-marking paint with luminescence. WORKMANSHIP: Spray apply paint. Use templates. REQUIREMENT: The contractors shall comply with Main Roads standards for paint and marking.

204 Priming Materials Colours of priming coats (and body coats where specified) are to be lighter than those of finish coat.

205 Spare Paint Contractor to provide adequate left over paint for touching up and maintenance. To be supplied in well-sealed long-life containers of colour matched paints, clearly labelled and mapped to rooms/walls inside and outside the building (where applicable).


Inspect surfaces and determine that they are in proper condition to receive the work to be performed under this trade section. Refer 302 A, below. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. The starting of work under this trade section will be taken to mean acceptance of such surfaces as being satisfactory and defects in work resulting from accepting poor surfaces are to be corrected at no cost to the proprietor. Refer AS/NZS 2311 Appendix C.

302 Preparation A. General: prepared to a standard not less than that described under AS/NZS 2311, Section 3:

Preparation of Un-Painted Surfaces inclusive, and other clauses of Australian Standards referenced therein. This Standard is incorporated by reference as part of this specification and applies to the work below to the same extent as if written herein.

B. Broom clean floor surfaces before painting. Remove dust, dirt, plaster, grease and other extraneous matter affecting the finish work.

C. Putty-stop or plug nail holes and cracks on both exterior and interior work, as required. Natural or stained wood finishes are to have putty coloured to match. Putty wood after prime coat or sealer coat has been applied.


D. Clean bare metal surfaces of mill scale, rust, grease, oil, dirt, or other foreign matter, then properly washed with spirit or other approved cleaning agents. After cleaning, etch, pickle, prime, or otherwise prepare, as recommended by the paint manufacturer.

E. Remove blisters or other imperfections in previous coats caused by foreign substances or paint skins from painted surfaces before the subsequent coat is applied.

F. Rub down wood and metal surfaces before finishing and between coats with No. 00 and finer sandpaper or steel wool, leaving a perfectly clean surface. Sand smooth-finished surfaces before finishing and between coats as required to smooth out rough areas and to assure a smooth, even finish. Surfaces to receive paint are to be smooth and free of sandpaper scratches, mill-marks, and other imperfections.

G. Remove hardware, accessories, plates, lighting fixtures and similar items in place prior to painting and re-position upon completion of each space, or protect as otherwise directed by the architect.

H. Thoroughly stir materials in containers before application, unless otherwise directed by the manufacturer of the paint used, to ensure uniformity of colour and mass. Strain out paint skins or other materials which would cause lumps or roughness. Thin only as recommended by the manufacturer.

303 Protection

Furnish and lay suitable drop cloths in areas where painting is being done to protect floors and other surfaces from damage during the work.

304 Application A. General: execute work of this trade section in strict compliance with paint manufacturer's

recommendations, and with the provisions of AS/NZS 2311, Section 6: Paint Application, inclusive. This standard is incorporated by reference as part of this specification and applies to the work below to the same extent as if written herein. In the event of conflict between manufacturer's recommendations and the provisions of AS/NZS 2311, manufacturer's recommendations govern.

B. Maintenance or repainting Execute work of this trade section in strict compliance with paint manufacturer's recommendations, and with the provisions of AS/NZS 2311, Section 7: Maintenance of Painted Surfaces on inclusive and Section 8: Maintenance Painting Systems. This standard is incorporated by reference as part of this specification and applies to the work below to the same extent as if written herein. In the event of conflict between manufacturer's recommendations and the provisions of AS/NZS 2311, manufacturer's recommendations govern.

305 Cleaning

At completion of work in each area, remove paint spots, oil and stain from adjacent surfaces, including finish hardware. Replace hardware previously removed.


307 Schedules Refer to Finishes Schedule for locations.

END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 10150 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10150 TOILET COMPARTMENTS


Design, supply and install complete compartments and/or enclosures including but not limited to: Toilet partitions, doors, panels etc.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Floor construction Wall construction Ceiling construction Finishing trades Plumbing fixtures Ceramic Tiling

103 Quality Assurance Ensure that the chosen contractor is widely experienced in the class of work required by this specification. Provide details of similar work satisfactorily completed, including names and telephone numbers of those for whom the work was done so they can be contacted for references.

104 References AS 1428 Design for access and mobility. There are 5 parts. 1992 – 2010. Comply with current written instructions of the manufacturer of the products specified.

105 Submissions Provide to the architect before ordering components: Manufacturer’s printed data on the specified products and installation instructions.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver all the materials to the site in totally satisfactory condition. Reduce storage of materials on site to a minimum. Do not install any damaged component or panel. Remove and replace all such items.

107 Warranty Provide to the architect a written warranty stating that all components of the complete installation will remain intact and in a satisfactory condition for 5 years from the date of Practical Completion.



201 Acceptable Manufacturers Aqualoo Regent Cubicle Partition System.

202 Materials A. Toilet Partitions

Fixed panels: N/A. Front panels: N/A Doors: 13mm compact laminate Indicator bolts, hinges turn snibs: Aqualoo concealed series. Coat hangers: Coat hook with bumper.

203 Detail Design Provisions

A. General: the architect's drawings are to be considered essentially schematic except for profiles of exposed surfaces and panel arrangement where indicated. If, in the opinion of the builder a change of profile is required in order to meet the specification, arrange through the architect for a review of the condition. Design the assembly, reinforcing and anchorage to suit each specified condition in an acceptable manner complying with the requirements specified herein.



level or dimensioned angle not to exceed 9mm total at location.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 10150 TOILET COMPARTMENTS

3. Change in deviation not to exceed 3mm for 3.5m run in direction. PART III EXECUTION300 301 Examination

Inspect site conditions before fabrication, where possible, and before delivery of materials. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation. Arrange for rectification required. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Start of work means total acceptance of relevant conditions.

302 Preparation A. Field measurements: do not delay job progress. Allow for adjustments and fitting of the work in

the field where taking of measurements might cause delay. B. Coordination with work of others: furnish to each relevant trade foreman anchorages and setting



Check each item, on arrival at the installation location, for damage. Replace damaged items.

304 Installation A. Anchorage: except for anchorages furnished herein but placed by other trades, set and secure

necessary anchorages, including concrete and masonry inserts, bolts, wood screws and other connectors as needed. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as needed, locating anchorages and holes to ensure proper positioning of completed work.

B. Fit: during installation and assembly, form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted, and reveals uniform. Finish work accurately, plumb, level, square and true in reference to adjacent construction.

C. Comply fully with manufacturer’s current written instructions.

305 Field Quality Control Where considered necessary by the architect, arrange for the manufacturer of products to instruct installers regarding correct installation.

306 Protection Cover work: immediately following installation, wrap or cover the installations to avoid wear and tear of finish during subsequent construction.



END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 10240 GRILLES AND SCREENS

SECTION 10240 GRILLES AND SCREENS


Design, fabricate, supply and install grilles and screens including but not limited to: Wall mounted grilles for ventilation and other purposes External grilles. Internal grilles. Ceiling grilles. Freestanding screens. Hinged screens.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Floor construction Metalwork Wall construction Metal windows and glazing Ceiling construction Metal finishing Concrete Painting Carpentry


104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1428 Design for access and mobility. There are 5 parts, 1992 – 2010. AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding. There are 7 parts, 2003 – 2014. AS 1627 Metal finishing - Preparation and pretreatment of surfaces.


AS 4100 1998 Steel structures Plus 1 Supplement, 1999, 1 Amdt 2012. AS/NZS 4680 2006 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on fabricated ferrous articles. AS 5039 2008 Security screen doors and security window grilles. AS 5040 2003 Installation of security screen doors and window grilles. Plus 1 Amdt, 2007. Comply with requirements of statutory and local authorities.


and do not show conditions. B. Develop details not shown and in conformity with the indicative details shown. C. Take and confirm dimensions on site, before preparing shop drawings where possible. D. Submit detailed shop drawings for fabrication and installation of major metalwork. Show plans,

elevations and detailed sections; indicate materials, finishes, types of joinery, fasteners, anchorages and accessory items. Provide setting diagrams and full- scale templates of blocking, anchorages, sleeves and bolts installed by others.

106 Samples

A. Sample welds: if requested, provide samples of weld types, including samples of railings joined at right angles and at typical acute angles, welded and ground smooth, for approval. If not acceptable, provide additional samples until approved. When approved, samples are to establish quality of similar work of this trade section.

B. Check on delivery: request architect to check materials on delivery to site for quality, and he will reject materials not meeting the requirements of this specification or equal to approved samples. Rejected materials are to be returned to the fabricator at the fabricator's expense.



PART II MATERIALS 201 Manufacturers

Arcadia Alspec Invisiguard

202 Materials

Manufacturer Item Model no. Material Finish Size(s) Arcadia Fixed Louvre Spur EL1 Aluminium Powdercoat 150mm Alspec Security/ Insect

Screens Invisiguard 316 Stainless

Steel 1.6 x 1.6mm

aperture Arcadia Roof A/C

Condenser Screen & gates

Spur FL1 Steel Colourbond 75mm

Arcadia Evaporative Cooler Plantroom louvres and louvre doors

Hush 150 acoustic louvre

Steel Colourbond 150mm

Arcadia Dust Extractor Plantroom louvres

Hush 300Aacoustic louvre

Steel Colourbond 300mm

203 Welding Steel

General: details of joints, the techniques of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds made and the methods used to correct defective work; conform to requirements of AS/NZS 1554. Welds exposed to view: grind smooth to architect's approval. Concealed welds: grind smooth before galvanising. Tack or skip welding: at regular intervals, very neat; not permitted if material is to be hot dip galvanised. Remove weld spatter. Certification: welds are to be made only by welders who certified in accordance with the Australian Standard. Tack welding or skip welding will NOT be permitted where items are to be galvanised. Weld continuously form joints and connections to exclude water and to permit draining during galvanising.

204 Connection Design General: design fabricated items so that possible work is done before delivery. Fully protect for shipment. Take possible care to prevent damage. A. Welding external items: conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS 1554, noting particularly the

design criteria. B. Flanges: concealed where possible. Sleeve connecting railings inside railing sections and secure

with flush or set screws. Except where access is impossible, connection screws and bolts are to be on the underside of joints.

C. Fasteners on the top of railing sections will not be permitted. D. Shop connections for steel fabrications are to be welded, and field connections bolted. E. Provide smooth finishes to exposed surfaces with sharp well-defined lines and arrises. Machined

joints are to be milled to a close fit. Design necessary lugs, brackets and similar items so that work can be assembled and installed in a neat, substantial manner.



205 Miscellaneous









A. Check fabrications as they are unloaded at the project site for evidence of physical damage. Damaged fabrications are to be treated as follows: 1. Damage through galvanising: perform immediate inorganic zinc silicate paint or cold-

galvanising repair. Do not install until reinstated. 2. Architectural metalwork: returned to shop for repair or replacement.


304 Installation


B. Fit: during installation and assembly, form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted, and reveals uniform. Finish work accurately, plumb, level, square and true in reference to adjacent construction. Make tolerances conform to Australian Standards.

C. Finish: do not cut or abrade shop finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field. The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted under conditions. Fabrications may be cut shorter with power hacksaws on site. Isolate dissimilar metals likely to be subject to moisture with inert materials, not visible on completion of installation.






END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS


Design, supply and install required items including but not limited to: Exterior/interior signs Plaques Door signs Signs for the disabled.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Wall construction Concrete Floor construction Finishes Tactile warning surfaces

103 Quality Assurance Materials, shop fabrication and on-site installation are to be supplied and performed by fully trained and experienced tradesmen in accordance with instructions of the manufacturer.

104 References Comply with the applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1319 1994 Safety signs for the occupational environment. HB 123 1999 Guidelines for the selection, location and installation of visual warning

devices in buildings.

105 System Description The specified materials and systems are intended to provide a uniform image throughout the building. Where possible, materials are to be provided by the same manufacturer.

106 Submissions Submit to the architect for approval, the following before ordering materials: A. Samples of specified materials, conforming to type and finish required. B. Fully detailed drawings showing overall dimensions and component sizes with proposed methods

of fixing and/or securing position. C. Check data on sign for data accuracy - spelling , phone number, etc. before manufacture. D. Copies of minutes of pre-installation conference.

107 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver materials in accordance with the Project Schedules. Prevent damage to materials by securely boxing or wrapping before delivery. Take care with materials during delivery and handling. Store materials on site where directed by builder. Where possible install directly in place.

108 Warranty Provide to the proprietor a warranty co-signed by the manufacturer and installer stating that items in this specification will remain in full operational condition for a period of years from the date of Practical Completion.

109 Maintenance Provide a written undertaking to the proprietor that parts of the installation will be available for additional supply from time to time to suit the proprietor's needs for a period of 10 years from the date of Practical Completion.


Allow a Provisional Sum (PS) of $ 2,500.00 for the supply and installation of signage by a nominated sub-contractor .

202 Materials

203 Finishes

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 10400 IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

204 Signs for The Disabled

205 Fabrication Fabricate components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved drawings. Form junctions so that fixings are concealed. Cut edges, drill holes free from burrs and indentations. Fit joints to a fine hairline. Pre-assemble where possible or practical and mark each item for intended location before delivery.


Visit site and inspect conditions, comparing conditions to drawings before delivery of materials to site. Rectify discrepancy or unsuitability of substrate. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions. Space enclosure: do not install materials until space is enclosed and weatherproof, and until wet-work in space is completed and nominally dry.

302 Preparation Prepare areas and surfaces before installation, so that best conditions exist. Where necessary, ensure that lighting cable is in place and concealed ready for connection to light fittings within the illuminated items.

303 Installation Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Provide appropriate anchoring devices, concrete pads for external signs. Take care of and protect adjacent surfaces and materials. Provide protective cover to adjacent finishes where necessary.

304 Protection Protect finished work. Replace or make good work found damaged at time of Practical Completion.

305 Cleaning A. Adjust and clean: clean exposed surfaces including trim, edge moldings, and comply with

manufacturer's instructions for cleaning and touch-up of minor finish damage. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

B. Remove spatterings and droppings from work. Remove daily surplus materials and rubbish from the work area.



END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS


Supply and install extinguishers where indicated in accordance with the statutory authority having jurisdiction.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Wall construction Wall finishes

103 Quality Assurance Perform work of this trade section with experienced tradesmen familiar with the quality of work required and licensed by the manufacturers of the extinguishers. Comply throughout with written instructions.

104 References Comply with applicable portion of the following Australian Standards: AS 1603 Automatic fire detection and alarm systems.

There are 12 parts 1996 – 2011 and 4 Amdts, 1998 – 2001. AS 1670 Fire detection, warning, control and intercom systems - System design,

installation and commissioning. There are 5 parts, 1997 – 2015.. AS/NZS 1841 2007 Portable fire extinguishers. There are 8 parts, one for each type. AS 2444 2001 Portable fire extinguishers and fire blankets – Selection and location. AS/NZS 4353 1995 Portable fire extinguishers - Aerosol type. Comply with requirements of statutory authority having jurisdiction.

105 Submissions Copies of minutes of pre-installation conference.

PART II MATERIALS200 201 Manufacturers

Manufacturers of materials approved in writing by the statutory authority may supply equipment.

202 Materials Allow a Provisional Sum (PS) of $5,000.00 plus GST for the supply of fire extinguishers from a nominated supplier.

203 Installation Devices Supply brackets signs and other required items, and the means of securing them to the building.

PART III EXECUTION300

301 Examination

Inspect site conditions before fabrication, where possible, and before delivery of materials. Ensure conditions are satisfactory for installation. Arrange for rectification if required. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Start of work means total acceptance of relevant conditions.

302 Inspection on Arrival at Site Inspect materials on arrival, comparing each item to the schedule provided. Ensure that no material is damaged. Return to the manufacturer damaged items and obtain a replacement.

303 Installation Anchorage: except for anchorages furnished herein but placed by other trades, set and secure necessary anchorages, including concrete and masonry inserts, bolts, wood screws and other connectors as needed. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting as needed, locating anchorages and holes to ensure proper positioning of completed work.

304 Cleaning Clean materials installed to the satisfaction of the architect.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 10520 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

Remove temporary protective coatings.


END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 3 SECTION 10705 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES

SECTION 10705 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES


Design, fabricate, supply and install exterior sun control devices for openings formed by doors and windows, including but not limited to: Metal sheet

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following other trades: Wall construction Door installation Wall finishing treatment Metal finishes Window installation Painting Metalwork

103 Quality Assurance A. Manufacturer Qualifications: not less than five (5) years continuous experience in the

manufacture of the product types specified. B. Installer Qualifications: installer is not to have less than three (3) years continuous experience in

the erection of specified material.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the following Australian Standards: AS 1231 2000 Aluminium and aluminium coatings – Anodic oxidation coatings. AS/NZS 1554 Structural steel welding. There are 7 parts, 2003 – 2014. AS 3715 2002 Metal finishing - Thermoset powder coating for architectural applications of

aluminium and aluminium alloys. AS/NZS 4791 2006 Hot-dip galvanised (zinc) coatings on ferrous open sections, applied by an in-

line process. AS/NZS 4792 2006 Hot-dip galvanized (zinc) coatings on ferrous hollow sections, applied by a

continuous or a specialized process. Comply with relevant authority's requirement for fire-rated installation, plus the Building Code of

Australia.

105 Submissions Required Prior to Fabrication A. Complete system description including the following information:

Names of manufacturers of products. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of local representatives for products. Types, model numbers and names of products, and indication whether products are "off the shelf" or custom fabricated. Include specific information on finishes - thicknesses, patented process name, process description and test data. Detailed information on products manufactured specifically for this project. Detailed system description including standard details and manufacturer's literature; and large-scale details of specially fabricated products.

B. Statement that the proposed system meet(s) the regulatory requirements, thermal, aesthetic and waterproofing criteria and wind loading, construction, glazing and warranty requirements specified; noting in detail exceptions.

C. Shop drawings: refer DOCUMENT 00800, clause 27. Provide shop drawings showing the following information where appropriate to the items: 1. Layout (sectional plan and elevation of complete assembly). 2. Full size section of members. 3. Methods of assembly, type and location of exposed screws. 4. Methods of glazing. 5. Methods of installation, including fixings, anchorage, caulking, flashings. 6. Provision for expansion (thermal). 7. Junctions and trim to adjoining surfaces. Fittings and accessories.


and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product required. Submit certificate test reports for elastomeric sealants on aged performance as specified, including hardness, stain resistance, adhesion, cohesion or tensile strength, elongation, low-temperature flexibility, compression set, modulus of elasticity, water absorption, and resistance (ageing, weight loss, deterioration) and heat and exposure to ozone and ultraviolet light.


106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Handle materials with care. Do not store on site. Install directly in place. Store sealants as instructed.

107 Warranty Provide to the proprietor a warranty, counter-signed by the installer, on the whole of the installation, which states that work will remain intact, waterproof and fully operational for the period of 10 years after date of installation.


Arcadia Group Sunlite

202 Materials Provide and fix external sunshade to external windows where indicated and as detailed on the drawings. Blades shall be Arcadia Zest® B55/640 Series, manufactured from extruded aluminium base material as standard with the manufacturer and finished using a standard colour Dulux Duratec warranty powdercoating in colour selected as scheduled. Blades shall be standard Arcadia profile 640mm x 55mm type rectangular blades with overlapped corners

203 Welding Steel General: details of joints, the techniques of welding employed, the appearance and quality of welds made and the methods used to correct defective work; conform to requirements of AS/NZS 1554. Welds exposed to view: grind smooth to architect's approval. Concealed welds: grind smooth before galvanising. Tack or skip welding: at regular intervals, very neat; not permitted if material is to be hot dip galvanised. Remove weld spatter. Certification: welds are to be made only by certified welders who have previously been qualified in accordance with Australian Standards. Tack welding or skip welding will NOT be permitted where items are to be galvanised. Weld continuously form joints and connections to exclude water and to permit draining during galvanising.

204 Connection Design General: design fabricated items so that possible work is done before delivery. Fully protect for shipment. Take possible care to prevent damage. A. Welding External Items: conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS 1554, noting particularly the

design criteria. B. Flanges: concealed where possible. Sleeve connecting railings inside railing sections and secure

with flush or set screws. Except where access is impossible, connection screws and bolts are to be on the underside of joints.

C. Fasteners on the top of railing sections will not be permitted. D. Weld shop connections for steel fabrications, and bolt field connections. E. Provide smooth finishes to exposed surfaces with sharp well-defined lines and arrises. Mill

machined joints to a close fit. Design necessary lugs, brackets and similar items so that work can be assembled and installed in a neat, substantial manner.



205 Miscellaneous


206 Galvanising Where scheduled or specified galvanised steel after chemical descaling in accordance with AS/NZS 4791 and AS/NZS 4792, so that rust, mill scale, oil grease and other foreign matter is removed leaving a clean surface. Then immerse steel in a bath of molten zinc so that when withdrawn, the zinc coating solidifies to a dry film thickness of 100 microns. Allow a 48 hour curing period before transporting steelwork. Repair abrasions, site welds, etc., by thoroughly wire brushing affected areas to achieve a clean sound substrate and patch coating with a Zinc-rich paint with a film thickness of 100 microns.








A. Check fabrications as they are unloaded at the project site for evidence of physical damage. Treat damaged fabrications as follows: 1. Damage through galvanising: perform immediate inorganic zinc silicate paint or cold-

galvanising repair. Do not install until reinstated. 2. architectural metalwork: returned to shop for repair or replacement.


304 Installation


B. Fit: finish work accurately, plumb, level, square and true in reference to adjacent construction. C. Finish: do not cut or abrade shop finishes which cannot be completely restored in the field.

The use of gas-cutting torch in the field for correcting fabrication errors will not be permitted. Fabrications may be cut shorter with power hacksaws on site.






END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 5 SECTION 12300 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK - SHOP BUILT

SECTION 12300 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK - SHOP BUILT


The work of this trade section covers the supply and installation of manufactured casework items. It includes but is not limited to: Kitchen cabinets and cupboards Shelving Laboratory cabinets and cupboards Work benches Storage cupboards

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Carpentry Wall finishes Floor finishes Ceiling finishes Plumbing Electrical installation

103 Quality Assurance Manufacturers and installers are required to be widely experienced in the relevant aspects and class of work required for this section. At a place selected by the architect, construct a prototype of a completed installation. Include in this prototype all elements required by this specification, finished in every respect. When approved by the architect, each prototype remains part of the work and becomes the standard for the remaining work.

104 References Comply with applicable portions of the Australian Standards: AS/NZS 1859 Reconstituted wood-based panels – Specifications.

1859.1 2004 Particleboard. Plus 2 Amdts, 2006 - 2011. There are 3 other parts, 2004 – 2005, 3 Amdts, 2006 - 2009.

AS 2754.2 1991 Adhesives for timber and timber products - Polymer emulsion adhesives. AS/NZS 2924 High pressure decorative laminates – Sheets made from thermosetting

resins. There are 2 parts, 1998.

AS/NZS 4386 Domestic kitchen assemblies. 4386.1 1996 Kitchen units. 4386.2 1996 Installation.

AS 4786.2 2005 Timber flooring - Sanding and finishing.

105 Submissions Submit the following prior to fabrication: Product literature on proposed hardware items including components. Technical data on melamine laminates proposed for use. Technical data and samples of substrate materials. Thickness of materials at typical locations.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Do not deliver work to the site until after completion of other trade activities which could soil, damage or cause deterioration of manufactured joinery items. Prevent soiling, damage or deterioration during delivery, storage and handling. Keep site storage to a minimum. Install directly in place, but refer to clause 302. If circumstances make storage necessary in areas other than the final location, store only in those that meet the requirements specified for installation areas.

PART II MATERIALS 201 Materials

Use low formaldehyde emission particleboards and MDF boards - E0 type. Use low VOC emission adhesives. A. Carcass units (Ends and vertical divisions):

1. (DRY AREA) Material : Pre-finished particle board Finish : White melamine finish internally all exposed external

surfaces to be finished with 0.8mm thick plastic


laminate. Thickness : 18mm 2. (WET AREA) Material : HMR Pre-finished particle board Finish : White melamine finish internally all exposed external

surfaces to be finished with 0.8mm thick plastic laminate.

Thickness: 18mm B. Floors of carcass

1. (DRY AREA) Material : Pre-finished Particleboard. Finish : White melamine finish internally all exposed external


Thickness : 18mm 2. (WET AREA) Material : HMR Pre-finished particle board Finish : White melamine finish internally all exposed external


Thickness : 18mm

C. Shelves within carcass : 1. (Dry Area) Material : Pre-finished Particleboard. Finish : White melamine finish internally all exposed external


Thickness : 18mm 2. (Wet Area) Material : HMR Pre-finished Particleboard.

Name : White melamine finish internally all exposed external surfaces to be finished with 0.8mm thick plastic laminate.

Thickness : 18mm

D. Doors of cabinets : 1. (DRY AREA) Material : Medium Density Fibreboard

Finish : Pre-finished coloured melamine board. Thickness : 18mm

2. (WET AREA) Material : HMR Medium Density Fibreboard Finish : Pre-finished coloured melamine board. Thickness : 18mm

E. Base (below floor of carcass) :

1. (DRY AREA) Material : HMR Particle board Finish : Front rail to have 0.8mm Thick Plastic Laminate Thickness : 18mm

2. (WET AREA) Material : HMR Particleboard Finish : Front rail to have 0.8mm thick Plastic Laminate. Thickness : 18mm

F. Bulkheads (above cupboards or overhead cabinets)

1. (Dry Area) Material : Pre-finished particle board Finish : Coloured melamine board Thickness : 18mm 2. (Wet Area) Material : Plasterboard, water resistant Thickness : 13mm Frame : Metal stud frame or timber stud frame Finish : Paint as selected

G. Back of Carcass : 1. (Dry Area) Material : Pre-finished particle board

Finish : White melamine


Thickness : 12mm

H. Edge Strips and Inserts : Material : Plastic laminate to match pre-finished board;

ABS edge Thickness : 2.0mm

I. Laminates : Refer to Interior Finishes Schedule J. BenchTops :

(DRY) Material : Particle board, Laminex Squareform post formed edge, with 2mm ABS edge strip to exposed sides other than the post formed edge. Install with drip groove to underside of post formed edge.

Finish : 1.2mm plastic laminate Thickness : Min. 39mm (SOLID SURFACE) Material : Refer to Finishes Schedule Edge

treatment: To resemble Laminex Squareform post formed edge

Thickness :

Min. 12 mm on 18mm MDF base

(WET) Material : HMR Particle board with Laminex Squareform post formed benchtop; ABS edge strip

Finish : 1.2mm plastic laminate Thickness :

Min. 39 mm

K. Whiteboard: Vitreous Porcelain Enamel on 0.43mm Thick Mild Steel Sheet. No alternative finish will be accepted. Test sampling may be performed on whiteboards installed in the works of this contract. Facings shall be fixed to gypsumboard core. Provide 0.43mm zincannealed steel sheet as backing. Provide extruded white power coated aluminium chalk rail at bottom and white powder coated aluminium edging to remaining edges, complete with concealed fixing strip.

L. Pin-up boards:

3mm thick Hardboard glued to nom 12mm thick pinnable fabric composite. 22 x 22 x 1.6 aluminium channel to all edges (mitre corners). Refer details. Selected fabric; refer Finishes Schedule Frame Finish: Clear Natural Anodised.

202 Fasteners and Adhesives.

A. Metal fasteners: in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and all relevant Australian standards for the application.

B. Plastic fasteners: in accordance with manufacturers recommendations and all relevant Australian standards for the application.

C. PVA adhesives: Comply with AS 2754.2.

D. Contact adhesives: Supply the manufacturer’s instructions and incorporate into this specification.

203 Hardware A. Door handles : 200mm long / 20mm thick / 35mm deep “D” handles by Hafele, anodised

aluminium (silver coloured) as scheduled in Finishes Schedule. B. Drawer handles : 200mm long / 20mm thick / 35mm deep “D” handles by Hafele, anodised

aluminium (silver coloured) as scheduled in Finishes Schedule. C. Drawer runners : Heavy duty Blum soft close nylon roller powdercoated steel runners, full

extension D. Adjustable shelf brackets : Ferrule and socket brass shelf supports @ 75mm ctrs. E. Pin-up fixing to wall: M4.5 x 58mm long flat head masonry anchors @ M2x 600 Centres. F. Hinges: Slide on type Hafele, Blum or Hettich automatic soft close hinges with steel and nickel

plate finish, heavy duty.115° for doors with restricted opening (against walls etc.) and 180° for all other doors. Minimum number of hinges per door: 2, for up to 900mm high door 3, for up to 1500mm high door


4, for up to 2000mm high door Refer manufacturer’s instructions for details and installation requirements.

G. Catches: Magnetic type, unless hinges are of the pressure sprung closer type where catch is not required.

H. Locks: Lockwood 600 series.

204 Fabrication Construct by screwing and gluing or other approved method. A dry stapled assembly will not be approved. Fabricate bench tops as indicated in a manner recommended by the material's manufacturer. Fabricate units without joints unless counter length exceeds maximum available length of materials. Seal joints between counter and splash back with matching colour silicone. Wherever possible, pre-cut openings to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work and similar items. Locate openings accurately using templates or roughing-in diagrams for proper size and shape. Smooth edges of cut-outs and, where located in bench tops and similar exposures, seal edges of cut-outs with a water resistant coating. Back prime all concealed solid timber surfaces prior to installation. Install fasteners, hinges etc. in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. When in doubt about suitability, consult with manufacturer of the items specified or selected.

205 Inspection Before Delivery Advise architect when the first of any group of items is ready for inspection not less than 4 days before delivery is due at the site. Where work is found not to comply with documentation, the architect will order rectification. The architect will be the sole decision-maker regarding compliance or non-compliance.


Visit the site and inspect conditions. Check dimensions and compare all aspects with the drawings and specification. Resolve differences before ordering materials or starting work. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Start of work means total acceptance of all conditions.

302 Preparation for Installation Prior to installing, condition joinery to the average humidity conditions prevailing in the installation areas. Deliver anchoring devices and similar inserts required to be built into substrates well in advance of the fixing of fittings and provide full details when they are to be fixed by others. Prior to installation, examine shop-fabricated work for completeness and remedy and any deficiencies. Include back priming. Remove packing where not required. Thoroughly clean all floors and walls that will be permanently concealed by joinery.

303 Installation Use concealed shims as required to install the work plumb, level, straight and distortion free within the following tolerances: - 1mm in 800mm for plumb and level (including bench tops), - 0.5mm maximum offsets in flush adjoining surfaces, - 2mm maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. Scribe and cut to fit adjoining work; refinish cut surfaces or repair damaged finishes at cuts. Secure joinery with anchors of blocking built-in or directly attached to substrates. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required to complete the installation. Except where pre-finished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails, countersunk and filled flush. Use a matching filler where a transparent finish is required. Install casework without distortion so that doors will fit openings properly and be accurately aligned.

304 Hardware Install all door and joinery hardware as scheduled, listed and required in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Adjust as needed to centre doors in openings.

305 Adjustments, Cleaning, Finishing and Protection A. Finish the work specified in this trade section and remedy anything not finished at the shop or

any other stage prior to completion. B. Adjust joinery to achieve a uniform appearance.


C. Lubricate and clean hardware making any final adjustments needed for proper operation. D. Remove all handling marks from visible joinery surfaces. E. Protection: do everything needed to ensure that all work is without damage or deterioration at

completion.

306 Completion Complete all contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the architect.

END OF SECTION

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 2 SECTION 12480 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

SECTION 12480 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

PART I GENERAL

101 Scope

The work of this trade section covers the supply and installation of floor mats and/or recessed mats and frames.

102 Related Work Coordinate and cooperate with the following trades: Concrete Metalwork Carpet Resilient flooring

103 Quality Assurance Suppliers and installers are required to be widely experienced in the relevant aspects and class of work required for this section. At a place selected by the architect, construct a prototype of a completed installation of floor mat and frame. On completion of the prototype and approval of all aspects of the installation, the work will remain in place and become the standard for the remaining work.

104 References (Not used).

105 Submissions Provide samples and data sheets of all materials. Obtain architect's approval for each item before ordering.

106 Delivery, Handling and Storage Deliver all materials in the packaging of the supplier bearing the brand name, colour, thickness and other relevant data. Store all materials in a secure dry area away from other materials which may cause deterioration.

107 Warranty Provide a warranty covering all aspects of the installation performed by this trade, against defective materials and workmanship for a period of 7 years from the date of completion. Include a statement that the whole of the work has been carried out in accordance with the relevant Australian Standards and the instructions of the manufacturers of components in effect at the time of installation.

PART II MATERIALS

201 Materials Refer Interior Finishes Schedule.

202 Fabrication Comply with the relevant Standards. Contractor to check all dimensions on site. Contractor to provide prototype for architect's approval prior to manufacture. Contractor to present sample to architect for final selection.

203 Schedule of Quantities Refer to drawings for location and extent.


Examine the site conditions applicable to each installation. Arrange for correction if required. Ensure tasks and activities comply with the Act, Regulation, Code of Practice or Australian Standards, as relevant. Start of work means total acceptance of conditions.

302 Installation Refer to drawings for location of floor mats.

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 2 of 2 SECTION 12480 FLOOR MATS AND FRAMES

Frame (if required by the manufacturer) to be provided with anchors and cast-in place or to be fixed in the mat recess with masonry anchors.

303 Preparation Comply with referenced Standards and manufacturer's recommendations. Do not install material until space is enclosed and weatherproof and until wet work in space is completed and dry.

304 Cleaning and Protection On completion of mat recess or area remove all dirt, scraps of left over materials and vacuum the area clean. Remove and replace work which cannot be successfully repaired or cleaned.

305 Completion Complete all contracted work in accordance with contract documents and written variation orders issued by the architect. Work will be deemed complete after being inspected and approved by architect.

END OF SECTION

HYDRAULIC 14000 Hydraulic systems

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 68 SECTION 14000 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

14000 HYDRAULIC SYSTEMS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General: Provide the hydraulic services, as documented. This section of the Specification shall be read in conjunction with the PRELIMINARIES Section of the Specification, which forms an integral part of this section. The Head Contractor shall engage the services of a West Australian licensed plumbing and gas fitting contractor with experience with projects of a similar nature and size as South Coast Baptist College Science and Technology Centre – Stage 1B. The Head Contractor shall nominate in their tender submission the name of the company proposed to carry out the Hydraulic Services installation including Plumbing License number and Gas Fitters License number. The Head Contractor shall include a list of similar projects completed by the plumbing contractor together with referees, within the Tender submission for assessment and approval by the Superintendent. The Head Contractor shall include hydraulic tender breakdown, within the Tender submission for assessment and approval by the Superintendent.

1.2 DESIGN HYDRAULIC CONSTRAINTS The tenderer shall be fully aquatinted with all conditions relating to the contract. The tenderers shall be deemed to have examined the tender documents, the means of access to the site, the availability and award conditions of labour and have obtained all necessary information as to risk and contingencies which could affect this tender. The Tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied themselves as to the correctness and sufficiency of their tender to fulfil their obligations, availability of materials, they shall, before submitting a tender, notify the Superintendent and obtain clarification prior to delivering tender. The only interpretation which shall be recognised shall be those given to the tenderer in writing by the Superintendent. Notwithstanding the Preliminary clauses and other contract documents pertaining to this requirement, the Tenderer, by submission of his tender acknowledges that he has, and shall be deemed to have, inspected the sites and determined and allowed for all conditions on and surrounding the site including but not limited to staged construction requirements and document, security arrangements, access, existence, location and condition of all above and below ground services, building works and structures and adjoining buildings all as found at the time of tender and so may affect the pricing and carrying out of the contract

2 DESIGN FOR DURABILITY AND MAINTAINABILITY

Design for durability: Develop the design so the systems achieve the documented performance, reliability, service life, energy efficiency and safety requirements, and are easily maintainable. Access for maintenance: Develop the design so the systems conform to ACCESS FOR MAINTENANCE in the General requirements work section. Carry out all sanitary plumbing, hot, cold, gas and fire services, industrial waste drainage, stormwater, property sewerage and stack work drainage as shown on the drawings, specified or as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Superintendent Representatives and the relevant authorities having jurisdiction. The work in the Hydraulics Services contract includes the furnishing of all materials, products, accessories, tools, equipment, services, scaffolding, ladders, transportation, supervision, labour, excavation, backfill and other items which may not be mentioned but are necessary for the fabrication and completion of the Hydraulic Services installation. Inspect the site, ascertain and include for all on site conditions.



Provide and install all sanitary plumbing including sanitary fixtures and all necessary fittings, traps, waste pipes, acoustic insulation, vent risers, air admittance valves, inspection openings positioned as required in all discharge pipes and drains. Provide and install all property sewerage including drains, clean out points, overflow relief traps, inspection openings and connection to the existing property sewer at locations indicated on the drawings. Provide and install all Trade waste including drains, cleanout points, sample points, and connection to the existing Dilution pit drain at locations indicated on the drawings. Provide and install all building stormwater drainage including uPVC rain water pipes, overflows, outlets, acoustic insulation, sump boxes, relief points, grated channels and connection to the Civil site stormwater drainage system. Provide and install siphonic roof drainage including shop drawings, above and below ground HDPE pipework, gutter outlets, pipe supports, acoustic insulation and connection to the Civil site stormwater drainage system by a specialised and approved Siphonic system sub-contractor. Provide and install potable and non-potable cold water services including connection to the existing water services, pipework, valve pits, taps, outlets, eye wash units, hose taps, recessed wall boxes, isolation valves, valve boxes, branches and connections to fixtures and equipment. Provide and install hot water services including water heaters, pipework, thermal insulation, branches, temperature control valves, isolations valves and connections to fixtures and equipment. Provide and install fire services including connection to the existing fire service, new pipework, isolation valves, valve boxes, fire hydrants, anti-tamper covers to all hydrants, numbering of all fire valves / boxes, fire service block plans and 3rd party flow testing. Provide and install gas services including connection to the existing natural gas service, pipework, valve pits, branches, isolation valves, emergency gas stops, testing of the existing gas services and connections to all gas equipment. Provide and install drainage and water provisions to all mechanical plant and equipment. Provide and install approved fire stop product to all penetrations traversing through fire compartment walls and floors. Allow for core drilling of holes through floors, walls to Structural Engineers approval and fire stop sealing thereafter. Allow for acoustic treatment of all hydraulic pipework and drains penetrating through acoustic walls. Submit shop drawings for review and approval for all fabricated stainless-steel fixtures, recessed hose tap wall cabinets, core drill details of structural elements and fire booster block plan Provide and install signage and/or painting to all above ground pipework, isolation valves, valve pits, non-potable water outlets, fire hydrants, eye wash stations, hose tap boxes, and emergency gas stop equipment Provide and install thermal insulation to all hot water pipework and condensate drains Provide and install acoustic insulation to all waste pipes, stormwater and evaporative cooler drains Allow for the inspection, testing and certification of the complete fire service installation by DFES approved 3rd party fire services testing contractor. Allow for all other necessary ancillary items of equipment, scaffolding, penetrations, sleeves, lights, specialist sub contractors, manufactures, etc. to satisfactorily complete these works to the satisfaction of the superintendent. To ascertain the scope of work the Specification shall be read in conjunction with ALL drawings. The Superintendent shall be advised in writing of all discrepancies prior to close of Tenders and all discrepancy adjustments are deemed to have been incorporated into the Tender. Provide all relevant test sheets, photos, CCTV drain footage to verify installation is in accordance with contract documents.

2.1 PRECEDENCE General Work sections and referenced documents: - The requirements of other work sections of the specification override conflicting requirements of this

work section.



- The requirements of the work sections override conflicting requirements of their referenced documents.

- The requirements of the referenced documents are minimum requirements.

2.2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement: Conform to the following work section(s): - 0171 General requirements.

2.3 INTERPRETATION DEFINITIONS General: For the purposes of this work section the definitions given in the 0171 General requirements work section apply.

2.4 STANDARDS General Microbial control: To AS/NZS 3666.1, AS/NZS 3666.2 and the recommendations of SAA/SNZ HB 32. Sanitary plumbing and drainage: To AS/NZS 3500.2. Water supply: To AS/NZS 3500.1. Where specified or implied, Australian Standard Specification and British Standard Specification or Codes shall be the latest revisions. Materials and Workmanship shall comply with following Australian Standards unless otherwise specified: AS 1260 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes and fittings for sewerage applications AS 1342 Precast concrete drainage pipes AS 1345 Identification of the contents of piping, conduits and ducts AS 1415 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes and fittings for soil, waste and vent (SWV) applications AS 1432 Copper tubes for water, gas and sanitation AS 1464 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes and fittings for gas reticulation AS 1477 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes and fittings for pressure applications AS 1589 Copper and copper alloy waste fittings AS 1631 Cast grey and ductile iron non pressure pipes and fittings AS 2032 Code of practice for installation of uPVC pipe systems AS 2118.2 Automatic fire sprinkler systems: Wall wetting sprinklers (Drenchers) AS 2280 Ductile iron pressure pipes and fittings AS 2419.1 Fire hydrant installations AS 2758 Aggregates and rock for engineering purposes AS 2977 unPlasticised PVC (uPVC) pipes for pressure applications - compatible with cast iron pipe outside diameters. AS 3500 National plumbing and drainage code - parts 1-4 AS 3517 Capillary fittings of copper and copper alloy for non-pressure sanitary plumbing applications AS 3688 Water supply - copper and copper alloy compression and capillary fittings and threaded end connectors AS 3725 Loads on buried concrete pipes AS 3972 Portland and blended cement AS 256 Plastics Pipe Laying Design Keep an onsite copy of AS3500.

2.5 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS General Requirement: Conform to the 0171 General requirements work section. The Tenderer shall obtain a full set of Tender Documents including Architectural, Structural, Civil, Mechanical, Electrical and Landscaping Services drawings and specifications. All information indicated on the Architectural, Structural, Civil, Landscaping, Mechanical and Electrical Services drawings and specifications that affect this section of the work but not indicated on the hydraulics services drawings shall be deemed to be incorporated into the Tender. Plumbing drawings do not show all the Architectural, Electrical, Mechanical and Structural details. Any information involving accurate measurement on site or buildings shall be taken from the previously mentioned drawings or at the site.



Should any discrepancies occur they shall be notified to the Superintendent Representative before the work proceeds. The hydraulic services drawings indicate the general location and route to be followed by pipe work and equipment etc, to be installed under this contract. Where the required pipe work is only shown diagrammatically, the pipe work shall be installed in such a way as to conserve headroom and interference as little as possible with the free use of the space through which they pass. All pipe work etc, shall be installed as close as practicable to ceilings, walls, floors, etc, unless otherwise shown or specified. The location of pipes, ducts, outlets, etc, may be altered at the direction of the Superintendent without expense to the Principle provided that the change is made before the installation and does not necessitate additional materials. As the work progresses and before installation of fixtures and equipment that may interfere with the interior treatment of the building, the Head Contractor shall consult with the Superintendent Representative and obtain detailed drawings and instructions for the exact locations of such equipment. No contact variations will be approved for the tenderer not informing themselves of information on the Architectural Drawings. It is the responsibility of the tenderer to ensure the contractor has provided a full set of documents and specifications. The drawings covering this section of work are as follows: H01 Site Plan – Drain, Water, Fire & Gas Layout 1:500 H02 Part Site Plan – Drain, Water, Fire & Gas Layout 1:200 H03 Ground Floor Plan – Drain Layout 1:100 H04 First Floor Plan – Drain Layout 1:100 H05 Ground Floor Plan – Water, Fire & Gas Layout 1:100 H06 First Floor Plan – Water & Gas Layout 1:100 H07 Roof Plan – Drain Layout 1:100

2.6 SUBMISSIONS Maintenance program General: Submit details of maintenance procedures and program, relating to installed plant and equipment, 6 weeks before the date for practical completion. Indicate dates of service visits. State contact telephone numbers of service operators and describe arrangements for emergency calls.

2.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS Requirement: Conform to the 0171 General requirements work section. Shop drawings Standard: To AS 1100.101, AS 1100.201, AS 1100.301, AS 1100.401 and AS/NZS 1100.501 as applicable. Requirement: Submit detail drawings at minimum 1:100 scale, showing the following: - Siphonic drainage and overflow systems - Fabricated stainless fixtures - Recessed hose tap cabinets - Domestic water and gas masonry valve pits. - Structural slab and wall penetrations - Schematic riser layouts and sections. - Piping and other schematic drawings including numbering of each valve to correspond to valve tags

notation. - Inclusions: Include the following on the drawings: . Access openings, cover plates, valve boxes and access pits. . Details of control panels including control and power diagrams. . Insulation of piping, fittings and tanks.

- Location, capacity, type and other relevant details of water heaters, including supports and safe trays.



. Location, type, grade and finish of piping, fittings, valves, meters and pipe supports.

. On-site detention pondage areas.

. Provision of a temporary fire hydrant service in the construction period.

. Provision of blue metal back fill to seepage drain system.

. Provision of erosion control measures.

. Provision of road barriers and lighting. - Provision of site treatment and fire vehicle parking as required adjacent to the fire hydrant booster

inlet valve station. . Provision of temporary sanitary accommodation for construction workers. . Provision of trafficable cover plates in the public domain. . Relevant survey levels. . Site and floor set out points. . Tank stands and supporting structures.

3 PRODUCTS

Equipment: Documented pump heads are based on provisional equipment selections and estimated pressure drops. Before ordering equipment, calculate the respective system pressure losses based on the equipment offered and layouts shown on the shop drawings and submit the proposed selections. Submissions: Submit technical data for all items of plant and equipment. Data: Include at least the following information in technical submissions: - Assumptions. - Calculations. - Model name, designation and number. - Capacity of all system elements. - Country of origin and manufacture. - Materials used in the construction. - Size, including required clearances for installation. - Certification of conformance to the applicable code or standard. - Technical data schedules corresponding to the equipment schedules in the contract documents. If

there is a discrepancy between the two, substantiate the change. - Manufacturers’ technical literature. - Type-test reports.

3.1 INSPECTION NOTICE Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Excavated surfaces. - Concealed or underground services. - Flow testing of the fire serice

4 EXECUTION

4.1 WORK ON EXISTING SYSTEMS Demolition General: Decommission, isolate, demolish and remove from the site all existing redundant equipment from the forward work contract including minor associated components that become redundant as a result of the demolition. Breaking down: Disassemble or cut up equipment where necessary to allow removal. Recovered materials: Recover all components associated with the listed items. Minimise damage during removal and deliver to the locations documented.



4.2 EXISTING SYSTEMS Condition of existing systems:

- If the existing condition does not conform to the requirements in the contract documents, submit proposals to rectify the deficiencies with related costing, time and other impacts.

- Subject to the rectification works on existing systems, achieve the performance in the contract documents.

4.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES General: Provide the accessories and fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the systems, including taps, valves, outlets, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and pumps. Isolating valves: In addition to valves required to meet statutory requirements, provide valves so that isolation of parts of the system for safe isolation of the system in the event of leaks or maintenance causes a minimum of inconvenience to building occupants.

4.4 CONNECTIONS TO NETWORK UTILITY OPERATOR MAINS General: Excavate to locate and expose the connection points and connect to the Network Utility Operator mains. On completion, backfill and compact the excavation and reinstate surfaces and elements which have been disturbed such as roads, pavements, kerbs, footpaths and nature strips.

4.5 SUPPORT OF PLANT AND EQUIPMENT SUPPORT OF ROOF MOUNTED PLANT AND EQUIPMENT

Platforms: If a horizontal platform is required, or the area of the plant and equipment is extensive, obtain the advice of a professional engineer for the documentation of a suitable platform. Balustrades: If balustrades or screening are required, obtain the advice of a registered architect. Roof level support: If any of the following apply to roof level support, obtain the advice of a professional engineer: - The total load from any unit of plant or equipment exceeds 500 kg. - The load from a unit of plant or equipment to any single support point exceeds 100 kg. - The average loading of plant and equipment over the area extending 1 m on all sides beyond the

plant and equipment exceeds 25 kg/m². - Sloping roofs: - Roof slope 10° or over: Adopt the roof material manufacturer’s documented installation procedures

or seek the advice of a professional engineer. - Roof slope less than 10°: Provide appropriate continuous supporting members, compatible with the

roof material, laid parallel to the span of the roof sheeting. Extend the continuous support members in both directions to the first purlin or joist that is over 1 m from the face of the plant or equipment it supports.

4.6 SUPPORT OF GROUND LEVEL PLANT AND EQUIPMENT Ground level - If the ground slope is 15° or over, or the area of the plant and equipment is extensive, obtain the

advice of a professional engineer for the documentation of a suitable slab or platform. - In all other cases, provide proprietary plastic or concrete supports installed with falls that achieve a

raised, impervious and water shedding bearing surface. - Balustrades: If balustrades or screening are required, obtain the advice of a registered architect.

4.7 GREEN STAR The Tenderer by submission of his tender acknowledges that he has, and shall be deemed to have, determined and allowed for all GREENSTAR requirements but not limited to practical demonstration of equipment, maintenance manuals, providing proof of purchase and installation of Green Star elements for inclusion in submission.

4.8 PROPRIETARY ITEMS (SPECIFICATION BY EXAMPLE) Requirement: The Contractor shall provide and install the proprietary items, materials and goods specified herein.



Substitution: Where a proprietary item, material, trade name, brand or catalogue number is referred to in the contract documents, the Head Contractor may propose substituting a similar product equivalent in form, function and quality, durability, appearance and the like to the approval of the Superintendent, provided that: - the Head Contractor has provided all necessary specifications, documentation, test results and the

like comparative information in respect of the proposed substitution to the satisfaction of the Superintendent, and

- in the opinion of the Superintendent Representative the characteristics of type, quality, finish, appearance, method of construction, durability and performance of the proposed substitution are not less than those of the specified item, and

- where the specified product is a Western Australian product, the proposed substitution is also a Western Australian product, and

- the Superintendent’s written approval of the proposed substitution has been obtained prior to its implementation.

Such approval shall not be anticipated because of a similar approval having been given in a previous contract. UNOBTAINABLE ITEMS: In the event of a specified proprietary item being unobtainable, the Contractor shall apply promptly to the Superintendent for further directions. Should any items or materials and/or equipment be found to have been substituted without approval, same shall be removed and replaced with the correct items as specified at no extra cost to the client.

4.9 APPRECIATION OF REQUIREMENTS The Tenderer is deemed to have: - Inspected the project documents (including all Architectural, Structural, Mechanical, Civil, Fire,

Landscape, Hydraulics and Electrical documents) and be cognisant of all conditions affecting the sub-contract works;

- Inspected the site and existing buildings and ascertained local information required; - Gathered all relevant regulations and requirements of the authorities having jurisdiction over the

project; - assessed the work, materials and equipment necessary to carry out the intent of the specification; - accurately assessed the time frame necessary to complete the work. No consideration will be granted for misunderstanding the sub-contract works to be undertaken, or for lack of knowledge of the conditions of the site. Arrangements to inspect the facility will be coordinated by the Superintendent. Regulations All plumbing and drainage work shall be carried out in accordance with the PLB and the National Plumbing Code AS3500, the regulations of the Local Authority and to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. A full set of the current legislated AS3500 must be onsite at all times for reference. All plumbing work shall be carried out by a plumber licensed by the Plumbers Licensing Board All fire service work shall be carried out in accordance with the Building Code of Australia, the relevant Australian Standards and to the satisfaction of Departments of Fire and Emergency services and Rescue Services WA and the Superintendent. A current legislated A2419 must be onsite at all times for reference. All gas service shall be carried out in accordance with the ‘Australian Gas Association Installation Code AG601-2013’ and to the satisfaction of Alinta Gas, Office of Energy and the Superintendent. All gas service work shall be carried out by a plumber, who is an Approved Alinta Gas Installer. A current legislated A5601 must be onsite at all times for reference. Provide and install everything necessary to comply with the by-laws and regulations and relevant Australian Standards even though not shown on the drawings or specifically mentioned herein.



5 SUPERVISION

A plumbing supervisor, licensed by the Plumbers Licensing Board, with seniority experience in the type of works to be constructed and is authorised to receive and act upon instruction shall be on site at all times.

6 PERMITS AND FEES

Make all applications, submit plans, pay all fees to all authorities having jurisdiction and obtain all necessary permits in order to facilitate the uninterrupted installation of this section of the work. It is the Head Contractor’s responsibility to pay Water Corporation Headwork’s and Service Connection charges. Refer to provisional sum in Architectural specification A receipt indicating the amount paid shall be presented to the Superintendent for the reimbursement of the Headwork’s and Connection charges. It is the Head Contractor’s responsibility to allow for and pay Water Corporation Building Application Fees based on the tender sum / construction value. It is the Sub Contractor’s responsibility to pay all other Plumbing related fees and charges.

7 SETTING OUT

Set out the pipe runs before the pouring of concrete and provide any sleeves, which may be necessary to avoid cutting holes in finished work. All sleeves shall be removable type and be removed from the structure prior to the installation of pipe work. Grout around all pipes installed through penetrations in concrete or masonry structure and finish off all grouting with an approved two (2) hour fire resistant material to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. All pre-fabricated sections must be fixed in position in ample time to avoid delay to other trades.

8 PROTECTION

All pipe work shall be protected against the entry of foreign matter at all times. Sanitary fixtures shall be protected against damage and any item not considered in first class condition on completion of the work, shall be removed and replaced at no expense of the Principal upon receipt of notice from the Superintendent.

9 INSTRUCTING THE PRINCIPLE

Following the date of practical completion and before handing over to the Principle, the contractor shall provide a practical demonstration in the presence of the Principle, superintendent, of all aspects of the operation and maintenance, general preventive maintenance and emergency shut down procedures of the hydraulic services system and equipment. Final payment is conditional upon satisfactory completion of the above.

10 FIRE STOPPING OF SERVICES PENETRATIONS

Install fire stopping products around all services pipes penetrating through fire and/or smoke walls. Products used shall be of approved manufacture, compatible with material being used for the installation. Refer to architectural drawing to ascertain exact location and rating of all fire and smoke walls. Fire stopping shall be in accordance with the Building Code OF Australia. (BCA) The contractor shall engage a certified company with FPA membership to provide all required fire stops and to certify all fire stopping is in accordance with the BCA. A copy of this certificate shall appear in the maintenance manual. Refer to Building Compliance report architectural drawing to ascertain FRL of penetrations



11 FIRE STOPPING OF SERVICES PENETRATIONS

Install fire stopping products around all services pipes penetrating through fire and/or smoke walls. Products used shall be of approved manufacture, compatible with material being used for the installation. The contractor shall engage Promaseal services to provide all required fire stops and to certify all fire stopping is in accordance with the BCA or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Promaseal® fire collars for floor waste or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Service penetrations for floor wastes are to be sealed using Promasnap floor waste system with integrated waterproofing puddle flange which is tested to the requirements for floor waste configurations in as 1530.4 and as 4072.1 and will maintain the required FRL of the element. All details to be in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. All work to be certified by installer in an approved manner. Promaseal fire collars for standard pipe penetrations or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Where appropriate, the specified plastics penetrations through floor/wall openings should be properly fire stopped using a Promastop®/Promaseal® collar capable of providing fire resistance of FRL when tested and assessed in accordance with as1530: part 4 and as 4072.1. All details to be in accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions. All work to be certified by installer in an approved manner.

12 ACOUSTIC INSULATION

Provide and install (two) 2 layers of Soundlag 4525C 5kg/25mm Quadzero Wrap lapped 100mm and taped with 50mm aluminium tape spirally wound or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Generally, insulate all rainwater pipes, siphonic stormwater drains, overflows, evaporative cooler drains, and sanitary drainage pipes suspended within internal ceiling spaces, cavities and ducts. Refer to Acoustic Consultants Report for additional information. Install acoustic insulation and tape in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Provide at the completion of the project a Compliance Certificate that all acoustic installation has been installed as required by the Acoustic Consultant in accordance the manufactures requirements.

13 ACOUSTIC WALL PENETRATIONS

All pipework penetrating walls shall be installed so that there is no direct contact between pipes and the surrounding structure. Pipework Penetrating Masonry Acoustic Walls Cut a clean round hole to provide 5 to 20mm clearance with pipes. Pack gap with fibre insulation to a density of 20 kg/m3 density; (fibre insulation must not be tightly packed). Seal the opening around the duct on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness. Clearances greater than 20mm Where clearances are greater than 20 mm, pack space around the pipe with fibre insulation to a density of 20 Kg/m3 density. Fix 2 layers of 13mm plasterboard on both sides of the masonry wall to achieve a clearance of 5 to 20 mm to pipe. Seal the opening around the pipe on both sides of wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness. Pipework Penetrating Stud Frame Acoustic Walls Ensure minimum thickness of plasterboard at penetration is 26mm. Provide additional overlapping face boards each side if required. Gap between pipe and surrounding plasterboard sheets is to be maximum of 20mm. Seal the opening around the duct on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.



14 CONSTRUCTION

The tenderer shall familiarise himself with the form of construction, as construction is of various forms ie concrete tilt up, block work, stud walls, pour in situ slabs, pre tensioned slabs steel frame etc and accommodate them in their tender price. All pipework positioned adjacent to any building shall be installed in strict accordance with the Structural Engineer’s requirements and the relevant detailed drawings. Where necessary, allow for all necessary holing of formwork and/or structural slab to facilitate the installation of pipework. Allow for providing all necessary ‘step-downs’, ‘sleeving’, ‘holing’ or ‘casting in’ to concrete foundations necessary to facilitate the installation of all pipework as shown on relevant drawings to ensure all pipework is concealed and has a minimum cover as required by the relevant Authorities. No pipework shall be concealed prior to the completion of all testing by the Superintendent Representative or his representative and all relevant Authorities.

15 CORING OF STRUCTURAL FLOOR SLAB

The Representative contractor’s attention is drawn to the fact the first floor slab has restrictions on penetration locations due to post tension reinforcements within the slab. The contractor shall engage specialist contractors with special equipment to locate reinforcements within the structural slab in the event any additional penetrations are required during construction once the first floor slab is poured. Drill pilot hole in the structural slab to ensure that proposed penetration avoids structural reinforcements. The builder shall mark out the proposed penetrations on the floor slab and obtain approval from the structural engineer prior to commencing any works. Give 48 hours’ notice to the structural engineer or his representative prior to inspection being required.

16 TESTING

All pipe work shall be tested at regular intervals as required during the progress of the work. Carry out all testing including providing all equipment and expenses, in the presence of the Superintendent Representatives. Give three working days’ notice to the Superintendent Representatives or his representative prior to testing. Sections of pipe work built into masonry or in inaccessible positions shall be tested and approved before installation.

17 PROGRESSIVE AUTHORITY INSPECTION REPORTS

The Head Contractor shall provide during construction written Authority evidence stating: Sections of property sewer, sanitary plumbing and industrial waste systems and stormwater downpipes have been sited and tested by a PLB Inspector prior to concealment. Sections of potable and non-potable hot and cold water systems and fire hydrant services tested by the PLB inspector prior to concealment. Sections of the rainwater pipe system tested and approved by the Superintendent Representative prior to concealment. Sections of the natural gas services installation tested by the installer prior to concealment. Fire stopping of penetrations approved by the product manufacturer and the DFES, prior to concealment. All pipe work shall be tested at regular intervals as required during the progress of the work. Sections of property sewer tested and approved by the PLB Inspector prior to concealment along with written Authority evidence. Ovality test shall be conducted of the installed new property sewer in the presence of the Superintendent representative and approved by the prior to concealment. Ovality test



- DN150 plain wall PVC pipes shall be tested for ovality using a 3% deflection gauge. - The Superintendent representative shall be provided with a letter certifying that all pipelines have

passed an ovality test. - Straight Sewers lines shall be tested as follows. - If the ground is dry and no dewatering equipment is required during the excavation of the trenches

the sewers can be tested for ovality 24 hours after the trenches have been backfilled. - If the ground is wet and the level of the ground water is determined and recorded excavation is

commenced, the sewers can be tested for ovality 24 hours after the trenches have been backfilled and the ground water has regained its original level.

- IO and IS sewers shall be tested immediately after the sewer has been constructed and the trench backfilled to the maximum amount possible, consistent with keeping the end of the trench open.

- Where a section of sewer fails the test, the failed section shall be removed and the sewer replaced stop. Repair couplings shall be concrete encased with the concrete encasing extending 150 mm past the ends of the couplings

18 CLEANING UP

On completion of the work, all pipe lines shall be checked, cleaned and flushed out, grated channels and sumps shall be cleaned out and fixtures cleaned, tapware and chrome plated fittings polished and the whole of this section of the work left in perfect new condition.

19 "AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS"

Refer to 2.54 of the Preliminaries. In addition to the Preliminaries – The Head Contractor shall allow for a Licensed Surveyor to record alignments and depths all new below ground services. The Licensed Surveyor shall provide as-con data in PDF and DWG format. The Sub Contractor shall amend construction issue plans as pipe work is installed, clearly indicating dimensions of all pipe work and valves with their respective alignments, depths and invert levels from fixed reference points prior to back filling trenches. These marked up drawings are to be kept on site for regular inspection by the superintendent and/or consultant. The electronic As Constructed Drawings shall have surveyed invert levels and connection points provided by a Licenced Surveyor.

20 HYDRAULIC SERVICES OPERATING MANUAL

Refer to 2.55 of the Preliminaries and 0171 General requirements section of Natspec. In addition to the above references include the following specific Hydraulic services requirements. - Index - Labelled dividers indicating sections eg. Hot Water, Fire Equipment, As Constructed Drawings,

Warranties, Maintenance Procedures etc - Name, address and contact numbers of emergency contact persons in event of warranty attendance

during Defects Liability Period - Dates of Practical Completion and Defects Liability termination - Schedule resume of maintenance procedures - Manufacturers pamphlets - Warranty for each item of equipment installed - Operating and service instructions for each item of equipment installed - Schedule resume of names and addresses for all suppliers of equipment - One complete A3 set of Hydraulic Services As Constructed Drawings in each manual - As constructed drawings to include clear dimensions to all major hydraulic services on all drawings. - Site and floor plans. - Copy of PLB ‘Certificate of Completion and Compliance’. - Copy of Departments of Fire and Emergency services ‘Certificate of Occupancy’



- Copy of Energy safety ‘Notice of Compliance’. - As Constructed accuracy certification. - Back flow valve test sheet. - Thermostatic mixing valve (TMV) test sheets. - Plumbing Licensing Board compliance sheet. - Video copies of the CCT property sewer drainage inspection x 3. - Sub-contractors “Certification of Installation” statement. i.e. installed in accordance with contract

documents and relevant Australian Standards… - Copies of test results for new gas system. - Hydrostatic Test sheets for Hot and cold water service. - Hydrostatic Test sheets for new fire service - Copies of test results for Soil and waste system. - Copies of test results for all back prevention devices - The schedule of resume and maintenance shall include (but not limited to) such items as: - Water heaters general preventative maintenance recommendations. - Emergency shut down and resetting procedures. - Water filters maintenance procedure and recommendations. - Fire service maintenance procedure and recommendations. - Domestic water service maintenance procedure and recommendations. The hydraulic services maintenance manual shall have the following words embossed on the front cover in gold lettering no less than 20mm high and on the spine in lettering no less than 10mm high;-

SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY CENTRE – STAGE 1B

'HYDRAULIC SERVICES MAINTENANCE MANUAL'

The hydraulic services operating manual shall have the name, address, phone and facsimile numbers of the Superintendent Representatives, Hydraulic Services Consultant, Builder and Plumbing Sub- Contractor in that order on the inside leaf of the cover in letters no less than 20mm high. Provide sample of Hydraulic Services Maintenance Manual identification lettering prior to manufacture. Provide with the Maintenance Manual, Two (2) sets of long handle manhole lifting keys to match covers installed, two (2) anti Vandal tap key for each hose tap installed and a budget keys the booster cabinet and fire hose reel/hydrant cabinets Liaise with school superintendent to determine school operating hours and set all plant and equipment timers to correspond with these operating hours. Submit a schedule of these hours for approval to the consultant prior to programming timers. Copy the approved document into maintenance manuals. Note: Final payment is conditional upon receipt of the above-mentioned items.

21 WARRANTY

All materials, equipment and workmanship etc. provided within these works shall be included in the 12 month Defects Liability Period applicable to the Head Contract and effective as from the date of issue of a Certificate of Practical Completion. Throughout the warranty period the Warrantor shall make good at no expense to the Principle, any remedial work which may be required for the rectification of defects whether replacement, repair or otherwise. Warranties shall include for site visits, parts and labour necessary for the rectification, adjustment etc. by the manufacturers service personnel.

22 INTENT OF THE CONTRACT

The intent of the contract is as follows;



To include for the total completion of the works shown on the contract drawings and specification including Client requirements for this project. To include for any errors or omissions that may become evident during the tender period in the contract documents and specification but the intent implied by way of: - Providing everything necessary to complete the project in accordance with the requirement of BMW. - To include for any on site co-ordination related matters between trades, authorities, contractors etc. - To include for all monies that may be necessary to be paid to other parties for completion of the

works whether they are authorities or other contractors or building license conditions. - That it includes for all attendance, profit, sit allowances and working and administrative and

acceleration costs and matters imposed by the controlling building contractor or authorities. - To include for all labour and materials: required to cut and seal redundant services from/in

redundant buildings.

23 QUALITY CONTROL AND QUALITY ASSURANCE. SITE AND PROJECT SPECIFIC SYSTEM

Prepare for the Superintendent Representative approval and a project Specific Quality system complying with AS 3900, AS3902.2 1994 – Generic guidelines for the application of AS 3901/NZS 9001/ISO 9001, AS 3902/NZS 9002/ISO 9002 and AS 3903/NZS 9002/ISO 9003. The system shall be kept on site and continuously monitored by the Contractor and Superintendent Representatives. Log all non-compliance activities and issues with recommended actions to remedy the situation to compliance. Log all hold points for witness testing. Log all testing and inspection results. Copy all testing and inspection results to the “as constructed” manuals. Bring to the attention of the Head Contractor and Superintendent Representative all issues of non- compliance, hold witness points and test results.

24 CERTIFICATION OF INSTALLATION

The Head Contractor shall provide sign-off certification on all services, equipment, plant, fixtures, etc. installed as part of this contract, so testifying the fact that the Contractor has supplied and installed and tested and commissioned this Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, Client requirements and all other controlling authority’s by-laws, codes and requirements.

24.1 CERTIFICATION CHECK LIST - Installation Certificate of Compliance - Copy of Plumbing Licensing Boards ‘Certificate of Completion and Compliance’. - Copy of Department Fire Emergency Services ‘Site testing results and comments’ - Copies of test results for soil, waste and stack system - Copy of private certifier Certificate of Compliance for fire service compliance. - Copies of test results for hot and cold water services site service and each individual units - Copies of test results for Fire service system - Copies of test results for all back prevention devices - Copies of test results for soil, waste and stack system - Copies of test results for gas system - Copy of Fire Stopping certification by a FPA registered passive fire engineer - As Constructed accuracy certification - As constructed with surveyed invert levels, connection points provided by a licenced surveyor - Copy of test tag certification for fire hydrants - Copy of CCTV footage with video operators written report x 2 - Copy of signed Statutory Declaration to confirm the CCTV footage stating that all sewer and

stormwater drains are free of blockages, debris, damage and are flowing freely.



- The Head Contractor shall provide sign-off certification on all services, etc. installed as part of this contract, so testifying the fact that the Contractor has supplied and installed and tested and commissioned this Contract in accordance with the Contract Documents, Client requirements and all other controlling authority’s by-laws, codes and requirements.

25 WATER SERVICE METER READING FOR BUILDING AND COMMISSIONING

Provide and install a sub metered water service for the recording and payment of water usage during the construction period. Install a suitable backflow prevention valve immediately downstream of the sub meter. Reticulate a temporary water service with taps and valves as required. Record the sub meter reading on the first day of each month and submit to the Superintendent

26 EXISTING SERVICES

With reference to all available existing service drawings, allow to carry out onsite investigations to ascertain extent, alignment and depths of all existing services prior to commencing new site works. Allow to hand excavate all excavations within 1 meter(s) of all known existing services. The exact location of existing site services, authority services and connection points indicated of the hydraulic service construction drawings are approximate only. These services have been plotted from record drawings. Engage a specialised underground services locating contractor to undertake ground penetrating radar (GPR) scanning of all proposed hydraulic service trenching routes and excavations. Pot hole findings by hand digging to determine type of service, size, depths. Engage a Licensed Surveyor to survey all investigation findings and provide data in AutoCAD DWG. Existing services that remain as part of this contract shall be plotted on ‘As Constructed’ drawings. Fully seal service penetrations no longer required. Where existing services are to remain, they shall remain operational at all times. All obsolete service pipe work, pits, sumps, manholes, valves, etc shall be removed in accordance with the demolition and construction programme and all excavations backfilled and consolidated. All temporary services provided shall be removed and cut and sealed upon permanent connections being made.

27 DRAIN VIDEO AUDIT

The Head contractor shall allow for the undertaking of two video audits of all new installed property sewer drains at the following stages of construction; - Intermediate of the project – Prior to commencing hard landscaping, carparks and hardcourts - Practical Completion – Provide video with video operators report 4 weeks prior handover The Head contractor is to ensure all drains are clear of debris. Debris and obstructions that may be encountered within the property sewer drainage system shall be cleared and the drains re-video audited by the Builder. The Builder shall provide a copy of the video audit to the Superintendent indicating all property sewer drains are clear of debris and obstructions. Final payment will not be made until receipt of the video audit. The audit shall contain a drawing highlighting the exact details of the drains audited to correlate with the video footage submitted for approval in accordance with AS3500.2. Appendix E. In addition to above, the sub-contractor shall provide a signed Statutory Declaration that they have viewed all the footage of the internal property sewer system to confirm they are free of blockages, debris, damage and are flowing freely.

28 BUILDING TUNING

In addition to clause 3.3 MAN-3 Building Tuning the Sub-Contractors shall perform commissioning building tuning for a continuous 12 month period after handover. This period shall be shown on the Project time line inclusive of –



The commissioning period shall include but not limited to during the defects liability period a regular (minimum 2 no - 1 no at 12 months) inspections, maintenance and testing of items such as backflow prevention valves, water heaters, thermostatic mixing valves, cisterns, filters, line strainers, boiling water units, water chillers, fire hydrants, fire pumps, domestic water pumps, hot water flow and return system, flow limiting valves etc

29 BUILDERS WORKS

The Head Contractor shall allow for and arrange the following works; - Below ground sub services scanning, pot holing and Surveying. - Cutting, removal and reinstatement of surfaces to enable trenching. - Excavation and removal of redundant services and accessories. - Removal of waste and excess soil off site. - Supply of clean free draining sand for backfill of service trenches. - Below ground formed concrete gas and domestic water valve pits - Landscape Irrigation services - Dewatering as required. - Rock removal as required. - Pipe and stack ‘box outs’ where required by the Superintendent - Removal of redundant aluminum water meter enclosure and concrete slab - Surveying of all new installed services - CCTV inspections of all new sewer and stormwater drains - Painting of all exposed hydraulic pipework and accessories - Signage to enclosures, cupboards - Timber supports for all fixtures installed on stud walls - Ceiling and wall access panels - All exposed metal rain water down pipes

30 WORKMANSHIP

Generally Workmanship shall be of a high standard and each section of the work shall be properly and neatly executed to the best trade practice. Untidy work, whether exposed to view or concealed, will not be accepted. Plumbing drawings are provided showing pipe layout and before any layout alteration is made the Superintendent must be consulted for his approval. Access All pipe runs shall be fixed in positions shown with provision for easy access to every section. Pipe work crossing walk in ducts shall be not more than 300mm above the floor surface or lower than 2100mm, so as to provide free access for persons in duct. Provide 300mm clearance of pipe work above cisterns for access purposes. Chrome plating Unless otherwise directed, install chrome plated piping, accessories, fittings and clips internally where unavoidable exposed in toilets, food preparation areas, cool rooms, freezer rooms and other similar areas. Where such pipes pass through walls and floors, provide a suitable chrome plated cover flange and disconnecting nut. Escutcheons Where pipes enter or exit cupboards provide a matching escutcheon neatly fitted to pipe over pipe penetration.



Dissimilar metals Where clips, brackets and pipe supports are of dissimilar metal to that of the piping used, completely insulate the pipe at all fixing points with at least four layers of black polyethylene self-adhesive tape wrapped around pipe. Liaison Allow for and maintain proper liaison with all other trades, particularly the Drainer, Formwork, Concretor, Reinforcer, Electrical, Mechanical and Bricklaying Sub-Contractors, to ensure that problems arising from co-ordination or services can be solved before the work is commenced.

31 FIXING AND PIPE SUPPORTS

Copper Pipes, Steel and PVC Pipework 15mm – 150mm Binder KS10 Kwik Clips with rubber coating with Binder M10 all thread cut to the required length and fixed to soffit/wall with Binder Drop in anchor or Binder Female wall plate with approved Fixing or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent. HDPE and Plastic Pipes 25mm – 150mm Binder KS12 Kwik Clips with rubber coating and spacer to prevent crushing pipe installed with Binder M10 all thread cut to the required length and fixed to soffit/wall with Binder Drop in anchor or Binder Female wall plate with approved Fixing or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent. Install clips at centres as indicated in AS 3500 and in accordance with manufacture instructions Binder shall be engaged to provide capacity statement of fixing and clipping pipe work systems which are to comply with the requirements of AS1170.4 earthquake code. All valves larger than 25mm diameter and equipment such as tanks, pumps, meters, shall be supported independently from the piping so that no undue strain is placed on the equipment. Brazing of pipes to each other or to supports will not be accepted. Securely fix all soil, waste and vent pipe work with Erico Macrofix clip where installed in ceiling and roof spaces. All clipped pipe work installed in wall cavities shall be sighted and certified by the Builder. Note hot and cold water pipe work shall be installed clear of all wall surfaces and brick ties where installed in cavities. Particular attention shall be paid to hot and cold water pipe work clipping in order to eliminate transmission of noise between rooms. Fix all pipes clear of wall surfaces and clear of each other so as to provide clear access to each section. Brazing of pipes to each other or to supports will not be accepted. Install clips at 1 maximum centres as indicated in AS 3500 and in accordance with manufacture instructions

31.1 SPACING OF PIPES Where practicable pipes shall be spaced at least 50mm clear of each other. Lagged hot water pipes shall be 75mm clear of plastic material and unlagged hot water pipes shall be 150mm clear. Hot and cold water pipes shall not be installed in the same wall chase or through the same hole in walls or floors.

31.2 EARTHQUAKE PROTECTION Provide and install all necessary pipe support and clipping to comply with AS1170 Part 4. Provide certification from an approved organization

31.3 CONCEALMENT OF PIPE WORK Unless otherwise directed, conceal all pipe work in ducts, wall chases, hollow walls, cavities, ceiling and roof spaces. Pipe work chased into walls shall be installed behind wall face. Pipe work concealed in cavities shall be fixed clear of all wall surfaces.



31.4 COPPER PIPING Fabricate pipe runs out of the longest lengths practicable, building up of sections from short offcuts will not be accepted. When pipes terminate in all wall mounted fittings such as taps, traps, etc., provide suitable anchor flange to pipe and secure into masonry to approval. Bends shall be pre-formed and junctions fabricated in the tube in accordance with the best standard practice. Cast brass bends and junctions will not be accepted. The use of 'Conetite' fittings will not be permitted. All pipes chased into wall, shall be installed behind the wall face and be continuously grouted with 3:1 cement mortar. Brick and plaster mortar will not be accepted. All copper water or fire service piping installed under concrete floors shall be sleeved through appropriately sized PVC pipe sleeves to facilitate removal and replacement of the copper water pipe. Remove all residual flux from silver brazed joints by washing with hot water and soap and scrubbing with steel wire brush.

31.5 CORROSION PROTECTION “Denso 500” primer paste “Mastic” and “Tape” shall be used to protect all underground copper piping, nuts and bolts on all fittings, valves, mechanical joints, tapping bands and as directed or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent. All copper pipe work chased into masonry walls shall be spirally wrapped with 6mm thick x 65mm wide foam insulation lapped 20mm. All steelwork shall be hot dipped galvanised after fabrication. All fixings shall be stainless steel whether inside or outside. 31.6 UNPLASTICISED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPES (UPVC) uPVC pipes shall be installed using the longest lengths practicable and shall be fitted with all necessary matching fittings with solvent welded or rubber ring joints as applicable, expansion joints, adapters and cast in situ concrete thrust blocks and anchor blocks. The use of UPVC pipes and fittings are permitted on this project based on the contractor implementing and adhering to Green Star best-practice guidelines and can present supporting documentation from the manufacture

31.7 EXCAVATIONS The Head Contractor shall make himself fully aware of all naturally occurring ground conditions including the extent of limestone, rock, clay etc likely to be encountered in the excavations and make all necessary allowances and inclusions in his tender for excavating in the adverse ground and laying to install all necessary services as found. No extra claims for excavating and laying to install all necessary services in hard ground, root or any other adverse conditions will be entertained. The Head Contractor will be responsible for all excavation necessary to facilitate the installation of this section of the work. The Head Contractor shall allow for sub surface radar scanning along and below all proposed excavations and recorded by a Licensed Surveyor. Findings shall be pot holed to identify service type, size and depth prior to excavations for new services. Excavations shall be true to line, maintained in a safe condition in accordance with the requirements of the Scaffolding Act and Worksafe WA and hand dressed to falls as required. With exception of those clearly indicated on the drawings, no excavation shall encroach within the angle of repose of any new or existing structural footing, pipe line or pit. Where it may be necessary to excavate within the angle of repose, approval must be obtained from the Structural Engineer and the entire operation, including sheet piling and compaction, shall be carried out under his supervision. The base of trenches shall be excavated so that the piping will be supported on a solid bed of earth compacted to ten blows per 300mm on a penetrometer to a depth of 900mm. Hand excavate and locate all existing services traversed by or in close proximity to the excavations for this section of the work and hand excavate for a distance of three meters on both sides of all existing services before commencing machine excavation.



Liaise with the Mechanical and Electrical Contractors and ensure that all sub grade services are installed in the necessary sequence and in the correct alignments to avoid future damage. Remove all excess excavated material from site. No contact variations will be approved for the tenderer not informing themselves of information contained in the Geotechnical Report. It is the responsibility of the tenderer to ensure the contractor has provided a full set of documents. It is the tenderers responsibility to make himself aware of information contained in the site geotechnical report.

31.8 EXCAVATION IN ROCK Refer to Civil Specification for definition of excavation in rock.

31.9 DEWATERING Refer to Civil Specification for definition of dewatering.

31.10 PIPE BEDDING Sand Bedding Where excavations are free from rock or clay, or ground water, sand bedding shall be carried out to an even and regular grade in sufficiently dewater excavations. Prior to laying of property sewers in sand bed conditions trench beds shall be tested with a hand driven penetrometer consisting of a 16mm dia. rod driven by a 9kgm weight falling 600mm to resist 7 blows per 300mm. Should the soil not resist the 7 blows per 300mm, then the Hydraulic Services Builder shall compact the virgin soil by approved means to give the required compaction. Metal Bedding Where excavations encounter rock, clay or water charged ground a 150 mm minimum thick metal bed shall be laid to an even and regular grade consisting of coarse, diorite, granite or other approved stone of igneous origin in accordance with AS 1465 - 1974, 100% passing the 13.2 mm BS sieve and 9% passing the 4.75mm BS sieve. Pile and Keel Provide and install 100mm x 100mm jarrah timber piles driven to refusal and topped with galvanised nailed jarrah timber keel as scheduled herein and in the following circumstances: In water charged ground (if dewatering is not effective or not approved by the plumbing inspector). Made up ground where mechanical compaction as previously specified is not obtainable. The base of trenches shall be excavated so that the piping will be supported on a solid bed of 300mm clean earth compacted to eight blows per 300mm on a penetrometer to a depth of 900mm above the top of the pipe. Pipe work shall not be installed until the bottom of all trenches has been levelled and compacted.

32 BACKFILLING AND CONSOLIDATION

Backfilling shall not commence above half the depth of the service pipe or drain, until the pipe or drain has been sighted and approved by the Plumbing Licensing Board and the Superintendent. Selected clean backfill material free of clay, debris, stones, rubbish, etc, shall be provided by the Contractor above all pipes laid in excavated ground. If acceptable backfill is not available from excavations, all excavated material shall be removed from the site and approved earth supplied by the head contractor shall be brought in for use in this event. All backfilling shall be done in 300mm layers, thoroughly watered and compacted to eight blows per 300mm on a penetrometer. The first 600mm of all backfill over drains shall be hand compacted. Vibrating rollers or similarly heavy compactors will not be permitted over service lines where there is less than 600mm soil cover over the barrel of the pipe. Compaction of soil to this depth shall be carried out only with hand tamper or approved mechanical type. Allow for re-testing services in areas where heavy compaction has been undertaken over service pipe installation.



33 MATERIALS

33.1 GENERALLY Materials used shall be the best of their respective kinds, manufactured in accordance with the relevant Australian Standard Specification or in its absence, the relevant British Standard Specification. Where required, material shall be tested and Watermarked stamped.

33.2 SUPPLY OF MATERIALS As soon as practical place all orders and take all necessary measures to ensure the supply on time of all materials and equipment necessary for this section of the work and verify in writing to the Superintendent that all materials have been ordered and can be delivered to suit the Construction Programme, or point out if the supply of any necessary material or component cannot be arranged to suit the Construction Programme.

Failure to ensure that all materials and equipment can be delivered to the site to be installed in accordance with the Construction Programme will render the Head Contractor liable for all extra costs and work involved in substitutions of a more expensive nature and all freight costs involved in obtaining the specified materials and components further afield than the normal points of supply.

Late ordering will not be accepted for substitution.

33.3 COPPER PIPES Copper pipes shall be type 'B' solid drawn tubes manufactured in accordance with AS1432. Copper fittings for use with copper tubes shall be manufactured in accordance with AS1589.

33.4 UNPLASTICISED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPES (UPVC) uPVC pipes and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with AS1415 and AS1260. The use of UPVC pipes and fittings are permitted on this project based on the contractor implementing and adhering to Green Star best-practice guidelines and can present supporting documentation from the manufacture

33.5 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE PIPES (HDPE) HDPE pipes shall be Coestilen with matching fittings and welded joints or equal approved.

33.6 GALVANISED STEEL PIPE Galvanised steel pipes shall be 'Heavy Gauge' tubes with screwed joints manufactured in accordance with AS1074. Galvanised malleable iron fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with AS1590, BS143 and BS1256 as applicable.

33.7 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPES Reinforced concrete pipes shall be “Humes” Class ‘X’ or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent.spigot and socket pipes with rubber ring joints manufactured in accordance with AS 1342.

33.8 VALVES Unless otherwise specified, all valves shall be of zinc free bronze construction.

33.9 SANITARY FIXTURES Sanitary fixtures shall be first quality of an approved brand of Australian manufacture where possible, tested and watermarked complete with all the necessary matching fittings.

33.10 CONCRETE All concrete and reinforcement for minor works shall be conform with AS 3600. Minimum strength of concrete shall be 20mPa with maximum slump of 75mm and with 20 size aggregate.



33.11 CEMENT Locally manufactured normal Portland Cement complying with AS1315 shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original branded containers.

33.12 SAND Shall be coarse, well graded, clean sand, free from deleterious matter.

33.13 WATER Shall be clean, fresh, free of impurities and of drinking quality.

33.14 COARSE AGGREGATE Shall be clean crushed granite, diorite, or other approved stone, free from deleterious matter and complying with AS2758.

34 SERVICES IDENTIFICATION - ABOVE GROUND

Provide and install Brady or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent. Colour coded self-adhesive, coloured and descriptive, stickers with service flow direction on all soil, waste, vent, rainwater, hot and cold water, gas and fire service pipe work installed internally at 3m maximum centres, all in accordance with AS1345-1972.

35 SERVICES IDENTIFICATION - BELOW GROUND

Provide and install Calpico YDET 150mm wide colour coded detectable warning tape over cold water, fire, gas and property sewer pipe work installed in ground or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent. Warning tape shall be installed 300mm directly above pipes with service identification facing up.

36 VALVES AND METERS IDENTIFICATION

Provide and install Brady or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent.50mm dia. custom brass valve tags secured to valve stem with Brady brass chain. Engraving shall identify service and rooms/areas of control and shall correspond with As Constructed drawings.

37 SIGNAGE NOT DRINKING WATER [SCIENCE LABS]

Provide signage (90 of) to all non-potable water outlets. Signage shall comply with AS 3500.1 1997 Section 4 and be PRATT or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the superintendent.; approved safety signs 225mmx 255mm stainless steel with the words Not Drinking Water. Provide sample of sign prior to ordering. Fixing location to be determined on site with Superintendent. Non potable signage - Science labs Safety Eye Wash stations Evaporative cooler water signage Isolation valves The below signage is to be included in the builders works and forms part of the builders work.

38 BUILDER SIGNAGE

Gas emergency shut off

39 WATERMARK

All pipes, fittings, tapware, fixtures and equipment shall be Watermark approved in accordance with the Plumbing Licensing Board requirements.



40 MAINTENANCE CONTRACTS

Throughout the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall include for regular and comprehensive maintenance and service inspections by the specialist suppliers of equipment and systems installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and to maintain regulatory compliance.

41 CLEANING UP

On completion of the work clean all pipe work of mortar and other foreign material. Flush and clean out all debris from wastes, property sewers, rainwater pipes, stormwater drains, grated channels etc. Inspect and tighten all inspection and cleaning openings. Check all pipe clips and fasteners and tighten where necessary. All pipelines shall be checked. Taps and valves shall be tested and rectified if required. Cisterns shall be checked and adjusted if required. Sanitary fixtures and chrome pipe work shall be uncovered and thoroughly cleaned and the whole of this section of the work shall be left in perfect new condition.

42 TENDER BREAKDOWN

Tenderers shall submit a breakdown of the total tender price for each section as indicated in the below table 1. The contractor shall also allow to provide progress claim breakdown, similar to following table 2 below.



TABLE 1

Section Price Authority Fees and Charges $ Prelims Inc. site setup, investigations, temp services, staging requirements, etc.. $ Sub services ground penetrating radar scanning, pot holing and Surveying $ Sanitary Plumbing and Drainage Inc. drain camera video with report $ Building Stormwater Drainage - Hydraulic $ Siphonic Roof Drainage – Specialised sub contractor $ Carpark Stormwater Drainage and Soakwells – Civil $ Gas Services $ Fire Services Inc. inspection, testing by suitably qualified 3rd party certifier $ Cold Water Services $ Hot Water Services Inc. water heaters, temperature control, thermal insulation $ Sanitary Fixtures and Tapware $ Mechanical equipment services Inc. drainage, insulation, water, gas $ Acoustic Insulation (stormwater, sanitary and evaporative cooler drains) $ Testing, Commissioning, Painting and Labelling $ Green Star Requirements (if project applicable) $ NA Operation and Maintenance Manuals Inc. As Constructed Drawings $ Maintenance and Servicing (12 Months) $ Sub-Total (excluding GST) $ GST $ Total INCLUDING GST $

Date: Company: Address: Signature:

Notes:



TABLE 2

Progress Claim submissions – Itemized under the following Buildings; Science & Technology Building sections:

% Claim

Total this claim Total

Price

Sanitary Plumbing and Drainage $ $ $ Stormwater Drainage – Building $ $ $ Siphonic Roof Drainage $ $ $ Gas Services $ $ $ Cold Water Services $ $ $ Hot Water Services $ $ $ Mechanical equipment services $ $ $ Acoustic Insulation $ $ $ Fixtures and Tapware $ $ $ Testing, Commissioning, Painting and Labelling $ $ $

Sub-Total (excluding GST) $ $ $ GST $ $ $ Total INCLUDING GST $ $ $

External Work sections:

% Claim

Total this claim Total

Price

Water Supply $ $ $ Sewer Drainage $ $ $ Gas Services $ $ $ Fire Services $ $ $ Building Stormwater Drainage - Hydraulic $ $ $ Stormwater Drainage – Civil $ $ $

Sub-Total (excluding GST) $ $ $ GST $ $ $ Total INCLUDING GST $ $ $

08 Hydraulics 0811 Sanitary fixtures


0811 SANITARY FIXTURES

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement: Provide sanitary fixtures, as documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES GENERAL Requirement: Conform to the following work section(s): - 0171 General requirements. - 0801 Hydraulic systems. - 0802 Tapware.

1.3 INTERPRETATION ABBREVIATIONS General: For the purposes of this Sanitary fixtures works section the following abbreviations apply: - WC: Water closet. - AWC: Ambulant Water closet - DWC: Disabled Water closet. - WB: Wall Basin - DWB: Disabled Wall Basin - LS: Laboratory Sink - DSR: Disabled Shower Recess - SK: Sink - UR: Urinal - LS: Laboratory Sink - TR: Trough - KS: Kitchen Sink - CS: Cleaners Sink - AT: Ablution Trough - PT: Practical Trough Refer to drawing index for full abbreviation list. Standards general Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1 and AS 1428.2. Authorised products Standard: Listed in the Watermark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

1.4 SUBMISSIONS CERTIFICATION General: Submit evidence that proposed fixtures are listed in the Watermark Product Database. Samples General: Submit samples as documented in the Sanitary fixtures samples schedule.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS Laundry troughs and tubs Standard: To AS/NZS 1229. Sealants



General: Use only sealants that do not support microbial growth. AS/NZS 3666.1 requires that sealants not support microbial growth. Many commonly used silicone based sealants do not meet this requirement and will support the growth of fungus. Colour: To match fixture.

2.2 WASH BASINS Standard: To AS/NZS 1730.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL Storage and handling Accessories: Use manufacturer's brackets and accessories if these are available and suitable for the mounting substrate. Protection: Deliver fixtures to site protected from damage under site conditions by coatings, coverings and packaging. Remove only sufficient protection to permit installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION GENERAL Connections: Connect to each fixture supply and waste services. Install plumb and level. Cutting and fitting: If it is necessary to cut and/or fit substrate to install an item, carry out this before the surface is finished or painted. Remove items when required for painting and protect until reinstalled. Cap or plug the open ends of pipes. Reinstall when painting and finishing is complete. Substrate and fixings: Before installation, make sure that the substrate to which the fixtures are to be installed is adequate for the intended loads and fixings methods. In solid walls, confirm adequacy of the material at fixing locations. Provide and fix tested sanitary fixtures to the manufacturer's specifications in positions indicated and as follows including all necessary brackets, fixings and fittings, brass chrome plated waste outlets, overflows and such like and connect to services as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Superintendent Representatives. All vitreous china fixtures to be white. All stainless steel fixtures to be satin finish Liaise with the Cabinet Worker and provide templates to facilitate correct holing of bench tops for self- rimming fixtures. Fix all self-rimming fixtures inset into bench tops as required, including waterproof mastic seals. All pedestal pans to be set level and plumb on a white cement mortar base with stainless steel counter sunk screws inserted into all fixing points. All Wall Hung fixtures to be set level and plumb with manufacture approved brackets and fixings. All exposed flush pipes to be chrome plated copper with chrome plated wall plate over penetration. All plug and washers to be chrome plated brass. At completions of works ensure all waste outlet plugs are provided. Obtain receipt of delivery and issue to consultant. All sinks shall be complete with sound proof backings Provide and install fixing plates within walls to facilitate the secure anchoring of all fixtures, tapware, outlets, valves, pipework, rails and appliances. All fixtures and fittings shall be anchored to with stand a force of 1100 N applied in any position and in any direction without showing any visible sign of deformation or loosening of the fastenings. All fixtures, tapware, outlets, and valves shall be installed in a manner that prevents flexing of walls when subject to these forces. Refer to architects’ drawings for exact location of all fixture, tapware, outlets and appliances. Pipes, fittings, tapware, fixtures and equipment shall be Watermark approved in accordance with the Plumbing Licensing Board requirements. Refer to Architectural Room Layout Details and Wall Elevation Detail drawings to ascertain the exact location of all fixture, tapware, outlets and appliances. Provide protective covering to all fixtures, fittings and equipment after installation to prevent damage during construction. Damaged fixtures, fittings and equipment shall be replaced with new at no expense to the Principal.



Noggings: In framed construction, provide a solid nogging at each fixing point.

3.3 VITREOUS CHINA FIXTURES General: Undertake preparation, assembly, connections to water supply and sanitary plumbing, application of slurries and sealants in sequence. Install the fixture without stressing its attachment points.

3.4 FIXTURES WALL HUNG BASINS General: Set basins firmly to walls or vanities as detailed. Connect through trap to the drainage system.

3.5 VANITIES General: Install to manufacturer's recommendations and details. Seal top and upstand to wall surface. Seal cut surfaces to prevent moisture penetration.

3.6 COMPLETION DAMAGE General: Inspect all work and replace or repair to factory condition damaged or marked fixtures and components.

3.7 PROTECTIVE COATINGS General: Immediately before the date for practical completion, remove all protective coatings and stickers and clean surfaces. Check and clean debris from traps.

4 SANITARY FIXTURE SCHEDULE

4.1 TOILET SUITES (WC) Provide and install Caroma (766100W) Liano Invisi II wall faced toilet suite complete with Liano s-trap back inlet pan, concealed Caroma Invisi II inwall cistern, Caroma (237088S) Invisi II satin round dual flush plate / buttons and Liano double flap soft close seat or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the Superintendent. Install centre of flush button plate at 950mm above floor level. Head Contractor to provide and install tile infill access panel of approx. 450mm W x 650mm H. Pan to be fixed to floor on bed of mortar with ratio of 3:1 sand cement. (AWC) Provide and install Caroma (766500W) Liano Easy Height Invisi II wall faced toilet suite complete with Liano s-trap back inlet pan, concealed Caroma Invisi II inwall cistern, Caroma (237086S) Invisi II raised satin round dual flush plate / buttons and Liano double flap soft close seat or a similar product equivalent in function, quality to the approval of the Superintendent. Install centre of flush button plate at 950mm above floor level. Head Contractor to provide and install tile infill access panel of approx. 450mm W x 650mm H. Pan to be fixed to floor on bed of mortar with ratio of 3:1 sand cement. (DWC) Provide and install Caroma (901900B) Care 800 wall faced close coupled toilet suite with Care 800 concealed S-trap pan, Care 800 cistern with Caroma (750109) vandal conversion kit, Caroma curved arm backrest, and Pedigree II Care single flap seat or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Install the toilet suite in accordance with AS1428-1 with particular attention to set out dimensions Pan to be fixed to floor on bed of mortar with ratio of 3:1 sand cement. Refer to Architectural documents for details on AS1428 grab rail requirements.

4.2 BASINS (WB) Provide and install Caroma (665615) Liano Nexus wall basin complete with one taphole, chrome plated brass outlet, Caroma (687295C) chrome plated bottle trap, 40mm copper waste dropper in wall



/ cavity, and D.200 basin fixing kit or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide and install chrome plated copper s-trap and exposed waste to basin installed on existing wall. (DWB) Provide and install Caroma (665515 left shelf / 665415 right shelf) Liano Nexus 720 wall basin complete with integral shelf, one tap hole, chrome plated waste outlet, D.200 basin fixing kit, Caroma (687295C) chrome plated and concealed 40mm copper waste dropper in wall / cavity or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent. Refer to architectural details to ascertain bowl / shelf configurations Note – Basin not to be installed against side wall, offset to comply with AS1428. Install basin in accordance with AS1428-1 with particular attention to set out dimensions.

4.3 KITCHEN SINKS (KS) Provide and install Clark (1503.1) Advance 930mm long end bowl stainless steel sink complete with one tap hole, drainer, basket waste outlet, fixing clips, 50mm PVC trap / waste and mastic seal to bench top or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent. Refer to architectural details to ascertain bowl / drainer configurations.

4.4 LAB SINKS (LS.1 & LS.2) Provide and install Britex (LB3-350Lx350Wx270D) 316 grade stainless steel under mount laboratory sink with optional Britex (74-11-0030) overflow outlet and drain to sink trap, 316 grade stainless steel waste outlet, 50mm polypropylene trap with overflow spigot, fixing clips and mastic seal to underside of bench top or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Refer to architectural drawings for fixing and lip detail. Provide shop drawings to the Superintendent for review and comment / approval prior to placing order.

4.5 PRACTICAL TROUGHS (PT) Provide and install purpose made Simcraft 1200Lx500Wx215Dmm 304 grade 1.2mm satin finish stainless steel practical trough with 300mm high rear wall upstand, 100mm wide rear flange with three tapholes, 50mm waste outlet, 50mm chrome plated copper p-trap, concealed waste and stainless steel wall brackets or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide shop drawings to the Superintendent for review and comment / approval prior to placing order.

5 CONNECT ONLY

Provide all materials and labour to connect the following fixtures and indicated on the drawings including waste outlets, traps, valves, taps, fittings, chrome plated waste pipe, hot and cold water connections. DW Dish Washing Machine (existing science preparation room)

08 HYDRAULICS 0812 Tapware


0812 TAPWARE

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement: Provide tapware, as documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES GENERAL Requirement: Conform to the following work section(s): - 0171 General requirements. - 0801 Hydraulic systems. - 0811 Sanitary Fixtures.

1.3 STANDARDS General Design for access and mobility: AS 1428.1 and AS 1428.2 Authorised products Standard: Listed in the Watermark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

1.4 SUBMISSIONS Certification General: Submit evidence that proposed tapware is listed in the Watermark Product Database. Samples General: Submit samples as documented in the Tapware samples schedule.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS Accessories General: Provide escutcheons and cover plates over visible penetrations. Finish and material to match adjacent fixtures. Sealants General: Use only sealants that do not support microbial growth.

Colour: To match fixture.

2.2 TAP AND VALVE HEADS Metal heads and handles: Provide brass fittings or a suitable bush to prevent electrolysis and growth. Plastic heads and handles: Provide compact fittings designed to prevent fracture and exposure of jagged or rough edges. Vandal-proof heads: Provide vandal-proof or anti-tampering devices for the designated types.

2.3 WATER EFFICIENCY Shower heads: To AS 3662 and suitable for the pressures and pressure differences of the supplied water. Water efficient tapware: Tested and labelled with their water efficiency rating to AS/NZS 6400.

AS/NZS 3666.1 requires that sealants not support microbial growth. Many commonly used silicone based sealants do not meet this requirement and will support the growth of fungus.



2.4 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES Standard: To AS 4032.1. Requirement: Provide thermostatic mixing valves that automatically control the temperature at the mixed outlet to a pre-sealed temperature and suitable for the number of outlets served by the individual valve. Controls: Include the following: - A temperature sensitive automatic control that maintains temperature at the pre-selected setting and

rapidly shuts down the flow if either supply system fails, or if the normal discharge water temperature is exceeded.

- Hot water flush facility. - Wall box: House the thermostatic mixing valve in a stainless steel recessed wall box with a hinged

door and keyed lock, in ceiling space and or under cupboards as nominated on hydraulic drawings.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION General Requirement: Install to manufacturer's recommendations. Use manufacturer's recommended tools and templates. Provide and install suitable approved taps, valves and outlets to comply with the following schedule. Unless otherwise specified all tapware shall be chrome plated All exposed cocks and outlets shall be chrome plated flanged type. Flexible hose shall be installed without twisting, tight stress bends or over stretching. Set taps and outlets true, level and on tile joints where such occur. Ensure assembly and spuds are securely fastened to prevent any movement within walls. Tap jumper washers shall be spring loaded ‘Hydroseal’ throughout. Refer to Architectural Detail and Room Elevation drawings to ascertain exact positions of isolating valves and outlets. Wherever necessary all valves for services coming under the jurisdiction of the PLB shall be tested and stamped with the approval of that Authority. Provide protective covering to all taps and outlets after installation to prevent damage during construction. Damaged tapware shall be replaced with new at no expense to the Principal. All tapware, fittings, outlets, valves and equipment shall be Watermark approved in accordance with the Plumbing Licensing Board requirements. Prior to positioning of any pipework in ceiling spaces or wall chases, allow for coordination on site with all other trades and Superintendent. Install “Not For Drinking’ signage to each non potable water outlet in accordance with AS1319. Commission and test each tap with an integral thermostatic mixing valve to manufacture instructions, set to deliver 45⁰ hot water, provide written test report for each tap within the handover manuals. All hot and cold water connection points under fixtures have threaded connection, securely anchored within wall, with chrome plated mini stop, chrome plated wall plate and flexible stainless steel or chrome plated copper connection to tap, fitting or piece of equipment. Location General: Locate to dimensions as documented. Installation General: Install level, plumb and true to line in the required location. Make sure moving parts function freely and without obstruction. Do not modify supplied units. Seal: Provide resilient seals between fixtures and back nuts. Fixing: Provide rigid fixing for tapware so that it does not move in normal operation. Cutting and fitting General: If it is necessary to cut and/or fit substrate to install an item, carry out before the surface is finished or painted. Remove items when required for painting and protect until reinstalled. Cap or plug the open ends of pipes. Reinstall items when painting and finishing is complete.



Tap positions General: Locate hot tap to the left of, or above, the cold tap.

3.2 COMPLETION Adjustment General: Inspect and adjust tapware for correct and smooth operation. If adjustment does not rectify incorrect or defective operation, replace units. Damage General: Inspect all work and replace or repair to factory condition damaged or marked fixtures and components. Foreign matter: Inspect for presence of foreign matter particularly on tap seats. Remove if found. Replace damaged seats. Protective coatings General: On completion of the tapware installation remove all protective coatings and stickers and clean surfaces. Check and clean debris from traps. Thermostatic mixing valves Field testing: To AS 4032.3. Maintenance: Conform to the 0891 Hydraulic maintenance work section.

4 TAPWARE SCHEDULE

4.1 TOILET CISTERNS (WC & AWC) Provide and install Zetco ball valve (1051) with Dura flexible stainless steel connector to in-duct and in-wall cisterns or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent. (DWC) Provide and install Zetco (1414) mini ball valve with Dura flexible stainless steel connector to rear entry cisterns or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.

4.2 BASINS (WB) Provide and install Caroma (96193C6A) Liano Nexus chrome plated basin mixer or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent. Remove integral temperature limiting device to ensure correct operation of thermostatic mixing valve. Provide and install cold and tempered water chrome plated mini stops below each basin.

(DWB) Provide and install Caroma (90991C5A) Skandic 150mm Care chrome plated basin mixer or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent. Remove integral temperature limiting device to ensure correct operation of thermostatic mixing valve. Provide and install cold and tempered water chrome plated mini stops below basin.

4.3 SHOWERS (DSR) Provide and install Caroma (782742A) Virtu Plus Starsafe shower complete with 1000mm stainless steel slide rail, dual check valve, flexible silver hose, chrome plated handpiece and Caroma (90952C) Skandic chrome plated shower mixer valve or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent. Remove temp limiting device from mixer tap to ensure correct operation of thermostatic mixing valve. Install the slide rail, hose connection point and mixer tap in accordance with AS1428-1 with particular attention to set out dimensions.



4.4 KITCHEN SINKS (KS) Provide and install Caroma (96194C5A) Liano Nexus chrome plated sink mixer or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide and install cold and hot water chrome plated mini stops below sink.

4.5 LABORATORY SINKS (LS.1) Provide and install Galvin Engineering (TL16FJ16C) chrome plated laboratory set with fixed spout, tube nozzle outlet and anti-rotation pin to base or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide and install non potable cold water chrome plated mini stop below sink. (LS.2) Provide and install Galvin Engineering (TL14FJ16C) chrome plated cold and hot mixing laboratory set with fixed spout and tube nozzle outlets or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide and install non potable cold and hot water chrome plated mini stops below sink. Ensure height and position of tap set to teacher demo sink will not block AV projector display.

4.6 PRACTICAL TROUGHS (PT) Provide and install 3x Galvin Engineering (TL16.USJ1C) chrome plated tap sets with vandal resistant handles, upswept swive spout, jumper valves and aerator outlet or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent. Install 3x tap sets to 100mm wide rear trough tap landing at equal spacing. Provide and install cold water chrome plated mini stops below trough with Dura flexible stainless steel connectors to each tap inlet or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.

4.7 EYE WASH UNITS (EW.1) Provide and install Galvin Engineering (WS-SE921) bench mounted laboratory single outlet aerated eye wash unit with retractable hose or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide and install lockable 15mm potable water ball under bench, padlock in open position. Install chrome plated dual check valve to outlet of ball valve Provide and install Enware (ESS504) 400x300 colourbond signage adjacent to eye wash. (EW.2) Provide and install Enware (EL485) wall mounted eye body wash unit with 3.3m self-coiling yellow nylon hose, dual aerated eye wash outlets, stay open lever handle, wall bracket, chrome plated brass body and fittings or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Install chrome plated dual check valve to water point at approx. 800mm above floor level Provide and install lockable 15mm potable water ball in ceiling space, padlock in open position. Head Contractor to provide ceiling access panel where required. Provide and install Enware (ESS504) 400x300 colourbond signage adjacent to eye wash.

4.8 WASHING MACHINES (WM) Provide and install Galvin Engineering (49920, 49924) chrome plated cold and hot vandal resistant washing machine taps and Galvin Engineering 17 l/min flood stop valves or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.



Install washing machine taps with adjacent cupboard.

4.9 HOSE TAPS Provide and install Galvin Engineering (12542) key control brass hose tap with vacuum breaker at 600mm above ground level at locations indicated on drawings or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide 2x key handles (12567) for each external key operated hose tap. (HT-R) Provide and install recessed wall cabinet for hose taps installed to perimeter of building where indicated on drawings. Generally, the wall cabinet shall match existing - Constructed from marine grade 316 grade 1.2mm stainless steel - 650mm high by 250mm wide by 150mm deep (internal clearances) - 750mm high by 350mm wide by 170mm deep (overall incl. frame / flanges) - Perimeter frame of 20mm wide set flush with finished wall - Concealed fixing flange of 30mm wide set back 12mm from frame - Door with a recessed pan of 12mm deep to facilitate Equitone insert - Fitted with hose tap at 250mm above base of cabinet - Fitted with rubber grommet to rear to suit 15mm brass all tread. - Fitted with a GPO at minimum 200mm above hose tap (by Builder) - Fully welded water tight with floor of cabinet sloping to door - Fitted with stainless steel piano hinge allowing door to be opened 180⁰ - Fitted with door stop trim for flush to frame door closing - Door fitted with camlock (Refer to lock and key schedule) - Fitted with signage “GPO & HOSE TAP” (Refer to signage schedule) - Refer to Architectural detail for further dimensions Provide shop drawings to the Superintendent for review and approval prior to placing order.

4.10 CONNECT ONLY Provide all materials and labour to connect the following fixtures and indicated on the drawings including waste outlets, traps, valves, taps, fittings, chrome plated waste pipe, hot and cold water connections. DW Dish Washing Machine (existing science preparation room)

08 HYDRAULIC 0813 Water Heaters


0813 WATER HEATERS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement: Provide water heaters, as documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement: Conform to the following work section(s): - 0171 General requirements. - 0781 Mechanical electrical. - 0801 Hydraulic systems. - 0823 Cold and Heated Water

1.3 STANDARDS General Heated water services: To AS/NZS 3500.4. Gas equipment: To AS 3645. Authorised products Standard: Listed in the Watermark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Microbial control Standard: To AS/NZS 3666.1 and AS/NZS 3666.2.

1.4 INTERPRETATION Abbreviations General: For the purposes of this work section the following abbreviations apply: - CFC: Chlorofluorocarbon. - HCFC: Hydro chlorofluorocarbons.

1.5 SUBMISSIONS Certification General: Submit evidence that proposed water heaters are listed in the Watermark Product Database. Warranties Requirement: Submit all required warranties: Warranties extending beyond the end of defects liability period: Make sure that the principal is named as the warrantee.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL Insulation Prohibition: Do not provide insulation materials that use CFC or HCFC as blowing agent during the manufacturing process.

2.2 ELECTRIC STORAGE WATER HEATERS Description General: Provide heaters as documented in the Electric storage water heater schedule. Corrosion protection: Provide sacrificial anodes in each steel storage vessel as documented in the

08 HYDRAULIC 0813 Water Heaters


2.3 ELECTRIC STORAGE WATER HEATER SCHEDULE. Standard General: To AS/NZS 4692.1. Energy performance: To AS/NZS 4692.2. Warranties Warranty period: Minimum 5 years on cylinder.

2.4 INSTANTANEOUS WATER HEATERS Description General: Provide heaters as documented in the Instantaneous water heater schedule.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION General Standard: Install to AS/NZS 3500.4.

3.2 GAS WATER HEATERS Standard: Install to AS/NZS 5601.1. Manifolds General: If multiple heaters are installed in banks use the manufacturer's standard manifold arrangement to provide equal flow thorough each heater in the bank.

4 WATER HEATER SCHEDULE

4.1 WATER HEATERS (WH) Provide and install Stiebel Eltron (DHE-18) electric instantaneous water heaters in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Install within cupboard below Science demonstration sink where indicated on drawings. Provide and install 15mm ball valve on cold water supply. All pipe work shall be concealed utilizing the rear connections Water heaters to be installed in vertical position Head Contractor to allow for power supplies and connection.

08 HYDRAULIC 0821 Stormwater - buildings


0821 STORMWATER - BUILDINGS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement: Provide stormwater installation, as documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES GENERAL Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - 0171 General requirements. - 0223 Service trenching. - 0224 Stormwater – Site - 0821s Siphonic Roof Drainage System - 0421 Roofing – combined and other Roofing worksections - 0801 Hydraulic systems.

1.3 STANDARDS STORMWATER DRAINAGE Standard: To AS/NZS 3500.3.

1.4 INTERPRETATION DEFINITIONS General: For the purposes of this worksection the following definitions apply: - Embedment material: Includes bedding, haunch support, side support and overlay material. - Pipe surround: Includes pipe overlay, pipe side support, side zone and haunch zone.

1.5 SUBMISSIONS TESTS Pre-completion tests: Submit results from pre-completion leak testing. Certification: Submit certificate stating that network is leak free upon completion. Warranties Detention tanks: Submit warranty.

1.6 INSPECTION NOTICE Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made at the following stages: - Concealed or underground services prior to being covered. - Upon completion.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS Piping Requirement: As documented in this section. PVC-U: Provide pipe marked Best Environmental Practice (BEP).

2.2 SURFACE DRAINS – PVC-U CHANNEL DRAINS, GRATING AND SUMPS General: Provide proprietary PVC-U channel drain complete with friction fit grating sections. Provide matching sumps.

2.3 SURFACE DRAINS – GRATED TRENCHES General: Provide precast or cast in situ concrete lined trenches with bitumen coated cast-iron or galvanized steel gratings.

2.4 SURFACE DRAINS – HALF ROUND PIPE General: Provide surface drains lined with half round pipe, including bedding and jointing, as documented in the Surface drains – half round pipe schedule.



2.5 LINEAR DRAINS AND GRATES Requirement: As documented in this schedule. Installation: Conform to manufacturer's recommendations. Rainwater outlets Requirement: Provide proprietary rainwater outlets to roof and balcony areas and as documented. Size: 100mm/150mm diameter or as documented.

2.6 CONCRETE AND MORTAR Requirement: Provide concrete and mortar conforming to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 2.9.

2.7 FILTER MATERIAL General: Provide filter materials consisting of natural clean washed sands and gravels and screened crushed rock conforming to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 2.13.1.

2.8 EMBEDMENT MATERIAL Stormwater drains: Conform to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 6.3.5.1. Subsoil drains: Conform to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 6.4.2.1.

2.9 GEOTEXTILES General Requirement: Provide polymeric fabric formed from plastic yarn composed of at least 85% by weight propylene, ethylene amide or vinylidene chloride and containing stabilisers or inhibitors which provide resistance to deterioration due to ultraviolet light.

2.10 SUBSOIL DRAINAGE Filter: Conform to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 2.13.2.

2.11 PREFABRICATED PITS GENERAL Requirement: Provide precast or prefabricated pits in conformance with AS/NZS 3500.3 clauses 2.12.8 and 7.5.

2.12 METAL ACCESS COVERS AND GRATES Standard: To AS 3996.

2.13 STORMWATER DRAINAGE PUMPS GENERAL Standard: To AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 8. Requirement: Conform to Pumped discharge system in the 0814 Hydraulic pumps worksection.

2.14 STORMWATER DETENTION TANKS General – Forms part of the civil specification Reinforced concrete tanks Type: Precast. Standard: To AS 3735. Design and certification: Provided by manufacturer.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING General Laying: Lay lengths separately with the barrel bearing evenly on the prepared bedding. Sockets: Lay with sockets pointing upstream. Cleaning: Clean pipe interior of dirt, debris, mortar and other foreign matter. Protection: Provide temporary caps over the ends of incomplete sections to prevent the entry of foreign matter.

3.2 TOLERANCES PIPELINE TOLERANCES TABLE

Permissible angular deviation from alignment

Permissible displacement from alignment

Horizontal 1:300 15 mm Vertical 1:500 5 mm Note: These tolerances are conditional on falls to outlets being maintained and no part of a pipeline having less than the documented gradient.



3.3 STORMWATER DRAINS Location General: Provide stormwater drains to connect downpipes, surface drains, subsoil drains and drainage pits to the outlet point or point of connection. Make sure that location of piping will not interfere with other services and building elements not yet installed or built. Subject to the preceding and documented layouts, follow the most direct route with the least number of changes in direction. Downpipe connections: Turn up branch pipelines with bends to meet the downpipe, finishing 100 mm (nominal) below finished ground or pavement level. Seal joints between downpipes and drains. Laying General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with sockets pointing up hill. If other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next pipe. If work is not continuous, cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter. Identification General: Lay a detectable strip or plastic tape in the trench after pipe laying, testing and initial backfilling. Pipe underlay (bedding) General: Bed piping on a continuous underlay of bedding material, minimum 75 mm, maximum 150 mm thick after compaction. Grade the underlay evenly to the gradient of the pipeline. Chases: If necessary, form chases to prevent projections such as sockets and flanges from bearing on the trench bottom or underlay. Pipe surrounds General: Place the material in the pipe surround in layers, maximum 200 mm loose thickness, and compact without damaging or displacing the piping. Anchor blocks General: If necessary, to restrain lateral and axial movement of the stormwater pipes, provide reinforced concrete anchor blocks at junctions and changes of grade or direction conforming to AS/NZS 3500.3 clause 7.9. Encasement General: As documented in this section. Location: Encase the pipeline in concrete at least 150 mm above and below the pipe, and 150 mm each side or the width of the trench, whichever is the greater. Concrete: Grade N15 to AS 1379. Thermal movement General: Arrange piping to accommodate thermal expansion. Provide proprietary expansion joints in copper and plastic pipes where pipe flexibility does not allow movement. Make sure that movement does not strain branch connections. Downpipes Downpipe termination: Stop downpipe 100 mm below the ground level and discharged directly into stormwater pipes with overflow as documented.

3.4 SUBSOIL DRAINS General – Forms part of the Civil contract.

3.5 PITS INSTALLATION General: Prepare foundation, install pit and connect pipes, to manufacturer’s recommendations. Location: At junctions, changes of gradient and changes of direction of stormwater drains, as documented.

3.6 METAL ACCESS COVERS AND GRATES Standard: To AS 3996. Cover levels: Top of cover or grate, including frame:



- In paved areas: Flush with the paving surface. - In landscaped areas: 25 mm above finished surface. - Gratings taking surface water runoff: Locate to receive runoff without ponding.

3.7 STORMWATER DETENTION TANKS General installation - Forms part of the Civil contract.

3.8 TESTING Pre-completion tests General: Before backfilling or concealing, carry out the following tests to AS/NZS 3500.3 Section 9: - Downpipes within buildings: Air or water pressure test. - Site stormwater drains and main internal drains: Air or water pressure test. - Rising mains from pumped discharge: Water pressure test. Leaks: If leaks are found, rectify and re-

test.

4 COMPLETION

Cleaning General: Clean and flush the whole installation.

5 SELECTIONS

5.1 GENERALLY All stormwater drains up to and including 225 shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and solvent welded joints. (100mm diameter SN6 grade and 150mm diameter and 225mm diameter SN8 grade). All stormwater drains larger than 225 shall be Class 2 Reinforced Concrete (RC) with matching fittings or an approved equivalent where cover in inadequate, or DWV SN10 grade uPVC pipe with matching fittings with solvent welded joints where applicable. Drains shall be laid in straight lines to a regular grade and with the barrel of each pipe firmly bedded on the bottom of the trench. Each pipe shall be clean of foreign matter and have invert checked before the next pipe is laid. Allow for all necessary planking and strutting of excavations and protection of adjacent property, services and footings.

5.2 PROPERTY DRAINS

Connect to rain water downpipe sumps, evaporative cooler sumps, rainwater down pipes, grated channels, balcony drains, AC condensate drains, plant room trapped floor wastes; extend and connect to uPVC and/or RC property stormwater drains of sizes, at the levels and on the alignments as indicated on the drawings including all necessary fittings, traps, gullies, etc: and connect to soakwells and Civil site stormwater pits as shown on the drawings and as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. All penetration into Civil sumps are to be made water tight to the satisfaction of the Civil engineer.

5.3 GRATED SUMPS (DPS) Provide and install ACO (77003) type 33 pit 300mm square x 450mm deep polymer concrete sump box with ACO (78665) galvanised steel welded bar grate and optional lock down bracket or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide a sample sump box to Head Contractor onsite prior to construction for co-ordination with footings etc. Liaise with Roofing Contractor to ascertain the exact position of all down pipes. Head Contractor to install block outs or step downs within concrete footings as required to facilitate the installation of the 300mm square x 450mm deep sump boxes hard against external wall faces with grate flush with finished surface level.



5.4 GRATED CHANNELS (GC) Provide and install ACO (K100) galvanised steel edge rail grated channel at locations and lengths indicated on drawings comprising of K1-00 (144041) 1 meter channel sections, 100mm bottom outlets, Type 438D (132555) galvanised steel longitudinal heel guard anti slip class B 1000mm grates, integrated lock down and matching end caps installed in-accordance with manufactures instructions on concrete mass and expansion joints as required or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent. Exact location of outlets to be confirmed onsite to suit low point of sloping channel / ground level. Head Contractor to ensure sufficient falls to paving are achievable to drainage grates to facilitate complete and efficient surface drainage. Provide 2 sets of ACO grate removal tools (01318) to Superintendent.

5.5 PAVING DRAINS (PD) Provide and install ACO (77003) type 33 pit 300mm square x 450mm deep polymer concrete sump box with ACO (90038) galvanised steel heel guard grate and optional lock down bracket or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Exact location of paving drains to be confirmed onsite to suit low points of paving. Head Contractor to ensure sufficient falls to paving are achievable to drainage grates to facilitate complete and efficient surface drainage.

5.6 RAIN WATER PIPES (RWP) Provide and install all above ground DWV grade PVC rain water pipes and overflows of sizes and in locations indicated on the Architectural and Hydraulic drawings complete with offsets where required to facilitate concealed connections to gutter outlets. Refer to the Architectural section drawings to ascertain exact length of rain and overflow pipes. Refer to Architectural elevation drawings to ascertain exact location of overflow pipe terminals. All pipework internal of buildings shall be wrapped with acoustic insulation as previously specified. Head Contractor to provide and install exposed galvanised steel rain water pipes.

5.7 RELIEF POINTS (RP) Provide and install relief point comprising of 100mm uPVC riser from main drain topped with Galvin Engineering (302385X) 100x150 316 grade stainless steel round grate set flush with finished surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.

5.8 CLEAN OUTS (CO) Provide and install Galvin Engineering (178051) hinged cast iron valve box on a 150mm wide x 150mm deep reinforced concrete footing with lid set flush with the finished surface level to top of 150mm PVC riser from main drain with screw cap 50mm below cover or a similar product equivalent in function, quality, etc to the approval of the Superintendent.

5.9 SOAKWELLS Refer to Civil Engineers documents for details on soakwells. Extend and connect building stormwater drains to Civil soakwells as indicated on drawings.

5.10 CARPARK DRAINAGE Refer to Civil Engineers documents for details on Carpark drainage.

5.11 DRAINAGE TESTING Subject the rainwater pipes to sight and hydrostatic tests as required by and to the satisfaction of the Local Authority and the Superintendent Representative.

08 HYDRAULIC 0821S Siphonic roof drainage


0821S SIPHONIC ROOF DRAINAGE

1 GENERAL

- Design, supply and install Valsir Rain Plus siphonic roof drainage system, generally of sizes and alignments indicated on hydraulic service drawings complete with Valsir Rainplus siphonic box gutter sump outlets, Valsir HDPE drains, pipe supports, acoustic insulation; or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.

- Provide monthly reports on the progress of the works to the Head Contractor. - Provide ‘As-Constructed’ drawings for the complete siphonic roof drainage installations are to be

submitted in accordance with specification section 0801. - Provide 10 warranty on materials and performance of the siphonic roof drainage system.

2 CONTRACTOR

The contractor shall be Siphonic Solutions (Australia) Pty Ltd T: (08) 9472 4208 or a similar contractor to the approval of the Superintendent who shall achieve compliance with this specification section and comply with the following requirements; - Permanent office set up in Western Australia - Siphonic roof drainage designed and signed off by a registered BE/mech. engineer. - Have a minimum of 10 years’ experience in design and construction of siphonic drainage systems

(Include list of WA reference projects.) - The siphonic roof drainage system shall be constructed using the products and materials from one

supplier / manufacture only. No alternative will be accepted in part. - Fulfil the requirements to obtain 10 years warranty from the supplier / manufacture for the siphonic

roof drainage system as specified and installed.

3 WORK BY OTHER BUILDING TRADES

Other building trades will carry out the following work. Liaise with other contractors to ensure that the correct requirements are provided: Roofing Contractor - The roofing contractor shall provide and install complete box gutter system including conventional

sumps and outlet pops. - The roofing contractor shall provide and install all box gutter / eaves gutter overflow pops and

outlets required. - The roofing contractor shall install the siphonic outlets supplied by siphonic contractor. Liaise with

Siphonic contractor for outlet type and exact location. Plumbing / Civil Contractor - The civil contractor shall provide and install grated break and overflow bubble up pits to

specifications of Siphonic contractor and connected to the site stormwater system. Plumbing Contractor - The plumbing contractor shall provide and install acoustic insulation to all above ground siphonic

drains in accordance within specification section 0801. - The plumbing contractor shall provide and install fire stop products to all service penetrations

through suspended slabs and fire walls in accordance with specification section 0801.

4 SIPHONIC ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM

Provide and install complete Valsir Rainplus siphonic roof drainage system complete with outlets, high-density polyethylene (HDPE) piping network and conventional rigid fastening system and or a



similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Connect to civil break and overflow bubble up pits where shown on the hydraulic services drawings.

5 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION

The Valsir Rainplus Siphonic Roof drainage system shall be designed to AS3500 and BS specific to Siphonic drainage and installed by a qualified company who shall have minimum of 10 years’ experience and be accredited by Valsir using only the Valsir Rainplus software licensed by Valsir. The design shall provide adequate longitudinal expansion and deflection referred to in the Valsir design handbook. Connect to the inground break and bubble up pits, installed by the plumbing / civil sub-contractor complete with all expansion socket and electro-fusion sleeve coupling. Liaise with the plumbing / civil sub-contractor to determine the exact size, location and depth of inground pits and/or drain required at each point of connection.

6 CALCULATIONS AND DRAWINGS

The siphonic sub-contractor shall submit complete hydraulic calculations including a monogram for the determination of pipe dimensions, friction resistance and flow velocity in pipes and isometric drawings in Adobe PDF to the hydraulic consultant for verification and approval. All calculations and approvals shall occur before installation.

7 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

The system shall be designed and installed to meet the specific performance rainstorm of 210mm/hour over a 5-minute duration (1:100 year) for box gutters and rainstorm of 140mm/hour over a 5-minute duration (1:20 year) for eaves gutters and fit for prevailing local weather conditions as specified.

Hydraulic calculations shall provide the following information within the set limit specified:

- 1. Vertical drainpipe size 40 to 315mm dia. - 2. Horizontal pipe size 40 to 315mm dia. - 3. Negative pressure Withstand 800mbar on pipe up to 160mm and 450mbar

on pipe Ø 200mm and above (PN3.2) and 800mbar on pipe Ø 200mm and above (PN4.0)

- 4. Filling ratio not below 60% water - 5. Water velocity not below 0.7 m/s The pipe work directly after the siphonic system shall be designed to cope with the maximum discharge from the siphonic system, using conventional gravity drainage formula.

8 MATERIAL

Provide and install Valsir High Density Polyethylene Pipes and fittings (thermally conditioned) bearing the manufacturers approved marking and Australian Standard test marking or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. High Density Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be joined by electro fusion sleeve coupling or butt-welding only strictly in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions. Threaded connections and hot air welds are strictly forbidden. Pipe and fittings shall have a written ten (10) year guarantee provided to the Superintendent upon installation.



9 SUSPENSION SYSTEM

All piping supports shall be purpose made by Uni-strut or Binder including hangers and clips or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Generally, all pipes shall be supported using ‘pear’ hangers on 10-12mm rod fixed to structural beams and or P1000 T rails. Where the span between structural elements do not allow for clipping at the required distances, install Uni-strut P1000 T rails All changes of direction shall be made using a rigid fixed point using Uni-strut rapid rail and dual swing clip (with spacer) to suit. Refer to the Valsir ‘Application Technique’ handbook for spacing requirements and recommended rigid fixing arrangement.

10 CERTIFICATION

Upon completion, submit to the Superintendent the Valsir Rainplus manufacturer’s written 10-year guarantee including the As-Constructed performance statement by the equipment supplier. Provide written certification to confirm that the installation meets the exacting requirements and has been installed using only genuine Valsir parts. Provide where necessary, installation certification by a third party registered BE/mech. Engineer.

08 HYDRAULIC 0822 Wastewater


0822 WASTEWATER

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement: Provide sanitary plumbing and drainage, as documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - 0171 General requirements. - 0223 Service trenching. - 0801 Hydraulic systems. - 0811 Sanitary fixtures. - 0821 Stormwater - Buildings

1.3 STANDARDS Authorised products Standard: Listed in the WaterMark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator.

1.4 SANITARY PLUMBING AND SANITARY DRAINAGE General: To AS/NZS 3500.2.

1.5 SUBMISSIONS Certification General: Submit evidence that proposed tapware is listed in the WaterMark Product Database.

1.6 INSPECTION Notice Inspection: Give sufficient notice so that inspection may be made at the following: - Excavated surfaces. - Concealed or underground services.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 TRAPS AND GULLIES General Traps: As documented in this schedule. Location: If possible, conceal traps and wastes in the fabric of the building. Gullies: As documented in this schedule. Inspection chambers and sumps General: As documented in this schedule.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 SANITARY PLUMBING Location General: Verify location and invert level of piping before commencing installation. Layout: Arrange piping to conform to the documented layouts as follows:

- Avoid interference with other services and building elements not yet installed or built.



- Follow the most direct route with the least number of changes of direction. Ducts: If installed in ducts, locate and fix stacks, wastes and pipes independently of other services. Arrange so they are easily accessible and removable throughout their entire length. Piping: As documented in this schedule. Discharge from air handling systems Trays, sumps and plumbing: To AS/NZS 3666.1.

3.2 THERMAL MOVEMENT General: Arrange piping to accommodate thermal expansion. Provide proprietary expansion joints in copper and plastic pipes where pipe flexibility does not allow for movement. Make sure that movement does not strain branch connections.

3.3 VENT PIPES Staying to roof: If fixings for stays penetrate the roof covering, seal the penetrations and make watertight. Terminations: Provide vent cowls of the same material as the vent pipe.

3.4 WET AREA FLOORS General: Where drainage connections pass through wet area floors, terminate 4 mm below the substrate surface.

3.5 SANITARY DRAINAGE Laying General: Lay in straight lines between changes in direction or grade with sockets pointing up hill. If other pipes are adjacent, set each pipe true to line and complete each joint before laying the next pipe. If work is not continuous, cap open ends to prevent entry of foreign matter. Piping: As documented in this schedule. Pipeline identification General: Lay detectable plastic warning tape, 300 mm above buried piping, for the full length of the piping.

3.6 PIPING Finishes General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings and supports, as follows: - In internal locations such as toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192

service condition 2, bright. - Externally, and steel piping and iron fittings internally: Paint. - In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces):

Leave copper and plastic unpainted except for identification marking. Prime steel piping and iron fittings.

Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping. Supports General: As documented in this schedule.

3.7 PIPELINE TOLERANCES TABLE Permissible angular deviation

from alignment Permissible displacement from alignment

Horizontal 1:300 15 mm Vertical 1:500 5 mm

3.8 TRADE WASTE General: As documented in the Sanitary plumbing, Sanitary drainage and the following: - Piping: As documented in the Trade waste schedule. - Disposal: Provide sumps or interceptors.



3.9 LABORATORY WASTES General: If there are chemically corrosive effluent wastes, provide compatible traps and waste connections, and drain to a treatment pit. Trap material: As documented in this schedule.

3.10 TESTS Pre-completion tests Requirement: Test to AS/NZS 3500.2 Section 15, before backfilling or concealing. Leaks: If leaks are found, rectify and re-test.

3.11 COMPLETION Cleaning General: On completion clean and flush the whole installation.

4 TRADE WASTE

4.1 GENERAL All drains and waste pipes upstream of the Dilution pit shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and solvent welded joints. All vent pipes shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and solvent welded joints. Connect waste pipes to each fixture bowl independently with traps and adaptors, extend industrial waste drains and connect to existing Dilution pit drain as indicated on the drawings and as required to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.

4.2 PERMITS AND FEES Make all applications, submit plans, pay all fees to Water Corporation and obtain all necessary permits including trade waste in order to facilitate the uninterrupted installation of this section of the work. Liaise with the Water Corporation to calculate, allow for and pay all fees and charges.

4.3 TRADE / INDUSTRIAL WASTE TRAPS (IWT) Provide and install 100mm industrial waste trap comprising of 100mm HDPE trap cast into concrete mass and topped with Galvin Engineering (DI4M06RX Tile or Concrete / D14M06VX Vinyl) 316 stainless steel 150x100 push on floor waste grate with fixed primary strainer, removable secondary strainer and vinyl clamp ring as required set flush with finished surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Install bolted clean out point immediately downstream of trap flush with finished surface level.

4.4 CLEAN OUTS (CO) Provide and install clean out comprising of riser from main drain of same size and material topped with Galvin Engineering (67717X Tile or Concrete / 69468X Vinyl) 316 stainless steel 150x100 push on bolted clean out set flush with finished surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.

5 SOIL, WASTE AND VENT PIPES

5.1 GENERALLY Soil, waste, Stormwater and vent pipes shall be complete with all bends, junctions, inspection and cleaning openings carefully selected to ensure that inspection and cleaning openings are correctly positioned and the correct radius bends and junctions are installed to provide a first class installation. Pipework up to and including 100mm shall be SN6 DWV grade uPVC Pipework larger than 100mm shall be SN8 DWV grade uPVC Floor waste grates, clean out points, traps and standing wastes shall be protected from scratching and damage throughout. At completion remove protection and clean and polish all chrome plated sanitary ware and fittings.



5.2 SOIL PIPES Soil pipes shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and solvent welded joints. Connect to fixtures with the necessary adaptors and extend soil pipes to connect to property sewers all as indicated on the drawings and as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Superintendent Representatives. Provide and install inspection openings to each WC branch and within stacks at each floor level. Coordinate the installation of access panels where required. The use of UPVC pipes and fittings are permitted on this project based on the contractor implementing and adhering to Green Star best-practice guidelines and can present supporting documentation from the manufacture

5.3 WASTE PIPES Waste pipes shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and solvent welded joints. Traps and waste pipes installed in exposed positions shall be chrome plated with chrome plated disconnector nuts and flanges at floor and wall penetrations. Chrome plated flanges shall be installed flush with floor/wall. Chrome plated nuts shall be installed flush with flanges. Provide and install puddle flanges to waste pipe penetrating first floor slab in two storey teaching block. Ensure all penetrations are water tight. Connect to all fixtures with the necessary double union traps and adaptors and extend waste pipes to connect to property sewers all as indicated on the drawings or as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of the PLB and the Superintendent. Install bottle traps to all exposed wall basins as previously specified.

5.4 VENT PIPES Vent pipes shall be DWV grade uPVC with matching fittings and solvent welded joints. Provide and install vent pipes and extend up through the building and discharge through roof with water proof flashing and anti-vermin / fire rated mesh cowls as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of AS3500 and the Superintendent Representatives. Provide and install DEKS Dektite Premium roof flashings of minimum sizes required to all roof penetrations in accordance with manufactures instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide and install on over length waste pipes and branch drains Air Admittance valves with suitable access panel as required in accordance with manufacture and code requirements. Unsure vent pipe termination locations are in accordance with Code requirements. Coordinate exact location of building air intakes with mechanical contractor.

5.5 ACOUSTIC INSULATION Provide and install acoustic insulation to all above ground sanity pipework, traps, fittings etc.. in ceiling spaces, ducts, and wall cavities passing through and over habitable rooms and spaces in accordance with specification section 0801.

5.6 FIRE STOPPING Provide and install fire stop products to all service penetrations through suspended slabs and fire / smoke walls defining separate fire compartments in accordance with specification section 0801.

5.7 FLOOR WASTE GULLY (FWG) Provide and install 100mm floor waste gullies comprising of 100mm uPVC trap cast into concrete mass and topped with Galvin Engineering (302385X Tile or Concrete / 303198X Vinyl) 316 stainless steel 150x100 push on floor waste grate set flush with finished surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Install uPVC puddle flanges to suspended slab floor waste gully risers / grates. Depth from grate to water seal not exceed 600mm. All floor waste gullies shall be charged by a fixture waste pipe.



5.8 CLEAN OUT (CO) Provide and install clean outs from soil and waste pipes internal to building and external concrete areas comprising of riser from main drain of same size and material topped with Galvin Engineering (67717X Tile or Concrete / 69468X Vinyl) 316 stainless steel 150x100 push on bolted clean out set flush with finished surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide and install clean outs from soil pipes located in block paving, bitumen and soft landscape areas comprising of riser from main drain of same size and material topped screw cap coupling below a hinged cast iron box set flush with finished surface level to the approval of the Superintendent.

5.9 TUNDISHES (TD) Provide and install 50x100 uPVC tundish for mechanical equipment as previously specified. Provide and install 50x100 uPVC tundish 100mm above finished floor level at locations required for the discharge from water heater relief drains, water heater safe tray wastes, reduced pressure zone device relief drains to the approval of the Superintendent.

5.10 REFLUX VALVES Not applicable

5.11 MECHANICAL SERVICES EQUIPMENT Provide and install 100x50mm uPVC tundish to all roof mounted evaporative coolers Provide and install 100x50mm uPVC tundish to all roof and plant room mounted condenser units. Provide and install 100x50mm uPVC tundish to ceiling cassette units. Provide and install 20mm uPVC drain spur to all wall mounted air conditioning units. Liaise with Mechanical Contractor onsite to discuss and ascertain exact location and height of all required drain points prior to commencing installation. The supply, installation and final connection of evaporative coolers by the mechanical contractor. All horizontal drainage pipework to be concealed in roof and ceiling spaces. Tundish’s shall be securely fixed where required to prevent movement. Provide and install DEKS Dektite Premium roof flashings of minimum sizes required to all roof penetrations in accordance with manufactures instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Builder to paint roof flashings and all exposed pipe work above roof matching colour. All evaporative cooler waste water drains in roof / ceiling spaces, ducts, and wall cavities passing through and over habitable rooms and spaces shall be fitted with acoustic insulation in accordance with specification section 0801. Provide and install Armaflex FRV closed cell nitrile rubber insulation of 25mm wall thickness in accordance with manufactures instructions to all above ground condensate tundishes, traps and drains in ceiling spaces, ducts and wall cavities or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent

5.12 SANITARY PLUMBING TESTING Subject all soil, waste and vent pipes, to hydrostatic tests as required by and to the satisfaction of the AS3500, the Plumbing Licensing Board and the Superintendent.

6 PROPERTY SEWERS

6.1 GENERALLY Property sewer drains shall be Iplex or Vinidex DWV grade uPVC (100mm diameter SN6 grade and 150mm diameter SN8 grade) with matching fittings and solvent welded joints or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. The use of uPVC pipes and fittings are permitted on this project based on the contractor implementing and adhering to Green Star best-practice guidelines and can present supporting documentation from the manufacturer.



Pipes shall be complete with all bends, junctions, inspection and cleaning openings, etc, and shall be of the appropriate grade to suit the application. Drains shall be laid in straight lines to a regular grade and with the barrel of each pipe firmly bedded on the bottom of the trench. Each pipe shall be clean of foreign matter and have invert checked before the next pipe is laid. Allow for all necessary planking and strutting of excavations and protection of adjacent property, services and footings.

6.2 PROPERTY SEWER CONNECTION Provide and install uPVC property sewers of sizes, at the levels and on the alignments indicated on the drawings including all necessary fittings, inspection openings, traps, gullies, drains, manholes etc and connect to all soil and waste pipes as shown on the drawings and as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of the PLB and the Superintendent. Excavate to locate existing drains and confirm design invert levels prior to commencing new works.

6.3 PROPERTY SEWER DRAINS Locate and connect to site sewer connection points, provide and install new property sewers of sizes, at the levels and on the alignments required including all necessary fittings, inspection opnings, traps, gullies, relief points, manholes etc: and connect to all soil and waste pipes as shown on the drawings and as required in order to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Plumbing Licensing Board and the Superintendent. Install inspection openings in accordance with AS3500 and as follows: - on each branch drain that enters under and/or exits a building - adjacent to the junction into the main drain - at the upstream and downstream end of all branch drains and main drains that are external to a

building - at every change in horizontal direction of 45° or greater - at intervals of not more than 30 meters - at the upper bend of a jump up or a rising shaft

6.4 PROPERTY DRAINS IN/THROUGH CONCRETE FOOTINGS Provide and install Styrolag 25mm thick pipe lagging to all drains laid through footings in accordance with manufacture and AS3500 requirements or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.

6.5 CLEAN OUT POINT (CO) Provide and install clean outs from soil pipes located in concrete paved areas comprising of riser from main drain of same size and material topped with Galvin Engineering (67717X) 316 stainless steel 150x100 push on bolted clean out set flush with finished surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide and install clean outs from soil pipes located in block paving, bitumen and soft landscape areas comprising of riser from main drain of same size and material topped screw cap coupling below a Galvin Engineering (178046) hinged cast iron valve box on a 150mm wide x 150mm deep reinforced concrete footing with lid set flush with the finished surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.

6.6 OVERFLOW RELIEF GULLY (ORG) Provide and install an overflow relief gully at locations indicated on drawings, with exact location to be determined on site to ensure minimum 150mm separation, comprising precast concrete disconnector mound with pop out PVC grate set 25mm above finished ground level. Charge disconnector traps with waste pipe connection or hose tap over all as required.

6.7 DRAINAGE TESTING Subject the property sewers to sight and hydrostatic tests as required by and to the satisfaction of AS3500, the Plumbing Licensing Board and the Superintendent Representative.

08 HYDRAULIC 0823 Cold and heated water


0823 COLD AND HEATED WATER

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement: Provide cold water and heated water systems, as documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES GENERAL Requirement: Conform to the following work section(s): - 0171 General requirements. - 0801 Hydraulic systems. - 0811 Sanitary fixtures. - 0812 Tapware. - 0813 Water heaters

1.3 STANDARDS General Water supply: To AS/NZS 3500.1. Heated water supply: To AS/NZS 3500.4. Backflow prevention: To AS/NZS 2845.1 and AS 2845.2. Copper pipe: To AS 1432 and AS 4809. Microbial control: To AS/NZS 3666.1 and AS/NZS 3666.2 and the recommendations of SAA/SNZ HB 32. Authorised products Standard: Listed in the Watermark Product Database, unless otherwise required by the Network Utility Operator. Installation of glass wool and rock wool insulation General: Conform to the ICANZ Industry code of practice for safe use of glass wool and rock wool insulation. Marking: Deliver mineral wool products to site in packaging labelled FBS1 BIO-SOLUBLE INSULATION. Labelling Water efficiency labelling: Provide only products conforming to and labelled to the Water Efficiency Labelling Scheme (WELS).

1.4 INTERPRETATION Definitions General: For the purposes of this work section the following definitions apply: - FBS-1 (fibre-bio-soluble) mineral wool: Insulation composed of bio-soluble glass or rock fibres. - Heated water: Water that has been intentionally heated. It includes hot water and warm water. - Material R-Value: The thermal resistance (m2.K/W) of a component calculated in conformance with

AS/NZS 4859.1 clause 2.3.3.8. Material R-Value does not include air space or surface resistances.

1.1 SUBMISSIONS Certification Watermark certification: Submit evidence that proposed components are listed in the Watermark Product Database. Fire hazard properties General: Submit evidence of conformance with MATERIALS, Fire hazard properties. Materials Thermal insulation performance: Submit evidence of conformance to AS/NZS 4859.1. Samples General: Submit samples of accessories identified by proprietary item, including the following: - Valves.



- Instruments, including gauges and thermostats.

1.5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Excavated surfaces. - Concealed or underground services.

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPONENTS Pressure control valves General: Provide reduction valves, pressure limiting valves, or ratio valves, which produce the necessary reduction in pressure. Backflow prevention devices General: As documented in the Testable backflow prevention devices schedule. Standard: To AS/NZS 2845.1 and AS 2845.2. Line strainers Type: Low resistance, Y-form bronze bodied type, with screen of dezincification resistant brass, corrosion-resistant stainless steel, or monel. Screen perforations: 0.8 mm maximum.

2.2 MATERIALS Fire hazard properties Spread-of-flame index: Maximum 9 where tested to AS/NZS 1530.3. Smoke-developed index: Maximum 8 if spread-of-flame is over 5, when tested to AS/NZS 1530.3. Flammability index of facing materials: Maximum 5 when tested to AS 1530.2. Materials with reflective foil facing: Test to AS/NZS 1530.3 clause A6.

2.3 INSULATION MATERIALS General Standard: To AS/NZS 4859.1. Material R-Value of insulation: ≥ Total R-Value in AS/NZS 3500.4 for the type and location of the pipe. Polyolefin foam Type: Closed cell cross-linked polyolefin foam produced using a hydrocarbon blowing agent. Insulation surface facing: Heat-bonded aluminium foil laminate.

Glass wool and rock wool and polyester Description: Select from the following: - Glass wool or rock wool resin-bonded to form tubular sections. - Polyester in moulded tubular sections. Elastomeric foam insulation Type: Chemically blown closed cell nitrile rubber in tubular sections for pipe insulation, in sheets for insulating pipe fittings, and in sheets or rolls for large pipes, tanks, vessels and heat exchangers. Provide with smooth natural finish and vapour barrier properties. Physical properties: - Free of ozone depleting gases in manufacture and composition. - Moisture absorption: Non-hygroscopic. - Water vapour permeability: Maximum 0.065 ng/Pa.m.s. Aluminium foil laminate sheet Standard: To AS/NZS 4200.1. Material: Glass fibre reinforced, aluminium foil-paper laminate. Duty classification to AS/NZS 4200.1: Heavy duty. Adhesives and sealants Requirement: Provide adhesives and sealants to manufacturer's recommendations.



Aluminium foil laminate tape Adhesive: Non-toxic, high tack synthetic pressure sensitive type. Liner: Silicone coated paper. Backing: Aluminium foil laminate. Minimum width: 50 mm. Minimum mechanical properties: Polyethylene tape serial number F11 to AS 1599.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING Location Mains connection: Connect the cold water supply system to the Network Utility Operator's main through a stop valve and meter. Cold water system: Provide the cold water supply system, installed from the meter to the draw-off points or connections to other services as documented in this schedule. Heated water system: Provide the heated water system, installed from the cold water connection points to the draw-off points or connections to other services as documented in the Piping system schedule. Finishes General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings, cover plates and supports, as follows: - Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192 service condition 2, bright in internal locations such as toilet

and kitchen areas: - Paint external above ground piping, and internal steel piping and iron fittings exposed to view. - In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces):


- Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping. Fittings and accessories General: Provide the fittings necessary for the proper functioning of the water supply system, including taps, valves, backflow prevention devices, pressure and temperature control devices, strainers, gauges and automatic controls and alarms. Provision for dismantling: Arrange piping by the provision of unions or similar so that valves, taps and other maintainable components can be removed for maintenance without disturbing or cutting adjacent piping. Material identification marks General: Pipes with grade or class identification markings: Install so that the markings are visible for inspection. Pipes under pressure embedded in concrete General: Use only copper pipe and the minimum number of joints. Pressure test and rectify leaks before the concrete is poured. Valve spindles General: If practicable, install valve spindles in a vertical position.

3.2 PIPING INSULATION General Requirement: Insulate all non-chrome plated heated water piping, fittings and valves. Application: Fit insulation tightly to piping surfaces without gaps. Close butt ends of insulation sections. Minimise number of joints. If the insulation is in half-sections, make only half-circumferential joints at any one place. Seal longitudinal seams in foil laminate and fix insulation at maximum 500 mm centres with polypropylene, zinc-coated steel or aluminium straps. Unions and other items requiring service: Install the insulation so that it is readily removable. Fittings: Provide insulation with thermal resistance at least equal to that of the adjacent piping insulation. Insulation material General: Provide insulation material as documented.



Elastomeric foam insulation Adhesives: Adhesive fix all longitudinal and butt joints. Adhere to the pipe at end joints, for a distance of 25 mm, to compartmentalise each section. Use only solvent-based adhesive supplied by insulation manufacturer and designed specifically for the material being used. Sheathing General: Provide metal sheathing to all piping insulation: - In plant rooms. - Where exposed to weather. - Where exposed to view. - Where subject to mechanical damage. - On valves, pipeline components and pumps in sheathed piping. Metal sheathing: Cover piping with 0.5 mm thick metallic-coated steel sheet sheathing sprung over the insulation in one piece with laps at least 30 mm wide and fastened with self-tapping screws or snap head rivets at 150 mm maximum centres. Preform the sheathing to match the shape of the insulated pipe and fittings. Position laps to avoid water penetration. In external locations weatherproof the joints and fixings using non-setting mastic. Alternative protection for elastomeric foam: Where exposed to sunlight but not exposed to mechanical damage, provide 2 coats of tintable, water-based, rubberised, UV resistant, flexible paint finish to outdoor installations. Surface preparation General: Clean the surfaces to remove scale, rust, grease and dirt and prepare surfaces to suit the insulation. Restore surface coatings, which have been damaged or affected by welding. Insulation at pipe supports General: Provide supports formed to fit around the insulation. Pipes under DN 25: Either: - Fit supports directly to pipe and form insulation around the support. - Support as for pipes DN 25 or over. Pipes DN 25 or over: Either: - Protect the insulation at the support point with metal sheathing extending sufficient distance both

sides of the support so the insulation thickness is reduced by less than 10%. - Replace the insulation at the support point with a shaped timber or cork spacer block. Butt the

insulation up to the spacer block and seal with silicone compound. Clad the block and insulation in - 0.5 mm metallic-coated steel sheet extending 100 mm both sides of the support. Insulation of buried pipes Insulation material: Elastomeric foam certified by the manufacturer as suitable for use direct buried inground. Sealing: Seal all but joints and longitudinal joints and seams with the insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Seal the insulation to the pipe at both ends and each termination. Valves and fittings: Insulate and seal as for pipe. Install valves in pits. Protection: Protect the pipe from water penetration. Select from: - Use of insulation material with integral polymeric coating to protect from mechanical damage, water

penetration and the growth of bacteria, mould and mildew. - Application of high density rubber sheathing supplied by the insulation manufacturer and certified for

use underground. Sleeving: Install the insulated pipe in a PVC-U soil pipe. If the water table may be above the sleeve pipe, seal all joints watertight. If the water table is permanently below the sleeve pipe, provide 10 mm drain holes at 600 mm centres along the bottom centre of the sleeve pipe. Insulation of piping to solar water heating systems – Not Applicable 3.3 PITS General General: Install below-ground water meters, stop valves and control valves in concrete access pits with removable pit covers.



Construction Internal dimensions: To give 300 mm clear space all around the fittings in the pit. Concrete: Grade N20 to AS 1379, 100 mm thick, reinforced with F82 fabric. Pit covers: To AS 3996. Installation General: Grade floor to a point on one side and drain to the stormwater drainage system. Carry the pit walls up to 50 mm above finished ground level. Cast in the pit cover frame flush with the top. Trowel the top smooth.

3.4 MARKING Notice plate General: Provide a notice plate containing condensed emergency instructions, legibly printed or engraved on durable material resistant to defacement, at least 3 mm thick or mounted on board at least 3 mm thick, permanently fixed in a convenient position at the control valves.

3.5 VALVE BOXES General General: Provide cast-iron valve boxes with removable covers for access to underground gate valves. Provide cast-iron sluice valve covers for access to sluice valves. Installation General: Set beneath each box a shaft formed of PVC-U pipe to give clear access to the valve wheel or spindle. Set top flush with pavement surface, or 15 mm above unpaved surfaces, and encase in formed concrete box 150 mm thick, with top surface troweled smooth.

3.6 TESTING Pre-completion tests Pressure tests: Before insulation is applied to joints pressure test piping to AS/NZS 3500.1 and AS/NZS 3500.4 as appropriate. Leaks: If found, rectify and re-test. Cross connections: Isolate systems individually and check for cross connections. Backflow prevention: To AS/NZS 3500.1. Tapware: Check for leaks. Completion test General: Provide a full operational test to verify conformance.

3.7 COMPLETION Commissioning Strainers: Remove, clean and replace strainer baskets. Cleaning: To AS/NZS 3500.1 Appendix I. Disinfection: Disinfect to AS/NZS 3500.1 Appendix J. Cold water systems: Test and commission to AS/NZS 3500.1 Section 18. Heated water systems: Test and commission to AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 13. Testable backflow prevention devices: Test and commission to AS 2845.3 by a licensed plumber with backflow device accreditation. Tag and certify to the requirements of the Network Utility Operator. Charging Completion: On completion of installation, commissioning, testing and disinfection, fill the system with water, turn on control and isolating valves and the energy supply and leave the water supply system in full operational condition. Maintenance manuals Standard: To AS/NZS 3666.2.

3.8 MAINTENANCE General Requirement: Conform to the 0891 Hydraulic maintenance work section.



4 SELECTIONS

4.1 GENERALLY Provide and install new water service pipework of sizes and on alignments indicated on drawings. Maintain existing water service in operation until completion and testing on the new water service. Provide and install temporary pipework as required to maintain the existing system. Liaise with the client 4 weeks prior to isolation of the existing water service to discuss the planned works with a date, time and expected duration of the changeover. To minimise duration off shut downs, ensure all new pipework has been installed and tested, all associated works have been undertaken, excavate to locate and prepare existing pipework for new connection and make available all required fittings, valves etc..

4.2 PIPING Cold water service pipes installed in the ground external of buildings shall be Acu-Water SDR11 PN16 PE100 (black with blue stripe) polyethylene manufactured to AS/NZS 4130 with matching electrofusion fittings manufactured to AS/NZS 4129 or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Install polyethylene water service pipes and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and specifications. Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be installed be skilled operatives, trained and certified by the supplier / manufacture install polyethylene water service. Cold water service installed on branch lines to buildings, above ground and within buildings shall be Kembla Type B copper tube with Viega Propress copper EPDM rubber seal fittings installed in accordance with manufactures instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. All below ground copper pipework be protected by wrapping with Denso petrolatum tape. ALL non-potable copper pipework shall be fitted with purple sleeving and labelled to AS3500. Hot water pipework shall be Kembla Type B copper tube with Viega Propress copper EPDM rubber seal fittings installed in accordance with manufactures instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. All hot water pipe work shall be installed in a way that ensures damage to pipe work will not occur due to movement or pipework due to expansion. All hot water pipes shall have 150mm minimum clearance from cold water pipes throughout. Where chased into walls pipes shall be protected by wrapping with approved sponge tape. Conetite fittings or cast brass tees and elbows will not be accepted, flare type unions only. Provide adequate anchorage where pipes terminate in walls, at taps and outlets, etc. ALL potable and non-potable copper pipework shall be labelled in accordance with AS3500.

4.3 HOT WATER PIPEWORK INSULATION Provide and Armaflex FRV 25mm wall thickness pipe insulation to all hot water branch line pipework in accordance with manufactures instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Insulation shall be installed over piping before installation and shall not be cut longitudinally.

4.4 ISOLATION VALVES Above Ground Provide and install Zetco (1005) series ball valves, of sizes indicated on the drawings, with stainless steel handles and disconnecting unions comprising tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Below Ground Provide and install Zetco (2505) series below ground ball valves, of sizes indicated on the drawings, with stem cap and disconnecting unions comprising tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.



All below ground valves, bolts, nuts shall be protected by wrapping with Denso petrolatum tape. Provide and install Zetco (2502) 900mm underground valve key or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide a valve key handle to all below ground valves / valve pits. Key handle to terminate 100mm below valve box cover, cut down each key handle to required length.

4.5 BELOW GROUND VALVE PITS Provide and install 150mm SN8 uPVC riser over below ground isolating valves and topped with Galvin Engineering (178049) 250x250 hinged ductile iron valve box cover cast into 150 wide x 150mm deep reinforced concrete surround and set flush with finished surrounding surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Cast iron covers shall label embossed 'WATER' and epoxy coated blue.

4.6 BACKFLOW PREVENTION VALVES Subject all backflow valves to test procedures as required by AS3500 and the Water Corporation. Fit engraved service / test tag to backflow valves with test date and testing contractors’ details. Within 5 days of installation submit all required certificates and results to the Water Corporation. Provide ‘owners’ copy of test certificates in operation and maintenance manuals. Allow for servicing and retesting of backflow valves 1 month prior to end of defects liability period.

4.7 LINE STRAINERS Provide and install Zetco (1504) brass y-strainers with 316 grade stainless steel 500 micron mesh strainer with disconnecting unions comprising tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.

4.8 NON RETURN VALVES Provide and install Zetco Series 1805 bronze check valves with disconnecting unions comprising tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.

4.9 TEMPERATURE CONTROL VALVES Provide and install Enware Aquablend 2000 (ATM713) 20mm thermostatic mixing valve with wall bracket (ATMS214) or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Install on wall within existing hot water cupboard in an accessible location. Extend tempered water service of 45°C to showers and basins indicated on drawings. Test valves to AS4032 and insert test form for each valve into operation and maintenance manuals. Allow for retesting of valves 1 month prior to end of defects liability period.

4.10 MECHANICAL SERVICES EQUIPMENT Provide and install a 15mm cold water ball valve adjacent to evaporative coolers. Liaise with the mechanical contractor to ascertain exact location and height of all required water points prior to commencing installation. Provide and install hose tap with vacuum breaker within evaporative cooled enclosure. Water point shall be securely fixed to prevent movement where required. The supply, installation and final connection of evaporative coolers by the mechanical contractor.

4.11 CONNECT ONLY Provide all materials and labour to connect the following fixtures and indicated on the drawings including waste outlets, traps, valves, taps, fittings, chrome plated waste pipe, hot and cold water connections. DW Dish Washing Machines (existing science prep)



4.12 TESTING Subject the domestic cold water service to hydrostatic tests in accordance with AS3500 and to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. The domestic cold water piping system shall be flushed of all debris and grit and subject to operating tests to the satisfaction of the Superintendent.

08 HYDRAULIC 0824 Fuel gas


0824 FUEL GAS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General General: Provide fuel gas installations, as documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement: Conform to the following worksection(s): - 0171 General requirements. - 0801 Hydraulic systems.

1.3 STANDARDS Reticulated gas systems General: To AS/NZS 5601.1. Gas equipment Standard: To AS 3645. Industrial and commercial gas-fired appliances General: To AS 3814. Steel mains and services Maximum operating pressure not more than 1050 kPa: To AS/NZS 4645.2. Flue cowls General: To AS 4566.

1.4 SUBMISSIONS Certificate of appliance approval Appliances with gas inputs under 500 MJ/hour: For each appliance where an approval code exists, submit a certificate from the manufacturer stating that the appliance has AGA/ALPGA approval for operation with the designated gas type. Exposed piping General: Submit proposals for location. Manuals General: Submit manuals conforming to MANUALS. Tests

1.5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Excavated surfaces. - Concealed or underground services.

2 EXECUTION

2.1 PIPING Concealment General: If practicable, install piping so that it is concealed within service ducts or non-habitable enclosed spaces and does not appear on external walls. Otherwise, provide metal piping mounted on metal brackets and provide metal cover plates at penetrations. Piping General: As documented in this schedule. Pipeline components



Valves: As documented in this schedule. Regulators: As documented in this schedule. Finishes General: Finish exposed piping, including fittings and supports, as follows: - In internal locations such as toilet and kitchen areas: Chrome plate copper piping to AS 1192

service condition 2, bright. - Externally, and steel piping and iron fittings internally: Paint. - In concealed but accessible spaces (including cupboards and non-habitable enclosed spaces):


Valves: Finish valves to match connected piping. Emergency isolation Standard: AS/NZS 5601 clause 5.2.11. Requirement: In each room containing gas appliances without flame safeguard systems, provide an emergency shut off system consisting of a solenoid valve and labelled trip button. Trip button location: Readily accessible, on the egress path from the room in a position where it will not be accidentally operated.

2.2 VALVE BOXES General General: Provide cast-iron valve boxes with removable covers for access to underground valves. Identification: Mark the box covers with the word GAS.

Installation General: Set beneath each box a shaft formed of PVC-U pipe to give clear access to the valve wheel or spindle. Set top flush with pavement surface, or 15 mm above unpaved surfaces, and encase in formed concrete box 150 mm thick, with top surface trowelled smooth.

2.3 PITS General General: If below ground, house control valves and regulators in concrete access pits with removable pit covers. Construction Internal dimensions: To give 300 mm clear space all around the fittings in the pit. Concrete: Grade N20 to AS 1379, 100 mm thick, reinforced with F82 fabric. Pit covers: To AS 3996. Marking: Mark pit covers with the word GAS. Installation General: Grade floor to a point on one side and provide a gravity drain to remove water from the pit. Do not connect the drain to other substructures or drains. Carry the pit walls up to 50 mm above finished ground level. Cast in the pit cover frame flush with the top. Trowel the top smooth.

2.4 MARKING Underground installations General: During backfilling lay plastic warning tape 300 mm above buried piping, for the full length of the piping. Warning tape: Minimum 100 mm width, with GAS PIPE UNDER marked continuously. Marker plates: Provide galvanized steel or brass marker plates at ground level at each change of direction in the underground pipeline, engraved to show the direction of the line and name of the service. Inset marker plates in 150 x 150 x 150 mm concrete blocks, with the tops set flush with ground level.

2.5 TESTING Pre-completion tests General: Immediately before putting the fuel gas installation into operation, test the installation to AS/NZS 5601.1 Appendix E.



2.6 MANUALS General Requirement: Prepare manuals to include recommendations for the operation, care and maintenance of gas appliances, storage tanks, valves, regulators and their associated fittings.

2.7 COMMISSIONING General Requirement: On completion of installation and testing, turn on isolating and control valves, and purge and charge the system. Purging: Conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS 5601.1 Appendix D. Appliances: Commission appliances. Conform to the recommendations of AS/NZS 5601 Appendix O. Charging Requirement: Immediately before the date of practical completion, fully charge the system with gas.

3 SELECTIONS

3.1 GENERALLY Provide and install new gas service pipework of sizes and on alignments indicated on drawings. Maintain existing gas service in operation until completion and testing on the new gas service. Provide and install temporary pipework as required to maintain the existing system. Liaise with the client 4 weeks prior to isolation of the existing gas service to discuss the planned works with a date, time and expected duration of the changeover. To minimise duration off shut downs, ensure all new pipework has been installed and tested, all associated works have been undertaken, excavate to locate and prepare existing pipework for new connection and make available all required fittings, valves etc..

3.2 PIPING Gas service pipes in ground external of buildings shall be Acu-Tech or equal SDR17 PE80 (yellow) manufactured to AS 4130 with matching electrofusion fittings manufactured to AS 4129. Install polyethylene gas service pipes and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s guidelines and specifications. Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be installed be skilled operatives, trained and certified by the supplier / manufacture install polyethylene gas service. All piping in the ground shall be laid at a minimum depth of 750mm below the finished surface level. Gas pipework installed below ground and buildings shall be Kembla Type B copper tube with matching fittings with silver brazed joints in accordance with AS5601 or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. All below ground copper pipework be protected by wrapping with Denso petrolatum tape. Gas pipework installed above ground and within buildings shall be Kembla Type B copper tube with Viega Propress copper HNBR rubber (yellow) seal fittings installed in accordance with manufactures instructions or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent.

3.3 ISOLATION VALVES Above Ground Provide and install Zetco (1005) series ball valves, of sizes indicated on the drawings, with stainless steel handles and disconnecting unions comprising tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Below Ground Provide and install Zetco (2501) series below ground AGA approved ball valves, of sizes indicated on the drawings, with stem cap and disconnecting unions comprising tube bush on inlet and flared type boiler union on outlet or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. All below ground valves, bolts, nuts shall be protected by wrapping with Denso petrolatum tape.



Provide and install Zetco (2502) 900mm underground valve key or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide a valve key handle to all below ground valves / valve pits. Key handle to terminate 100mm below valve box cover, cut down each key handle to required length.

3.4 BELOW GROUND VALVE PITS Provide and install 150mm SN8 uPVC riser over below ground isolating valves and topped with Galvin Engineering (178005) 250x250 hinged ductile iron valve box cover cast into 150 wide x 150mm deep reinforced concrete surround and set flush with finished surrounding surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Cast iron covers shall label embossed 'GAS' and epoxy coated yellow.

3.5 EMERGENCY SHUT OFF VALVES (SN) Provide and install All Controls (20KGSESK) emergency gas isolation system comprising of 20mm VS Kromschroder 240 AC gas solenoid valve (powered open), lockable gas stop button (ES) with manual reset button or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Provide and install 20mm ball valve, line filter and gas regulator on inlet to gas solenoid valve. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions, AS5601 and the regulatory Authority. Head Contractor to provide and install vent grilles and a door locks where the solenoid is installed within a cupboard. Head Contractor to provide access panel where installed in ceiling space. Provide gas stop and reset buttons to Electrical Contractor for installation and wiring. Install emergency gas stop button to end face of the demonstration bench. Install manual gas reset button within the same cupboard space as the solenoid valve. Electrical contractor to allow for power supply and electrical wiring between the gas solenoid valves, stop buttons and manual reset buttons. Provide and install signage “GAS EMERGENCY STOP” adjacent to gas stop buttons.

3.6 REGULATORS Provide and install All Controls or similar approved gas regulators complete with isolation ball valve on inlet, where required in accordance with AS 5601, local gas authority and the Superintendent.

3.7 GAS TURRETS (GT) Provide and install Galvin Engineering (TG40.DRAC) chrome plated 2-way right angle outlet gas turret incorporating non return valve or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Refer to Architectural furniture detail drawings to ascertain position of gas turrets. Provide and install mini gas isolation valve on supply to inlet of each gas turret. Head Contractor to provide and install heat shielding to underside of overhead cupboards where required.

3.8 GAS TESTING Subject natural gas services to operating and pressure tests as required by AS5601, the regulatory gas Authority and to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. Allow for testing of pipework and recommissioning of all gas appliances that form part of any existing gas services requiring isolation for alteration and / or diversion, prior to and following completion. Liaise with regulatory gas authority gas inspector to ascertain site specific gas testing requirements. Copy test results into maintenance manual.

08 HYDRAULIC 0831 Hydrants


0831 HYDRANTS

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement: Provide fire hydrant installations including water supply, piping, valves, hydrant valves, booster valve and suction points, as documented. Design Standard: To AS 2419.1.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES General Requirement: Conform to the following work section(s): - 0171 General requirements. - 0801 Hydraulic systems. - 0814 Hydraulic pumps. - 0891 Hydraulic maintenance.

1.3 STANDARDS General Standard: To AS 2419.1.

1.4 SUBMISSIONS Products Product listing: Submit documentation to verify product listing in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment for the respective item. Samples General: Submit samples of accessories not documented as proprietary items, including the following: - Fire brigade booster valve. - Fire hydrant valve. - Vandal resistant canister enclosures.

1.5 INSPECTION Notice Inspection: Give notice so that inspection may be made of the following: - Connection branch to existing site water mains. - Pipes installed in trenches including all thrust blocks where required. - Flow testing of the most hydraulically disadvantage hydrant - Fire brigade booster / operational test

2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AUTHORISED PRODUCTS General Requirement: Provide equipment listed in the ActivFire Register of Fire Protection Equipment.

2.2 PIPING General Piping material: As documented.



2.3 VALVES Isolating valves Below-ground metal seated isolating valves: To AS/NZS 2638.1. Below-ground resilient seated isolating valves: To AS/NZS 2638.2. Fire hydrant valves Standard: To AS 2419.2. Requirement: Provide fire hydrant valves as follows: - To the requirements of the local fire brigade. - Copper alloy construction. - Matching non-ferrous dust cap and chain. Valve monitors: To AS 4118.1.4.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION General System: To AS 2419.1. Valves: Locate valves to permit satisfactory operation and maintenance.

3.2 COMMISSIONING GENERAL System: To AS 2419.1. Baseline data Requirement: Provide baseline data to AS 1851.

3.3 MAINTENANCE GENERAL Requirement: Conform to the 0891 Hydraulic maintenance worksection.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 GENRALLY Provide and install new fire service pipework of sizes and on alignments indicated on drawings. Liaise with DFES and the site Superintended 2 weeks prior to any isolation of the existing fire service to discuss the planned works with a date, time and expected duration. To minimise duration off shut downs, ensure all new pipework has been installed and tested, all associated works have been undertaken, excavate to locate and prepare existing pipework for new connection and make available all required fittings, valves etc. Provide and install new A2 size engraved fire service block plan. Submit draft PDF copy to DFES for review and comment prior to engraving. Screw fix new block plan within existing booster cabinet.

4.2 PIPING Fire service pipe installed in the ground external of buildings shall be Acu-Fire SDR11 PN16 HD- PE100 (black with red stripe) manufactured to AS/NZS 4130 with matching electrofusion fittings manufactured to AS/NZS 4129 or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Install polyethylene pipework and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Polyethylene pipes and fittings shall be installed be skilled operatives, trained and certified by the supplier / manufacture install polyethylene water service. Fire service piping installed in the ground shall maintain 750mm minimum depth to top of pipe. Fire service pipe of 100mm and larger, installed above ground and within the buildings shall be ActivFire certified, hot-dip galvanised, medium wall steel pipes in accordance with AS1074, with matching hot-dip galvanised roll grooved fittings and couplings. Galvanised steel pipe installed below ground shall be of 1500mm maximum length. Connect steel risers to vertical polyethylene pipework 600mm below ground level. Galvanized steel pipe and fittings shall be Denso wrapped where installed within the ground.



4.3 ISOLATION VALVES Below ground fire service isolating valves 100mm and larger shall be AVFI (RSGV-AS) clockwise close resilient sealing sluice valve in accordance with AS2638, with stem cap, table E flange AS2129, fibre gaskets, galvanized steel bolts, washers and nuts or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Sluice valves shall operate anti-clockwise open. Provide and install spindle extension to terminate stem cap 100-350mm below finished surface level. All below ground valves, bolts, nuts shall be protected by wrapping with Denso petrolatum tape.

4.4 BELOW GROUND VALVE PITS Provide and install 150mm SN8 uPVC riser over below ground isolating valves and topped with Galvin Engineering (178041) 250x250 hinged ductile iron valve box cover cast into 150 wide x 150mm deep reinforced concrete surround and set flush with finished surrounding surface level or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Cast iron covers shall label embossed ‘FIRE' and epoxy coated white. Provide and install black embossed engraved stainless steel tag with lettering at 75mm high to the access cover of all existing and new sluice valves with details of valve type and valve number in accordance with AS2419 and DFES requirements. All sluice valve numbers shall be reflected on the fire booster block plans.

4.5 FIRE HYDRANTS (FH) Provide and install dual outlet fire hydrant comprising of Galvin Engineering galvanised steel hydrant riser with dual head and flanged vertical inlet (381337), 2x 65 BIC fire hydrant valves (381301), brass valve plugs (380550), tamper resistant valve cover (381331), stainless steel securing chain and 003 Lockwood padlock or a similar product equivalent in form, function, quality, durability and appearance to the approval of the Superintendent. Centre of fire hydrant valve outlets to be 900mm above finished surface level. Install a concrete surround of 450mm x 450mm x 450mm around hydrant riser pipe, with top of concrete set 25mm above adjacent finished surface level to all external fire hydrants that are not located within an enclosure. Provide and install 2x 100mm diameter concrete filled heavy duty galvanized vehicle protection bollards to either side of fire hydrants where located adjacent to driveways and carparks or where mechanical damage by vehicles is possible. Ensure access to and operation of all existing fire hydrants is maintained during new site works.

4.6 TESTING On completion of new works the complete fire service system shall be pressure tested to not less than 1700Kpa. Rectify leaks if required and re-pressure test the fire service system. Provide 2 weeks’ notice to the Superintendent of date and time of fire system pressure test. The fire service system pressure test shall be sighted by the Superintendent. Provide pressure test certification within Booster Cabinet and within the Hydraulic Services Maintenance and Operating Manuals. Ensure all fire service piping is flushed clean of debris and grit. The Contractor is liable for rectification costs if damage is caused to DFES pumping appliances and testing equipment by debris and grit from the fire service system. Subject the entire fire service to hydrostatic tests as required by DFES and in accordance with AS2419 and to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. Insert all test results within the Hydraulic Services Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Subject the fire hydrant service to operating tests as required by and to the satisfaction of the DFES and the Superintendent. Allow for monthly testing of the fire protection equipment; booster assembly, tanks, pumps, hydrants, etc. accordance with AS1851 (Maintenance of fire protection systems and equipment) during the defects period. Provide copy of service contract and test log to Superintendent at final handover.

4.7 FIRE SERVICE INSTALLATION COMPLIANCE Engage a DFES approved third party certifier with FPA membership to undertake an inspection and flow pressure test of the complete commissioned hydrant system. The fire hydrants, pumps, tanks, booster and all components of the fire service installation shall be checked for compliance with



relevant Building Codes, Australian Standards and DFES operational requirements. The certifier shall provide a report and final certification to the Superintendent prior to Practical Completion. Insert copies of approval certificates within the Hydraulic Services Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

08 HYDRAULIC 0891 Hydraulic maintenance


0891 HYDRAULIC MAINTENANCE

1 GENERAL

1.1 RESPONSIBILITIES General Requirement: Maintain the hydraulic systems for the documented maintenance period so that the performance, reliability, service life, energy efficiency and safety of the system is equal to or better than that at the beginning of the maintenance period, in parallel with and including: - Periodic and statutory maintenance, cleaning and replacement of consumables. - Emergency repairs. Maintenance period: As documented.

1.2 CROSS REFERENCES GENERAL Requirement: Conform to the following work section(s): - 0171 General requirements.

1.3 INTERPRETATION DEFINITIONS General: For the purpose of this work section the following definition applies: - Consumable: Materials or components intended to be replaced within the service life of the

associated plant or equipment. - Periodic maintenance: Planned routine maintenance of plant and equipment (proactive), including

fire safety measures and statutory requirements. - Repairs: Unplanned/corrective maintenance (reactive). - Replacement: Upgrading of a higher value component on regular cycle, including repainting and

replacement of air conditioning equipment.

1.4 SUBMISSIONS CERTIFICATION Annual certification: Inspect and submit certification for all items required to be inspected annually under statutory requirements including, but not limited to, air handling systems required for fire operation, boilers and pressure vessels. Records Maintenance records: Conform to the 0171 General requirements work section. Periodic maintenance and performance report: At the frequency documented, submit reports summarising the maintenance performed and the performance of the hydraulic installation in the preceding period. Set out the report in a form that permits comparison with previous reports. Include the following as minimum requirements: - Dates and number of site labour hours for periodic maintenance. Exclude travelling time. - Dates, number of site labour hours and nature of work for emergency repairs. Exclude travelling

time. - Dates and number of site labour hours for defects liability rectification if within the defects liability

period. Exclude travelling time. - List of any motors for which the motor current varied by more than 10% from the current measured

during commissioning. - For each separately metered item, the water or gas use for each month of the reporting period.

1.5 INSPECTION Notice Requirement: Give notice so that an inspection may be held simultaneously with the final programmed maintenance visit.



2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL Product selection Proprietary items: Select products, as consumables or replacement items, of the same make, model and type as those being replaced. Substitutions: Where the existing product is no longer available, provide products with at least the same performance and construction characteristics.

3 EXECUTION

3.1 EMERGENCY REPAIRS General Requirement: Respond to call outs for breakdowns or other faults requiring emergency repairs. Rectify faults and replace faulty materials and equipment. Remedial work: Carry out any remedial work, including temporary work, necessary to restore each system to safe and satisfactory operation. Verify each system is operating correctly before leaving the site. Do not leave the plant in an unsafe condition. Temporary work: Promptly replace temporary work with permanent rectification. Contact details Emergency contract: Provide contact details including after hours and emergency mobile and/or pager details, to permit notification of emergency conditions. Response time Period: Attend site for emergency service within the documented response time. Response period: Starts at the time of notification to the contactor’s nominated contact point.

3.2 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE General Microbial control maintenance: To AS/NZS 3666.2. Routine visits: Make routine service visits at the frequency documented. Service items of equipment in conformance with the maintenance schedules in the operation and maintenance manuals. Notification of defects: When defects in the installation are identified, give notice. Requirement: Provide maintenance work including, but not limited to, the following: - Carry out the manufacturers' recommended maintenance. - Attend to reported defects and complaints. - Check for and repair corrosion. - Check for and rectify any unsafe conditions. - Replace faulty or damaged parts and consumable components. - Check anti-vibration supports, brackets and clamps, holding down bolts and flexible connections, for

deterioration and for freedom of movement of assembly. - Identification of pipes, conduits and ducts maintenance: To AS 1345. - Safety signs maintenance: To AS 1319. Backflow prevention devices Standards: To AS/NZS 3500.1 and AS 2845.3. Cleaning Requirement: At the end of the maintenance period: - Remove waste and clean all parts of the installation. - Remove temporary protective coatings, packaging and labels. - Clean screens and strainer baskets. Piped systems Tasks: Perform the following:



- Check equipment items and record values for operation, calibration, performance compliance, temperature and energy consumption.

- Rectify all water leaks regardless of size. Clean and repair any water damage. - Check condition of insulation and repair as required. - Provide service tags recording inspections and tests. Cold and heated water Maintenance of tanks and piping for potable water: To AS/NZS 3500.1 and AS/NZS 3500.4. Ball float valves: Check and adjust for no overflow. Heated water systems: - Conform to AS/NZS 3500.4 Section 12. - Inspection and maintenance: To AS/NZS 3666.2. - Provide service tags recording inspections and tests. - Leaks: Inspect cold and heated water systems at least annually for the following: - Leaks, including leaks from cisterns. - Other defects. - Safe condition. - Conformance to the PCA and network utility operator requirements. Leaks and defects: Report if

found and rectify. Strainers: Inspect and clean at least annually. Tapware Requirement: Inspect for leaks and damage. If leaks are found, service O-rings, replace washers and reseat to rectify. Backflow prevention devices General: Maintain to AS 2845.3 and AS/NZS 3500.1. Service tags: Record inspections and tests. Thermostatic mixing valves Field testing and maintenance: To AS 4032.3. Service tags: Record inspections and tests. Fuel gas Requirement: Maintain fuel gas services so that they are: - Free from leaks and other defects. - Efficient and safe. - In conformance with AS/NZS 5601.1 and network utility operator requirements. - Maintenance: Perform the following annually: - Inspect all gas reticulation including fixings, isolating valves, regulators and safety enclosures. - Pressure test the whole installation for leaks. - Provide service tags recording inspections and tests. Sanitary plumbing Requirement: Maintain as follows: - At least annually: Inspect for leaks, repair and report. - At other times: Attend and clear blockages within 24 hours of notification. Submit a report on the

cause of the blockage. System performance: Conform to the PCA and network utility operator requirements. Stormwater Requirement: Regularly clean and inspection as follows: - Annually at the end of autumn: Inspect guttering and other rainwater goods. Remove leaves and

other potential blockages. Clean leaf screens. - At other times: Attend and clear blockages within 24 hours of notification. System performance: Conform to the PCA and network utility operator requirements. Hydrants Hydrants: To AS 1851.



3.3 END OF MAINTENANCE PERIOD SERVICE General Requirement: Within a month of the end of the 12 month maintenance period, undertake all work scheduled to be carried out on an annual basis.

3.4 COMPLETION Maintenance records Service records: Record maintenance undertaken in the schedules in the operation and maintenance manuals. Maintenance reports: Prepare maintenance reports as documented. Restitution after maintenance tasks Requirement: Restore removed, damaged, contaminated, or soiled services and building elements when the maintenance task is complete. Standard: Equal to the condition of the original installation.

4 SELECTIONS

4.1 MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS SCHEDULE

Provision Requirement Maintenance period Conform to the 0171 General requirements work

section

MECHANICAL SERVICES

SPECIFICATION FOR

MECHANICAL SERVICES

AT

SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE

STAGE 1B

Prepared By

0417 925898 [email protected]

MS1906 20181102.DOCX

MECHANICAL SERVICES

MECHANICAL i SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B MS1906 20181102.DOCX

TABLE of CONTENTS

PART 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF SUB CONTRACT ............................................................ 1 101 MECHANICAL TRADES CONTRACTOR TO INFORM HIMSELF ........................................................................... 1 102 STORAGE .................................................................................................................................................... 1 103 PROTECTION OF SUB-CONTRACT WORK ...................................................................................................... 1 104 DAMAGE TO WORKS AND PROPERTY ........................................................................................................... 1 105 DESIGN DRAWINGS ..................................................................................................................................... 1 106 SCHEDULE OF MECHANICAL SERVICES DRAWINGS ....................................................................................... 2 107 DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY MECHANICAL TRADES CONTRACTOR ........................................................... 2 108 PROPRIETARY BRAND NAME REFERENCES ................................................................................................... 2 109 QUALITY OF WORK AND MATERIALS .......................................................................................................... 2 110 OBVIOUS WORK .......................................................................................................................................... 2 111 STANDARDS ................................................................................................................................................ 2

PART 2 TECHNICAL GENERAL ................................................................................................................... 3 201 DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES WORK .......................................................................................... 3

Scope of Work ............................................................................................................................................ 3 202 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THE MECHANICAL SERVICES CONTRACT ................................................................ 4

By Building Contractor .............................................................................................................................. 4 PART 3 ACOUSTIC SPECIFICATION .......................................................................................................... 4

301 MECHANICAL DUCTWORK .................................................................................................................. 4 Mechanical Ducts Through Masonry Walls ............................................................................................... 4 Pipework.................................................................................................................................................... 6 Electrical ................................................................................................................................................... 6

PART 4 EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................................................... 7 401 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME SYSTEMS ................................................................................................ 7

General ...................................................................................................................................................... 7 Outdoor Unit.............................................................................................................................................. 7 Compressor ................................................................................................................................................ 7 Condenser Coil .......................................................................................................................................... 7 Refrigerant Circuit ..................................................................................................................................... 7 Oil Recovery System .................................................................................................................................. 8 Indoor Units ............................................................................................................................................... 8 Control ...................................................................................................................................................... 8 Central Remote Controller ......................................................................................................................... 8 Unified ON / OFF Controller (Option)....................................................................................................... 8

402 EVAPORATIVE AIR COOLING UNITS ............................................................................................................. 8 403 FANS .......................................................................................................................................................... 9 404 ROOF COWLS .............................................................................................................................................. 9 405 DUST COLLECTOR ....................................................................................................................................... 9

General ...................................................................................................................................................... 9 Shaker Assembly ........................................................................................................................................ 9 Motor Rating ........................................................................................................................................... 10 Acoustic Hood.......................................................................................................................................... 10 Discharge Silencer ................................................................................................................................... 10

406 AIR COMPRESSOR...................................................................................................................................... 10 Compressor .............................................................................................................................................. 10 Motor ....................................................................................................................................................... 10 Refrigerant Dryer .................................................................................................................................... 10 Air Inlet Filter ......................................................................................................................................... 10

407 FINISHING HOOD ....................................................................................................................................... 10 PART 5 AIR DISTRIBUTION DUCTWORK AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS ......................................... 10

501 SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK .......................................................................................................................... 10 General .................................................................................................................................................... 10

MECHANICAL ii SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B MS1906 20181102.DOCX

Pressure Classification ............................................................................................................................ 11 Materials and Fixings .............................................................................................................................. 11 Branch Connections ................................................................................................................................. 11 Spigots for Flexible Ducts ........................................................................................................................ 11 Exhaust Ductwork Sealing ....................................................................................................................... 11 Duct Supports .......................................................................................................................................... 11 Protection During Construction ............................................................................................................... 11 Duct Access Hatches ................................................................................................................................ 11 Access Openings ...................................................................................................................................... 12 Flexible Connections ............................................................................................................................... 12

502 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK ............................................................................................................................... 12 Materials ................................................................................................................................................. 12 Installation of Flexible Ductwork ............................................................................................................. 13

503 DUST EXTRACTION DUCTWORK....................................................................................................... 13 General .................................................................................................................................................... 13

504 EXPLOSION VENT DUCTWORK ................................................................................................................... 14 PART 6 ACOUSTIC LOUVRES .................................................................................................................... 14

PART 7 AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT ...................................................................................................... 14 701 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 14 702 CEILING MOUNTED LINEAR BOOTS ............................................................................................................ 14 703 RETURN / RELIEF / EXHAUST AIR GRILLES – WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED ................................................ 14 704 REGISTERS ................................................................................................................................................ 14 705 CURVED BLADE DIFFUSERS ....................................................................................................................... 15 706 DOOR GRILLES .......................................................................................................................................... 15 707 WEATHERPROOF LOUVRES ........................................................................................................................ 15 708 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS .................................................................................................................. 15

Damper Sets ............................................................................................................................................. 15 709 FIRE DAMPERS .......................................................................................................................................... 16

Fusible Link Type .................................................................................................................................... 16 PART 8 REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK ..................................................................................................... 16

801 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 16 802 TESTING ................................................................................................................................................... 16

General .................................................................................................................................................... 16 Pressure Tests .......................................................................................................................................... 16 Evacuation tests ....................................................................................................................................... 16

803 CHARGING ................................................................................................................................................ 17 PART 9 AIR FILTERS ................................................................................................................................... 17

901 GENERAL .................................................................................................................................................. 17 902 MULTI-VEE FILTERS.................................................................................................................................. 17 903 PANEL FILTERS ......................................................................................................................................... 17

PART 10 INSULATION.................................................................................................................................... 18 1001 EXTERNAL ACOUSTIC INSULATION ............................................................................................................ 18 1002 INTERNAL SHEETMETAL INSULATION......................................................................................................... 18 1003 REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK INSULATION .................................................................................................... 18

General .................................................................................................................................................... 18 PART 11 ELECTRICAL .................................................................................................................................. 18

1101 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................. 18 1102 WORK BY ELECTRICAL TRADES CONTRACTOR .......................................................................................... 18 1103 MOTOR STARTING .................................................................................................................................... 18 1104 QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................................... 18 1105 STANDARDS, REGULATIONS AND PERFORMANCE ....................................................................................... 19 1106 EARTHING SYSTEMS ................................................................................................................................. 19

MECHANICAL iii SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B MS1906 20181102.DOCX

1107 LABELLING AND COLOUR CODING ............................................................................................................ 19 1108 DRAWINGS AND WIRING DIAGRAMS .......................................................................................................... 19 1109 AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................... 19 1110 FIELD WIRING METHODS .......................................................................................................................... 19

External ................................................................................................................................................... 19 Internal .................................................................................................................................................... 19

1111 CABLES .................................................................................................................................................... 19 PVC Insulated Cables (T.P.I.) .................................................................................................................. 20 PVC Insulated Pvc Sheathed Cables (PVC/PVC) ..................................................................................... 20 Shielded Cables ....................................................................................................................................... 20

1112 CONDUITS ................................................................................................................................................ 20 1113 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCHBOARD.............................................................................................................. 20

General .................................................................................................................................................... 20 Fault Current Levels ................................................................................................................................ 21 Load Balancing ........................................................................................................................................ 21 Construction ............................................................................................................................................ 21 Finishes ................................................................................................................................................... 21 Power Isolating Switches ......................................................................................................................... 21 Circuit Breakers....................................................................................................................................... 21 Contactors and Motor Starters ................................................................................................................. 21 Relays and Time Delay Relays ................................................................................................................. 22 Terminals and Terminations ..................................................................................................................... 22 Labels ...................................................................................................................................................... 22

1114 VARIABLE SPEED AC DRIVES .................................................................................................................... 22 PART 12 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION AND CONTROLS ......................................................................... 22

1201 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................. 22 1202 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION ......................................................................................................................... 23

Air Conditioning Units ............................................................................................................................. 23 Supply and Exhaust Air Systems ............................................................................................................... 23

1203 CONTROLS EQUIPMENT ............................................................................................................................. 23 Remote Element Temperature Sensors...................................................................................................... 23 Start/Stop Control & After Hours Operation Push Buttons ....................................................................... 23

1204 WIRING METHODS .................................................................................................................................... 23 1205 POWER SUPPLIES ...................................................................................................................................... 23 1206 LABELS .................................................................................................................................................... 23 1207 DRAWINGS ............................................................................................................................................... 23 1208 MSSB SCHEDULE OF ELECTRICAL AND CONTROLS WIRING ........................................................................ 24

MSSB-2 Located on the Roof Adjacent to Condensing Units .................................................................... 24 MSSB-3 Located in the Ground Floor Equipment Room........................................................................... 24

PART 13 NOISE AND VIBRATION ................................................................................................................ 24 1301 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................. 24 1302 VIBRATION ............................................................................................................................................... 24

Machinery ................................................................................................................................................ 25 Connections ............................................................................................................................................. 25 Piping ...................................................................................................................................................... 25

PART 14 PAINTING AND LABELLING ........................................................................................................ 25 1401 GALVANISED IRON ................................................................................................................................... 25 1402 PAINTING (EXPOSED TO WEATHER) ........................................................................................................... 25 1403 SWITCHBOARDS AND CONTROL PANELS .................................................................................................... 25 1404 LABELLING .............................................................................................................................................. 25

PART 15 SETTING INTO OPERATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS ...................................................... 25 1501 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................. 25

PART 16 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 26

MECHANICAL iv SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B MS1906 20181102.DOCX

PART 17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS ......................................................................... 26 1701 GENERAL ................................................................................................................................................. 26 1702 AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS ................................................................................................................... 26

PART 18 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE ................................................................................................. 27 1801 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – VRV AIR CONDENSING UNITS ................................................................... 27 1802 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – VRV AIR CONDITIONING UNITS................................................................. 27 1803 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – DUST COLLECTOR UNIT ............................................................................. 29 1804 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – AIR COMPRESSOR ...................................................................................... 30 1805 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – FANS ........................................................................................................ 30

Fans EF-1 & EF-3 Maximum Discharge Noise Levels ............................................................................. 30 1806 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – EVAPORATIVE COOLING UNITS .................................................................. 31 1807 FINISHING HOOD ...................................................................................................................................... 31 1808 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – ACOUSTIC LOUVRES .................................................................................. 31 1809 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – VSD DRIVES ............................................................................................. 31

MECHANICAL 1 SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B MS1906 20181102.DOCX

PART 1 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF SUB CONTRACT 101 MECHANICAL TRADES CONTRACTOR TO INFORM HIMSELF

The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall be deemed to have carefully examined the Preliminaries to the main contract which shall be carried out under the Standard Conditions of Contract, the Supplementary Conditions of the Sub-Contract, the Specification and the Drawings.

The Mechanical Trades Contractor must carefully consider local conditions prevailing at the Site and visit the Site of the proposed work, and make site surveys as necessary for proper planning and execution of the work. Failure to do so shall in no way relieve the Mechanical Trades Contractor of responsibility for claimed unanticipated costs due to Site conditions.

102 STORAGE The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall accept and make due allowance in his tender for the fact that access is restricted and controlled. Deliveries of large loads shall be programmed with the Contractor.

The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall be responsible for storage and protection of equipment whether on or off the job site and/or in transit.

Upon delivery to site all materials and equipment shall immediately be properly stacked and protected from the weather, dampness and dust with particular attention to preventing ingress to working parts and pipes.

The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall be responsible for storing of all equipment that cannot be accommodated on site.

The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall confer with the Contractor and accept his instructions with regard to storage of materials particularly heavy loads. All equipment and materials shall be stored clear of floor slabs on timber packers.

103 PROTECTION OF SUB-CONTRACT WORK The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall protect, as required, all parts of the Sub-contract Works until practical completion to prevent any deterioration and damage.

104 DAMAGE TO WORKS AND PROPERTY Special care shall be exercised to prevent the ingress of dirt, moisture and foreign substances into any part of the Sub-contract Works.

The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall be responsible and liable for any damage caused to, or by his equipment or material while under his control, or by any act or omission arising from his negligence.

Such liability shall continue until the completion of the maintenance and/or defects liability period and any extensions thereto.

105 DESIGN DRAWINGS The design drawings show the system design details, the performance requirements from each item of equipment and the general arrangement of equipment. The design drawings have been co-ordinated with the architectural drawings, the structural drawings and other services in so far as is practical during the design phase and to the extent of establishing the feasibility of the general arrangements shown on the drawings based on the equipment specified.

Information involving accurate measurement of the building shall be taken from the site. Drawings of detail do not purport to show the exact presentation of components and the Mechanical Trades Contractor shall check with component suppliers for accurate information on the actual components to be provided.

The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall make, without variation in cost to the Contract, all necessary changes or additions to co-ordinate with all other services and the building structure.


106 SCHEDULE OF MECHANICAL SERVICES DRAWINGS The following Mechanical Services drawings form part of this Contract:

Number Title Rev M001 Ground Floor Air Conditioning and Exhaust Overview 0 M002 Ground Floor Air Conditioning Evaporative Cooling and Exhaust Layouts 0 M003 First Floor Air Conditioning and Exhaust Layout 0 M004 Roof Plan Condensing Units Fans and Cowls Layout 0 M005 Plant Room Layout, Sections & Details 0 M006 Sections Sheet 1 0 M007 Sections Sheet 2 0

107 DRAWINGS TO BE SUPPLIED BY MECHANICAL TRADES CONTRACTOR The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall prepare working drawings and all necessary detail drawings of all equipment, ductwork and pipework to be installed under the Sub-contract. A set of working drawings in PDF format shall be submitted for approval.

Manufacture and installation shall not commence without approval of the working drawings by the Superintendent's Representative.

Such drawings shall be based upon measurements taken from the site, and shall show all relevant dimensions and weights, and shall show sizes and locations of openings, wiring, etc., required for the installation and/or subsequent servicing of the equipment.

The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay for all alterations of the work due to any discrepancies, errors or omissions in the prints of drawings or other information supplied by him, whether such prints of drawings or information have been inspected by the Superintendent's Representative or not.

108 PROPRIETARY BRAND NAME REFERENCES Reference in this specification to proprietary brand names or to a particular manufactured product is given as an indication of the quality, physical size, weight, class, performance, type and finish of the items to be included for and provided under the contract.

Articles or products considered by the Tenderer to be of equal type and quality, produced by other manufacturers may be offered in addition to the conforming Tender and may be considered for approval by the Superintendent's Representative. Any potential changes or additional costs to the installation including effects on other trades resulting from the substitution of the alternative item(s) shall have been fully evaluated and the costs included in the alternative price structure.

109 QUALITY OF WORK AND MATERIALS All materials, fittings, accessories and apparatus shall be new and of first grade design and manufacture.

The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall submit samples of all accessories fittings and apparatus proposed for use in the works of this Sub-contract for approval. Only such items which are approved may be installed. Failure to comply with this provision may result in the unconditional rejection of such items when inspected on site.

The workmanship shall be of high standard throughout and only first class tradesmen shall be employed on the work in their respective trades.

110 OBVIOUS WORK If neither the Specification nor the Drawings contain any particulars of minor parts that nevertheless are clearly necessary for the completion of the work under the Contract, all such parts shall be supplied and executed without additional charge to the Contract.

111 STANDARDS Unless otherwise stated all materials, equipment and work covered by this Specification shall be in accordance with the latest editions of the appropriate standards and codes of the Standards Association of Australia. Where such standards are not provided by the SAI Global appropriate standards of the British Standards Institute shall apply. In the event of conflict between the requirements of the Standards referred to, and this Specification, the prevailing requirements shall be those which in the opinion of the Superintendent's Representative give the highest quality of work and material and the highest degree of safety to personnel.


The applicable Standards and Codes shall include, but not necessarily be limited to the following:

Number Title NCC 2016 National Construction Code 2016 ANSI B70.1 Refrigeration tube fittings AS1029 Low Voltage Contactors AS1132 Tests for Air Filters for Use In Air Conditioning and General Ventilation AS1135 Rules for the design, fabrication installation and inspection of nonferrous pressure

piping AS1136 Low Voltage Switchgear AS1167 Welding and brazing - Filler metals AS1192 Electroplated coatings - Nickel & Chromium AS1202 AC Motor Starting Equipment AS1324 Air Filters for Use in Air Conditioning and General Ventilation AS1432 Copper Tubes for Plumbing, Gasfitting and Drainage Applications AS1530 Methods of Fire Tests on materials AS1571 Copper - Seamless tubes for air-conditioning and refrigeration AS1585 Capillary and Brazing Fittings of Copper and Copper Alloys AS1599 Pressure sensitive tapes AS1657 Fixed Platforms, Walkways, Stairs and Ladders AS1668 Rules for Mechanical Ventilation and Air Conditioning in Buildings AS1677 Refrigeration Systems AS1861 Air Conditioning Units AS1903 Reflective foil laminate AS1904 Code of Practice for Installation of Reflective Foil Laminates AS2053 Non-Metallic Conduits and Fittings AS2107 Ambient Sound Levels for Areas of Occupancy within Buildings AS2184 Circuit Breakers AS2352 Glossary of terms for thermal insulation AS2464 Methods of Testing Thermal Insulation AS3000 SAA Wiring Rules AS3147 0.6/1kV Electric Cables AS3666 Air handling and water systems - Microbiology Control AS3742 Mineral Wool Thermal Insulation AS4254 Ductwork for Air Handling Systems in Buildings AS4426 Thermal Insulation of Pipework Ductwork and Equipment AS5601 Gas Installations

PART 2 TECHNICAL GENERAL 201 DESCRIPTION OF MECHANICAL SERVICES WORK

Scope of Work The work to be carried out by the Mechanical Trades Contractor shall include however not be limited to:

- Acoustic treatment of mechanical services as further specified.

- Supply and installation of reverse cycle 2 pipe VRV air cooled units complete with electrical wiring, controls and refrigeration pipework.

- Supply and installation of evaporative cooling systems as indicated on the drawings and nominated in this Specification.

- Supply and installation of dust collector including acoustic hood, discharge silencer, ductwork and associated fittings.

- Supply and installation of air compressor complete with refrigerated dryer, receiver and associated pipework and fittings.

- Supply and installation of uninsulated and thermal and acoustic insulated sheetmetal ductwork as shown on the drawings constructed in accordance with the nominated codes.

- Supply and installation of supply and exhaust ventilation systems as indicated on the drawings and nominated in this Specification.


- Supply and installation of flexible ductwork and air diffusion equipment, all as indicated on the drawings.

- Supply and installation of the acoustic louvre in accordance with the schedule of performance and as indicated on the drawings.

- Supply of door grilles for installation by the Builder.

- Supply and installation of sheetmetal weather proof covers for mechanical and weather protection of sheetmetal ductwork where indicated on the drawings.

- Supply and installation of sheetmetal pipe covers for mechanical and weather protection of refrigeration pipework and insulation where indicated on the drawings.

- Supply and install electrics and control equipment as specified. Refer to clause PART 11, titled Electrical, page 18 and clause PART 12, titled Sequence Of Operation And Controls, page 22. It is the responsibility of the Mechanical Trades Contractor to issue the Electrical Trades Contractor with a list of equipment and their associated power requirements prior to the installation of a power supply to MSSB-3.

- Painting and labelling of the installation as nominated in clause PART 14, titled Painting And Labelling, page 25.

- Provision of testing and commissioning of the completed systems.

- Provide two (2) copies of operating and maintenance manuals and 'As Constructed' drawings of the complete mechanical services systems, including electrical and controls work. Provide 'As Constructed' electrical wiring diagrams for power and control, and internal wiring circuits of all the equipment, as applicable. Manuals shall be provided in both hard copy and PDF formats.

- Provide 'As Constructed' drawings in accordance with clause 1702, titled As Constructed Drawings, page 26 together with drawings on CD in pdf and dwg formats.

- Provide twelve months preventative maintenance and warranty to the systems and equipment by visiting the site monthly, plus any additional visits made necessary by failure of any part of the system, commencing from the date of Practical Completion.

202 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THE MECHANICAL SERVICES CONTRACT By Building Contractor The following building works do not form part of the Mechanical Services works and will be provided by the Builder.

- Clear openings throughout the building structure for the passage of supply and return ductwork, return air grilles, pipes, etc., in accordance with details to be supplied by the Mechanical Trades Contractor.

- Making good the wall openings following installation of the ductwork and pipework forming part of the Mechanical installation.

- Provision of adequate ceiling access panels to all equipment as indicated on the drawings.

- Installation of door grilles supplied by the Mechanical Trades Contractor.

- Electrical services as nominated in section PART 11 titled Electrical, page 18.

Note: Electrical wiring to mechanical services switchboards has been based on nominal selections listed in this Specification. It shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical subcontractor to notify the Contractor and the Electrical subcontractor of any changes in wiring requirements and include for any additional costs incurred.

PART 3 ACOUSTIC SPECIFICATION 301 MECHANICAL DUCTWORK

All mechanical ductwork penetrating walls shall be installed so that there is no direct contact between duct and the surrounding structure. A minimum clearance of 10mm around the duct is required.

Mechanical Ducts Through Masonry Walls Sheet Metal Ducts: Where sheet metal ducts penetrate masonry acoustic walls, provide 10 to 20mm clearance around duct. Pack space around duct with fibre insulation to a density of 20 kg/m³ density; (fibre insulation must not be tightly packed). Seal the opening around the duct on both sides of wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.


Flexible Ducts: The sound reduction through a wall penetration via flexible ductwork is almost zero. Hence where flexible ducts must pass through an acoustic wall, the sound transmission through the opening must be treated. There are two approaches that can be used:

Wrap flexible Duct: Provide a steel sleeve through the penetration, extending at least 150 mm each side of wall, for connection of flexible ductwork each side. Provide 10 to 20mm clearance around sleeve and pack the space with fibre insulation to a density of 20 kg/m³; (fibre insulation must not be tightly packed). Acoustic type flexible duct to be connected to each side of the sleeve, and wrapped with foil faced 5 kg/m² loaded vinyl for a minimum distance of 900 mm each side of wall. Loaded vinyl to be lapped a minimum of 50 mm and fully taped and sealed. Seal loaded vinyl to wall.

Steel Sleeve over Flexible Duct: Provide a minimum 1200mm long (or 4 times diameter of flexible duct), 1.2 mm steel sleeve through the masonry wall. Steel sleeve to be sealed to masonry wall as per above. Pass acoustic type flexible duct through metal sleeve. Provide minimum 25mm clearance all the way around the flexible duct to the sleeve. Insert fibre insulation between the flexible duct and the steel sleeve for a minimum depth of 150 mm, both ends of the sleeve. Insulation to be compressed to a density of 20 kg/m³. (See Figure 1)

Clearances greater than 25mm: Where clearances between duct / sleeve and masonry are greater than 20 mm, pack space around duct with fibre insulation to a density of 20 kg/m³ density. Fix 2 layers of 13mm plasterboard on both sides of the masonry wall to achieve a clearance of 10 to 20 mm between duct. Seal the opening around the duct on both sides of wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.

Mechanical Ducts Through Stud Frame Walls

Sheet Metal Ducts: Where sheet metal ducts penetrate through stud framed acoustic walls ensure minimum thickness of plasterboard at penetration is 26mm. Provide additional overlapping face board if required. Gap between duct and surrounding plasterboard sheets to be 10 to 20mm. Seal both sides of the wall with flexible sealant to a minimum thickness of 15mm or at least equivalent to the size of the gap, whichever is the greater.

Penetrations through Plantroom walls: Where sheet metal ducts or silencers penetrates through a stud frame plantroom walls or high performance walls (i.e. >Rw50), box out the opening in the plasterboard to provide 10 to 20mm gap around perimeter of duct. Pack the space around duct with fibre insulation to a density of 20 kg/m³ density. Seal the opening around the duct on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness or to the size of the gap whichever is the greater.

Discontinuous Construction: Where ducts penetrate high performance acoustic walls of discontinuous construction, the discontinuity must be maintained in the boxing out of the opening; i.e. the 20mm gap between the stud frames must also be maintained in the boxing out of the opening.

Flexible Ducts: As per masonry walls, where flexible ducts penetrate stud framed acoustic walls, the sound transmission through the opening must be treated. There are two approaches that can be used:

Wrap flexible Duct: Provide a steel sleeve through the penetration, extending at least 150 mm each side of wall, for connection of acoustic flexible ductwork each side. Ensure minimum thickness of plasterboard on each side of wall is 26mm. Provide additional overlapping face board if required. Gap between duct and surrounding plasterboard sheets to be 10 to 20mm. Seal both sides of the wall with flexible sealant to a minimum thickness of 15mm. Flexible acoustic type duct to be connected to each side of the sleeve, and wrapped with foil faced 5 kg/m² loaded vinyl for a minimum distance of at least 900 mm each side of wall. Loaded vinyl to be lapped a minimum of 50 mm and fully taped and sealed. Seal loaded vinyl to wall.

Steel Sleeve over Flexible Duct: Provide a minimum 1200mm long (or 4 times diameter of flexible duct) of 1.2 mm steel sleeve through plasterboard wall. Steel sleeve to be sealed to plasterboard wall as per above. Pass acoustic type flexible duct through metal sleeve. Provide minimum 25mm clearance all the way around the flexible duct. Insert fibre insulation between the flexible duct and the steel sleeve for a minimum depth of 150 mm, both ends of the sleeve. Insulation to be compressed to a density of 20 kg/m³.


Fig.1 - Flexible Duct Penetration through full height walls

Pipework All pipework penetrating walls shall be installed so that there is no direct contact between pipes and the surrounding structure.

Pipework Penetrating Masonry Acoustic Walls: Cut a clean round hole to provide 5 to 20mm clearance with pipes. Pack gap with fibre insulation to a density of 20 kg/m³ density; (fibre insulation must not be tightly packed). Seal the opening around the duct on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.

Clearances greater than 20mm: Where clearances are greater than 20 mm, pack space around the pipe with fibre insulation to a density of 20 kg/m³ density. Fix 2 layers of 13mm plasterboard on both sides of the masonry wall to achieve a clearance of 5 to 20 mm to pipe. Seal the opening around the pipe on both sides of wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.

Pipework Penetrating Stud Frame Acoustic Walls: Ensure minimum thickness of plasterboard at penetration is 26mm. Provide additional overlapping face board if required. Gap between pipe and surrounding plasterboard sheets is to be maximum of 20mm. Seal the opening

around the duct on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.

Electrical Cable Penetrations through Masonry Wall: The gap between cable penetration (up to 3 twin flex) and the opening in the acoustic wall shall not be greater than 20mm. Pack the void with fibre insulation to a density of 20 kg/m³ density. Seal the opening on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.

Cable Penetrations through Stud Frame Wall: The gap between cable penetration (up to 3 twin flex) and the opening in the acoustic wall shall not be greater than 20mm. Ensure minimum thickness of plasterboard at penetration is 26mm. Provide additional overlapping face board if required. Seal the opening on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness or to the size of the gap whichever is the greater.

Cable Tray / Bundled Cable Penetrations Through Masonry Walls: Cable tray penetrations through acoustic walls must be avoided wherever possible. . It is preferred that the cable tray stop either side of the acoustic walls, and cables bundled and pass through cylindrical conduit. Conduits to be minimum 200mm long. .

Diameter of conduit is to be sized such that bundled cables occupy no less than 50% of the cross sectional area of conduit. For large numbers of cables it is preferred to use multiple smaller diameter conduits.

Cut a clean round hole in masonry wall to provide 5 to 20mm clearance with conduit. Pack the gap tight fibre insulation. Seal the opening around the conduit on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant,


minimum 15mm thickness. Pack the conduit from both sides with fibre insulation to ensure that cables are tightly supported within the conduit.

Cable trays must not pass through Rw 50+ walls; these penetrations must be via conduits as per above. For wall constructions less than Rw 50, the cable tray must be taken through masonry acoustic wall, the clearance around the cable tray should be kept to a minimum and not greater than 30mm.

Pack the opening tight with fibre insulation to the full extent of the wall thickness.

Cable Tray / Bundled Cable Penetrations Through Stud Frame Walls: Cable tray penetrations through acoustic plasterboard walls must be avoided wherever possible. It is preferred that the cable tray stop either side of the acoustic walls, and cables bundled and pass through cylindrical conduit. Conduit is to be minimum 200mm long.

Diameter of conduit is to be sized such that bundled cables occupy no less than 50% of the cross sectional area of conduit. For large numbers of cables it is preferred to use multiple smaller diameter conduits.

Seal cylindrical conduit to wall. Ensure minimum thickness of plasterboard at penetration is 26mm on both sides of the stud frame. Provide additional overlapping face board if required. . Seal the opening around the duct on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.

Pack the conduit from both sides with fibre insulation to ensure that cables are tightly supported within the conduit.

Cable Tray Option: Cable trays must not pass through Rw 50+ walls; these penetrations must be via conduits as per above. For wall constructions less than Rw 50, the cable tray must be taken through acoustic plasterboard wall, box out the opening in the plasterboard wall to provide not greater than 30mm clearance all around the cable tray. Boxing to be fully sealed to wall sheeting.

Pack fibre insulation around the cable tray and cables such that fibre insulation is tightly packed to the surrounding plasterboard reveal.

PART 4 EQUIPMENT 401 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME SYSTEMS

General Units shall be air-cooled, split-type, 2 pipe, multi-system air conditioning systems consisting of outdoor units and multiple indoor units, each having capability to cool or heat for the requirements of the rooms.

The compressor shall be equipped with inverter controller, and capable of changing the rotating speed to follow variations in cooling and heating loads in the controlled zones.

VRV systems shall be Daikin, Fujitsu, Panasonic, Mitsubishi or other approved equivalent.

Outdoor Unit The outdoor unit shall be factory-assembled, housed in a sturdy weatherproof casing and constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.

The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and shall allow side-by-side installation of multiple condensing units.

Compressor Compressors shall be a hermetic scroll type and equipped with inverter control capable of changing the speed in accordance to the cooling or heating load requirement to meet load fluctuation and indoor unit individual control.

Condenser Coil The condenser coil shall be constructed from copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminium fins to form a cross fin coil. The aluminium fins shall be treated with an anti-corrosion resin film.

Refrigerant Circuit The refrigerant circuit shall include liquid and gas shut off valves and solenoid valves.

All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safety operation of the system.

The following safety devices shall be included in the outdoor unit.

- High Pressure Switch

- Fan Driver Overload Protector


- Inverter Overload Protector

- Fusible Plugs

- Fuses

Oil Recovery System Unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation with long refrigerant piping.

Indoor Units Electronic control valves shall control refrigerant flow rate in response to load variations of the conditioned space. Fans shall be of the double inlet multi-blade type and statically and dynamically balanced to ensure low noise and vibration-free operation.

Control Computerized PID control shall maintain the room temperature set-point.

The unit shall be equipped with a self-diagnosis system for easy and quick maintenance and service.

The LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) remote controller shall retain the latest fault code for easy maintenance.

The controller shall be able to control up to 16 indoor units and change fan speed and angle of swing flap individually in the group.

Central Remote Controller A multi-functional centralized controller (central remote controller) shall be supplied and shall be capable of providing the following functions:

- Temperature setting for each zone, or group, or indoor unit.

- ON/ OFF as a zone or individual unit.

- Indication of operating condition.

- Select one of 10 operation modes for each zone.

Wide screen liquid crystal display and can be wired by a non-polar 2-wire transmission cable to a distance of 1 km away from the indoor unit.

Unified ON / OFF Controller (Option) Unified ON / OFF controller is supplied as an optional accessory.

Controls up to 16 groups (each group consists of a maximum of 16 indoor units) or 128 indoor units with the following functions:

- ON / OFF as a zone or individual unit.

- Indication of operation condition of each group.

- Select one of 4 operation modes.

- Wired by a non-polar 2-wire transmission cable to a distance of 1 km away from indoor unit.

402 EVAPORATIVE AIR COOLING UNITS The evaporative air cooling units shall be of the centrifugal fan, top discharge type, constructed from marine grade aluminium and fibreglass reinforced polyester, suitable for mounting on to hot dipped galvanised, tubular frames.

The units shall operate with a dry sump whenever the circulating pump is not required.

The cabinet shall be fabricated from UV stable plastic, incorporating a rigid base frame, channel section corner and centre posts (as applicable), with rigid channel section frames supporting the fan scroll and motor mounting base. Cabinet fastenings shall be non-corroding, type 316 stainless steel, monel metal and nylon, depending on the duty.

The blower assembly within the cabinet shall comprise a large diameter, low rotational speed, double inlet forward blade centrifugal fan, motor and drive. The fan wheel shall be constructed from zinc coated steel; powder coated and statically and dynamically balanced, after manufacture. The fan scroll shall be of heavy wall section polyethylene. The fan shaft shall be stainless steel mounted in resiliently housed, self aligning lubricated and sealed ball bearings, rated for 100,000 hour life. Fan motors shall be single phase, 3 speed winding type, TEFC to IP54; or single phase, speed tapped type, as scheduled.


All motor circuits shall be provided with overload protection.

The evaporative filter pads shall be easily removable from the cabinet and shall be one piece, louvre faced units complete with integral water distributing trough. The evaporative material shall be CELdeck, treated to provide odourless absorbent and wettable air cooling paths. Design of the air flow/saturating pad area and depth shall provide a humidifying efficiency of not less than 80%.

The water reservoir forming the base of the unit shall be one piece moulded polyethylene with make-up water supply and overflow connections. The reservoir shall be provided with a servo operated dump valve operating when the pump is switched off. The water circulating pump shall be corrosion resistant, centrifugal type with non-metallic impeller and housing, and shall not be adversely affected if run dry. The motor shall be hermetically sealed and lubricated for life. Water bleed off shall be adjustable.

The complete unit shall be factory wired to meet Western Power standards and shall be fitted with internal isolating switch. The control station shall be wall mounted and consist of a three speed fan control; ON/OFF switch and pump switch, all with LED status indicators.

Evaporative cooling units shall be of Bonaire manufacture, or approved equal, in accordance with the Schedule of Performance.

403 FANS Motors and drives shall have rated power output to allow a 10% increase in air quantity against the system (duty kW x 1.35).

Access panels shall be provided, to the approval of the Superintendent's Representative, in the fan casings or the connecting ductwork, to provide adequate access to the motor and impeller assemblies.

Lubrication points shall be provided external to the fan casings for periodic lubrication of bearings.

Each fan shall deliver the air quantity specified in the Fan Schedule against the resistance of its system. The overall sound power level of the fan shall not exceed the level nominated in the manufacturer's catalogue data at the specified duty.

The housing shall incorporate a moulded base that forms a weatherproof skirt and is suitable for mounting on a kerb. An integral wiring conduit shall be provided from the motor compartment to under the weatherproof skirt. All exposed metal parts and fixings shall be made of corrosion resistant materials.

Each fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced. All bearings shall be grease packed sealed ball bearings. The motor shall be of the type, minimum kW rating and current characteristics as specified in the Schedule of Performance.

Fans shall be as manufactured by Fantech or approved equal.

404 ROOF COWLS Roof cowls shall be of the low silhouette cowl type, similar to Fibre-Aire Relief, installed at roof level to permit entry or relief air, and shall be provided where shown on the drawings.

The installation of cowls shall be complete with bird screens, OBDs and ductwork, as indicated on the drawings.

405 DUST COLLECTOR

General The dust control unit shall include a self contained fabric filter designed for intermittent duty, with filter cleaning automatically activated when the dust unit is turned off.

The unit shall be complete with fan, filter assembly, hopper and dust container with quick-release sealer gear.

The unit shall be fitted with explosion relief panels consisting of an antistatic membrane with supporting mesh fitted to the rear of the dirty side of each unit.

The filter assembly shall consist of a primarily filter bag material which suits the application.

Shaker Assembly The shaker assembly shall consist of a motor which turns an eccentric mechanism to vibrate a shaker bar. The shaker bar shall have locators which fit either side of each filter pad, thus, vibrating the filter assembly clean.


Motor Rating The motor shall be rated to be dust ignition proof.

Acoustic Hood The dust collector shall be fitted with an acoustic hood.

Due to height limitations in the plant room the hood shall be manufactured so that it can be disassembled and removed horizontally.

Discharge Silencer The dust collector shall be fitted with a discharge silencer.

406 AIR COMPRESSOR The compressor shall be Atlas Copco or approved equivalent manufacture.

Compressor The compressor shall be a screw type.

Motor The motor shall be a high efficiency, totally enclosed fan-cooled (TEFC), IP54, class F electric motor with bearings greased for life.

Refrigerant Dryer An integrated refrigerant dryer shall be installed for water vapour removal from the compressed. The refrigeration system shall utilize refrigerant R134a.

Air Inlet Filter An intake filter shall be provided to filter air prior to entry into the compressor.

407 FINISHING HOOD The finishing hood or fume booth shall be manufactured by Smiths Spray Booths or approved equivalent.

The hood shall comply with the requirements of AS4114

The booth shall be designed for a velocity of not less than 0.5 m/s and a filter velocity of not greater than 1.5 m/s.

PART 5 AIR DISTRIBUTION DUCTWORK AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS 501 SHEETMETAL DUCTWORK

This specification sets out the minimum quality of materials and standards of workmanship required for the fabrication and installation of ductwork on air-conditioning and ventilation systems.

General Sheet metal ductwork and associated fittings shall comply with AS4254. The ductwork shall be rectangular, circular or oval, to the sizes indicated on the drawings. Circular or oval sheet metal ductwork shall be spirally wound with a grooved seam.

All ductwork shall be installed true and square to the building to the approval of the Superintendent's Representative. The installation shall be arranged to provide ready access for maintenance to duct components such as dampers and the like, and the installation work of other trades on the site.

Rectangular sheet metal ductwork shall generally be cross-broken or beaded in accordance with AS4254.

The design drawings indicate the dimensions of the airway in mm, with the side viewed in the particular plan or elevation stated first. The scaled duct size has been increased by the thickness of internal insulation or other internal treatment, and has been co-ordinated with the Architectural drawings depicting the space available for the ductwork as far as is practical during the design phase. The cross sectional dimensions of the duct may be varied during construction, if approved by the Superintendent's Representative, to facilitate installation. Any such changes shall be designed to achieve the same pressure drop as that indicated by the design drawings.


Pressure Classification All supply air ductwork and return air ductwork; fresh air and exhaust air ductwork, shall be manufactured to AS4250 - 500Pa Static Pressure Classification. Duct construction and installation shall comply with AS4254 and AS1668 Part 1.

Materials and Fixings The material used for sheet metal ductwork fabrication shall be prime lock forming quality galvanised steel sheet, Grade G2 or G3 to AS2338 with Z275 coating to AS1397.

Rolled steel angels shall be mild steel to AS1204 Table 1, grade 250, and to conform to the dimensions specified in AS1131. Angle sections used for supporting ductwork, shall be hot dipped galvanised steel.

Rivets for galvanised ductwork shall be of aluminium alloy with 5% magnesium and shall be of the expanding solid end type. Rivets for stainless steel ductwork shall be of monel metal.

Bolts and nuts shall conform to AS1111, AS1112 and AS1275 as appropriate.

Hexagon bolts and nuts used in protected locations shall be zinc plated. Bolts and nuts exposed to weather shall be hot dipped galvanised.

Branch Connections Branch connections to rectangular ducts shall be as detailed in the AS4254, and in accordance with the following:

Upstream branch connections to VAV boxes shall be 45º angled boot take-offs.

Branch connections to individual outlets may be bell-mouthed straight or angled tap in branches.

Parallel flow branches shall be used for connections handling 30% or more of the air flow in the main duct and where indicated on the drawings.

Entry branches for all other rectangular connections shall be at 45°.

Provide a splitter damper at parallel flow branches and a single or opposed blade damper in other branches.

Spigots for Flexible Ducts Spigots for the connection of flexible ducts shall be circular or oval to suit the size shown on the drawings. The spigot shall be manufactured from spun aluminium or 0.8mm minimum thickness galvanised steel. Where required for air balancing, (e.g. take-offs from supply ducts) spigots shall be fitted with a butterfly damper. The damper blade shall be manufactured from 0.8mm minimum thickness galvanised steel. The damper shall be complete with a metal shaft securely fixed to the blade and a cast metal quadrant arm. The quadrant arm shall clearly indicate the damper position and shall be secured to a cast metal quadrant by a wing nut. The quadrant shall be mounted at least 70mm proud of the spigot.

Exhaust Ductwork Sealing Exhaust ductwork shall be sealed with duct sealant, mastic or gaskets to AS4254, at joints and seams to ensure that the duct is airtight and leak-proof.

Splitters, turning vanes or internal stiffening tie rods shall not be utilised within unfiltered exhaust systems.

Duct Supports Duct supports shall be from galvanised steel strap for small ducts, or galvanised steel angle, 'Unistrut', or 'Milistrut' sections, galvanised with cadmium plated all thread rod and galvanised steel nuts for larger ducts. Ducts may be hung from joint angles or TDF flanges.

General hanger arrangements and spacing shall conform to AS4254 standards.

Protection During Construction All ductwork shall be stored under cover with open ends sealed with plastic sheeting before and after shipment to site, prior to installation. The protective plastic sheeting shall remain in place up to the time of installation. Open ends of installed duct shall be protected from dust ingress by taped plastic sheet closures.

Duct Access Hatches All ductwork shall have access hatches where shown on the drawings and where required for satisfactory inspection and service purposes. Access panels in ductwork required for installation purposes shall be insulated and shall be permanently sealed to the approval of the Superintendent's Representative. Access hatches for inspection purposes, shall be 450x600 (access hole) and 200x300 (handhole), internally insulated double panel, deep formed GSS panel matched to a rigid frame fixed securely to the ductwork. Panels shall


be held closed against a pliable Neoprene sealing gasket, with wedge type sash fasteners. Access holes and hand holes shall be fitted with four and two wedge type sash latches respectively.

Access Openings Access shall be provided to all motorised dampers where shown on the drawings. Panels installed in insulated ducts shall be insulated. Access openings shall be of a size and location; such that dampers can be reset and blades checked for tight closure.

Ductwork access openings shall be to the following minimum dimensions:

Access Doors 1350 x 500 - walk in access. Stiffened to prevent distortion under normal use, hinged to open against air pressure, with clamp type latches and handles which can be opened from both inside and outside, sealed with mechanically fixed rubber or soft Neoprene Gaskets to make the door airtight.

Access panels 450 x 600 - crawl/climb in access. Double panel, deep formed, GSS Insulated as ductwork or filled with minimum 25mm mineral wool with rigid matching GSS frame securely attached to the duct and 4 off wedge type sash latches sealed as for access doors.

Hand holes 200 x 300 - hand and sight access. Double panel, deep formed GSS as for access holes but with 2 only latches.

Flexible Connections Flexible connections shall be installed to isolate fans from conditioner casings and from connecting ductwork. Connecting components shall be aligned prior to installing the connection, and shall permit renewal without moving the ductwork or the equipment.

Provide each connection with an effective length of 75mm to 125mm between ductwork and equipment, with adequate (at least 25mm) slack in the material to ensure the movement and vibration isolation is achieved. Folds shall be incorporated in the connection material joint seams to conceal raw edges. Stitching thread shall match the quality of the material. Seams shall be sealed with approved adhesive to achieve an airtight connection, and stitched to suit the maximum potential service stress. Protrusion into the airway shall not exceed 10mm by incorporating connections with metal collar frames or other features where connections subjected to negative internal pressure.

For exposed connections use suitable weather resistant material or protect by weatherproof sheetmetal covers which do not compromise isolation.

Make connections to rectangular ductwork with continuous 16mm x 6mrn x 1.2mm thick galvanised steel channel section or 25mm x 1.6mm galvanised steel bar flexible connection sandwiched between the channel and the duct. Fasten the channel section to the duct with pop rivets at not greater than 150mm centres for pressures below 500Pa and 75mm centres for pressures above 500Pa.

On flanged rectangular connections, hold the flexible joint in place with a matching flange incorporating a backing plate.

On circular duct, screw 25mm x 1.6mm draw bands at nominal 300mm centres (for pressures to 500Pa) and 150mm centres (for pressures above 500 Pa).

Material type and usage shall be in accordance with the requirements of AS1668 Part 1, and shall be selected from the following:

- Heavy duty vinyl

- Neoprene fire retardant, waterproof (1.005 kg/m²)

- Heavy duty PVC coated vinyl

- Fibreglass reinforced PVC fabric

- Neoprene coated glass fabric (1 kg/m²)

- PVC coated fabric with cotton sateen backing (0.5 kg/m²)

- Woven plastic material.

502 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK Materials Flexible ductwork shall comply with AS1668 Part 1 clause 2.2 in either of the following constructions:

For supply systems


Tough, flexible, reinforced aluminium foil laminate, supported by a reinforcing helix of aluminium alloy or steel, and insulated with 25mm fibreglass encased in an outer layer of reinforced foil.

For exhaust systems

Corrugated aluminium, helically wound with lock seam capable of being bent or set by hand without spring back and without deforming the circular section.

Tough, flexible, reinforced aluminium foil laminate, supported by a reinforcing helix of aluminium alloy or steel, suitable for operation under negative pressure, without distortion reducing the diameter.

The ductwork shall have a zero rating (both inside and outside) to each of the four indices when tested in accordance with AS 1530 Part 3.

Flexible ductwork shall be sized as shown on the drawings.

Each spigot on rigid ducts for connection to flexible ducts leading to the Variable Volume boxes, shall be standard circular angled take-off.

Installation of Flexible Ductwork Flexible duct connections and connections to spigots shall be made airtight by first coating the spigot with silicone mastic, sliding the inner wall of the flexible duct over the mastic coated spigot and securing with a wormscrew draw band, or bushed mechanical fixings 120º apart.

Duct tape shall be used only to dress the outer insulation layer on to the spigot and the tape end shall itself, be held in place by a further braided nylon or aluminium band fastening over all.

The length of each flexible duct shall be such as to ensure that the duct when connected is fully extended and is the minimum length required. Flexible duct runs shall not exceed 3 metres in length. Flexible duct runs indicated on the drawings longer than 3m long shall have a straight length of insulated circular sheetmetal ductwork inserted.

Ducts shall be installed without restriction to airflow and shall be supported where suspended above the ceiling by not less than 50 mm wide, woven nylon upholstery straps at not more than 1 metre spacing. 20mm wide nylon or metal crating tape, shall not be used for suspending flexible ductwork, but may be used to hold the pressure sensitive tape securing the outer covering over the insulation. Flexible ductwork shall not be installed with a bend centre line radius to duct diameter ratio of less than 1.5.

503 DUST EXTRACTION DUCTWORK General Sheetmetal ductwork shall be provided for the dust extraction system and connections made to the equipment generally as shown on the drawings. Blast gates shall be included for the machine connections.

The approximate position of the duct run is indicated on the drawings, but the actual positions on site shall be adjusted to suit the final machine locations and connecting points so that all ducts are run vertically and horizontally, square and true.

The duct sizes shown on the drawings are internal dimensions of the air passage.

Ductwork shall be constructed in general accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards and with the following additional requirements:

- Ductwork shall be suitable for operation with suction pressure reduction to 0.2 bar below atmospheric and with dust laden and abrasive air stream.

- Ductwork may be fabricated from spiral wound tubing having a smooth internal bore; marketed as suitable for the duty.

- Transverse joins in circular ductwork may be welded using brazing metal, however the joins shall be made with the minimum of heat and all affected areas shall be wire brushed and coated with zinc rich paint.

- Slip joints shall be in the direction of air flow, mechanically fixed and sealed with paintable silicone. No upstream slip joints shall be permitted.

- Where flanged duct joints are used, the downstream end of the duct shall be bent round the face of the flange. The upstream end of the duct shall be inserted 50mm into the downstream duct. Flanges shall be jig drilled to a template to minimum clearance over bolt diameters.


504 EXPLOSION VENT DUCTWORK The explosion vent ductwork extending the explosion panels to the external wall of the plant enclosure shall 3 mm thick sheet metal, fully welded.

PART 6 ACOUSTIC LOUVRES Packaged type acoustic louvres shall be to size, numbers, length, location and type as shown on drawings and listed in the Schedule of Performance to provide the necessary attenuation, and shall not exceed the pressure drops specified for the air quantity handled. Acoustic louvres shall be as manufactured by Sound Attenuators, or approved equal, and shall have tested and certified performance characteristics of insulation loss, pressure loss and self noise generation.

Each acoustic louvre shall comprise a galvanised steel case with internal sound absorbing panels. Each panel shall consist of a fibreglass high density rockwool fill retained with fire-proof fibreglass scrim encased in a 0.6 mm thick perforated galvanised steel casing. The case shall be made from not less than 1.6 mm thick galvanised steel with continuous welded or grooved seams and with galvanised angle iron frames at each end fixed to the case. The case shall be suitably braced so as to be completely airtight and free from drumming or distortion at all pressures up to 1.25 kPa. Matching angle frames shall be supplied and shall be jig drilled so as to be interchangeable.

The casing and cells shall have a smooth finish, with all edges neatly butted. Raw edges, fixing straps or screws are not to protrude in to the air stream.

PART 7 AIR DIFFUSION EQUIPMENT 701 GENERAL

Diffusers, registers and grilles, shall be of the types, sizes, numbers and positions as shown on the drawings, for all air conditioning and ventilation systems.

The ceiling arrangement and type of suspension system, including type of air terminal fitting shall be checked prior to ordering equipment.

Volume control dampers shall be provided for all diffusers, registers and grilles.

OBD volume dampers shall be provided behind all return air and exhaust air grilles to give even air flow over the face of the grille.

All volume controls where mounted behind grilles and diffusers shall be finished in matt black paint. The interior ductwork visible through the face of grilles shall also be painted matt black.

Opposed blade dampers shall give volume control and even air distribution over the full face of the outlet without the introduction of noise. Opposed blade dampers shall have a sheet metal frame enclosure around the blades to give reasonably robust construction and to ensure vibration free operation.

Samples of all types of grilles and diffusers shall be submitted for approval prior to placing orders.

702 CEILING MOUNTED LINEAR BOOTS Linear slot diffusers shall be 1200mm long or of the length indicated on the drawings, having the number of slots selected for the air flow rate shown on the drawings for the particular application. Linear slots shall provide 180° of air pattern adjustment, by multiple individual elements within each slot, designed to permit the air flow from adjacent slots being directed horizontally under the ceiling in opposite directions, or any angle in between.

Linear diffusers shall be Holyoake single deflection LD series or approved equal

703 RETURN / RELIEF / EXHAUST AIR GRILLES – WALL AND CEILING MOUNTED Wall and ceiling mounted air grilles shall be half chevron removable core aluminium louvre type, with aluminium border frame.

Grille blades shall be positioned so that ductwork behind the grille is visible only from the adjacent service core wall.

Grilles shall have a free area of not less than 50% and shall have powder coated finish as selected by the Superintendent's Representative.

704 REGISTERS All universal type registers shall be of aluminium and/or steel construction and shall have two sets of vanes adjustable in the horizontal or vertical planes and shall be designed to give a satisfactory distribution of air


without the introduction of noise. A sponge rubber gasket shall be supplied around the frame of each register. The front set of vanes of each register shall be horizontal and the spacing of the horizontal and vertical blades shall not exceed 18mm. The vanes shall have an aerofoil shape. The registers shall be finished in baked enamel to a colour to be selected by the Superintendent's Representative. The register frame and core shall be such that no screw heads are visible on the face of the grille after fixing.

705 CURVED BLADE DIFFUSERS Curved blade ceiling diffusers shall be manufactured from extruded aluminium and finished in white baked enamel.

Ceiling blade ceiling diffusers shall be specifically designed for horizontal supply air duty, with extended curved blades to distribute the air without dumping.

Ceiling diffusers, where shown on the drawings for supply air shall fit the ceiling tile/suspension system. Flush ceiling type shall have flanges with concealed fixings.

706 DOOR GRILLES Door mounted grilles shall be Variflow (WA) Pty Ltd, Hart Engineering, or a similar product equivalent in function, quality etc. to the approval of the Superintendent's Representative with extruded aluminium inverted vee sight proof horizontal blades and extruded aluminium border frame fitting both front and back of the door or wall.

Grilles shall have a free area of not less than 50% and shall have powder coated finish to be advised by the Superintendent's Representative.

707 WEATHERPROOF LOUVRES Outside air louvre shall consist of extruded natural anodised aluminium blades mounted horizontally in an extruded aluminium frame. Each louvre shall have an aluminium bird screen of 12mm x 12mm x 1.6mm crimped mesh fixed to the inside face; shall be of the weatherproof type and shall have a resistance to air flow of less than 50 Pa when passing 2,500 l/s through each square metre of face area. Louvres shall be Hart Engineering or a similar product equivalent in function, quality etc to the approval of the Superintendent's Representative.

708 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS Volume damper sets shall be provided where specified and/or shown on the drawings.

The type of volume damper to be used for each application shall be as follows:

- Manually adjustable damper sets, opposed blade type, as used for volume control. - Manually adjustable dampers at air outlets and return grilles, as used for volume trimming. Note that

where the grille or louvre has been supplied as an architectural element, forming part of the mechanical services air circuit, a damper shall be attached to the rear of the louvre.

Damper Sets Dampers shall be constructed of extruded aluminium and shall be as manufactured by Bullock, or approved equal.

Damper sets used for volume control shall be of the opposed blade type.

Damper sets shall be arranged in substantial and rigid supporting frames and each blade shall be mounted on a 12mm shaft turning in sintered bronze bearings. All damper blades shall be interconnected by means of a suitable, non-corroding bar linkage for ganged operation.

The bar linkage shall positively connect all blades via a ball joint connection so that all blades rotate equally and close tightly against felt seals. All dampers shall provide positive shut-off and the damper linkages shall be free from unnecessary slackness.

Where damper sets are installed in ductwork or other inaccessible locations, the operating shafts shall extend through the duct and a lockable quadrant fitted. Damper position limits of open and closed shall be permanently marked.

Groups of damper blades shall be linked together for ganged operation.


709 FIRE DAMPERS Fusible Link Type Provide fire dampers where required by AS/NZS 1668.1 or by the regulations of any authority having jurisdiction over the works.

Fire dampers shall be Bullock Model 4900 or approved equivalent.

Fire materials, design, manufacture, rating, testing and marking shall comply with AS 1682.1-1990. Submit a copy of the test report for each size range before commencement of installation.

Install and commission fire dampers in accordance with AS 1682.2-1990.

PART 8 REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK 801 GENERAL

Refrigeration pipework shall be insulated in accordance with the National Construction Code 2016 Specification J5.4.

People handling refrigerant shall be licensed in accordance with the requirements of the National Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Licensing Scheme. Further information is available at www.arctick.org or 1300 884 483.

Pipework connecting the condensing sections to the air conditioning split units fan coil units shall be fabricated in new, clean, sealed lengths of hard drawn Refrigeration Grade copper tubing, installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

Pipework penetrations through walls shall be sealed closed to the room with Compriband or equivalent, approved compressible sealer, without injury to the EPDM insulation. Silicone mastic shall not be used for this purpose.

All joints in the refrigeration pipework shall be silver soldered to wrought copper capillary type fittings using 15% silver hard solder, carried out with dry nitrogen flowing within the pipework to prevent oxidation during jointing. The use of dry nitrogen during pipework fabrication is mandatory and shall be strictly adhered to. Failure to comply with this requirement shall result in rejection of the installation.

Vertical risers shall be provided with oil traps in accordance with accepted refrigeration practice, and the recommendations of the manufacturer.

802 TESTING General Refrigeration systems shall comply in all respects with AS1677 Parts 1 & 2 and shall be subject to the following pre-commissioning and commissioning tests. Equipment shall pass appropriate tests at the manufacturer's works and certification of the tests shall be submitted, on request, to the Superintendent's Representative.

Pressure Tests Pressure tests shall be carried out using dry nitrogen gas to a pressure of 1750kPa.

Compressors shall be isolated from the test circuit on pressures greater than 700kPa, if required to avoid damage to the mechanical seal of open unit compressors.

The liquid solenoid valve shall be energised or mechanically opened before the tests.

Insulation of the refrigeration system shall be left until the pressure tests are satisfactorily completed.

Leaks shall be detected with approved electronic detectors or by using soap and water on joints.

The ambient temperature and pressure shall be recorded and the test pressure of 1750kPa shall be held for at least twelve hours (overnight) or twenty four hours if possible, without a measurable pressure drop.

Pressure change for ambient change shall be accounted for.

Nitrogen manifold gauges will not be accepted for checking minor pressure variations.

Pressure test shall be repeated after leaks are corrected.

Evacuation tests The refrigeration system (including the compressor) shall be dehydrated, by means of a high vacuum pump to a pressure of 300 microns.


Line connections from the pump to the system shall be as short as possible and of as large a diameter as is practicable eg 10mm.

The pump and compressor shall be isolated and the system swept with dry nitrogen to a pressure of 350kPa.

Evacuate the system (not including the compressor) to 100 microns and hold for a minimum of two hours with the pump off. Break the vacuum with dry nitrogen gas.

Before further evacuation is commenced the compressor oil shall be added, line filters fitted, all valves open and controls connected.

The refrigeration system shall be again dehydrated to 100 microns and held in this condition for one hour with the vacuum pump off. Pressure should not rise above 250 microns during this period and should correspond to standard system pressure rise curves.

If the system fails to hold these conditions below 250 microns, the pump shall be brought back on line and the system further dehydrated until the requirements are met.

Purging nitrogen gas from the system shall be made from a point in the system as far away from the nitrogen inlet connections as possible. This will tend to sweep moisture and any particles out of the system.

803 CHARGING On completion of the tests, the vacuum shall be broken by the addition of the correct refrigerant quantity.

PART 9 AIR FILTERS 901 GENERAL

Air filters shall be installed where shown on the drawings and be of the type nominated in the Schedule of Performance.

Each filter shall be sized capable of handling the scheduled air quantity at the maximum effective face velocity specified, and shall meet the specified performance characteristics.

Filters shall comply with the requirements of AS1324 and prototypes shall have been tested by a NATA registered laboratory in accordance with AS1132. Reference shall be made to AS1323 for definition of terms employed.

Filters shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations complete with all accessories necessary for their proper performance. All filter connections to adjoining equipment, panelling or support framing shall be sealed airtight to prevent any air by-passing the filter media.

Adequate access shall be provided to each filter for inspection, maintenance and removal when necessary.

Filter sizes where nominated in the schedule have been used on the drawings to indicated the connecting sizes of the adjoining equipment, ductwork or apparatus housing. Make any adjustment to accommodate filters sized differently to those scheduled.

902 MULTI-VEE FILTERS Multi-vee filters shall be installed in the fan coil unit shown on the drawings.

Filters shall be easily removable for replacement and shall be capable of efficiently filtering the total quantity of air circulated. The air velocity over the filters shall not exceed 2.5 m/s, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Filters shall have efficiencies of 98% and 87% with dust types number 2 and 4 respectively when tested in accordance with AS1324. Filters shall be Farr 30/30, 100mm thick or a similar product equivalent in function, quality etc to the approval of the Superintendent.

903 PANEL FILTERS Panel filters shall be installed behind the weatherproof outside air louvres in the plantroom and minor supply air ventilation systems on the Ground floor and as nominated on the drawings.

Panel filters shall be of the disposable dry media type, of Email DY, Farr 20/20 or approved equivalent manufacture. Filters shall be 25mm thick.

Filters shall be designed to handle the specified total air quantities for each system with a face velocity not exceeding 2.5m/s, a maximum clean resistance to air flow of 30 Pa and minimum AS 1132 No. 4 dust average efficiency of 62%.


PART 10 INSULATION 1001 EXTERNAL ACOUSTIC INSULATION

External acoustic ductwork shall have a minimum A weighted insertion loss of 25.2db.

Ductwork where indicated on the drawings shall be externally insulated with a single layer of Pyrotek Soundlag 4525C or approved equivalent, in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

Reference: https://www.pyroteknc.com/products/soundlag/soundlag-4525c/

1002 INTERNAL SHEETMETAL INSULATION Ductwork where indicated on the drawings shall be internally insulated in accordance with the National Construction Code 2016 Specification J5.2.

1003 REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK INSULATION Refrigeration pipework insulated in accordance with the National Construction Code 2016 Specification J5.4.

General The insulation work specified shall be carried out by experienced personnel.

- Where clarification is required on the intent of this Specification and the Drawings, refer to the Superintendent's Representative for a ruling.

- The extent of ductwork insulation is shown on the drawings using markings detailed on the Legend.

- All internal insulating or acoustical materials including adhesives and surfacing materials used within ductwork, shafts, attenuating chambers, and the like shall be non-combustible in terms of AS1530 Part I and under conditions of fire or intense heat shall not give off toxic emissions, and shall have Early Fire Hazard Properties not exceeding the following indices when tested in accordance with AS1530 Part III.

Spread of Flame 0 Ignitibility 0 Heat Evolved 0 Smoke Developed 3

PART 11 ELECTRICAL 1101 GENERAL

The extent of work includes the design, supply, and installation, commissioning and testing, and handing over in working order the completed electrical systems associated with the Mechanical subcontract Works specified and indicated on the drawings, together with subsequent maintenance for the stipulated period.

The scope of the work of the electrical systems comprises the following principal items and services:

- Connection of sub-main power supply from the existing MSSB-1 located on the roof to new MSSB-2.

- Supply and install wiring to mechanical services equipment as scheduled in clause 1208 titled MSSB Schedule of Electrical and Controls Wiring, page 24.

1102 WORK BY ELECTRICAL TRADES CONTRACTOR - Supply of power supply adjacent to new MSSB-3. Final connection shall be by the Mechanical

Services Trades Contractor.

- Power and control wiring of toilet exhaust fan as further nominated in clause 1208 titled MSSB Schedule of Electrical and Controls Wiring, page 24.

1103 MOTOR STARTING Motor starting equipment shall be selected to suit the characteristics of the particular motor and drive and shall include approved current sensing overload devices. Motor starting devices shall satisfy the voltage fluctuation and interference requirements of the Western Power Regulation 263.

1104 QUALITY OF EQUIPMENT All equipment shall be new, of the best quality and of the class most suitable for the purpose specified.


1105 STANDARDS, REGULATIONS AND PERFORMANCE All equipment, apparatus and workmanship shall comply with The Standards Association of Australia, and all equipment and the installation shall be in accordance with The State Electricity Act and the requirements of Western Power.

1106 EARTHING SYSTEMS Earthing shall be carried out in accordance with AS3000 and the Supply Authority's requirements.

Earthing conductors shall be copper, of adequate cross section, and continuous throughout their entire length and sheathed in green coloured PVC.

1107 LABELLING AND COLOUR CODING All apparatus shall be labelled as to its designation and status. Each label shall be conspicuous and manufactured from three layer rigid material engraved to approval, particularly in respect of size and lettering.

The function of all ancillary apparatus, e.g. fuses, relays and in the case of fuses, the ratings also shall be clearly indicated. Fixings to the equipment shall use chrome plated, round head screws which will permit ready replacement.

Machine engraved characters, minimum size 5 mm high shall be used with colours which are fast.

Terminals shall be numbered in sequence by means of full length identification strips with engraved numbers.

All switch and control boards and internal equipment shall be labelled.

Each phase of cables and busbars shall be designated by its appropriate colour. Each piece of equipment, circuit breaker or fuse outlet shall be numbered on the label, the origin of sub mains and motor control panel number shall be indicated, these shall correspond with those shown on diagrams.

Controls wiring shall be numbered where joining motor control panel terminal strips using slip-on, coloured ferrules with printed numbers, crimp on plastic ferrules with engraved or moulded numbers, or self adhesive plastic tags with printed numbers.

Wiring diagrams shall show all circuit and corresponding terminal connection numbers.

Colour coding of all conductors shall be strictly in accordance with the AS3000.

1108 DRAWINGS AND WIRING DIAGRAMS General arrangement, schematic, wiring diagrams and 'As Constructed' record drawings shall be prepared and submitted in duplicate for approval.

1109 AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS On completion of the work under the Contract, provide approved 'As Constructed' schematic wiring diagrams. 'As Constructed' drawings shall conform with the requirements specified in Clause 1702, titled As Constructed Drawings, page 26.

1110 FIELD WIRING METHODS External Single insulated PVC cables enclosed in heavy duty rigid PVC conduit; with HDG mild steel conduit where subject to weather or mechanical damage. UV resistant PVC served flexible metallic conduit shall be used to connect to vibrating equipment where less than 1m apart.

Internal Cables run through ceiling spaces shall be PVC insulated and PVC sheathed multi-core cables, supported on cable trays.

Alternatively, cables may be single insulated PVC enclosed in heavy duty PVC conduit, secured to building surfaces.

1111 CABLES Cables shall be of the size, type, voltage and insulation grade as specified and shall;

- comply in all respects with AS3000, Western Power; relevant Australian and British Standards Specifications and installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions, adequately fixed and


braced with purpose made clips, cleats or supports to ensure that damage is minimised under fault conditions and adequate air is allowed to circulate around the cables at all times;

- be PVC insulated V-75 grade 0.6/1kV., voltage rating, with stranded copper conductors complying with AS3147 except where indicated otherwise;

- be installed between items of equipment without any joints and such that they are not bent, when installed or during installation, through radii less than their minimum bending radii, and in a manner such that they may be readily withdrawable for replacement purposes;

- be protected by rigid PVC conduits where passing through or installed in walls, floors and like structural partitions, and in all exposed situations.

PVC Insulated Cables (T.P.I.) Cables for control circuits and power circuits up to 16 mm² installed in occupied spaces or similar locations without false ceiling spaces shall be of thermoplastic insulated type ('building wire') enclosed throughout the entire circuit lengths within conduits and wired using the loop-in system, connecting conductors from point to point without joints being interposed.

PVC Insulated Pvc Sheathed Cables (PVC/PVC) Cables for power circuits 16 mm² and over shall be PVC insulated circular thermoplastic cables with orange coloured PVC sheathing overall, installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions using approved glands and lugs and fixed using proprietary, approved cable clamps and be supported from the structure directly in the case of single circuits and by means of cable trays for multi-circuits.

Shielded Cables Shielded cables shall be thermoplastic insulated, metal braided of metal wound and thermoplastic sheathed with the metal shielding earthed at each termination.

The type of shielded cable used shall be suitable for the particular controls application to the controls manufacturer's recommendations.

Cables shall be run in the same manner as specified for T.P.I. and T.P.S. cable systems, but away from AC power cables.

1112 CONDUITS Conduit and conduit fittings shall be rigid PVC with cemented type fittings to AS2053 except where otherwise indicated, of 20mm minimum diameter, with metallic conduits using screwed fittings to AS2052 used where exposed to weather or mechanical damage and galvanised metallic by a hot process where installed in damp situations or exposed to the weather.

Conduit shall be installed without 'tees' or 'elbows', swabbed through and inspected before any cables are inserted.

Cabling for different services, voltages and frequencies shall be installed within separate conduit systems.

Conduits where used for accommodating underfloor or underground services shall be Heavy Duty PVC.

1113 MOTOR CONTROL SWITCHBOARD General The motor control switchboard shall be fabricated strictly in accordance with the relevant sections of AS1136 Switchgear and Control Gear Assemblies suitable for 415/240 volt 50 Hz operation, with a minimum Degree of Protection IP 55, Safety Measure 1 Form 1 construction.

Prior to commencement of construction of the switchboards the Mechanical Contractor shall submit a detailed drawing for approval.

Electronic equipment associated with the DDC operating and temperature control system and interacting with the switchboards shall be mounted adjacent to the switchboards in lockable sheetmetal enclosures.

The switchboards shall be designed for ease of installation, inspection, cleaning and repairs and for use where long life and continuity of operation are the prime considerations and shall ensure satisfactory performance under such variations in load, pressure and atmospheric conditions that may be encountered in service.

Mechanical switchboards shall have the facility to transmit alarms via the BMS. All switchboard wiring is to be numbered by appropriate ferrules and is to conform to the Australian Standard.


Fault Current Levels The prospective fault current level at the mechanical services switchboards is assumed to be 10 kA.

Load Balancing The currents drawn across the three phases at the Mechanical Services Switchboards shall be balanced to within 10% of each other.

Construction The switchboards shall be fabricated from commercial grade zinc anneal sheet steel, having edges straight and smooth with machine formed folds and continuously welded joints.

The front shall present a smooth, regular even finish with only switches, handles, pilot lights and like equipment for operational use protruding through the front switchboard.

The switchboard shall be equipped with wiring channels and cable zones of ample dimensions and access to accommodate both internal and external wiring, including provision for future cabling.

The board shall incorporate an approved means of supporting all wiring with bushed holes between compartments.

Switchboards shall be of the front access type and provided with adequate cable space within the depth of the board for cables entering from the rear, base or top as applicable, with provision for cable anchoring and ensuring that no cabling covers live parts or restricts access.

Doors shall be using a folded or pressed construction, adequately stiffened, braced, fitted with gaskets and mounted on chrome plated pintle hinges.

Finishes All Material shall be protected to minimise the effects of corrosion and galvanic action.

External lifting handles, bolt heads, catches, locks, nuts and screws shall be stainless steel or chromium plated.

All fixings into painted surfaces shall have washers and felt or nylon washers and be of the captive type.

Ferrous metal shall be cleaned, freed from rust, grease and scale and have rough surfaces filled and smoothed. Surfaces shall then be painted using one coat or rust inhibiting primer and undercoat of zinc enriched paint and two coats of gloss enamel, in selected colours to AS K185, unless specified otherwise.

Power Isolating Switches The motor control sub board shall be provided with a main triple pole isolating switch adequately rated to carry the full load current of all items of equipment including future equipment. Main switches shall be similar to ‘Clipsal “T” Series’.

Circuit Breakers To protect the outgoing circuits from the motor control switchboards, miniature circuit breakers are preferred. Miniature over current circuit breakers (MCBs) shall comply with the requirements of AS3111 and 2184 and moulded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) shall comply with the requirements of AS 2184.

All circuit breakers shall have breaking capacities adequate for the maximum prospective fault currents to which they may be subjected.

MCBs shall be installed within the switchboards in accordance with the Manufacturer’s instructions using standard fittings and accessories, such that an MCB may be installed or replaced without disturbing adjacent units.

Three pole MCBs shall be physically equivalent to three single pole MCBs such that ready interchangeability can be achieved.

Contactors and Motor Starters Contactors shall be provided for all motor circuits, whether started on reduced voltage or direct on line. Contactors shall not be used with VSD controlled motor circuits.

Contactors and motor starters shall be uniform manufacture throughout and conform to the requirements of AS1029 and AS1202. Contactors and motor starters shall be of Sprecher and Schuh manufacture, suitable for rail mounting in the smaller ranges.


Relays and Time Delay Relays Relay and time delay relays shall be interlocked to give fail safe operation. Time delays shall be provided to properly time the starting and stopping sequences and to limit the number of starts per hour to within the capacity of the motor starters. Start limit timers shall be of the “stop to start” delay type.

Relays shall be Izumi Denki, NHP, Omron or approved equal, multipole, suitable for continuous energisation and completely enclosed in translucent polycarbonate cases, with pin or blade connections for plugging in to matching front wired bases complete with screw terminals.

Terminals and Terminations All outgoing control circuits shall be connected to tunnel type rail mounted terminals similar to Sprecher and Schuh VR Series or equal approved.

Cables shall be terminated using crimp pins similar to Telemecanique DZ5 cable ends or other approved alternative.

Where the termination arrangement of equipment permits, then cables shall be fitted with crimp lugs in lieu of the above pins.

Motors shall have their power circuit cables connected directly to the motor starter, fuse or associated switchgear as appropriate.

Labels All components shall be identified with black traffolyte labels with white upper case lettering glued securely to the switchboard beneath the equipment to which it refers. Labels shall not be glued to equipment covers. Labels shall indicate the true function of the instruments, without having to refer to the controls diagrams.

All switchboard components shall be clearly labelled.

1114 VARIABLE SPEED AC DRIVES The variable speed drives shall be supplied and installed to vary the speed of fans as scheduled. Variable speed drives shall be located in the switchboard. The drive shall be mounted so that the output screen is at a convenient level for viewing.

The variable speed drive shall be of the variable frequency type approved by Western Power for continuous operation when connected to a standard 3-phase squirrel cage induction motor. The variable speed controller shall be capable of modulating the speed of the fan motor down to 30% of synchronous speed and shall be entirely compatible with the motor such that the combination of motor and controller will provide a quiet, reliable speed control without hunting.

The controller shall accept a digital start/stop signal, a 0-10 VDC control input; a 4-20mA output speed signal and a fault relay; to indicate at the DDC graphic display, status, fault and percentage of synchronous speed.

The controller shall soft start the fan motor and accept a contact opening to stop.

Speed control shall be set during commissioning.

The motor speed controller shall be equipped with integrated motor coils; radio frequency interference (RFI) filters and harmonic current filters. No motor current de-rating shall be permitted and motor noise at low speeds shall be compensated for automatically.

The motor speed frequency controller shall be selected to suit the pump motor power input and shall be Danfoss VLT 6000 series IP54, selected to meet all the above criteria.

PART 12 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION AND CONTROLS 1201 GENERAL

The automatic operating and temperature control systems, shall form an integral part of the Contract, and shall be designed, selected, supplied and installed by a competent controls subcontractor, who shall also be required to liaise closely with the specialist Mechanical Trades Contractor's electrical subcontractor, so as to provide fully functional and automatically operating systems.

Electronic controls shall be provided on a standalone basis to air cooled air conditioning equipment and ventilation systems.

A skilled serviceman shall be provided to instruct the operating personnel in the operation of the control systems at arranged times during commissioning or during the maintenance period.


1202 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION Air Conditioning Units Local push button switches shall be provided to each air conditioning unit to enable operation as required.

- Multiple cassette units shall be controlled via one controller in the room served.

- A central master controller shall be installed to override all units in a location to be confirmed.

Supply and Exhaust Air Systems - Outside air (SAF) fans shall start and stop in conjunction with their respective air conditioning units.

- Refer to clause 1208 titled MSSB Schedule of Electrical and Controls Wiring, page 24 for coordination with the Electrical Trades Contractor.

- Individual fans shall have ON/OFF switches with indicator lights installed local to the system served.

1203 CONTROLS EQUIPMENT Remote Element Temperature Sensors Remote element air temperature sensors shall be wall mounting protected type, providing a limited local temperature adjustment of ±1.5°K around the fixed set-point.

The terminal section of remote element temperature sensors shall be external, and sealed weather and dust proof.

Temperature sensor elements shall be negative temperature co-efficient, linearised thermistors, or approved equal.

Start/Stop Control & After Hours Operation Push Buttons Push button switches shall provide both start / stop and after hours operation of each air conditioning unit.

The push button switches shall include a neon indicator 'RUN' light and the switch plate shall be engraved with appropriate operating instructions.

Activation of the push button runs the related air conditioning system for the period set by a local timer. Activation of push button switches during operation shall switch individual air conditioning systems off.

1204 WIRING METHODS All wiring for the electronic control system shall be shielded cable of a type recommended by the control manufacturer to prevent control system pick up of spurious signals.

1205 POWER SUPPLIES The power supply for the control system shall be derived from the air conditioning switchboard.

Power supply(s) shall be at the voltage required for the particular system.

1206 LABELS All components shall be identified with black traffolyte labels with white upper case lettering glued securely to the switchboard beneath the equipment to which it refers. Labels shall not be glued to equipment covers. Labels shall indicate the true function of the instruments, without having to refer to the controls diagrams.

1207 DRAWINGS The controls supplier shall produce and submit to the Superintendent's Representative for approval, comprehensive control diagrams and installation drawings, which shall show interface connection points with the electrical control diagram. All control component terminal numbers shall be shown on the schematic.

Upon completion of the project, one plasticised or glazed print of controls drawings shall be provided for each system. 'As Constructed' drawings shall conform to the requirements specified in clause 1702, titled As Constructed Drawings, page 26.


1208 MSSB SCHEDULE OF ELECTRICAL AND CONTROLS WIRING MSSB-2 Located on the Roof Adjacent to Condensing Units Item of Equipment Power Supply

(Nominal Operating based on nominal equipment selections)

Power and Control Wiring and Switching by Electrical Contractor

Final Connection by Mechanical Trades Contractor

All Power & Control Wiring by Mechanical Trades Contractor

CU-1 40A 3∅ - X X CU-2 24A 3∅ - X X CU-3 40A 3∅ - X X CU-4 31A 3∅ - X X CU-5 24A 3∅ - X X Cassette units 0.4A 1∅each - X X EF-1 Welding Bay 6.2A 3∅

(3 kW Motor) - X X

VSD Required EF-2 Chem. Store 0.25A 1∅ - X X EF-3 Finishing Booth 6.2 A 3∅

(3 kW Motor) - X X

VSD Required EF-4 Toilet & Uni 1.28A 1∅ X X - EF-5 Laser Exhaust 1.3A 1∅ - X X SAF-1 GF Breakout 0.8A 1∅ - X X SAF-2 GF Plan Studio 0.8A 1∅ - X X SAF-3 GF Staff 0.62A 1∅ - X X SAF-4 GF Staff Study 0.62A 1∅ - X X SAF-5 FF Staff Study 0.32A 1∅ - X X SAF-6 STEM 1.85A 1∅ - X X SAF-7 Science 5 1.85A 1∅ - X X SAF-8 Science 4 1.85A 1∅ - X X SAF-9 Science 3 1.85A 1∅ - X X

MSSB-3 Located in the Ground Floor Equipment Room Item of Equipment Power Supply

(Nominal Operating based on nominal equipment selections)

Control Wiring and Switching by Electrical Contractor

Final Connection by Mechanical Trades Contractor

All Power & Control Wiring by Mechanical Trades Contractor

Air Compressor 7.5kW 3∅ - X X Dust Collector 11kW 3∅ - X X EC-1 7.85A 1∅ - X X EC-2 7.85A 1∅ - X X

Note: Speed Controllers for fans shall be mounted adjacent to the respective fan to be utilised during commissioning of ventilation systems.

PART 13 NOISE AND VIBRATION 1301 GENERAL

Attention shall be paid to all rotating equipment for prevention of noise and vibration. The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall be responsible for the correction of any noise or vibration caused by the equipment, which in the opinion of the Superintendent's Representative, is unusual or excessive.

The system shall maintain the lowest possible noise level in all spaces which is consistent with that associated with an education installation. The target noise levels shall be in accordance with Table 1 of AS/NZS 2107:2016 "Acoustics - Recommended Design Sound Levels and Reverberation Times for Building Interiors". Special features for mounting the equipment and pipework have been incorporated with this Specification and the drawings and shall be adhered to.

1302 VIBRATION The following minimum precautions shall be taken to prevent the generation and transmission of vibration to the building structure.


Machinery Machinery shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall be isolated from the building structure.

Vibration isolators shall be selected with due regard to the weight and speed of the equipment to be isolated and shall have isolating efficiencies as specified for the particular equipment or in any case, not less than 98%.

Connections The connection of electrical cables, piping and ductwork to vibrating machinery shall be sufficiently flexible to prevent transmission of vibration.

Piping Pipework shall be designed to have sufficient flexibility where connected to vibrating machinery and shall be effectively isolated with rubber in shear mounts from the building structure to prevent the transmission of vibration.

PART 14 PAINTING AND LABELLING All equipment, pipework and ductwork, installed under this Contract where exposed to the weather or to view external or internal to the building shall be painted.

All painting shall be done by experienced tradesmen with first class quality paints brought to Site in the manufacturer's sealed containers. All coats of paint on any one item shall be of the same type and manufacture and shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer.

The colour scheme shall be as agreed with the Superintendent's Representative.

1401 GALVANISED IRON Galvanised iron surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease or other contaminant and artificially weathered before painting.

1402 PAINTING (EXPOSED TO WEATHER) All surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all grease, rust, scale welding flux and the like. The surface shall then be given one coat of heavy duty anti corrosive primer (Emergard or a similar product equivalent in function, quality etc. to the approval of the Superintendent's Representative). The second coat shall be an anti-corrosive protecting coating (Emer-coat or a similar product equivalent in function, quality etc to the approval of the Superintendent's Representative). The final coat shall be a heavy duty anti corrosive gloss enamel of the colour designated in the attached Schedule.

1403 SWITCHBOARDS AND CONTROL PANELS The switchboards shall be supplied on Site, factory finished with Dulon automotive lacquer of the colour scheduled. The switchboards and control panels shall be suitably protected during installation. Any chips, marks or scratches, of the paintwork shall be retouched to the satisfaction of the Superintendent's Representative.

1404 LABELLING Refer to clause 1107 titled Labelling and Colour Coding on page 19 for electrical labelling requirements.

PART 15 SETTING INTO OPERATION AND ACCEPTANCE TESTS 1501 GENERAL

On completion of the installation work, commission, start up, operate, test and adjust the air conditioning systems; the exhaust systems and the control system and the electrical systems.

Provide all instruments, tools, materials and labour required to perform the commissioning tests.

Adjust all air and water quantities to within -0% to +10% of the air quantities shown on the drawings or nominated in this Specification and make such further minor adjustments to air conditioning supply air quantities as are later found necessary to maintain satisfactory space conditions.

Outlet air quantities shall be balanced using an anemometer traverse for registers and grilles, to a tolerance of ± 5%.

Test and adjust all air conditioning system controls and conduct capacity tests on the systems, under as near as possible the specified conditions.

Submit a commissioning report to the Superintendent's Representative showing the following information:


- Settings of all operating controls. - Air conditioning units' air flow rates; entering and leaving temperatures; fan coil unit and condensing

unit amperage; and the operation of all temperature control systems for each system. - Operation of the exhaust air fans including motor amperages, air quantities and static pressures.

PART 16 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall visit the Site at three monthly intervals to completely service and generally maintain the plant and the complete installation. Such servicing shall include lubrication of the equipment installed under the Contract in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall also check all operating and temperature controls, belt tensions, electrical switchgear and where necessary shall make adjustments to the equipment to ensure trouble free operation to maintain plant operating efficiency. The Preventative Maintenance Period shall start on the same date as the Defects Liability Period and shall run for twelve calendar months.

The Mechanical Trades Contractor shall, after each visit to Site, submit to the Superintendent's Representative a completed Maintenance Service Form in duplicate signed by a representative of the owner, containing the following information:

- Lubrication check chart completed, confirming that routine lubrication has been checked and carried out on all machinery in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

- Report of general running of complete system, including the operation of automatic temperature controls.

- Any abnormal operation shall be made good and detailed in the report.

PART 17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 1701 GENERAL

On completion of the installation supply two (2) complete sets of operating instructions for use by the Client's personnel who will be operating and maintaining the plant. Manuals adequate for basic plant operation shall be provided prior to issue of Certificate of Practical Completion.

The bound operating instructions shall be complete with full wiring diagrams and functional diagrams of the installation indicating all equipment, controls and instruments, and shall comprise:

- Index. - Description and Operating Instructions. - List of all equipment giving manufacturer, agent and nameplate details. - Maintenance instructions for each item of equipment. - Manufacturers' data sheets or catalogue. - Electrical wiring and control diagrams. - Schedule of final balance figures. - As-constructed plans, elevations and sections, folded to A4, and enclosed in plastic sheath envelopes. - The manuals shall be separately bound in vinyl A4 3 ring binders and shall be appropriately labelled on

the spine and face.

1702 AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS Drawings shall be submitted as required by and in compliance with the current version of "CADD Protocols for Contractual Deliverables", produced by the Department of Housing and Works.


PART 18 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE 1801 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – VRV AIR CONDENSING UNITS

Unit Number CU1 CU2 CU3 Nominal Total Cooling Capacity 85.7 kW 101.7 kW 90.6 kW Ambient Temperature 38°C 38°C 38°C System Type 2 Pipe VRV 2 Pipe VRV 2 Pipe VRV Nominal Selection RXYQ32TSY1A RXYQ38TSY1A RXYQ34TSY1A

Electrical Requirements 64A, 3ø Excluding Cassettes

71A, 3ø Excluding Cassettes

62A, 3ø Excluding Cassettes

1802 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – VRV AIR CONDITIONING UNITS Unit Number CC-G-1-1 CC-G-1-2 CC-G-2-1 CC-G-2-2 Room Staff Study Staff Study Staff Seminar Staff Seminar Room Design 22.5°CDB

50% RH 22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

Total Cooling Capacity 6.5 kW 6.5 kW 6.5 kW 6.5 kW Sensible Cooling Capacity 5.6 kW 5.6 kW 5.6 kW 5.6 kW Heating Capacity 7.7 kW 7.7 kW 7.7 kW 7.7 kW Supply Air Quantity 317 l/s 317 l/s 317 l/s 317 l/s System Type 2 Pipe VRV

Cassette 2 Pipe VRV Cassette

2 Pipe VRV Cassette

2 Pipe VRV Cassette

Nominal Selection Daikin FXFQ63PVE8

Daikin FXFQ63PVE8

Daikin FXFQ63PVE8

Daikin FXFQ63PVE8

Electrical Requirements 0.4A, 1ø 0.4A, 1ø 0.4A, 1ø 0.4A, 1ø

Unit Number CC-G-3-1 CC-G-3-2 CC-G-3-3 CC-G-3-4 Room Planning

Studio Planning Studio

Planning Studio

Planning Studio

Room Design 22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH



2 Pipe VRV Cassette

2 Pipe VRV Cassette


Daikin FXFQ63PVE8

Daikin FXFQ63PVE8

Daikin FXFQ80PVE8

Electrical Requirements 0.4A, 1ø 0.4A, 1ø 0.4A, 1ø 0.5, 1ø


Unit Number CC-G-4-1 CC-G-4-2 CC-G-4-3 CC-G-4-4 Room Breakout

Gallery Breakout Gallery

Breakout Gallery

Breakout Gallery

Room Design 22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH



2 Pipe VRV Cassette

2 Pipe VRV Cassette


Daikin FXFQ80PVE8

Daikin FXFQ80PVE8

Daikin FXFQ80PVE8

Electrical Requirements 0.5, 1ø 0.5, 1ø 0.5, 1ø 0.5, 1ø

Unit Number CC-G-5-1 CC-G-5-2 CC-G-5-3 CC-G-5-4 Room STEM Studio STEM Studio STEM Studio STEM Studio Room Design 22.5°CDB

50% RH 22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH



2 Pipe VRV Cassette

2 Pipe VRV Cassette


Daikin FXFQ125PVE8

Daikin FXFQ125PVE8

Daikin FXFQ125PVE8


Unit Number CC-G-6-1 CC-G-6-2 CC-G-6-3 CC-G-7-1 Room Staff Study Staff Study Meeting Room Science Lab 5 Room Design 22.5°CDB

50% RH 22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH



2 Pipe VRV Cassette

2 Pipe VRV Cassette


Daikin FXFQ63PVE8

Daikin FXFQ63PVE8

Daikin FXFQ63PVE8



Unit Number CC-G-7-2 CC-G-7-3 CC-G-7-4 CC-G-8-1 Room Science Lab 5 Science Lab 5 Science Lab 5 Science Lab 4 Room Design 22.5°CDB

50% RH 22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH



2 Pipe VRV Cassette

2 Pipe VRV Cassette


Daikin FXFQ80PVE8

Daikin FXFQ80PVE8

Daikin FXFQ80PVE8

Electrical Requirements 0.4A, 1ø 0.5, 1ø 0.5, 1ø 0.5, 1ø

Unit Number CC-G-8-2 CC-G-8-3 CC-G-8-4 CC-G-9-1 Room Science Lab 4 Science Lab 4 Science Lab 4 Science Lab 3 Room Design 22.5°CDB

50% RH 22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH



2 Pipe VRV Cassette

2 Pipe VRV Cassette


Daikin FXFQ40PVE8

Daikin FXFQ40PVE8

Daikin FXFQ40PVE8


Unit Number CC-G-9-2 CC-G-9-3 CC-G-9-4 Room Science Lab 3 Science Lab 3 Science Lab 3 Room Design 22.5°CDB

50% RH 22.5°CDB 50% RH

22.5°CDB 50% RH

Total Cooling Capacity 6.5 kW 6.5 kW 6.5 kW Sensible Cooling Capacity 5.6 kW 5.6 kW 5.6 kW Heating Capacity 7.7 kW 7.7 kW 7.7 kW Supply Air Quantity 317 l/s 317 l/s 317 l/s System Type 2 Pipe VRV


2 Pipe VRV Cassette


Daikin FXFQ40PVE8

Daikin FXFQ40PVE8

Electrical Requirements 0.3A, 1ø 0.3A, 1ø 0.3A, 1ø

1803 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – DUST COLLECTOR UNIT Label DX-1 Duty Dust Collection Volumetric Air Flow 2350 !/s Duct Static Pressure 1750 Pa Dust Containers 3 x 110! Motor(s) No./kW/Phases 1/15.0/3 Nominal Selection: Make/Model Nederman MZ90 Sound Level (dBA @ 3m) 80 Accessories Slide off acoustic motor hood & discharge

silencer reducing noise level to 76.3db(A)


1804 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – AIR COMPRESSOR Label AC-1 Duty Compressed Air Volumetric Air Flow 23 !/s Free Air Delivery Nominal Pressure 10 bar Storage Tank Capacity 270 ! Pre-filter Performance Dust to 1 micron / Oil carryover to 1 micron After Filter Performance Dust to 0.01 micron / Oil carryover to 0.01 micron Motor(s) No./kW/Phases 1 / 11kW / 3∅Nominal Selection: Make/Model Atlas Copco / G11 EP

1805 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – FANS Label EF-1 EF-2 EF-3 EF-4 EF-5 Duty Welding

Bay

Chemical Store

Finishing Hood

Toilets Ground Laser Exhaust

Volumetric Air Flow 1980 !/s 100 !/s 2000 !/s 460 !/s 300 !/s Static Pressure 360 Pa 80 Pa 360 Pa 175 Pa 300 Pa Maximum Fan Speed 1125 rpm 1380rpm 1125 rpm 900rpm 23 r/s Motor(s) kW/Phases 3.0 kW 3∅ 0.05 kW 1∅ 3.0 kW 3∅ 0.36kW 1∅ 0.27kW 1∅ Fan Type Roof

Mounted Centrifugal

Roof Mounted Centrifugal




Nominal Selection: Make Model

Fantech HUD564

Fantech CE224D

Fantech HUD564

Fantech CE456V

Fantech CE356V

Sound Level (dBA @ 3m) Refer Table Below

38 Refer Table Below

47 51

Accessories VSD Speed Controller

VSD Speed Controller

Speed Controller

Fans EF-1 & EF-3 Maximum Discharge Noise Levels

Tag OUTLET Noise Insertion Loss (dB)

63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k EF-1 75 82 80 80 79 71 66 64 EF-3 75 82 80 80 79 71 66 64

Label EF-7 SAF-1 SAF-2 SAF-3 SAF-4 Duty STEM Laser

Exhaust Outside Air Breakout

Outside Air Planning

Outside Air Staff Study

Outside Air Staff Seminar

Volumetric Air Flow 300 !/s 200 !/s 240 !/s 120 !/s 120 !/s Static Pressure 300 Pa 100 Pa 100 Pa 130 Pa 130 Pa Maximum Fan Speed 23 r/s 900 rpm 900 rpm 1240 rpm 1240 rpm Motor(s) kW/Phases 0.27kW 1∅ 0.17 kW 1∅ 0.17 kW 1∅ 0.14 kW 1∅ 0.14 kW 1∅Fan Type Roof

Mounted Centrifugal






Fantech CE356V

Fantech CE406S

Fantech CE406S

Fantech CE314S

Fantech CE314S

Sound Level (dBA @ 3m) 51 44 44 47 47 Accessories Speed

Controller Speed Controller

Speed Controller

Speed Controller

Speed Controller

Note: EF-7 is a replacement fan within the existing building. There is not an EF-6 on this stage of the works.


Label SAF-5 SAF-6 SAF-7 SAF-8 SAF-9 Duty Outside Air

FF Study Outside Air STEM

Outside Air Science Lab 5



Volumetric Air Flow 150 !/s 320 !/s 320 !/s 320 !/s 320 !/s Static Pressure 100 Pa 140 Pa 140 Pa 140 Pa 140 Pa Maximum Fan Speed 900 rpm 900 rpm 900 rpm 900 rpm 900 rpm Motor(s) No./kW/Phases 0.07 kW 1∅ 0.36 kW 1∅ 0.36 kW 1∅ 0.36 kW 1∅ 0.36 kW 1∅ Fan Type Roof

Mounted Centrifugal






Fantech CE356S

Fantech CE456S

Fantech CE456S

Fantech CE456S

Fantech CE456S

Sound Level (dBA @ 3m) 43 47 47 47 47 Accessories Speed

Controller Speed Controller

Speed Controller

Speed Controller

Speed Controller

1806 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – EVAPORATIVE COOLING UNITS Unit Number EC-1 EC-2 Serves Materials

Technology Studio Materials Technology Studio

Fan Type Centrifugal Centrifugal Supply Air Quantity 2720 !/s 2720 !/s Estimated Static Pressure 150 Pa 150 Pa Fan Speed Variable Speed Variable Speed Motor Size / Phases 1.5 kW/1∅ 1.5 kW/1∅Construction Injection Moulded

CELdek Pads Injection Moulded CELdek Pads

Nominal Selection :Make / Model Bonaire B33 Bonaire 33

1807 FINISHING HOOD Label FH-1

Stages of Filtration 1

Air Quantity 2000 l/s

Width 1800mm

Height 2200mm

Depth 1000mm

Compliance AS4114

Recommended Manufacturer Smiths Spray Booths

1808 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – ACOUSTIC LOUVRES Tag Air

Flow !/s

Maximum Pressure Loss

Dimensions Insertion Loss (dB)

Width Height Depth 63 125 250 500 1k 2k 4k 8k AL-1 2350 25 Pa 1500 1000 300 9 12 15 18 21 22 21 20

1809 SCHEDULE OF PERFORMANCE – VSD DRIVES Refer to the Schedule of Mechanical Services Switchboards for equipment connected to variable speed drives.

ELECTRICAL 16000 Electrical design and install

South Coast Baptist College Stage 1B Page 1 of 33 SECTION 16000 ELECTRICAL

0902 ELECTRICAL DESIGN AND INSTALL

1 GENERAL

This specification section shall be read in conjunction with whole specification inclusive of the General Conditions of the Contract, Contract Preliminaries, Architectural drawings, Structural drawings and the Services drawings. Work called for by one and not the other shall be fully executed. Examine the Contract drawings to establish the extent of work.

1.1 CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT Inspect the site and make due allowance for existing site physical encumbrances and all idiosyncrasies with any existing services prior to submitting a tender. No cost additions will be accepted during the course of the works due to non-completion of a pre-tender site inspection and associated due diligence. Place orders to ensure delivery times in accordance with the Contract Program. No variation claims will be accepted for delays due to the lack of available materials. Terms in use within this trade package are clarified as follows: – ‘Provide’ shall mean the supply, installation, test and commissioning of the item, in accordance with

this specification and to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. – ‘Supply’ shall mean supply and delivery without installation. – ‘Installation’ shall mean complete installation of the item, excluding supply, in accordance with this

specification and to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. – ‘Submit’ shall mean submit to the Superintendent. – ‘Approved’ shall mean approved by the Superintendent. – ‘Provisional Sum’ shall mean an amount of money included in the contract documents to cover works

proposed as part of the contract for which full information cannot be made available prior to the calling of tenders and letting of a contract. Unless specifically stated herein, a provisional sum includes labour, materials, and all costs and margins but excludes GST.

– ‘The Contractor’ shall mean the company contracted to complete the project by the Superintendent or Principal.

– ‘The Consulting Engineer’ shall mean BEST Consultants Pty Ltd.

1.2 REGULATIONS All work performed and equipment provided, shall comply fully with statutory authority regulations, bylaws and the requirements of the Building Code of Australia, Relevant Australian and Industry Standards, indicated but not limited to the schedule below: – ASNZS3000 Wiring Rules – AS3008.1 Electrical Installation - Selection of Cables – AS2293.1 Emergency Lighting in Buildings – AS3080 Telecommunications Installations – AS2201 Intruder Alarm systems. – Western Power regulations – Office of Energy WAER, and other applicable documents – ACMA Regulations – Local Building Authorities – Building Code of Australia – Worksafe Australia Referenced Standards are deemed to be the latest version available at the date of invitation to quote.



1.3 PERFORMANCE General Take responsibility for the maintaining of standards of materials and workmanship. The Superintendent will make periodic visits to site and instruct the Contractor on what constitutes adequate or inadequate work. Take responsibility for the coordination of all work, both directly and associated, with this trade package and with all other trades on site. Advise the Superintendent in writing when the contract works are complete. All materials and equipment purchased for this contract shall be inclusive of all royalties, patent rights and fees. Remove all debris and rubbish generated by the contracted scope of work, on a daily basis. Equipment Location Do note scale off drawings, final location of equipment shall be in accordance with good working practice and to the Superintendents approval, including;- – alignment with building structure; – luminaires to be equally offset from walls, and of equi-centre spacing; – outlets in similar position shall be from same manufacturer (eg light switch, socket outlet, data outlet,

etc), unless specifically nominated for that location

1.4 ALTERNATIVE MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT The specification of a proprietary item does not necessarily imply exclusivity for that item but shall be deemed to indicate required properties of quality, appearance, finish, method of construction, performance and similar. Tenders shall be deemed to have included the specified equipment and materials, as shown in the Contract Documents. Cost savings resulting from the acceptance of alternative equipment and materials shall be treated as a Contract variation. Alternatives enabling a cost saving to the Principal may be submitted for review, subject to the alternative not resulting in a reduction of quality, performance or appearance. Review of the alternative will attract cost from the Electrical Consultant, Superintendent, Principal and any other affected parties (eg Mechanical Consultant, etc). The Contractor shall pay all costs associated with the review of the alternative, irrespective of the outcome of the review process. These costs shall be charged at commercial rates and shall include for all time and redesign required to ensure alternatives are suitable for use. When offering an alternative for approval, provide all available technical information, test reports carried out by approved independent testing Authorities, any associated works required by other trades and any other relevant information requested by the Superintendent. Technical information shall include but not be limited to; manufacturer, supplier, catalogue reference number, product brochure and comparison sheet of technical performance between specified and the alternative offered fitting. Additional technical information required for the assessment of alternative light fittings shall include lighting calculations for all areas indicating illumination and glare levels in accordance with AS 1680 and other relevant Australian Standards. All lighting calculations must be certified by an independent qualified Engineer. The Superintendent may in its absolute discretion adopt or reject any or all alternatives. No claims shall arise from any rejection nor, unless otherwise agreed, shall adoption of an alternative be grounds for any claim for extension of time. No claim shall arise from any refusal of the Superintendent to approve a substitution. No substitution will be authorized through failure of the Contractor to place orders in sufficient time to avoid delays to the Works other than in circumstances where the Contractor can demonstrate that delay in material supply is or was beyond the Contractor’s control.

1.5 VARIATIONS Variations to the contract shall be agreed at rates commensurate with the scope of change and the original tender price.



1.6 COORDINATION WITH ARCHITECTURAL AND OTHER TRADE DRAWINGS Refer to Architectural and other trade drawings for relative locations of all equipment or furniture and coordinate the positioning of electrical outlets and equipment. Where such is not detailed, liaise with relevant trade for exact positions and requirements to approval by Superintendent.

1.7 SAMPLES Provide on request samples of equipment, fixtures, switches, outlets, materials and/or workmanship, identification labels and the like. Samples of the items listed below shall be submitted for approval prior to purchase, at least 10 working days before approval is required. Samples shall be clearly marked with the manufacturer’s name and catalogue number and project luminaire number. – One working sample of each type of light fitting, clearly labelled with the letter designated from the

light fitting schedule (light fitting shall be complete with flex plug, lamp and control gear for complete operation).

– Sample of emergency shut off button and reset switch. – Sample of socket outlet. After approval, samples will be available for incorporation in the works.

1.8 MAKING GOOD Repair all damages incurred in providing the services outlined with materials compatible with the surrounding material and finish off flush with the surface on which they occur to approval.

1.9 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT Fabricated equipment shall be of robust and symmetrical construction. All fabricated equipment shall be approved before being installed. Metalwork shall be neatly and accurately cut and free from undulations or any other distortions. Bends and folds in sheet metalwork shall be made by the use of a suitable bending machine. All joints and folds shall be seam or spot welded. Welding shall be neatly executed.

1.10 FIXING Fixings shall be neatly drilled to the length required. Fixing in masonry joints, plasterboard and the use of self-tapping screws in sheet metal, fixings from explosive power tools and nails are not approved.

1.11 PAINTING Paint all equipment including cable supports, cable trays and ducts, conduit, support framework and all fabricated equipment unless otherwise specified or where concealed from view in ceiling spaces. Finished surfaces of all paintwork shall be free from bubbles, runs or any other imperfections. All surfaces to be painted shall be free of rust, scale, oil and other foreign matter, then painted with one coat of etching primer, zinc primer or similar corrosion resistant barrier to suit the material being painted and the finishing coats to be applied. This shall be followed by two coats of approved wet spray coloured acrylic or powdercoat paint in accordance with AS/NZS4506. All external metal work shall be aluminium, hot dip galvanised or stainless steel. Paint finish to external metalwork shall be finished with two coats of approved colour, Dulux or equal two pack Polyurethane epoxy paint unless otherwise specified as powdercoat, where it shall be provided in accordance with AS/NZS4506 Cat 5. Carry out all painting in accordance with the paint manufacturers recommendations and data sheets.

1.12 PROTECTION The installation at Practical Completion shall be in an "as new" condition. During construction undertake the following: – Provide proper care to protect all apparatus, materials or equipment stored or installed on site. – Protect the building fabric and finishes from damage that may be caused whilst executing the works.

Initiate procedures with site labour to identify particular hazards. – Provide durable protective covers for equipment as required.



– Temporarily remove and re-installed after completion of painting or application of other finishes wallplates, luminaires and similar equipment likely to be blemished during painting or the application of finishes.

– Energise for necessary testing of equipment only any fittings, wiring, etc which to form part of the permanent installation.

Correctly and permanently re-install or remove protection on all equipment after completion of painting.

1.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Test and commission the installation in accordance with Australian Standards and the recommendations contained within the Appendices of those Standards where applicable. Start up, commission and test the systems in accordance with the approved program. A representative who is qualified to commission the installation, shall remain on site until the system is operating to the satisfaction of the Superintendent. Arrange for the commissioning of major plant and equipment provided under this scope of work, to be supervised by the manufacturer’s representative, who shall remain on site until the equipment is operating satisfactorily. Coordinate manufacturer’s representative so that testing is carried out according to the approved program. All systems and services shall be tested and operational to specification prior to commissioning tests being witnessed by the Consulting Engineer. The Consulting Engineer may attend selected commissioning activities and may conduct a detailed inspection of the completed installation, following which the Consultant will provide a list of any rectification works required. Submit detailed test results for the complete electrical work, installed in the contracted of work. A copy of all test results and certifications shall be included in each Operating and maintenance manual, as further described herein. Test results shall be presented in the format set out in the following samples,



Upon completion of the noted defects, provide a signed statement confirming completion of the work. Upon receipt of the statement, Consulting Engineer will re-inspect the work. Should the work still be considered by the Consulting Engineer as unsatisfactory, requiring the further inspection by the Consulting Engineer, hours of attendance will be charged to the Contractor at ACEA recommended hourly rates. Certification shall follow the following format. “We (name of Electrical Services Contractor) certify that the Electrical Services Installation is installed in compliance with the Contract Specification and drawings, Australian Standard AS 3000 and all statutory requirements”. Provide individual statements of Certification for; – General Electrical Installation – Emergency Lighting – Security System Each statement shall certify conformance to the relevant Statutory Codes, Standards and Regulations



The certification is to be made on company letterhead stationery, is to include ACN/ABN and license numbers and shall be signed by the Contractors Project Manager, or other senior company representative.

1.14 SHOP DRAWINGS Provide shop drawings of all manufactured switchboards and/or proposed alterations to existing switchboards for inspection prior to construction, complete with comprehensive parts list. Drawings shall be prepared using AS 1102 drafting standard symbols. Drawings shall be provided with a legend of symbols, where applicable. Shop drawings shall all be on the same size drawing sheets and shall be to the scale of not less than 1:10 and larger where necessary. Shop drawings shall be of the same sheet size as the project drawings. Three copies of shop drawings shall be submitted. Allow 10 working days for return of shop drawings. When requested amend shop drawings and resubmit. Shop drawings will be reviewed for general principle of design only, review of shop drawings by the Superintendent in no way relieves the Contractor of the responsibility of complying with the requirements of this specification and associated drawings. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to check and approve all shop drawing for construction and installation.

1.15 AS CONSTRUCTED DRAWINGS AND MANUALS Format of Manuals Provide one PDF soft copy and one hard bound A4 size, three ring binder, embossed with ‘Electrical Services- Operating and Maintenance Manual’ in a format to be approved by the Superintendent and as further specified. A draft copy of the Operating and Maintenance manual complete with all draft ‘As Constructed’ drawings and including an index of the proposed content of the manual must be submitted for approval, at least two weeks prior to Practical Completion. A written statement shall be issued by the Contractor, verifying the accuracy of the information contained within the final completed manuals. Operation and Maintenance Information The manuals shall be complete with: – Separate identified sections within the manual. – List of suppliers and sub-contractors used, including key personnel names and mobile phone

numbers. – Manufacturers literature on all fixed equipment installed – Comprehensive schedule of all light fittings including, description of light fitting (as per contract

documents), manufacturer’s catalogue number, lamp rating (including colour temperature, beam angle etc.)

– Specific operating instructions for all equipment and systems – Shop drawing – switchboard, etc Provide separate log books and/or binders for: – Emergency lighting – Communication test results – Security services. The following sections shall be included as a minimum within the manual: – Contact Register – Earthing systems – Lighting – luminaire “cut sheets” – Emergency lighting – test results, as constructed plans – Voice and data communications infrastructure – test results – Intruder detection system - overview – Test records and commissioning certificates



As Constructed Drawings Prepare comprehensive ‘As Constructed’ drawings, detailing all equipment and services installed within the scope of work defined within the contract documents. The following is the minimum content acceptable for “As Constructed” drawings submissions. – Locations and type of luminaires – Switching positions and numbering (including any master switching) – Lighting control switch group details – Emergency and exit lighting (including reference numbers of emergency fittings corresponding to

emergency log book) – Power outlet locations, and current rating – Circuit numbering – Communications outlet locations numbering – Security Device Locations Drawings shall not make reference to construction notes or information relevant only to the construction process. All information associated with specialty systems shall not appear on general electrical services drawings. All ‘As Constructed’ drawings shall incorporate the Electrical Contractor’s name or Specialist Installers name within the title block. A statement shall be provided on each drawing, to read: ‘As Constructed by (company name and telephone number)’ and the name of the senior representative of the company responsible for the authenticity of the drawings. The title block shall clearly incorporate BEST Consultants as Electrical Consulting Engineers. Upon completion of commissioning and in no case more than two weeks following practical completion, submit final approved drawings. The drawings shall be accompanied by a letter certifying the accuracy of the drawings, on company letterhead stationery and signed by a senior company representative. Drawings shall be consistent with DHW published guidelines for drawing submission including all layering protocols. As Constructed drawing submissions will not be accepted for checking by the Superintendent unless accompanied with a completed DHW checklist. Supply one disk copy of ‘As Constructed’ drawings in .pdf format and one set of full size drawing prints, for each maintenance manual. In addition provide one disk copy of ‘As Constructed’ drawings in pdf format and dwg AutoCAD 2015 format to BEST Consultants.

1.16 TRAINING AND TUITION Upon acceptance of Practical Completion, train the Principal in the correct operation and maintenance of all electrical services equipment and systems. Provide suitably qualified personnel to undertake the necessary training. Provide user friendly instruction sheets to assist in training and for post training use, in easy to follow English. Provide three, 2 hour training sessions for the Principal.

1.17 MAINTENANCE AND DEFECTS LIABILITY Provide warranty and preventative maintenance for all new equipment as from the date of practical completion for the period stipulated in the Contract Preliminaries. Provide service support for the complete system for the period stipulated. Provide corrective maintenance and repair to all electrical equipment and systems which become defective, or is found to be defective, during the Defects Period, including the making good of any resulting damage. In addition, provide preventative maintenance of the electrical services for the full duration of the Defects Liability Period, in accordance with this section. Replace all LED fittings that fail during the maintenance and defects period. All replacements shall be completed within two working days of reported defect at no additional charge to the Superintendent or Principal. All costs associated with defective equipment replacement shall be included within tendered price. Prepare and retain copies of all service reports, including details of all preventative and corrective maintenance work carried out and copies of log book entries. At the completion of the maintenance period or at any other time when requested submit a copy of all records to the Superintendent.



1.18 PREVENTATIVE MAINTENANCE Generally, the routine preventative maintenance shall include the inspection, testing and such other checking as may be necessary to ensure the satisfactory operation of the electrical systems. Notify the Proprietor of the building on arrival and log details of all visits. Preventative maintenance shall include the following: Six Monthly Services (2 Off)

a) Low Voltage Installation Check operation of all earth leakage circuit breakers.

b) Lighting Replace all inoperative luminaires.

c) Emergency Lighting Installation Six monthly inspection and maintenance procedures in accordance with AS 2293.2, update log book.

d) Intruder Detection System. Six Monthly maintenance procedures in accordance with manufactures recommendation, including:- – Test the operation of all devices, – Clean and service all devices, as necessary, – Ensure all devices are securely mounted, – Load test on back-up battery – Documented Report (to Principal) and Service Log Completion (at Panel location)

e) Other Equipment Visual inspection, check operation of the systems and complete maintenance in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

2 SCOPE OF WORK

2.1 GENERAL The electrical services scope of work includes the delivery to site, supply, installation, modification to existing, commissioning and subsequent maintenance for the stipulated period, for all works indicated or implied. Liaise with the Superintendent to achieve uniformity of appearance and location for power, data, communications outlets and other services. Tender drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily indicate exact location of services. All services installed prior to confirmation shall be relocated at no cost as required. To accommodate the building works, the existing submain to MDB2 in the adjacent block shall be disconnected and removed temporarily and then reinstated. The shutdown shall not interfere with the schools operation, therefore all works must be undertaken during a weekend of holiday period. The work shall include, but not be limited to: – Removal and reinstatement of existing MDB2 submain – LV cabling and submains – Cables containment and support systems – Earthing systems – General power distribution – Power to mechanical services switchboard – Power to hydraulic equipment – General Lighting & Emergency lighting – Extension of existing Voice and data communications infrastructure – Extension of existing Intruder detection system – Power and gas isolation systems – Audio visual cabling systems



– Commissioning – As Built drawings and maintenance handbooks – Maintenance during the defects period

2.2 EXCLUSIONS The following work is not included and does not form part of this Trade Section: – Provision of wireless access points, data switches, PC’s, printers or other active equipment. – Whiteboard projectors – White goods such as ovens, fridges, microwaves and the like.

2.3 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLED ON SITE. Supply and install the following additional items at the direction of the Superintendent. (Not indicated on the drawings.): – 2 off “EM1” emergency light fittings complete with 20 metres of cable. – 2 off double socket outlet complete with 20 metres of cable. – 2 off dual telephone/data outlets complete with 60 metres of cable.

3 ACCOUSTIC INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

3.1 CABLE PENETRATIONS DIRECT THROUGH MASONRY WALL The gap between cable penetration (up to 3 twin flex) and the opening in the acoustic wall shall not be greater than 20mm. Pack the void with fibre insulation to a density of 20 Kg/m3 density. Seal the opening on both sides of the wall with a flexible fire/acoustic sealant, minimum 15mm thickness.

3.2 CABLE PENETRATIONS DIRECT THROUGH STUD FRAME WALL The gap between cable penetration (up to 3 twin flex) and the opening in the acoustic wall shall not be greater than 20mm. Ensure minimum thickness of plasterboard at penetration is 26mm. Provide additional build-up of overlapping lining board if required. Seal the opening on both sides of the wall with a flexible fire/acoustic sealant, minimum 15mm depth, or to match the size of the gap - whichever is the greater.

3.3 CABLE TRAY / BUNDLED CABLE PENETRATIONS THROUGH MASONRY WALLS Cable tray penetrations through acoustic rated walls must be avoided wherever possible. It is strongly recommended that all cable trays stop either side of acoustic rated walls, with cables bundled and passed through cylindrical conduits. Conduits to be minimum 200mm long. Diameter of conduit is to be sized such that bundled cables occupy no less than 50% of the cross sectional area of conduit. For large numbers of cables it is preferred to use multiple smaller diameter conduits. Cut a clean round hole through masonry wall, to provide 10 to 20mm clearance around the conduit. Pack the perimeter gap tight fibre insulation. Seal the opening around the conduit on both sides of the wall with a flexible fire/acoustic sealant, minimum 15mm depth. After pulling cables, pack the conduit from both sides with fibre insulation to ensure that cables are tightly supported within the conduit. Cable trays must not pass through walls rated Rw 50+, or where adjacent ceilings are perforated. These penetrations must detailed with conduits as per above. For wall constructions rated less than Rw 50, where ceilings are Flush Plasterboard or Mineral Fibre Tile, and where taking the full cable tray through the masonry wall is unavoidable, the clearance around the cable tray must be kept to a minimum and not greater than 30mm. Pack the opening tight with fibre insulation to the full extent of the wall



thickness. Pending overall size of the penetration, this approach may still de-rate the host wall, so use of conduits is recommended.

3.4 CABLE TRAY / BUNDLED CABLE PENETRATIONS THROUGH STUD FRAME WALLS Cable tray penetrations through acoustic rated plasterboard walls must be avoided wherever possible. It is strongly recommended that the cable tray stop either side of the walls, and cables bundled and passed through cylindrical conduits. Conduits to be minimum 200mm long. Diameter of conduit is to be sized such that bundled cables occupy no less than 50% of the cross sectional area of conduit. For large numbers of cables it is preferred to use multiple smaller diameter conduits. Cut tight fitting penetration to suit conduit diameter. Effectively seal cylindrical conduit to wall with flexible fire/acoustic mastic. Ensure minimum thickness of plasterboard at penetration is 26mm on both sides of the stud frame. Provide additional overlapping face board if required. Seal the opening around the duct on both sides of the wall with a flexible sealant, minimum 15mm thickness. After pulling cables, pack the conduit from both sides with fibre insulation, to ensure that cables are tightly supported within the conduit. Cable Tray Option: Cable trays must not pass through Rw 50+ walls, or where adjacent ceilings are perforated. These penetrations must be via conduits as per above. For wall constructions rated less than Rw 50, where a cable tray penetration is unavoidable, fully box out all sides of the opening through wall, to provide not greater than 30mm clearance all around the cable tray. Boxing out to seal the wall cavity must therefore be to base, top and sides, and be fully sealed to wall sheeting. Pack fibre insulation around the cable tray and cables such that fibre insulation is tightly packed to the surrounding plasterboard around the entire reveal. Pending overall size of the penetration, this approach may still de-rate the host wall, so use of conduits is recommended.

3.5 ELECTRICAL OUTLETS Power points located on either side of a wall are to be offset to ensure acoustic integrity of the wall is maintained. Generally back-to-back switches / outlets must be avoided. The minimum offset between outlets on either side of the wall is 300mm. In addition, in framed walls it is also recommended that a stud be located between the two outlets. All wall boxes in walls to noise sensitive areas (i.e. Rw 45 or greater) are to be Clipsal Fire / Acoustic Rated Wall Boxes rated at STC 50.

4 POWER SUPPLIES

4.1 GENERAL Power supply to the installation will be three phase, four wire, 415/240V, 50 Hz. All equipment supplied as part of this Contract shall be suitable for the actual voltage and frequency available by the Supply Authority.

4.2 PROSPECTIVE FAULT CURRENT All parts of the installation shall be sized to withstand the nominated prospective fault current for a period of one (1) second. Circuit breakers shall be rated for the prospective fault current at the point of installation, or the level of fault current nominated on the drawings, whichever is the greater.

4.3 PHASE SEQUENCING The same phase sequence as provided by the Supply Authority shall be maintained to all switchboards, submains, three phase outlets and other three phase equipment throughout the installation.



Prior to disconnection of supply or disconnection of any motors, equipment and the like, confirm the existing phase sequencing.

4.4 LOAD BALANCING The loads and circuits shall balance as evenly as possible over the three phases throughout the installation. Failure to comply with this section will result in the rejection of the electrical installation. Where phases have not been nominated for particular loads, balance the loads between individual phases to the approval of the Superintendent or his representative and the Supply Authority.

4.5 CONTINUITY OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICES The existing College is required to remain fully operational during the course of this Contract and all works must be co-ordinated to minimise the number of shutdowns and shutdown time on services. Carry out work affecting the continuity of existing services such as work on the existing MDB2 and at the least inconvenient time to the occupants. Organise the work during school holidays to minimise the duration of an interruption. Provide a minimum of three weeks notice of intended shutdowns. All shutdowns must be co-ordinated with the Principal to the Superintendent’s approval. The Superintendent shall be notified immediately upon any incident.

5 SWITCHBOARDS

5.1 GENERAL Switchboards shall – Comply with AS 3439 Parts 1, 2 and 3 as appropriate. – Be designed to operate in the ambient environmental conditions. – Where installed within a building or enclosure, have a minimum of 1.6mm thick sheet metal

construction with removable escutcheons fitted with gaskets and lifting handles on panels larger than 0.4 sq. metres.

– Have a minimum of 2.0mm thick marine grade aluminium construction with removable escutcheons fitted with gaskets and lifting handles on panels larger than 0.4 sq. metres.

– Be provided with lockable doors unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Doors shall be cable of opening to 100o and where installed externally, be provided with captive stays to secure the door in the open position

– Be provided with suitable nonferrous gland plates to all cable entry points – Be positioned to ensure 1000mm clear access is provided in front of the switchboard – Be fitted with a 3 phase copper bus bar assembly to suit equipment including spaces for future

equipment. – Have brass or copper neutral and earth links with the same number of terminals as there are active

poles and numbered to correspond. – Have full size neutral conductors and bus bars. – Have a minimum 25% spare space capacity for future circuit protection and control devices. – Where installed in a position which causes the switchboard to be obstructed by a cupboard door

mullion, designed so that the escutcheons are arranged to be positioned either side of a spacer which aligns with the mullion and the gap between the escutcheons is greater than the thickness of the door mullion.

Switchboards and Distribution boards are not to be constructed until detailed Shop drawings of each switchboard have been reviewed by the Superintendent and comments arising from the review have been received by the switchboard manufacturer.



5.2 CIRCUIT BREAKERS General Circuit breakers shall be used for all circuit protection unless otherwise shown on the drawings or specified herein. Moulded Case Circuit Breakers shall be used for protection of all circuits of 100A rating or greater and for all protective device provided for the protection of submains. Select all circuit breakers to ensure the device will operate in a fault condition, based on the maximum fault current which is able to flow at in the circuit. Due consideration shall be taken to identify the maximum fault current which may be present at the device located at the furthest point from protective device when, selecting the protective device and, in the case of adjustable circuit breakers, commissioning the settings of the device. Where necessary provide electronic trip units to protective devices to ensure compliance with this requirement. Moulded Case Circuit breakers (MCCB) Moulded Case Circuit breakers shall have the following requirements:

Enable full discrimination and cascading with upstream/downstream breakers of the same manufacturer.

All moulded case circuit breakers of 250A trip rating or greater shall be fitted with adjustable electromagnetic and thermal trip units, or electronic trip units.

Be from approved manufacture (i.e. IPD, Schneider, NHP, Cutler Hammer) Where used as transformer isolating switches all MCCBs shall be fitted with fully adjustable short time

and long-time over current and earth fault trip units.

Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) Miniature Circuit breakers shall have the following requirements: – Minimum fault interruption capacity of 6000amps symmetrical at 240VAC. – Shall be DIN type moulded case type. – Be a combined 30mA RCD/MCB of same overcurrent trip setting as the breaker it replaces – Be identified with an I.P.A. marker showing correct colour coding and circuit number. – Shall have “C” curve tripping characteristics unless otherwise shown on the drawings. – MCB types shall be limited to manufacturers suitable for delivery of new equipment within 24 hours

of the fault being registered.

5.3 SWITCHBOARD COMPONENTS Fuses Provide fuses to the existing fuse switch to supply the new mechanical services switchboard. Fuses shall be GEC red spot or approved equal standard T type, Class Q1 and identified with an IPA marker showing correct colour coding and circuit number. All fuse units shall comply with AS.2005 parts 1 and 2 and all subsequent amendments. Supply and install one set of three (3) spare fuse cartridges for each current rating located on the switchboard. All fuse cartridges shall be installed on fuse rack and located on the switchboard door. Contactors All Contactors shall be suitable for the required duty. Contactors shall be rated AC3 for motor loads and AC5 for discharge lighting loads. Contactor coils, unless otherwise specified, shall be 250 volt. Contactor used as motor starters shall have thermal overload devices in all three phases and single phasing protection. Size of overloads shall suit the motor manufacturers requirements and recommendations. Current Transformers Ensure rated burden of transformer is compatible with load circuit requirements indicated on the drawings. The short time current rating is to be coordinated with the prospective short circuit current and the related protective devices.



Install CT(s) on separate sections of busbar so that access and removal is simply accomplished. Provide mechanical clearance of not less than 12mm between adjacent CT(s). Ensure rating plates are easily readable after installation. Provide an engraved label identifying the CT turns ratio, on the switchboard escutcheon, adjacent to the respective meter. Isolators and Switches Isolators and switches shall be manufactured by GEC, Kraus & Naimer C16, or Schneider. Alternative manufacturers will not be accepted without prior written approval. All Isolators and switches shall be load break contacts and be cabled to be switched on to the maximum fault current available at the point of installation. Where non Auto MCCBs are used as isolators they shall be rated at not less than 150% of the current rating of the upstream protective device. Marking and Labels Update all labels as nominated on drawings. Labels shall be: – Laminated plastic engraved to approved size, wording and design, clearly indicating the function

and/or circuit designation of the component – Of white background white with black machine engraved lettering for general items – Not be fixed to removable covers and lids. – Of 5mm minimum lettering height. Switchboard Legend Provide two updated type written legends (one secured in the switchboard and in maintenance manual) detailing: – description of services connected to each circuit – rating of each protective device – cable size of each circuit Busbars The line side connections to all protection equipment shall be made with high conductivity, hard drawn copper busbar. Each busbar shall have sufficient capacity to carry the current shown on the drawings or where no current rating is shown the full connected load plus 50% without exceeding a temperature rise of 60 degrees Centigrade, after allowing for derating due to the degree of enclosure. Busbars shall be completely insulated with colour coded heat shrunk sleeving, or otherwise protected by clear polycarbonate barriers to IP2X, in accordance with AS3439. Internal Wiring Internal wiring shall be: – Installed in vertically and horizontally installed slotted P.V.C. cable duct, fitted with clip on lids and

sized for 25% expansion. – Fitted with soldered or compression type cable lugs where cables are terminated on bolt or studs. – Terminated using compression type lugs where suitable strip terminals are not provided. – Labelled to identify active neutral, and earth conductors using numbered and phase coloured printed

type coded ferrule. – Labelled to identify all control cables to correspond with terminal numbers on the control single line

diagrams. Cables terminating on bolts or studs shall be fitted with compression type cable lugs.

5.4 DISCRIMINATION Select the protective devices in order that in the event of any condition of over-current or short circuit occurring on the load side of any protection device(s) or final circuit equipment device(s), the protection effectively discriminates with the downstream device(s). Ensure that the loss of power to any electrical device on the site does not occur due to non-selectivity of circuit protective devices. Certify in writing to the Consulting Engineer the full compliance with discrimination of manufacturers equipment prior to any construction and installation of any equipment.



Some brands of switchgear may require upgrading of circuit breaker sizing and cabling to achieve full discrimination of all devices installed throughout the site, the cost of which shall be included within the tender. Refer to the drawings for the nominated circuit breaker design.

5.5 EMERGENCY LIGHTING TEST FACILITIES Supply and install all emergency lighting test facilities in accordance with AS 2293 and as further indicated within the specification. The following equipment shall be installed as a minimum requirement: Phase failure relays. Timers. Pushbutton reset devices

5.6 POWER ANALYSIS METERS Provide power analysis meter(s) to the switchboard(s) as indicated on the drawings as type PM1 meters. Power analysis meter s shall be Schneider reference PM820 complete with current transformers and current limiting fuses. The meter shall provide the following functions: Instantaneous phase current Instantaneous neutral current Voltage Total active, reactive and apparent power Active, reactive and apparent power per phase Total power factor Phase power factor Maximum demand current The meter shall store accumulated power values and maximum demand values, using an on board memory.

5.7 SHOP DRAWINGS Provide shop drawings detailing the switchboard design, as specified elsewhere in this document, of all manufactured switchboards and/or proposed alterations to existing switchboards, complete with comprehensive parts list for inspection prior to construction,. All switchboard designs shall be endorsed by the Switchboard Manufacturer. Show all label wording, positions, details, and clearly indicate the fault ratings of all protective devices and busbar assemblies on shop drawings. Submit detailed control diagrams for all control circuits, complete with termination and cable schedules. Shop drawings shall be produced using AutoCAD or an equivalent electronic drafting package, be of minimum 1:10 scale and include the following information, as a minimum; Manufacturer’s drawing sheet title block identifying the project name, project number and drawing number, Fault rating Form of segregation, Equipment materials list with part numbers, Label schedule including size and colour of lettering and background, Switchboard general arrangements including front elevations with escutcheons fitted and without escutcheons, vertical and horizontal sections, Diagrams for all control equipment, (eg, lighting controls) complete with terminal strip numbers; Schedule of construction details, including material type dimensions, paint finishes, handle types, locks and all hardware. Locations of cupboard door mullions where mullions are to be located in front of switchboards.



Shop drawing submissions shall be accompanied with a tabulated schedule of circuit breaker settings, relative to the drawing being submitted. The schedule may be incorporated on the shop drawing, or submitted as a separate document. All switchboard shop drawings must be checked and endorsed as approved by the Contractor prior to submission to Superintendent.

6 SURGE PROTECTION

6.1 Transient Voltage Surge Protection Main Switchboard. Cat C (Point of Entry) Provide Voltage Surge Protection devices to each phase of the main Switchboard in accordance with the following criteria. The Maximum Discharge Current, Imax, as defined in IEC61643-11 shall be at least 100kA, 8/20µs, per phase. The Nominal Discharge Current, In, as defined in IEC61643-11 shall be at least 40kA, 8/20µs, per phase. The Voltage Protection Level Up as defined in IEC61643-11 shall be less than 850V at 3kA 8/20µs. The Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage, Uc as defined in IEC61643-11, shall be greater than 310 Volts RMS. Shall incorporate built-in short circuit protection Shall incorporate visual status indication and voltage free alarm contacts. Provide parallel type transient voltage surge suppression between each phase and earth, each phase and neutral and neutral and earth, nominally referred to as “4 Mode Protection devices” for the main switchboard in accordance IEC61643-1 and AS1768. 7 Operation The Surge device shall operate at a nominal system voltage of (Vrms) 240/415V, 50Hz 8 Protection The Maximum Discharge Current, Imax, as defined in IEC61643-11 shall be at least 100kA, 8/20µs, per phase. The Nominal Discharge Current, In, as defined in IEC61643-11 shall be at least 40kA, 8/20µs, per phase. The Voltage Protection Level Up as defined in IEC61643-11 shall be less than 850V at 3kA 8/20µs. The Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage, Uc as defined in IEC61643-11, shall be 310 Volts RMS.

9 CABLE AND CABLE INSTALLATION

9.1 CABLES General Cables shall be of the size, type, voltage and insulation grade as specified and shall: – Comply in all respects with AS/NZS 3000, AS/NZS 5000, Western Power, relevant Australian

Standards Specifications, – Installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, adequately fixed and braced with

purpose made clips, cleats or supports to ensure that damage is minimised under fault conditions and adequate air is allowed to circulate around the cable at all times.

– Be PVC insulated V90 grade 450/750V, with stranded copper conductors complying with AS/NZS 5000 except where indicated otherwise.



– Be installed between items of equipment without any joints and, when installed or during installation, ensure the cables are not bent beyond their minimum bending radii, and in a manner such that they may be readily withdrawn for replacement purposes.

– Be protected by rigid PVC conduits where passing through or installed in walls, floors and like structural partitions, and in all exposed situations.

PVC Insulated Cables (TPI) Cables for small power and lighting services shall be of thermoplastic insulated type, which shall; – Be PVC insulated V90 grade 450/750V, with stranded copper conductors complying with AS/NZS

5000.2 except where indicated otherwise. – Be enclosed throughout the entire circuit length within conduits or PVC miniduct. – Wired using the loop-in-system, connecting conductors from point to point without joints being

interposed. Cables shall not, however, be looped through the bodies of luminaires unless specified otherwise.

– Be wired with a maximum of two circuits being enclosed in a conduit and with lighting and power circuits accommodated within separate conduits.

– Be PVC sheathed in the instances where they are to be installed underground, enclosed in galvanised water pipes, in floor or ceiling ducts and in the instances where they are to be accommodated within wiring channels of partitions and cable access ducts.

PVC Insulated and Sheathed Cables (TPS) Cables for small power and lighting services located within accessible false ceiling space, cable access ducting and wiring channels, shall be of the thermoplastic sheathed type, which shall: – Be PVC V90 insulated SV90 PVC sheathed grade 450/750V, with stranded copper conductors

complying with AS/NZS 5000.2 except where indicated otherwise. – Be fixed using proprietary approved cable clamps supported from the structure using stainless steel

catenary cables. – Be erected in straight lines, vertically and horizontally, with at least 300 mm of straight cable adjacent

to terminations and enclosed in rigid conduits or sleeves where installed in short lengths of concrete, brick or masonry walls.

PVC Insulated PVC Sheathed Cables (PVC/PVC) PVC insulated PVC sheathed, thermoplastic cables shall be circular with orange coloured PVC sheathed overall. installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, fixed using proprietary approved cable clamps and be supported from the structure directly in the case of single cables and by means of cable trays for multi-runs. PVC insulated PVC sheathed cables shall; – Be PVC V90 insulated SV90 PVC sheathed grade 450/750V, with stranded copper conductors

complying with AS/NZS 5000.2 except where indicated otherwise. – Be fixed using proprietary approved cable clamps supported from the structure using stainless steel

catenary cables. – Be erected in straight lines, vertically and horizontally, with at least 300 mm of straight cable adjacent

to terminations and enclosed in rigid conduits or sleeves where installed in short lengths of concrete, brick or masonry walls.

9.2 FINAL CIRCUIT INSTALLATION All lighting circuits and power shall be a minimum of 2.5mm2 Cu TPS. Where final circuit cable sizes are shown on the contract drawings, the cable size shall be read as a minimum size. Determine the final cable size shall be to suit exact route lengths, volt drop (based on full rating of circuit protection for the full extent of the fixed wiring on site), derating and earth loop impedance requirements in accordance with AS3000 and WAER. Make due allowance in the contract price to provide final circuit cables to suit the installation conditions. Where more than 5 cables are in close proximity, they shall be secured to a catenary wire. Cables shall be securely fixed direct to the structure (i.e. not to other services or ceiling hangers).



Where cables are installed in walls filled with thermal insulation, increase cable size or separately enclose cables in individual conduits to ensure ventilation around cable. Refer to derating tables of AS3008. Cabling installed within ceiling spaces over removable tile ceilings shall be secured above the ceiling to ensure cables do not interfere with the removal and reinstallation of tiles, or the maintenance of in ceiling equipment. Horizontal cabling in cavities stud walls shall be avoided and where considered unavoidable, cables shall be enclosed in conduit. Cables from ceiling spaces to accessories shall be installed vertically.

9.3 UNDERGROUND WIRING Install underground wiring in accordance with AS3000 and as indicated on the drawings. Where underground wiring requires trenching; Make all appropriate enquiry’s (e.g. dial before you dig) to determine extent of existing services prior to trenching. Engage a qualified professional cable scanner to scan the existing ground along proposed cable routes to identify location of existing services. Hand dig where existing services may exist. Liaise with other trades for coordination of trench layouts Excavate trenches and remove rubbish fill from site Complete backfilling of trenches using clean fill and compact to match surrounding material. Make good to surfaces after back-filling. Notify Superintendent of any damage to existing services Excavate trenches straight and true and to an adequate depth to provide the required cover for conduits. Where underground wiring is proposed to take an alternative route to design drawings, hand mark up proposed route and send to Superintendent for approval. Ensure “As Constructed” drawings are amended to document final route. Survey all proposed routes during tender period and nominate on tender what allowance is included for rock excavation. Damage to existing services, caused by the digging of trenches, shall be repaired at the Contractor’s expense.

10 CABLE CONTAINMENT

10.1 Conduits All underground conduit shall be approved heavy duty Category A, electric orange rigid P.V.C. conduit for low, medium and high voltage services and white PVC (ACMA approved) for Data/Communications and Telstra services, complete with approved accessories for joins, bends, etc. Generally class B rigid PVC conduits shall be used except where exposed to mechanical damage or sunlight, where galvanised screwed steel conduits or G.W.P. conduits shall be used. Where necessary PVC sheathed flexible conduits shall be used to enclose final connections to fixed equipment. Conduit shall not be of less than 20mm diameter. Except where the conduit size is specified, conduits shall have capacity for one additional circuit. Conduit sizes shown on drawings are for rigid conduits. If corrugated conduits are being used, select the size to give an equivalent internal diameter. Conduits, unavoidably exposed shall be run square and plumb with building lines and as directed by the Superintendent. All conduit ends and boxes shall be plugged in an approved manner until permanent fittings are installed. Conduit in concrete shall be installed in accordance with AS 3600 Section 14. Generally this requires conduits in slabs to be installed between the top and bottom layers of reinforcing steel. In columns and beams, conduits shall be inside the ligatures with clearance from longitudinal steel reinforcement of no



less than the concrete cover to the steel reinforcement. A suitably qualified electrician must present at all times when concrete containing conduit is being poured. Unless otherwise specified, no conduit fittings other than deep conduit boxes, couplings and unions shall be installed in concrete. Flexible joints shall be made at right angles across concrete expansion joints. The ends of the conduit shall be kept 19mm apart (across the joints) and belled to form a firm sliding fit inside a larger size conduit sleeve (200mm long minimum). The sleeve shall be taped to conduits with ‘Scotchrap’ to prevent ingress of slurry to the expansion joint. PVC accessories shall be used wherever possible. Unless otherwise specified all joints in PVC conduit shall be welded. A gap of at least 40mm shall be provided between parallel conduits. Conduit boxes shall be proprietary units with conduit access facilities. All joints in galvanised conduits and water pipe installations shall be made waterproof by use of "Thread Seal Tape" or similar. The ends of conduits shall be internally reamed clear of sharp edges and projections. Provide end caps to all conduits exiting cable pits, where shown on the drawings as provision for future wiring. 10.2 Underground Conduits Install conduits at minimum depth, to top of conduit, of 500mm (LV cable) and 450mm (communications cables) below finished ground level, except where shown otherwise. Cable pits shall be used at changes of direction and at intervals not exceeding 65 metres. A maximum of two bends shall be allowed in any conduit run between pits. Ensure the bottoms of trenches are flat and clear of protrusions such as rocks, tree roots and the like, prior to installation of conduits. Cover conduits with 300mm depth of rubble free yellow sand and place an identification tape, 200mm above the conduit, along the entire length of the installation. Use orange plastic tape, approximately 150mm wide and indelibly marked "DANGER ELECTRIC CABLE BELOW", at not more than 1 metre intervals. Install conduits from buildings with a slight fall to the first junction box or cable pit external to the building. All underground conduits shall be provided with a 7/0.67 (2.5 mm2) green /yellow PVC covered draw wire, irrespective of the extent of cabling installed in the conduit. Conduits entering cable pits shall; Be terminated flush with the internal face of the pit, Shall be fitted with a conduit bush, Shall only enter the ends of rectangular pits, Shall be located 50mm above the floor of the pit. Conduits installed for Telstra services shall;

o Have a minimum bending radius of 300mm for 25mm diameter conduit o Have a bending radius of 800mm for 50mm and 100mm conduit, where less

than 800mm form an access point, o Have a bending radius of not less than 5.0m for 50mm and 100mm conduit,

where greater than 800mm from an access point. o Have a maximum of two bend between access points o Be compliant with NBNCo requirements.

Where external conduits are entering or leaving cable pits, poles, switchboards or buildings, seal conduits internally with an expanding foam on completion of works to prevent water and insect/rodent ingress. 10.3 Cable Pits Supply and install cable pits as indicated on the drawings. The following minimum requirements shall apply:



Cable pits shall be from approved manufacture, and unless specifically sized on the drawings, shall be sized to suit number of specified conduits + 25%. Refer to civil drawings for final finished level ground level and install pits to the correct depth to ensure the pit lids are level with the finished ground level. Secure the immediate area with orange tape and hazard warning cones until compaction has taken place to avoid damage from vehicles. All pits shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers’ recommendations, including concrete encasement of conduits at pit entry for structural integrity. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, all pit lids shall be medium duty (minimum 4000kg static wheel load) where installed in areas not accessible by vehicular traffic and heavy duty (minimum 9000kg static wheel load) in road ways, parking area, loading docks and the like, engraved ‘ELECTRIC’ or "TELSTRA’ (to ACMA approval), ‘NBNCo’ (to NBNCo approval) or "COMMUNICATIONS" as applicable. All cable pits shall be iDS™, STAKKAbox™, ACO Cablemate or Fibre Concrete Industries. Alternative manufacturers will not be approved. Supply and install a concrete collar to every pit. The collar shall be in accordance with the pit manufacturer’s recommendations. Pits shall be backfilled with correct material as per the manufacturers installation guidelines Provide a layer of blue metal, of 200mm depth, immediately beneath the cable pit to improve stability and drainage from the pit. Following installation of cable pits, record the exact GPS location using northings and eastings and document on as-constructed drawings. 10.4 Cable Access Duct Provide 50mm deep by 150mm high, two-compartment aluminum cable duct to the positions shown on the drawings. Provide the ducts and all associated components with a powder-coated finish of a colour to the approval of the Superintendent. The cable duct shall be Cableduct Systems reference AKS50 with snap fit cover. Install the duct in a first class manner with skilled tradesmen, securely aligning all joints using jointing plates, concealed within the duct. Make all cuts with a machine saw and jig to ensure a straight and square cut. Use packers if necessary to make duct body straight after installation for easy fitting and removal of covers. Provide manufactured corner fittings at each internal and external corner. Multiple short sections of duct cover (less than 300mm) will not be accepted, except at outlet positions. Provide manufactured end caps at the end of each section of duct. Provide an individual section of duct cover, pre punched to facilitate the mounting of an outlet plate, for each communications or power outlet. Obtain confirmation of outlet locations on site prior to final installation. Secure all outlet plates using screw fixings. All power and communications outlets shall be flush mounted outlet type, as specified elsewhere in this document. The use of surface mounted outlets fixed to ducting shall not be permitted. Maintain earth continuity of the metal duct throughout its length. Install conduits, from the cable access duct, to an accessible position in the ceiling void. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, provide four 25mm conduits for communications and two 25mm conduits for power at the end of each duct and at intervals not exceeding ten metres.

11 FITTINGS AND ELECTRICAL DEVICES

11.1 GENERAL Fittings and accessories shall be supplied from a single manufacturer throughout, unless otherwise specified. Where works are alterations and additions to existing buildings, fittings shall be of type to match existing unless specifically noted in detailed clauses or drawings. Request the Superintendent to select accessory colours from standard ranges not less than two (2) weeks before the ordering date required ensuring delivery of the equipment in accordance with the Contract Program.



Heights shown on plans or specified shall be the height from finished floor level to the centre of the equipment. The height and exact position of fittings in all tiled walls shall be as indicated on detailed drawings or as directed by the Superintendent. All fittings shall be vertically and horizontally aligned. Coordinate with other trades to ensure considered positioning with other service equipment. Outlets fixed to benches shall be on enclosed mounting boxes.

11.2 WALL BOXES Install all fittings and accessories on flush set wall boxes as recommended by the accessory manufacturer.

11.3 GENERAL PURPOSE SOCKET OUTLETS Supply and install socket outlets as indicated on the drawings and in accordance with the following; – Generally socket outlets shall be Clipsal Series 2000 No. 2015 mounted on flush horizontal wall boxes

300mm above finished floor level unless otherwise specified. – Double socket outlets shall be Clipsal Series 2000 No. 2025. – General purpose socket outlets comprise of a 10A, 240V rocker operated switch and 3-pin plug base

with flat earth pin, mounted under a common moulded impact resistant plastic flushplate. – Comprise two (2) switches/plug bases within a common 115mm x 70mm flushplate for double socket

outlet’s. – Comply with IP44 to AS 1939 where located in damp situations. – Be horizontally at a mounting height shown on drawings of standard colour range ‘Electric White’

unless otherwise nominated. – Be flush mounted in a wallbox having adjustable metal fixing lugs where located in masonry walls. – Be flush mounted within a metal bracket fixed to a stud or noggin where located in stud partitions. RCD protection shall be provided via combined MCB/RCD units installed at the switchboard with a separate MCB/RCD unit for each socket outlet circuit.

11.4 NOMINATED OUTLETS All Socket Outlet circuits, other than those meeting the specific criteria for exemption as defined in AS 3000, shall be protected with a 30mA RCD device. Outlets not protected by RCD shall be labelled clearly in accordance with AS 3000 “Not RCD protected, not for general use”. Sockets Outlets provided for specific functions shall comply with the following: – Socket outlets nominated for serving a Boiling Water Unit shall be on a dedicated circuit. Engrave

outlet ‘Boiling Water Unit’ – Provide isolator (single or three phase and rating as nominated) for air conditioning equipment, on

dedicated circuit. Liaise with A/C installer for exact location and requirements. Where Heavy Duty and Weatherproof fittings are documented, these shall be Clipsal IP56 (white) type or approved equal.

11.5 SWITCHES General All switches shall; – Comprise multiple rocker switches within a common flushplate. – Be vertically at 1100mm mounting height or as shown on drawings. – Be flush mounted in a wallbox having adjustable metal fixing lugs where located in masonry walls. – Be flush mounted within a metal bracket fixed to a stud or noggin where located in stud partitions. – Line up with adjacent wall switches in vertical and horizontal axis. Co-ordinate with other trades to

ensure considered positioning with other service equipment. – Line up switches to tile coursing on tiled walls. Coordinate with designers detailed wall elevations

where possible.



11.6 ISOLATORS Provide weatherproof isolators adjacent equipment as nominated on drawings. Liaise with installer of nominated equipment for preferred location and confirmation of correct rating. Unless otherwise specified, isolators installed externally shall be IP56 rated. All isolators shall have Fault Make, Load Break contacts rated at not less than 125% of circuit cable ratings. All motor isolators shall be rated to Fault Make, Locked Rotor Current Break. All isolators must accept a padlock in the on and off position.

11.7 GAS SOLENOID VALVES The gas solenoid valves within the Science laboratories shall be supplied and installed by the Hydraulic Services Trade. Provide power supply and controls to emergency stop push buttons and reset switches as indicated on the drawings. Refer to Hydraulic Services layout drawings and electrical schematics for details. Exact locations shall be verified on site with Hydraulic Services Trade.

11.8 EMERGENCY POWER ISOLATION CONTROLS (WITH SEPARATE KEY RESET SWITCH) Provide emergency stop (emergency power shutoff) controls for each of the rooms/areas as indicated on the drawings. Emergency stop buttons shall be Sprecher and Schuh, momentary-action non-latching type, with shroud to prevent accidental power shutoff. Refer to electrical drawings for wiring detail. Provide separate key reset switch to each room/area, as indicated on the drawings, for resetting of the power. Key reset switches shall be separate to emergency stop buttons, and shall not incorporate a button. Emergency stop controls shall isolate only the general power outlets in the associated room/area, as indicated on drawings. Allow to wire existing and new circuits to contactors located in wall mounted enclosures adjacent to the associated distribution board. Separate control circuits shall be provided for each room/area. Provide fixed labelling adjacent emergency stop buttons and key reset switches as indicated on the drawings.

11.9 PERMANENT CONNECTIONS Provide permanent connection to equipment as nominated on drawings. Provide all cable lugs as necessary to connect the circuit cables to the equipment. Liaise with the installer of the equipment to determine the exact location of the point of entry of cables to the equipment and to confirm the rating and number of phases of the electrical supply necessary to enable the correct operation of the equipment.

11.10 POWER SUPPLY TO MECHANICAL SERVICES EQUIPMENT Mechanical services equipment (e.g. exhaust fans, supply air fans, air conditioning units etc) shall be supplied and installed by the Mechanical Services Trade. Verify the exact location and rating of the power supplies to Mechanical Services equipment on site with Mechanical Services Trade prior to installation. Advise the Superintendent if there are any discrepancies.

11.11 POWER SUPPLY TO HYDRAULIC SERVICES EQUIPMENT Provide all power supplies and control wiring to Hydraulic Services equipment as indicated on the drawings (i.e. hot water units, isolation control equipment, gas solenoid valves). Provide final connections to the Hydraulic Services equipment as required. Test the operation of the gas isolation system. Verify the exact location and rating of the power supplies and control schematics to the equipment on site with the Hydraulic Services Trade prior to commencing the installation. Advise the Superintendent if there are any discrepancies.



11.12 LABELLING AND IDENTIFICATION Where flush plates, light switch panels and other items of equipment are to be labelled or engraved, they shall be machine engraved in upper case lettering filled with black pigments to approval. Switchplates and socket outlet plates shall be marked to identify phase and circuit number. The identification shall be provided by means of inedible ink positioned so as to be concealed by the cover plate when in position. Provide IPA markers to IP44 and IP56 rated devices with circuit numbers coloured to the appropriate phase colour. Install the IPA markers centrally at the bottom of the device.

11.13 AUDIO VISUAL CABLING Provide cabling from each white board projector location to the teacher’s location as shown on the plans with USB, and HDMI cables. Provide communications outlet adjacent to each white board projector.

12 LIGHTING

12.1 GENERAL Supply and Install the lighting system complete in all respects, including luminaires, lamps, control gear, battens, brackets, fittings, fixings, accessories, connections, ancillary work, and equipment guarantees as applicable to luminaires and lamps. Refer to the luminaire schedule for full details of the specified light fittings. Although luminaires may be specified by trade names and catalogue numbers, all such luminaires shall comply with the requirements of this specification, where necessary modify the luminaire to meet the full requirements of this document. Where a particular type and make of fitting is specified, the exact luminaires type shall be supplied unless the superintendent has approved an alternative. All luminaires shall comply with the requirements of AS/NZS 60598, Luminaires; - Parts 1 and 2. All luminaires shall comply with the limits and methods of measurement of radio disturbance characteristics of electrical equipment (i.e. EMC test), as defined within the latest version of AS/NZS CPR CISPR15. Luminaires and associated transformers, drivers and other control gear shall display a C-Tick mark incorporating the supplier identification number, which is recognised as a number prefixed with a letter N. Set out the positions of all light fittings. Cut out holes in suspended ceilings for recessed luminaires. Clean all diffusers and reflectors upon completion.

12.2 LED LIGHTING Provide LED Luminaires complete with lamps and control gear as nominated on the drawings. Lamps and control gear should have a minimum LM70 lumen maintenance life of 50,000 hours for internal installations and 100,000 hours for external application luminaires. All LED light sources shall be of an approved colour temperature, as detailed in the luminaire schedule. Colour temperature tolerance shall be +/- 150O Kelvin (i.e. equal to MacAdams 3). The colour accuracy of the light shall have a CRI of no less than 80. Lumen depreciation of LED light sources shall be equal to, or less than, 90% of the initial output at 6000 hours of operation. LED luminaires shall be from by a reputable manufacturer/supplier, Philips, Ruud, Cree, or equal and approved. All control gear shall be suitable for the lamps utilised in accordance with lamp manufacture’s recommendations and shall sustain lamp condition at voltages within Authority Supply Guidelines (nominal 230V ± 6%). Where required to be connected to dimmable circuits, LED drivers shall be compatible with universal phase dimming devices, unless specified to be DALI, 0-10V or DSI. LED lamp drivers shall have an earth leakage current not exceeding 0.5mA/per luminaire. LED luminaires shall incorporate a passive cooling system utilising convection.



12.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING SYSTEM General Provide an emergency lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. The completed system shall comply with the requirements of AS2293, AS2676 and AS3000 latest editions as applicable. All emergency lighting fittings shall be of the performance classification specified in the Schedule of Light Fittings and shall be of the single point type. Connect to existing test facilities for conducting a discharge test on all emergency luminaires and exit signs without necessitating disconnection of supply to the normal lighting. Such facilities shall comply with the latest Australian Standards and shall be installed on the appropriate distribution board(s). Single Point Emergency Lighting Fittings Self-contained emergency luminaires shall be type tested in accordance with AS2293 and BCA. Duration of operation shall be minimum 2 hours. Self-contained emergency luminaires shall be complete with integral sealed nickel cadmium batteries, inverter, test switch and LED lamp indicating charge. Batteries shall be high temperature sealed type rated for an operating ambient temperature range of 5 deg. C to 60 deg. C and shall be guaranteed for at least three years. Battery chargers and inverters shall be located away from heat sources. Single point emergency lighting fittings shall be connected to an unswitched active of their relevant lighting circuit to sense power failure. Operation, both on power failure and power restoration, shall be automatic. Illuminated Exit Signs Illuminated exit signs shall comply with all other clauses of this specification section. Classification of Emergency Lighting Fittings All lighting fittings, which include emergency operation, shall be fully tested and classified by a NATA registered laboratory in accordance with the requirements of AS2293 and the Building Regulations. Where emergency lighting forms part of a project lighting fitting or an adaptation of a previously certified lighting fitting, then full NATA testing for re-certification shall be carried out. AS2293 classification certificates from an approved NATA laboratory shall be lodged for each type of emergency lighting fitting and illuminated exit sign.

12.4 MOTION SENSORS FOR LIGHTING CONTROL General Motion sensors shall be selected for area/application and shall be equal in performance to the following devices:- Provide MySmart EBDSPIR_PRM, mains voltage (240 VAC), standard range Passive Infrared, ceiling occupancy sensor with integral ON-OFF photocell. Motion sensors shall be programmed to remain on for 10 minutes unless otherwise noted. Provide 1 x user programming handset for the building manager at completion of contract. Presence Detection Mode (Labs, Classrooms) Motion sensors are generally to be connected as presence detectors. In science labs and classrooms connect detectors before room light switches as shown on drawings: Motion sensors shall be MySmart MWS6-PRM, mains voltage (240 VAC), microwave occupancy sensor connected in presence detection mode.

13 VOICE / DATA COMMUNICATIONS – CLASS E (CATEGORY 6)

Provide a voice and data cabling and outlet system to comply with ISO/IEC 11801 Class E - Category 6 Applications - Structured Cabling System to AS3080. All components in the installation shall be warranted from defect for a minimum of fifteen-(15) year’s post the end of the project contract defects period. The system guarantee must apply to any protocol sanctioned by standards bodies for use with the category of cable installed in the system.



– The communications system is summarized as follows: - – Communications outlets and cabling. – Testing and Commissioning. – As constructed documentation. 13.1 Active Components Switches, servers and telephony equipment will be supplied and installed by the Principal near the end of the contract. Liaise with the Principal and provide attendance during installation and commissioning of the equipment. Provide adequate rack space on the TCBD for equipment. 13.2 Standards – Communication and LV Cabling Personnel installing the communications shall be ACMA licensed for the type of cabling and installation practice to be installed (eg. Category 6 UTP) and all cable and cabling products installed shall be ACMA approved or listed product and be installed in compliance with AS/CA standards and Technical Standard S009. The complete installation shall comply with all relevant regulations, by-laws and requirements, including but not limited to: – AS/NZS 3000 Wiring Rules – AS/NZS 3080: Telecommunications installations - Integrated telecommunications cabling systems for

commercial premises – AS 3084: Telecommunications installations - Telecommunications pathways and spaces for

commercial buildings – AS/NZS 3087.1: Telecommunications installations - Generic cabling systems - Specification for the

testing of balanced communication cabling. – AS/NZS 3087.2: Telecommunications installations - Generic cabling systems - Specification for the

testing of patch cords in accordance with AS/NZS 3080 – HB 243 Communications Cabling Manual, Module 1: Australian regulatory arrangements – AS/NZS 3086: Telecommunications installations - Integrated telecommunications cabling systems for

small office/home office premises – AS/CA S009 Installation Requirements for Customer Cabling (Wiring Rules) – AS/CA S008 Requirements for Authorised Cabling Products – AS/CA Regulations and Standards – HB 29 Communications Cabling Manual (CCM). – TS 010 General premises and domestic cable installer’s license and inspection requirements. – TS 011 Abbreviations, definitions and terms used in Technical Standards 13.3 Communications Earth System (CES) Install a Communications Earth System in accordance with AS/CA S009. Install a Telecommunications Functional Earth Electrode (TFEE) to obtain the specified maximum earth resistance in accordance with AS3000 and to AS/CA S009, where required. Permanently label, using a brass plaque, engraved with the words “Telecommunications Electrode”. Use clamps to AS 1882 for the connection of the main earthing conductor and interconnecting bonding to electrodes within a suitable pit. Where electrodes are to be installed in rock, fill the gap between the rock and electrode with bentonite clay or resin compound or as otherwise approved. The pit shall be sized to ensure all connections within a cable pit shall be accessible for testing, disconnection and reconnection, and the pit cover shall be flush with the surrounding finished ground level. The connection to the earthing system shall be not less than 150mm above the level of the ground within the pit. Permanently label, using an engraved brass plaque, with the words "Telecommunications Electrode". Provide a Communications Earth Terminal at the Building Distributor and adjacent to each Floor Distributor. Provide connection from the Communications Earth Terminals, to the building main earth bar using method 1, as defined in AS/CA S009. Provide labels to all CET earth bars in accordance with AS/CA S009. Complete the following tests on the Telecommunication reference conductor:



– resistance from Building Distributor to ground – Provide copies of the test results. 13.4 Connection Hardware The existing communication services shall retained and reused, provide additional hardware as required for a complete system. Cabinet accessories to be warranted by the Manufacturer for the same period as the horizontal cabling. Patch Panels Provide patch panels at each Distributor cabinet to match the number of telecommunication outlets, voice and data, plus 10% spare. Patch panels (including all connectors) shall be rated at 250 MHz and conform to the specifications for UTP connecting hardware (Category 6 - Class E Applications) as detailed in AS/NZS 3080. Patch panels shall be 24 way and be complete with metal rear cable management and Velcro ties unless otherwise nominated on drawings. The patch panels shall be suitable for mounting in 19" frames and shall be fixed using securing bolts and captive nuts at either side. Terminate each cable at each patch panel using an 8-position modular RJ45 connection T568-A Wiring Sequence, compliant with connector clauses of this specification. Arrange panels from the top (typically, unless otherwise shown on drawings): 1RU spare, Voice TP, Field Cabling, Equipment shelving. TPF backbone blocks shall be at the bottom of the cabinet. Panels shall accommodate full labeling of every connector. Cables terminating in connectors shall be dressed in the panel with due consideration to minimum bending radii. The cable dressing shall not cause permanent indentation of cable sheath. Sufficient cable reserve shall be installed such that re-termination of connectors can occur in addition to an allowance for removal and inspection of the complete panels. Protect cables entering panels by appropriate protective glands or grommets. Strain relief shall be provided at each termination such that any strain on the cable is not transferred to the electrical contacts in the connector. Supply and install horizontal and vertical brackets (cable tidy’s) for cable management of patching leads. Horizontal brackets shall be provided between every 2RU of patch panels and shall be open ring type with minimum dimensions 40mm x 60mm. Equip each patch panel, to its full capacity, with RJ45 Cat 6 type modular sockets. 13.5 Cables General Install cables in accordance with AS/CA S009- Communications Wiring Rules (ACMA Mandated) and in a manner, which eliminates any possibility of strain on the cable or terminations. Installation practices shall not deform the cable shape. Cables shall not be installed within 100mm or parallel with power cables or within 10m of any sources of high-energy emissions such as transformers, generators etc. Any possible conflict with this requirement shall be referred to the Superintendent for instruction. All cables are to be run via the shortest practical route to minimise cable length. Backbone UTP cabling shall not exceed 90 metre in length unless specifically for voice applications only. Due to the constraints of Category 6 cabling excess length in 4pair cables shall be kept to a minimum. Slack retention at termination points shall be restricted to the amount of cable required for re-termination (less than 1 meter). The storage of cable shall comply with the minimum bend radius for that cable type as per manufactures specifications. All cabling is to be handled, drawn in and fastened with care to ensure that physical damage is not caused to the cable. Cables shall not be subject to excessive draw forces during installation. Wherever possible cable shall be fed and drawn at the same time to avoid excessive strain on the cable. Any cable damaged during installation is to be replaced in its entirety. All sections of damaged cable are to be removed as part of the replacement process. Cable shall not be left under tension at any point. Particular note should be taken of the entry/exit from the ceiling space, conduits, cable trays, catenary wires, vertical ducting and workpoint partitioning. Where cables enter or leave pathways, they are to be protected from damage by use of suitable grommets or protective strips.



Joints or splices shall not be permitted in any installed cable. Penetrations through fire-rated partitions or floors are to maintain the designated fire-rating. Ensure that all Velcro cable ties are not drawn excessively tight. The cable ties should be installed in a manner so as not to distort the cable/s in any way. All cable ties are to be dressed neatly after installation. Conduit or other type of cable enclosure shall not be mounted and exposed on wall surfaces, without written approval by the Superintendent unless otherwise specified. Cable Pathways Cabling is not to be embedded in plaster, concrete or similar materials. Where cable has to be routed through these materials, the cable is to be contained in conduit, or similar, which allows for easy reticulation of cables. Cable and horizontal pathways are to be routed to avoid ceiling space services such as light fittings and air-conditioning ducting. Support cabling in ceiling spaces by cable trays or catenary wires. Cabling shall not to be attached to ceiling support struts nor is it to rest on suspended ceiling surfaces. Catenary wires may be used from the end of cable trays to the point where cabling is reticulated through vertical ducting. Cabling is to be secured to the catenary wires at regular intervals using Velcro ties. Support must be provided where cabling is reticulated from horizontal pathways to vertical ducting to carry the weight of the cables. Where ever possible, cabling is to make use of vertical conduit or cavity walls, suitable for the reticulation of cable. Vertical ducting or service poles are to be supplied and installed wherever conduit or similar ducting is of insufficient size to accommodate the required cable bundle. Where ever possible service poles are to form part of workpoint partitioning. Refer to the layout drawings for circumstances where service poles are proposed. Where cables are run through steel noggins or studs, appropriate grommets shall be provided to protect the cables. Cable entry into a wall cavity shall be directly above or below the physical location of the information outlet location. The cable entry hole into the cavity should be sufficient to permit free running of all cables and a minimum of 20% spare capacity for additional cable. Horizontal Cabling Provide Horizontal cabling to each outlet and other designated locations as indicated on the drawings. The horizontal cabling to each outlet shall consist of two 4 pair 100 ohm UTP cables rated at 250 MHz and conform to the specifications for Category 6 - Class E Applications UTP Cable as specified in AS3080. The total length of any UTP cable run from the telecommunication outlet to the patch panel is not to exceed 90 metres, and 100 metres including patch cords and fly leads. Subject to above clauses – 2 metres of courtesy cable is to be left at both ends of each cable to allow re-termination if necessary. Where telecommunication outlets are located on skirting or similar ducting, sufficient additional cable is to be left in ceiling void to allow the removal of the outlet for servicing. Large service loops (500mm diameter minimum) are to be used to store excess cable. UTP cables shall be reticulated and bundled in groups not exceeding Twenty four (24) cables. Care is to be taken that UTP cabling is not bent at a radius less than that recommended by the supplier, and not less than ten (10) times the outside diameter of the cable during installation. “At rest” diameter can be four (4) times outside diameter. All horizontal cabling is to maintain a separation from power cabling in accordance with AS/CA 009-2001. Cable must be laid on the racks in a manner which does not impede the mounting of equipment in the rack. 13.6 Connectors/Outlets Terminate horizontal cabling at an RJ45 connector using an Insulation Displacement Contact (IDC). RJ45 connectors are to be rated at 250 MHz and conform to the specifications for UTP Connecting Hardware (Category 6 - Class E Applications) as detailed in AS/NZS 3080. RJ45 connectors shall be configured with a pin/pair assignment in accordance with T568A as detailed in AS/NZS 3080.



For twin telecommunication outlets, the horizontal data cable should be terminated on the right-most or lower RJ45 connector, and the horizontal voice cable should be terminated on the left-most or upper RJ45 connector. The installation of the face plate and RJ45 connector should make allowance for each telecommunication outlet to be easily and distinctly identified and labelled as to its allocated use. The work station outlet for each cable is to be positioned within 100mm of the junction of the clerical and computer desks. Outlets shall be of the same manufacturer and colour as adjacent power socket outlets. UTP Patch Leads Provide patch cables in a quantity to match the number of telecommunication outlets plus 10% spare. Patch cord performance level shall be verified by the manufacture to be a minimum of Category 6 when tested in accordance with AS/NZS 3087.2: Telecommunications installations - Generic cabling systems – Part 2: Specification for the testing of patch cords in accordance with AS/NZS 3080: Patch cords shall be; Constructed of a flexible (stranded/bunched conductor) 4-pair cable conforming to the specifications for UTP cross-connect jumpers and patch cords (Category 6) as detailed in ISO/IEC 11801; Terminated according to AS/NZS 3080 (T568-A) The length of the patch cable is to be clearly identified on the cable at both ends. The label is to be attached flush with the cable sheath and be colour coded as follows: Blue – data White – voice Red – cross patch – Fly Leads Provide one fly lead for every outlet shown on the plans. Fly leads shall be 2m long for 80% of cables; the remaining 20% shall be 4m long. Fly Lead performance level shall be verified by the manufacturer to be a minimum of Category 6 when tested in accordance with AS/NZS 3087.2: Telecommunications installations - Generic cabling systems – Part 2: Specification for the testing of patch cords in accordance with AS/NZS 3080. The fly leads shall be: – constructed of a flexible (stranded/bunched connector) 4-pair cable conforming to the specifications

for UTP cross-connect jumpers and patch cords (category 6) as detailed in ISO/IEC 11801; – Terminated according to connector’s section of this specification. – Flyleads are to be supplied in a quantity to match the number of telecommunication outlets plus 10%. – The length of the flylead is to be clearly identified on the cable at both ends. The label is to be attached

flush with the cable sheath and be colour coded according to length. – Coordinate with the telephone vendor for system specific requirements. 13.7 Labelling General Provide mechanically printed Trafolyte labelling (7mm high), with 4mm high black lettering for the labelling of all telecommunication outlets, patch panels, and patch panel ports, using the colour coding convention established in AS/NZS 3080; Blue background for horizontal wiring (including telecommunication outlets and patch panels); and White background for system connections (including cross-connects, equipment rooms and to telecommunication closets). Identify all outlets sequentially. Identify all IDC type blocks shall be identified using printed labels in proprietary holders.. Each horizontal cable shall be labelled 150 mm from each end and, at a minimum, marked with a permanent pen in a legible manner using a surface mounted label, which sits flush with the cable sheath.



Each bundle of up to 24 data cables shall be labelled at all locations where the horizontal pathways divide. Patch Panel Labelling The numbering of each patch port is to commence at the left-hand side of the patch panel with 01 and proceed towards the right. DO NOT repeat numbers on different panels at the same rack. Leading zeros are to be included. 13.8 Documentation Produce and maintain accurate records of all cables and terminations undertaken as part of the installation process. Provide backbone cable records such that each pair is clearly identifiable at each end and all cross jumpering is clearly shown. Provide complete and up to date documentation to the Superintendent upon handover of the cabling system. The documentation is to include, but not be limited to: a comprehensive list which identifies all components; a table, located in the equipment room, identifying all horizontal and vertical cables and their length; a detailed floor plan showing outlet locations and their identification label; a schedule detailing all tests undertaken and the results obtained for copper cables; and Cable records showing the pair assignments and all jumpering on all IDC-type blocks. Floor plans shall be provided in Autocad 2012 format suitable in compliance with DHW layering protocols. – 13.9 Testing and Commissioning General All components comprising the structured cabling system must be recognised as a Certified System. Proforma transmission performance testing reports and graphical results by an approved testing house must be made available to the superintendent prior to commencement of works. Individual cable runs, terminations, and other system components are to be tested at the time of installation, and the complete system tested in its entirety prior to handover. Test procedures must be designed to verify 100% end-to-end operation of the system, and in the case of UTP and fibre cables and componentry, Compliance Testing shall be in accordance with AS/NZS 3080. UTP Cabling Testing Test all UTP Cable using a level III tester as defined by AS/NZ3087.1. Category 6 cabling and associated componentry shall be tested using Permanent Link configuration to Class E requirements as specified by AS/NS3080 for compliance testing and the electronic test results shall include full plot data. Submit the test results in soft copy, in the tester manufacturers’ native format. Test reports are not acceptable in TXT,CSV and PDF formats Replace any cable or system component, found to be damaged or identified as not meeting specifications or test requirements. Provide the necessary replacement with cost to the Principal. Test all horizontal data cables are to be tested for termination and pair integrity (continuity, polarity, pin-assignment and colour code). Inspect, all UTP cables to ensure that each pair has retained the required twist rate up to the point of termination - maximum amount of untwisting in a pair as a result of termination to connecting hardware shall be no greater than 13mm. In addition to any other test considered necessary by the installer, the following end-to-end tests are to be carried out on the horizontal and vertical UTP cabling using the appropriate test set-up and apparatus and undertaken in accordance to compliance testing requirements of AS/NZS 3080 and As/NZS3087 , including:- – Insertion Loss – NEXT, – PSNEXT,



– ACR, – PSACR, – ELFEXT, – PSELFEXT, – DC Loop Resistance, – Skew, – Length, – Wiremap, – Continuity of conductors, – Return Loss;

14 SECURITY SYSTEM

14.1 GENERAL Engage Wired Earth Security Services to undertake the extension of the existing security system and works outlined within this section. Extend the existing Tecom equipment to integrate with the existing site security system, including memory expansion cards, processor and software upgrades required for a fully functioning system. Equipment and materials and the installation shall comply in standards and performance with the current requirements of the Standards Association of Australia, in particular AS3000 and AS2201. Provide 24 hour security monitoring of the building via a nominated monitoring station.

14.2 SCOPE OF WORKS Supply and install the following equipment for; – Systems, control and programming – Intruder alarm detectors and alarms. – Smoke alarms – Complete cabling systems. – Control and communication equipment. – Complete programming of the systems. – Full testing and commissioning of all systems. – Maintenance of the system for twelve (12) months from the date of commissioning. – All other material and components necessary to achieve the specified performance.

14.3 CONTROL/PROGRAMMING EQUIPMENT Carry out the necessary processing to operate the system and hold all operating programmes and system data. When a system or area within the system is switched “on” (armed), movement within the area covered by the motion detectors will initiate an alarm.

14.4 SYSTEM ARMING / DISARMING Arming and disarming of the system shall be achieved by use of the keypads located adjacent to exit doors.

14.5 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS Equipment shall: – Operate in ambient temperatures from 0° to 50°C. – Cooling shall be by natural ventilation. – Mains operated equipment shall be suitably fused and designed for operation from a single phase,

50Hz supply of 240 volts ± 6%. Two (2) metres of 3 core flexible cable terminated on a 10 amp 3 flat pin plug shall be used for the connection to that supply.



– All switching contacts shall be rated by the component manufacturer for 100,000 operations at the installed operating current.

– Relay coils shall be suitable for operation from their respective supply voltage +20%, -25% in the battery powered equipment and +15% in mains only powered equipment.

Cabling shall be protected against damage by overloads. Cable liable to bending during service or maintenance, shall be of a flexible type. Plugs and sockets shall be labelled with the circuit they connect to. Cabling within equipment, shall be neatly laced and tied and supported on metal brackets as necessary. Interconnections between equipment and internal modules shall be via plug socket connections. All indication lamps shall be L.E.D.

14.6 POSITIONING The positions of devices shown on the drawings are approximate only. Before commencing work, ascertain the positions to give optimum performance for the devices supplied.

14.7 MOTION DETECTORS Movement detectors shall be of an approved passive infra-red type and with integral LED. The passive infra-red detection range shall not decrease as room temperature nears body temperature. The range/type of detector shall provide coverage to the total area in which it is shown and shall have individual outputs for the signaling of alarm, tamper and trouble. The detection sensitivity shall be adjustable. The motion sensor shall signal an alarm when its alarm relay is de-energised (N.C.). Tamper switch shall be closed, when the equipment is fully assembled. An alarm-indicating LED on the sensor shall be capable of being disabled, but shall indicate trouble by flashing, even when disabled. Seal all cable entry and mounting holes, after installation, to prevent ingress of insects, draughts, etc. Install mounting brackets where corner or direct wall mounting does not provide optimum detector performance.

14.8 SMOKE & THERMAL DETECTORS Provide smoke and thermal detectors as part of the security system to provide coverage as indicated on the contract drawings. Smoke detectors shall comply with AS 12239 or AS3786 and thermal detectors with AS 1603.3.

14.9 DOOR CONTACT SWITCHES Provide door contact switches as noted on the contract documents to suit the item to be secured. Provide minimum one switch per opening component i.e. one per door leaf. Contact switches to internal doors shall be 3/4” end-on-end concealed type. Surface mounted contact switches shall only be utilised where concealed type cannot be accommodated and with approval from the Superintendent. Provide heavy duty reed switches to roller shutters as DAS Sentrol or equivalent. Provide local audible alarm using ceiling mounted sonalert sounders.

14.10 PROGRAMMING/COMMISSIONING Allow programming the installation as directed on site at practical completion, and once during the warranty period.



14.11 TENDER SCHEDULE The electrical services tender prices shall be submitted in the following breakdown format; TENDER BREAKDOWN - ELECTRICAL SERVICES South Coast College Technology Block – Stage 1B I/We hereby tender for the supply, installation, testing and maintenance of all work in accordance with the tender documents. Item Tender Amount LV switchboards $ Pipe and pit $ Submains $ General power $ Lighting (Supply of light fittings) $ Lighting & Emergency lighting installation $ Carpark lighting $ Extension of existing Voice and data communications infrastructure $ Extension of existing Intruder detection system $ $ Commissioning $ As Built drawings and maintenance handbooks $ Maintenance during the defects period $ Site establishment costs $ Provisional Sums $ Sub Total $ Goods & Services Tax (GST) $ Total $

SCHEDULE OF COMPLIANCE (Initial relevant paragraph below and strike out the other.) (i) We confirm that the tender submission fully complies with the tender documentation. (ii) We confirm that the tender submission is not fully compliant with the tender documentation and varies from the requirements of the documentation as detailed upon the attached schedule: Dated this ………………………...…………….. Day of ……………………………….. 2017 Name of Contractor: ……………………………………………………………………………… Signed: ……………………….………………….Print Name: …………………………………..



15 APPENDIX A GAS SOLENOID WIRING DIAGRAM

EXTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE PROJECT SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE – STAGE 1B PROJECT NO. 17.04 DATE OF ISSUE 20 OCTOBER 2018 REVISION 0

This schedule is to be read in conjunction with the drawings and specifications. Submit control samples of all finishes for approval and keep on site once approved.

ELEMENT MATERIAL FINISH MANUFACTURER COLOUR REFERENCE NOTES

Page 1 of 2

Site Carpark Bitumen Bitumen - Black - - Paving – Type A Concrete Unit Paver Concrete Brikmakers Cappuccino Grandpave 60

330 x 330 x 60 Flagstone 60 330 x 165 x 60

Alternating courses of Grandpave & Flagstone

Paving – Type B Concrete Unit Paver Concrete Brikmakers Federation Red Twinpave 60 220 x 110 x 60

-

Paving – Type C Concrete Unit Paver Concrete Brikmakers Federation Red Newpave 60 220 x 220 x 60

-

Walls Masonry Walls (Brick) Clay Brick Face Brick Midland Brick Cream Mexicut

Raked joints to match existing

Retaining Walls (Block) Concrete Block Face Block Modular Masonry Parchment Besser Block Rolled joints Retaining Walls (Limestone) Reconstituted Limestone Face Block Limestone Square edge blocks Steel Sheet Cladding Zincalume Spandek Colourbond Bluescope Steel Surfmist Spandek - Compressed Fibre Cement James Hardie Exotec

Compressed Fibre Cement Facade

Painted Dulux Weathershield To match Colourbond Woodland Grey

SW1B5 -

Concrete Columns (Circular) Concrete Class 3 Concrete Finish Dulux Weathershield To match Colourbond Woodland Grey

- -

Steel Structure Steel columns Steel Hot dip galvanised - - - - Steel Rainwater Pipes Steel Hot dip galvanised - - - - Steel Fascia Beams Steel Hot dip galvanised/ Low

Sheen Acrylic Paint Dulux WeatherMax To match Colourbond

Woodland Grey - -

Doors & Windows Door & Window Frames Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Woodland Grey 272-7255S Satin - Doors Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Woodland Grey 272-7255S Satin - Doors Timber Semi-Gloss Enamel Paint Dulux Aquanamel To match Woodland

Grey - -

Door Reveals Steel Hot dip galvanised - - - -

EXTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE PROJECT SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE – STAGE 1B PROJECT NO. 17.04 DATE OF ISSUE 20 OCTOBER 2018 REVISION 0


ELEMENT MATERIAL FINISH MANUFACTURER COLOUR REFERENCE NOTES

Page 2 of 2

Security Screens Stainless Steel Powdercoat - Black - - Security Screen Frames Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Woodland Grey 272-7255S Satin - Roller Shutter Steel Powdercoat Mirage Dulux Surfmist 272-1137S Satin - Glazing Vision Glass - Comfort Plus Viridian Clear - Refer Door & Window Schedule Spandrel Glass - Spectra Seraphic Viridian Woodland Grey Super

Clear - Refer Door & Window Schedule

Louvres Condenser Enclosure Pressed Steel Colourbond Bluescope Steel Woodland Grey - New gate to existing louvre Wall Louvres & Louvre Doors

Aluminium Colourbond Bluescope Steel Woodland Grey - -

Soffit Soffit Lining Fibre Cement Low Sheen Acrylic Paint Dulux Weathershield To match Colourbond

Surfmist - -

Soffit Lining Zinclaume Colourbond Bluescope Steek Surfmsit Spandek profile - Roof Roof Sheeting Steel Colourbond Bluescope Steel Surfmist Trimdek profile - Roof Sheeting Steel Colourbond Bluescope Steel Surfmist Kliplok profile - Capping and Flashings Steel Colourbond Bluescope Steel To match roof - - Gutter Steel Colourbond Bluescope Steel Surfmist - - Miscellaneous Balustrade Steel Hot dip galvanised - - - - Sunscreens Aluminium Powdercoat Dulux Woodland Grey 272-7255S Satin -

END OF SHEDULE

INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE PROJECT SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE – STAGE 1B PROJECT NO. 17.04 DATE OF ISSUE 20 October 2018 REVISION 0


CODE ITEM MANUFACTURER SPECIFICATION COLOUR NOTES IMAGE

Page 1 of 3

BL- Blinds BL-01 Roller Blind Vertilux Metalo Mettalised Gunmetal BW- Brickwork BW-01 Brickwork Boral, Austral Bricks 305 x 162 x 90 Commons Fair Face with rolled joints BW-02 Blockwork Boral, Modular Masonry 390 x 190 x 150 Grey Fair Face with rolled joints CA- Carpet CA-01 Carpet Tile Shaw Contract Glitch tile 5T128

Interrupt 26505

229 x 914 Brick pattern

CA-02 Carpet Tile Shaw Contract Manipulate tile 5T130 Interrupt 26505

229 x 914 Brick pattern

CP- Ceiling Panel CP-01 Acoustic Panel CSR Martini Absorb HD 50 Grey Brick bond Pattern CR – Cement Render CR-01 Glass face cement

render Grey

CS – Concrete Sealer CS-01 Concrete Floor Sealer Fosroc Nitroflor 150 HP-FC Grey CT- Ceiling Tile CT-01 Ceiling Tile Armstrong Ultima H4771 White FA-Fabric FA-01 Pinboard fabric Ecoustic Curve Deep Natural anodised aluminium frame HD- Handles HD-01 Cabinetry Handle Hafele Studio 138mm D-Pull Brushed SS HD-02 Cabinetry Handle Hafele 155.00.270 mm Flush

handle Matt Chrome Plated




Page 2 of 3

LA- Laminates LA-01 Whiteboard Laminate Formica Magnetic Laminate Glossy White

9672

LA-02 Desktop Laminate Laminex Laminate White 200 Natural finish

LA-03 Cabinetry Laminex Laminate Zincworks 869 Natural finish

Chemical Resistant to Science Laboratories and Science Preparation Room

LA-04 Cabinetry Laminex Laminate Battalion 042 Natural finish

Chemical Resistant to Science Laboratories, Science Preparation Room and Chemical Store

LA-05 Toilet Cubicles Laminex Compact Laminate Zincworks 869 MA- Entry Mats MA-01 Entry Mat Autex Reef 7mm thick Tornado PA- Paints PA-01 General wall paint Dulux Wash & Wear Low

Sheen Acrylic Brume Quarter P12A1Q

PA-02 Feature wall paint Dulux Wash & Wear Low Sheen Acrylic

Caboose S12A3

PA-03 Door, Door Frames & Trims

Dulux Aquanamel Semi-Gloss Acrylic

To match PA-01

PA-04 Door, Door Frames & Trims

Dulux Aquanamel Semi-Gloss Acrylic

To match PC-01

PA-05 Ceiling paint Dulux Ceiling White White PC- Powdercoats PC-01 Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Woodland Grey PC-02 Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy White Satin PC-03 Powdercoat Dulux Duralloy Surfmist RF- Resilient Finishes RF-01 Floor Vinyl Forbo Surestep Wood Grey Seagrass

18562 Slip Resistance R10




Page 3 of 3

RF-02 Floor Vinyl Forbo Surestep Original Steel 171962 Slip Resistance R10 SF- Solid Finishes SF-01 General Benchtops Corian 12mm/6mm Aspen Heat moulded seams –no visible joints SK- Skirtings SK-01 Skirting (General) Gunnersens Bevelled MDF PA-01 92 x 18mm SK-02 Skirting Tile Tiles Expo LIFESTYLE-BAS C7 300 x 150mm, Slip Resistance R10/P4

(300 x 300mm tile cut in half)

TF- Floor Tiles TF-01 Floor Tile- General Tiles Expo LIFESTYLE-BAS C7 300 x 150mm, Slip Resistance R10/P4 TF-01 Floor Tile- Shower Tiles Expo LIFESTYLE-BASSQU C7 48 x 48mm, Slip Resistance R10/P4 TR- Trims TR-01 Wall tile/ wall fabric /

wall laminate trim DTA Australia Contempo Edge

Trim Aluminium Depth to suit wall tile or fabric depth

TR-02 Transition trim vinyl to carpet tile

Intafloors Code: IF6-3 Anodised aluminium

TR-03 Transition trim carpet to concrete floors

Intafloors Code: IF50CJ Anodised aluminium

TR-04 Tile external corner trim

BAT Trims Code: BEC-6-3-MS Size: 6

Matt Silver

TW- Wall Tiles TW-01 Wall Tile Tiles Expo Modern Cit C7 (Light

Grey) 100 x 300 horizontal brick bond. Grout – Ardex Ultra White 390 TR-01 to exposed edges

END OF SHEDULE

INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE ROOM BY ROOM PROJECT SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE – STAGE 1B PROJECT NO. 17.04 DATE OF ISSUE 20 OCTOBER 2018 REVISION 0


ROOM WALLS FLOOR CEILING DOORS WINDOWS FITMENTS NOTES FACE FINISH FLOOR SKIRTING FINISH FRAME DOOR SILL FRAME TREATMENTS

Page 1 of 7

GROUND FLOOR

Breakout & Gallery

N - CA-01 MA-01

- PA-05 PC-01 PC-01 - PC-01 - - -

E PA-01 PA-02

SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - PC-01 - - PA-01 to columns PA-02 to walls below windows

S - - - - - - - - -

W Exist. SK-01/PA-04 - - - - - - -

Materials Workshop 1

N BW-02 PA-01

MA-01 CS-01

- CP-01 PC-01 PA-04

PC-01 PA-04

- - - -

E BW-01 PA-01

- - PC-03 - - - -

S PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - PC-01 - -

W PA-01 - PC-01 PC-01 - PC-01 - -

Tool Store 1 N BW-01 PA-01

CS-01 - PA-05 - - - - - - -

E BW-01 PA-01

- - - - - - - -

S BW-02 PA-01

- PA-04 PA-04 - - - - -

W BW-01 PA-01

- - - - - - - -

Welding 1 Welding 2 Oxy Weld

N BW-01 PA-01

CS-01 - PA-05 - - - - - - Welding Curtin as specified Galvanised screen frame PA-01 to screen panel E BW-01

PA-01 - - - - - - -

S - - - - - - - -

W BW-01 PA-01

- - - - - - -




Page 2 of 7

Covered Work Area

N BW-01 PA-01

CS-01 - PA-05 - - - - - - -

E BW-01 PA-01

- - PC-03 - - - - -

S BW-01 PA-01

- - - - -

- - -

W BW-01 PA-01

- - PC-03 - - - - -

Materials Store 1 Materials Store 2

N BW-01 PA-01

CS-01 - PA-05 CP-01

- - - - - Materials Racks – galvanised steel

E BW-01 PA-01

- - PC-03 - - -

S BW-01 PA-01

- - - - - -

W BW-01 PA-01

- - PC-03 - - -

Model Store 1 Model Store 2

N BW-01 PA-01

CS-01 - PA-05 - - - - - Refer Cabinetry Schedule

-

E BW-01 PA-01

- - - - - - -

S BW-01 PA-01

- - - - - - -

W BW-01 PA-01

- - PC-03 - - - -

Machine Room N BW-01 PA-01

CS-01 - PA-05 CP-01

PC-01 PC-01 - - - - -

E BW-01 PA-01

- - PC-03 - - - - -

S BW-01 PA-01

- PC-01

PC-01

- -

- - -




Page 3 of 7

W PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 - - - PC-01 - - -

Planning Studio N PA-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PA-05 CT-01

- - - PC-01 - Refer Cabinetry Schedule

E PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 - - - PC-01 -

S PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 - - - PC-01 -

W PA-01 LA-01

SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - PC-01 -

Tool Store 2 N BW-01 PA-01

CS-01 - PA-05 - - - - - Refer Cabinetry Schedule

E BW-01 PA-01

- - - - - -

S BW-01 PA-01

- - - - - -

W BW-01 PA-01

- PA-04 PA-04 - - -

Finishing N BW-01 PA-01

CS-01 - PA-05 - - - - - -

E BW-01 PA-01

- PA-04 PA-04 - - - -

S BW-02 PA-01

- - - - - - -

W BW-01 PA-01

- PA-04 PA-04 - - - -

Chem Store N BW-01 PA-01

CS-01 - PA-05 - - - - - -

E BW-01 PA-01

- - - - - - -

S BW-02 PA-01

- - - - - - -

W BW-01 PA-01

- PA-04 PA-04 - - - -




Page 4 of 7

Staff Study 1 N PA-01 FA-01

CA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PA-05 CT-01

- - - - - Refer Cabinetry Schedule

TR-O1 to FA-01 edges

E PA-01 FA-01

SK-01/PA-04 - - - - -

S PA-01 FA-01

SK-01/PA-04 - - PA-03 PC-04 BL-01

W PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - - -

Lobby N PA-01 CA-01 MA-01

SK-01/PA-04 PA-05 PC-01 PC-01 - PC-01 - Refer Cabinetry Schedule

E PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - PC-01 -

S PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - PC-01 -

W PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 - - - - -

Staff Seminar N PA-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PA-05 PC-01 PC-01 PC-01 - - Refer Cabinetry Schedule

TR-01 to LA-01 edges

E CR-01 PA-01

SK-01/PA-04 - - - PC-01 BL-01

S PA-01 LA-01

SK-01/PA-04 - - - - -

W PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - - -

Female Toilet Male Toilet

N CR-01 PA-01

TF-01 SK-02 PA-05 - - - - - - LA-05 Toilet cubicle doors

TW-01 Basin wall – all four faces.

TR-04 to corners.

E CR-01 PA-01

SK-02 - - - - - -

S CR-01 PA-01

SK-02 PC-01 PA-04 - - - -

W CR-01 PA-01

SK-02 - - - - - -

UAT N CR-01 PA-01 TW-01

TF-01 TF-02

SK-02 PA-05 - - - - - -




Page 5 of 7

E CR-01 PA-01 TW-01

SK-02 - - - - - - TF-02 to 1100x1100 nom. Shower area

TR-01 to TW-01 edges S CR-01 PA-01

SK-02 PC-01 PA-04 - - - -

W CR-01 PA-01

SK-02 - - - - - -

FIRST FLOOR

Breakout / Gallery (Existing)

N Exist. Exist. - Exist. - - - - - - -

E PA-01 PA-02

SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 PA-03 PC-01 - - PA-01 to columns PA-02 to walls below windows

S Exist. - - - - - - - -

W Exist. Exist. - - - - - - -

Science Lab 3

N PA-01 TW-01

CA-01 RF-01

SK-01/PA-04 PA-05 CT-01

- - PA-03 PC-01 BL-01 Refer Cabinetry Schedule

TR-01 to FA-01 edges TR-01 to TW-01 edges TR-02 to CA-01 / RF-01 junction.

E PA-01 TW-01 FA-01

SK-01/PA-04 - - - - -

S - - - - - - -

W PA-01 TW-01

SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - - -

Science Lab 4 N - CA-01 RF-01

- PA-05 CT-01


TR-01 to FA-01 edges TR-01 to TW-01 edges TR-02 to CA-01 / RF-01 junction.

E PA-01 TW-01

SK-01/PA-04 - - PA-03 PC-01 BL-01

S PA-01 TW-01 FA-01

SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 LA-01 - - -

W PA-01 TW-01

SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 PA-03 PC-01 -




Page 6 of 7

Science Lab 5 N PA-01 TW-01 FA-01

CA-01 RF-01

SK-01/PA-04 PA-05 CT-01

PC-01 LA-01 - - - Refer Cabinetry Schedule

TR-01 to FA-01 edges TR-01 to TW-01 edges TR-02 to CA-01 / RF-01 junction. E PA-01

TW-01 SK-01/PA-04 - - PA-03 PC-01 BL-01

S - - - - - - -

W PA-01 TW-01

SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 PA-03 PC-01 -

Staff Study 2 N PA-01 FA-01

CA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PA-05 CT-01


TR-O1 to FA-01 edges

E PA-01 FA-01

SK-01/PA-04 - - - - -

S PA-01 FA-01

SK-01/PA-04 - - PA-03 PC-04 BL-01

W PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - - -

Meeting Room N PA-01 CA-01 SK-01/PA-04 PA-05

- - - - - -

-

E PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 - - - - -

S - - PC-01 PC-01 - PC-04 -

W PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 - - - PC-04 -

STEM Studio N PA-01 TW-01

RF-01

SK-01/PA-04 CT-01 PA-03


TR-01 to FA-01 edges

E PA-01 FA-01

SK-01/PA-04 - - PA-03 PC-01 BL-01

S - SK-01/PA-04 - - - - -

W PA-01 FA-01

SK-01/PA-04 PC-01 PC-01 - - -

END OF SHEDULE




Page 7 of 7

Project Store N Exist Exist

Exist Exist - - - - - Refer Cabinetry Schedule

E Exist Exist Exist Exist Exist Exist -

S Exist Exist - - - - -

W PA-01 - - - - - -

Science Preparation Room (Existing)

N Exist RF-02 Replace exist carpet

- Exist - - - - - Refer Cabinetry Schedule

E PA-01 SK-01/PA-04 Exist Exist - - -

S Exist Exist - - - - -

W PA-01 Exist - - Exist Exist BL-01

Science Laboratory 1 (Existing)

E - -

- - - - - - BL-01 2 off nom. 4700mm wide x 1500mm high blinds. Site measure

Science Laboratory 2 (Existing)

N - -

- - - - - - BL-01 2 off nom. 3900mm wide x 1500mm high blinds. Site measure

Music Laboratory (Existing)

E - -

- - - - - - BL-01 1 off nom. 4700mm wide x 1500mm high blind. Site measure

INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE CABINETRY PROJECT SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B PROJECT NO. 17.04 DATE OF ISSUE 20 OCTOBER 2018 REVISION 0


ROOM ITEM PLINTH CUPBOARDS BENCH TOP OPEN SHEVLVING EDGES FRAMING NOTES INTERNALS FACE HANDLES SHELVES SURROUND

Page 1 of 2

Model Stores 1 & 2

Model Store Shelving

- - PC-03 - - LA-02 - ABS PC-03 PC-03 to all steel frames and doors

Planning Studio Planning Studio Bench

- - - - LA-01 - - ABS PC-02

Tool Stores 2 Tool Store Shelving

- - - - - LA-02 - ABS PC-03

Staff Study 1 & 2

Staff Study Bench

- - - - LA-02 - - ABS PC-02

Overhead Shelves

- - - - - LA-04 LA-03 ABS _

Lobby Bag Rack LA-04 LA-04 - - LA-04 LA-04 LA-04 ABS -

Staff Seminar Tea Prep LA-04 White Melamine

PA-04 HD-01 SF-01 - - ABS - LA-04 pelmet

Science Lab 3, 4, & 5

Science Demonstration Bench

LA-03 White Melamine

LA-03 HD-01 SF-01 - - ABS -

Science Student Bench


LA-03 HD-01 SF-01 - - ABS -

Science Display Cabinet


LA-04 HD-01 LA-04 LA-04 LA-04 ABS - LA-04 pelmet

Science Whiteboard Cabinet


LA-04 HD-01 LA-04 - - ABS - LA-01 whiteboard panel

INTERIOR FINISHES SCHEDULE CABINETRY PROJECT SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE STAGE 1B PROJECT NO. 17.04 DATE OF ISSUE 20 OCTOBER 2018 REVISION 0


ROOM ITEM PLINTH CUPBOARDS BENCH TOP OPEN SHEVLVING EDGES FRAMING NOTES INTERNALS FACE HANDLES SHELVES SURROUND

Page 2 of 2

STEM Studio STEM Studio bench

- - - - SF-01 - - SF-01 PC-02

Cupboards LA-04 White Melamine

LA-01 HD-02 - - - ABS - LA-04 pelmet

Science Project Store

Science Project Room Cupboard

LA-04 LA-04 - - - LA-04 LA-04 ABS - LA-04 pelmet

Display Cupboards

LA-04 LA-04 LA-01 - LA-04 LA-04 LA-04 ABS - LA-04 pelmet

Science Preparation Room (Existing)

Bench & Shelving

- - - - SF-01 LA-04 LA-04 ABS PC-02 LA-04 pelmet

Preparation bench

1 - - - SF-01 - - - PC-02

Science Chemical Store (Existing)

Shelving - - - - - LA-04 - ABS - New shelves to existing shelving unit

Food Preparation (Existing)

Shelving - - - - - LA-04 LA-04 ABS - LA-04 pelmet

END OF SHEDULE

ATC Williams Pty Ltd ABN 64 005 931 288 Melbourne T: +61 3 8587 0900 Perth T: +61 8 9213 1600 Brisbane T: +617 3352 7222 www.atcwilliams.com.au

Our Ref: 116196.01LR01

07 September 2016

BPA Engineering

460 Roberts Road

Subiaco WA 6008

ATTENTION: Long Truong

Dear Long

GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION: SCIENCE & TECHNOLOGY CENTRE - SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE, GNANGARA DRIVE, WAIKIKI

1 INTRODUCTION

This report presents the results of a geotechnical investigation carried out at the South Coast Baptist College in Waikiki. The plans provided indicate that the proposed development, located on the eastern portion of the site will comprise construction of a new two storey Science & Technology building and a new car parking area located in the northern portion of the site adjacent to Gnangara Drive. This investigation was requested by BPA Engineering acting on behalf of T & Z Architects. The objectives of this investigation were to ascertain the following:

Subsurface conditions and groundwater levels;

Site classification in accordance with AS2870 [1];

Site subsoil class in accordance with AS 1170.4 [2];

Site preparation requirements (earthworks) and construction considerations;

Foundation design criteria including allowable bearing pressure and settlement estimates;

Geotechnical parameters for retaining wall design calculations;

Subgrade CBR for flexible pavement design; and

Suitability of site soils for stormwater drainage. Terms of reference for this investigation were provided in ATC Williams proposal 116196.01P01 dated 11th August 2016. Authorisation to proceed was received from Long Truong of BPA Engineering in an e-mail dated 19th August 2016.

2 SITE DESCRIPTION

The study site is located on the southwest corner of the intersection of Gnangara Drive and Oakwood Crescent in Waikiki. At the time of the investigation the proposed building and a new car park area were occupied by several trees and covered by grass. The provided survey plan indicates the site to slope to the southwest from approximately 6.45 m AHD at the northeast corner to approximately 5.2 m AHD at the south west portion of the proposed building area. The proposed car parking area slopes to the southeast.

http://www.atcwilliams.com.au/

07 September 2016 Page 2 of 7 116196.01LR01.docx

The available geological map [3] for the area indicates the site to be underlain by calcareous Safety Bay sand. The Perth groundwater atlases (1st and 2nd editions [4, 5]) indicate groundwater levels at the site to be between 3.5 m AHD and 3 m AHD respectively.

3 SCOPE OF WORKS

The fieldwork was carried out on 25th August, 2016 and comprised:

Five hand auger boreholes (located in the proposed building area) advanced to depths of between 1.7 m and 1.9 m below the surface to visually assess subsurface conditions;

Two shallow test pits (located in the proposed car park area) to visually assess subsurface conditions and obtain samples for standard compaction and CBR testing;

Seven Perth sand penetrometer (PSP) tests carried out adjacent to each borehole and test pit to a depth of 1.05 m to determine relative density of the subgrade; and

One falling head permeability test carried out in HA2 to assess the permeability of the strata. Borehole and test pit locations are indicated on Figure 1. The borehole and test pit logs (including PSP results) and photographs are provided in Appendix A. The permeability test results are provided in Appendix B. The following laboratory tests were carried out on a soil sample collected form TP1:

Standard Compaction, and

Soaked CBR tests @ 98 % SMDD The test results are provided in Appendix C.

4 RESULTS OF INVESTIGATION

The ground conditions identified at the site comprised: Topsoil: Medium dense, fine and medium, brown sand with grass roots, was encountered in all

hand auger boreholes and both test pits to depths of between 0.05 m and 0.1 m. Sand/Fill: A thin layer of dense sand/fill material approximately 0.25 m thick was encountered

in HA 4 below the topsoil to a depth of 0.28 m. The material comprised yellow sand with trace gravel.

Sand: Dense, fine and medium, light grey sand was encountered below the topsoil and sand

fill in all boreholes and test pit locations across the site to depths of 0.4 m (proposed car park area) and 1.8 m elsewhere. The sand becomes pale brown in colour with depth.

The measured permeability of the sand encountered at the site was approximately 2.3 x 10-4m/s.

Groundwater: Groundwater was not encountered during the investigation.


5 Laboratory Test Results

A disturbed soil sample of sand was collected from TP1 (located in the proposed car parking area)

and submitted to laboratory for standard compaction and soaked CBR testing.

The results of compaction and soaked CBR testing on this sample are summarised in Table 1.

TABLE 1

COMPACTION AND SOAKED CBR

Location Depth(m) CBR* (%) SMDD (t/m3) OMC (%) USC Class

TP1 0.1 – 0.4 20 1.69 18 SP

* 98 % SMDD

6 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

6.1 Site Classification

After site preparations are carried out in accordance with Section 6.3, the site is considered to be a Class A site in accordance with AS 2870-2011 [1].

6.2 Site Subsoil Classification

The site sub-soil class is Ce (shallow soil site) in accordance with AS 1170.4-2007 [2].

6.3 Site Preparation and Construction Consideration

We understand that cut to fill earthworks are proposed to create a new level building pad. The entire site needs to be cleared of trees and stripped of grass, grass roots, topsoil and any other unsuitable material, and removed from site. The sand encountered below the topsoil is considered suitable as fill provided that any tree roots and other unsuitable materials are removed. All cut areas and exposed subgrade should be proof compacted, on completion of excavation and prior to fill placement, to at least 95% SMDD (in accordance with AS 3798-2007 [6]). This generally equates to a minimum of 7 blows/300 mm in the depth range 150 mm to 450 mm below the compacted surface with a Perth Sand Penetrometer. If imported fill is to be placed, it should comprise clean sand with less than 5% fines. All fill should be placed in loose layers not exceeding 300 mm and compacted to at least 95 % SMDD in accordance with AS 3798-2007 [6].

6.4 Foundation Design

Provided the site preparation detailed in Section 6.3 is implemented, allowable bearing pressures of 150 kPa are considered appropriate for edge beam/strip foundations associated with standard footing designs presented in AS2870-2011 [1]. Settlements are anticipated to be less than 10 mm. In all instances the base of footing excavations should be proof compacted using a plate compactor prior to footing construction.


6.5 CBR for flexible pavement design

Following the site preparation work, the subgrade should comprise compacted light/pale grey sand. Provided the in-situ material is compacted to at least 98% SMDD, a design subgrade CBR of 20 % is considered appropriate based on laboratory test results.

6.6 Retaining Wall Design Criteria

For temporary and permanent retaining wall design, the following geotechnical parameters are recommended for retaining wall design and are applicable to imported sand used as wall backfill:

' = 37 KA = 0.25 KP = 4.05 Ko = 0.40

6.7 Stormwater Drainage

Conventional soakwells are considered to be suitable for stormwater drainage at the site. Based on the falling head permeability test performed in HA2, a soil infiltration rate of 2.3 x 10-4 m/s is considered appropriate for the natural light brown/pale brown sand encountered. Soakwells should be placed as far as possible from foundations. Exact distances will depend on depth of footings and soakwells but generally a line drawn downward and outward at a slope of 1H:1V from footing edges should not intersect a soakwell.

7 CLOSURE Your attention is drawn to the “Conditions of Investigation” which appear at the end of this report.

Yours Sincerely,

ZORAN KOVACEV

ATC Williams Pty Ltd


REFERENCES

[1] AS 2870 (2011): Residential Slabs and Footings – Construction. [2] AS 1170.4 (2007): Structural Design Actions Part 4: Earthquake Actions in Australia. [3] Geological Survey of Western Australia. 1:100,000 Environmental Geology Series,

Rockingham Sheet.

[4] Water and Rivers Commission (1997): Perth Groundwater Atlas (First Edition).

[5] Department of Environment (2004): Perth Groundwater Atlas (Second edition).

[6] AS 3798 (2007): Guidelines on earthworks for commercial and residential development.


CONDITIONS OF INVESTIGATION AND REPORT

Conditions of Report

1. This report has been prepared by us for

the purposes stated herein. We do not accept

responsibility for the consequences of

extrapolation, extension or transference of the

findings and recommendations of this report to

different sites, cases or conditions.

2. This report is based in part on

information which was provided to us by the

client and/or others and which is not under our

control. We do not warrant or guarantee the

accuracy of this information.

3. We believe the conclusions and

recommendations contained herein were

reasonable and appropriate at the time of issue

of the report. However, the user is cautioned

that fundamental input assumptions upon which

this report is based may change with time. It is

the user’s responsibility to ensure that input

assumptions remain valid.

4. This report must be read in its entirety.

This notice constitutes an integral part of the

report, and must be reproduced with every

copy.

5. This report is prepared solely for the use

of the person or company to whom it is

addressed. No responsibility or liability to any

third party is accepted for any damages

howsoever arising out of the use of this report

by any third party.

6. Unless specifically agreed otherwise in

the contract of engagement, ATC Williams

retains Intellectual Property Rights over the

contents of this report. The client is granted a

licence to use the report for the purposes for

which it was commissioned.

Geotechnical Investigation

7. Geotechnical site investigation

necessarily involves the investigation of the

subsurface conditions at a site at a few isolated

locations, and the interpretation and

extrapolation of those conditions to elsewhere

on the site not so investigated. This procedure

has been adopted at the site that is the subject

of this report and due care and skill has been

applied in carrying out and reporting on the

work. Thus the findings, conclusions and

comments contained in this report represent

professional estimates and opinions and are not

to be read as facts unless the context makes it

clear to the contrary. In general, statements of

fact are confined to statements as to what was

done and/or what was observed. Other

statements have been based on professional

judgement.

8. The scope of the work has been planned

in the absence of any fore-knowledge of the site

other than that stated in the report. Unless

otherwise stated we consider that the number

of locations investigated and the depths to

which they have been investigated are

reasonable bearing in mind the scale and nature

of the project, and the defined purpose for

which the investigation was undertaken.

9. We do not accept any responsibility for

any variance between the interpreted and

extrapolated conditions and those that are

revealed by any means subsequently. Specific

warning is also given that many factors, either

natural or artificial, may render ground

conditions different from those which pertained

at the time of the investigation. Should there

be revealed during the construction or at any

other time any apparent difference from

subsurface conditions described or assessed in

this report, it is strongly recommended that

such differences be brought to our attention so

that its significance may be assessed and

appropriate advice given.

F I G U R E S

HA1

HA2

HA3HA4

HA5

TP1

TP2

LEGEND:

Hand Auger LocationTest Pit Location

FILE

:

F:\A

TC\2

016\

1161

96 S

OU

TH C

OA

ST

BA

PTI

ST

CO

LLE

GE

, WA

IKIK

I\01

- SO

UTH

CO

AS

T B

AP

TIS

T C

OLL

EG

E, W

AIK

IKI\C

AD

\116

196.

01.D

WG

CHECKDRWNDATENo. DESCRIPTION

A.B.N 64 005 931 288www.atcwilliams.com.au

Perth T +61 8 9355 [email protected]

Melb T +61 3 8587 [email protected]

JOB No. REV No.

SHT SIZE A4

DATEDSGNDRWNCHECKAPRVD

SHEET OF South Coast Baptist College,Gnangara Drive, WAIKIKI

Site Layout and Test Location Plan

116196.01 FIGURE 1 0

Not To Scale25/08/2016

ZKPRPR

A P P E N D I X A

not

enco

unte

red

SP

SP

TOPSOILDense, fine and medium, brown sand with grass roots, moistSANDVery dense, fine and medium, light brown, moist

becoming pale brown with depth

Hand auger HA1 terminated at 1.8m

Wat

er

Met

hod

Cla

ssifi

catio

nS

ymbo

l

RL(m)

6.0

5.5

5.0

4.5

4.0

3.5

Depth(m)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

Gra

phic

Log

Material Description:

DATE 25/8/16 LOGGED BY ZK CHECKED PR R.L. SURFACE 6.43 DATUM m AHD

LOCATION: Refer to Site Plan

REMARKS

EQUIPMENT: Hand Auger

FIGURE A2

SHEET 1 OF 1HAND AUGER NUMBER HA1

CLIENT BPA Engineering

JOB NUMBER 116196.01

JOB NAME South Coast Baptist College

JOB LOCATION Gnangara Drive, WAIKIKI

MP

AW

/AT

C/A

TC

W B

OR

EH

OLE

/ T

ES

T P

IT 1

1619

6.0

1.G

PJ

GIN

T A

US

TR

ALI

A.G

DT

26/

8/1

6

0 3 6 9 12 15

Perth Sand PenetrometerNo. of blows for depth

indicated by bar thickness

Sam

ple

cond

ition

Sam

ple

Typ

e

Soil: type, USCS symbol, strength, plasticity or particle size, colour, secondarycomponents, moisture condition


ATCGROUNDED IN DESIGN



Williams

HAND AUGER 1

not

enco

unte

red

SP

SP

TOPSOILMedium dense, fine and medium, brown sand with grass roots, moist

SANDDense, fine and medium, brown, moist

becomes light brown at 0.5 m

becomes pale brown with depth


Wat

er

Met

hod

Cla

ssifi

catio

nS

ymbo

l

RL(m)

6.0

5.5

5.0

4.5

4.0

3.5

Depth(m)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

Gra

phic

Log




REMARKS


FIGURE A3






MP

AW

/AT

C/A

TC

W B

OR

EH

OLE

/ T

ES

T P

IT 1

1619

6.0

1.G

PJ

GIN

T A

US

TR

ALI

A.G

DT

26/

8/1

6

0 1 2 3 4 5



Sam

ple

cond

ition

Sam

ple

Typ

e






Williams

HAND AUGER 2

not

enco

unte

red

SP

SP


SANDDense, fine and medium, brown, moist

becomes light brown at 0.5 m

becomes pale brown with depth


Wat

er

Met

hod

Cla

ssifi

catio

nS

ymbo

l

RL(m)

5.5

5.0

4.5

4.0

3.5

3.0

Depth(m)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

Gra

phic

Log




REMARKS


FIGURE A4






MP

AW

/AT

C/A

TC

W B

OR

EH

OLE

/ T

ES

T P

IT 1

1619

6.0

1.G

PJ

GIN

T A

US

TR

ALI

A.G

DT

26/

8/1

6

0 2 4 6 8 10



Sam

ple

cond

ition

Sam

ple

Typ

e






Williams

HAND AUGER 3

not

enco

unte

red

SP

SP

SP

TOPSOILMedium dense, fine and medium, brown sand with grass roots, moistFILLDense, fine and medium, yellow sand with trace gravel, moist

SANDDense, fine and medium, pale brown, moist


Wat

er

Met

hod

Cla

ssifi

catio

nS

ymbo

l

RL(m)

5.0

4.5

4.0

3.5

3.0

2.5

Depth(m)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

Gra

phic

Log




REMARKS


FIGURE A5






MP

AW

/AT

C/A

TC

W B

OR

EH

OLE

/ T

ES

T P

IT 1

1619

6.0

1.G

PJ

GIN

T A

US

TR

ALI

A.G

DT

26/

8/1

6

0 2 4 6 8 10



Sam

ple

cond

ition

Sam

ple

Typ

e






Williams

HAND AUGER 4

not

enco

unte

red

SP

SP


SANDDense, fine and medium, pale brown, moist

becomes pale brown at 0.35 m


Wat

er

Met

hod

Cla

ssifi

catio

nS

ymbo

l

RL(m)

5.5

5.0

4.5

4.0

3.5

3.0

Depth(m)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

Gra

phic

Log




REMARKS


FIGURE A6






MP

AW

/AT

C/A

TC

W B

OR

EH

OLE

/ T

ES

T P

IT 1

1619

6.0

1.G

PJ

GIN

T A

US

TR

ALI

A.G

DT

26/

8/1

6

0 1 2 3 4 5



Sam

ple

cond

ition

Sam

ple

Typ

e






Williams

HAND AUGER 5

not

enco

unte

red SP

SP


SANDDense, fine and medium, brown/light brown, moist

Test pit TP1 terminated at 0.4m

1.69 18 20BS

Wat

er

Met

hod

Cla

ssifi

catio

nS

ymbo

l

RL(m)

Depth(m)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

Gra

phic

Log


DATE 25/8/16 LOGGED BY ZK CHECKED PR R.L. SURFACE N/A DATUM

LOCATION

REMARKS

EQUIPMENT

FIGURE A7

SHEET 1 OF 1TEST PIT NUMBER TP1





MP

AW

/AT

C/A

TC

W B

OR

EH

OLE

/ T

ES

T P

IT 1

1619

6.0

1.G

PJ

GIN

T A

US

TR

ALI

A.G

DT

6/9

/16

0 2 4 6 8 10



MD

D

OM

C

CB

R @

98%

Sam

ple

cond

ition

Sam

ple

Typ

e

Soil: type, USCS symbol, strength, plasticity or particle size, colour,secondary components, moisture condition





Williams

TEST PIT 1

not

enco

unte

red SP

SP


SANDDense, fine and medium, brown/light brown, moist

Test pit TP2 terminated at 0.4m

Wat

er

Met

hod

Cla

ssifi

catio

nS

ymbo

l

RL(m)

Depth(m)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

Gra

phic

Log


DATE 25/8/16 LOGGED BY ZK CHECKED PR R.L. SURFACE N/A DATUM


REMARKS

EQUIPMENT: Hand Dug

FIGURE A8

SHEET 1 OF 1TEST PIT NUMBER TP2





MP

AW

/AT

C/A

TC

W B

OR

EH

OLE

/ T

ES

T P

IT 1

1619

6.0

1.G

PJ

GIN

T A

US

TR

ALI

A.G

DT

26/

8/1

6

0 2 4 6 8 10



Sam

ple

cond

ition

Sam

ple

Typ

e






Williams

TEST PIT 2

A P P E N D I X B

PROJECT: South Coast Baptist College, WAIKIKI

HOLE NO: HA2 1.60 0.025

Test One Test One (Continued)

thr:min:sec

tsec

dm

hm

h + r/2m

thr:min:sec

tsec

dm

hm

h + r/2m

12:00:00 0 0 1.6 1.612512:00:10 10 0.62 0.98 0.992512:00:20 20 0.85 0.75 0.762512:00:30 30 1 0.6 0.612512:00:40 40 1.09 0.51 0.522512:00:50 50 1.2 0.4 0.412512:01:00 60 1.27 0.33 0.342512:01:30 90 1.4 0.2 0.212512:02:00 120 1.48 0.12 0.132512:02:30 150 1.52 0.08 0.0925

t1 t2 Permeability

1 20 150 2.28E-04

0 0 #DIV/0!

2 #DIV/0!

#DIV/0!

Radius:(m)Depth: (m)

Water: (m)

Date: 25/08/2016

TESTED BY: ZK

Job No: 116196.01

BOREHOLE PERMEABILITY TEST - PORCHET METHOD

0.001

0.01

0.1

1

100 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

2rd

hH K = 1.15 x r

t2 - t1Log10

ht1 + r/2

ht2 + r/2

ATC Williams Pty Ltd1141 Hay Street, WEst Perth WA 6005T +61 8 9213 1600 F +61 8 9486 [email protected]

A P P E N D I X C

DRY DENSITY / MOISTURE RELATIONSHIP OF A SOIL

AS1289.5.1.1 (Standard Compactive Effort)

Sample Description: Organic Sand

Standard MDD (t/m3) 1.69

Standard OMC (%) 18.0

Oversize Sieve (mm) 19.0

Percent Wet Oversize (%) 0

Moisture Content Method AS1289.2.1.1

Sampling Method sampled by client

Date of Sampling Unknown

[email protected]: 44 000 964 278ph: 1300 781 744fx: +61 (0)8 9378 0199

TEST CERTIFICATEThis document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service (www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm). Attention is drawn to the limitations

of liability, indemnification and jurisdictional issues established therein.

This document is to be treated as an original within the meaning of UCP 600. Any holder of this document is to be advised that information contained hereon reflectsthe Company's findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of client's instructions, if any. The Company's sole responsibility is to its Client and thisdocument does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. Any unauthorized alteration,

forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law.

SGS Australia Pty LtdPO Box 486 Bassendean WA 6934

5 Yelland WayBassendean WA 6054

Client: ATC Williams Pty Ltd Client Job No:

Order No: Project: South Coast Baptist College

Tested Date: 26/08/2016 Location: Waikiki

SGS Job Number: 16-01-1730 Sample No: 16-MT-7147

Lab: Bassendean Sample ID: TP1 (0.1 - 0.4)

Authorised

Signatory: (Benjamin Brumpton) Date: 1/09/2016

Accreditation No.: 2418

Accredited for compliance with ISO/IEC 17025 Site No.: 2411Cert No.: 16-MT-7147-S440

Form No.PF-AU-INDCMT-TE-S440 V5.0Client Address: Unit 1, 21 Teddington Road Burswood WA 6100

Page 1 of 1

California Bearing Ratio

AS1289.6.1.1 - Soaked

.

CBR Value @ 5.0mm: 20.

.

Sample Data

Sample Description: Organic Soil

Location: Unknown

Sampling Method:

Depth (mm): (0.1 - 0.4)

Maximum Dry Density (t/m³): 1.69

Optimum Moisture Content (%): 18.0

Field Moisture Content (%): 11.7

Mass of Surcharge (kg): 4.5

No. of Days Soaked: 4

Retained on 19.0mm Sieve (%): 0

+19.0mm Excluded (Yes/No): Yes.

Compaction Data

Laboratory Moisture Ratio (%): 101

Laboratory Density Ratio (%): 97

Target Moisture Ratio (%): 100

Target Density Ratio (%): 98

Target Compactive Effort: Standard.

Soak Data

Swell (%): 0.0

Dry Density After Soak (t/m³): 1.65

Moisture Content - Top 30mm (%): 25.7

Moisture Content - Remaining (%): 19.4

Test Methods: AS1289.2.1.1, AS1289.5.1.1.

[email protected]: 44 000 964 278ph: 1300 781 744fx: +61 (0)8 9378 0199

TEST CERTIFICATEThis document is issued by the Company subject to its General Conditions of Service (www.sgs.com/terms_and_conditions.htm). Attention is drawn to the limitations

of liability, indemnification and jurisdictional issues established therein.

This document is to be treated as an original within the meaning of UCP 600. Any holder of this document is to be advised that information contained hereon reflectsthe Company's findings at the time of its intervention only and within the limits of client's instructions, if any. The Company's sole responsibility is to its Client and thisdocument does not exonerate parties to a transaction from exercising all their rights and obligations under the transaction documents. Any unauthorized alteration,

forgery or falsification of the content or appearance of this document is unlawful and offenders may be prosecuted to the fullest extent of the law.

SGS Australia Pty LtdPO Box 486 Bassendean WA 6934

5 Yelland WayBassendean WA 6054

Client: ATC Williams Pty Ltd Client Job No:

Order No: Project: South Coast Baptist College

Tested Date: 29/08/2016 Location: Waikiki

SGS Job Number: 16-01-1730 Sample No: 16-MT-7147

Lab: Bassendean Sample ID: TP1 (0.1 - 0.4)

Authorised

Signatory: (Kyle Harpley) Date: 4/09/2016

Accreditation No.: 2418

Accredited for compliance with ISO/IEC 17025 Site No.: 2411Cert No.: 16-MT-7147-S500

Form No.Client Address: Unit 1, 21 Teddington Road Burswood WA 6100

Page 1 of 1

APPENDIX B CONFIDENTIAL DECLARATION FORM

STRICTLY CONFIDENTIAL

Confidential Declaration form must be completed by: • Persons requiring access to schools who are not employees of South Coast Baptist College. Please read the following carefully, and tick (ü) one of the boxes below:

1 I declare that I DO NOT HAVE any convictions, circumstances or reasons, which might preclude my working with, or near, children.

OR

2 I declare that I DO HAVE convictions, circumstances or reasons which might preclude my working with or near children. The nature of these convictions, circumstances or reasons is outlined below:

(Please attach a separate sheet of paper, if required)

I certify the accuracy of the above information. I am aware that I may be required to consent to a criminal record clearance, through the Department of Education’s Screening Unit, if it is considered necessary to verify the information I have provided.

Name:

Company: (if relevant)

Address:

Telephone:

Email:

School visiting:

Purpose of visit:

Signature: Date: See the following page for explanatory notes

SOUTH COAST BAPTIST COLLEGE

NOTES ABOUT THIS CONFIDENTIAL DECLARATION FORM What the form is about: In 1997, the then Education Department of Western Australia joined other Australian states to implement the National Strategy in Schools for the Prevention of Paedophilia and Other Forms of Child Abuse. The Confidential Declaration form is designed to prevent people from entering schools who may pose a potential risk to children based on previous criminal history. It does not replace the Working With Children check for employees. The Confidential Declaration form is for persons who are not South Coast Baptist College employees, and are not involved in child-related work, but who do require access to a school (for example, tradespeople carrying out repairs or entertainers who do not work directly with children). By completing this form, you will help the College ensure that schools are safe places for our children. Confidentiality: Please be assured that unless statutory obligations require otherwise, the information on the completed form will not be used without your consent for any purpose other than in relation to your entry onto the school premises. The completed form will be treated with the utmost confidentially at all times. Thank you for taking the time to read this information.

SPECIFICATION - Alita Constructions

Documents

Transcript of SPECIFICATION - Alita Constructions